Mitsubishi PURY-HP72 Heat Pump manual
HVAC Systems · 20 Q&As

Mitsubishi PURY-HP72 Heat Pump

Ask AI

— answers from the official manual

Answers from the official manual.

Common questions

Common Questions

20 total
1

What precautions should I take before opening the control box?

Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power and leave the unit turned off for at least 10 minutes. Check that the voltage of the electrolytic capacitor (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less, as the unit may remain energized or hot after power is turned off. It will take approximately 10 minutes for the voltage to discharge after power off. (Page 15)

2

What type of refrigerant should I use for the PURY-HP72 system?

The PURY-HP72 uses R410A refrigerant exclusively. Do not use any other refrigerant type, as using the wrong refrigerant may cause the unit or pipes to burst, or result in explosion or fire. The system is designed specifically for R410A, which is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend. (Page 3)

3

How long should I wait before turning off the power after stopping operation?

Leave the unit turned on for at least 5 minutes after stopping operation before turning off the power. This prevents water leakage and malfunctions that could occur if power is turned off immediately. (Page 3)

4

What piping materials should be used for R410A refrigerant systems?

Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper with specific radial thickness ratings depending on the pipe diameter. For pipes smaller than ø19.05 (3/4"), use 1/2H-material (Drawn) pipes unless the radial thickness is at least 1.2t. Keep the inner and outer surfaces clean and free of contaminants such as sulfur, oxides, dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water. (Page 5)

5

How should refrigerant be charged into the system?

Refrigerant must be charged in the liquid state, not the gaseous state. If gaseous refrigerant is drawn out first, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use. When using a cylinder with a siphon, refrigerant is charged in the liquid state without needing to turn it upside down. (Page 14)

6

What is the required vacuum level for the system before refrigerant charging?

Use a vacuum pump that attains 0.5 Torr (65 Pa) or lower degree of vacuum after 5 minutes of operation. After the degree of vacuum has reached 5 Torr (650 Pa), evacuate for an additional 1 hour. Verify that the vacuum degree has not risen by more than 1 Torr (130 Pa) one hour after evacuation. (Page 12)

Show 14 more questions

Full Manual

371 pages
Page 2

i Safety Precautions ŒPlease read the following safety precautions carefully before installing the unit to ensure safety. ŒMake sure that this manual is passed on to the end user to retain for future reference. ŒRetain this manual for future reference. When the unit is reinstalled or repaired, have this manual available to those who pro- vide these services. Make sure that this manual is passed on to any future users. All electric work must be performed by qualified personnel. Air tightness test must be performed by qualified personnel. [1] General Precautions Indicates a risk of death or serious injury. Indicates a risk of serious injury or structural damage. General Precautions Do not use refrigerant other than the type in- dicated in the manuals provided with the unit and on the nameplate. Doing so may cause the unit or pipes to burst, or result in explosion or fire during use, during repair, or at the time of disposal of the unit. It may also be in violation of applicable laws. MIT- SUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION cannot be held responsible for malfunctions or ac- cidents resulting from the use of the wrong type of refrigerant. Do not install the unit in a place where large amounts of oil, steam, organic solvents, or corrosive gases, such as sulfuric gas, are present or where acidic/alkaline solutions or sprays containing sulfur are used fre- quently. These substances can compro- mise the performance of the unit or cause certain components of the unit to corrode, which can result in refrigerant leakage, wa- ter leakage, injury, electric shock, malfunc- tions, smoke, or fire. Do not try to defeat the safety features of the unit or make unauthorized setting changes. Forcing the unit to operate the unit by de- feating the safety features of the devices such as the pressure switch or the tempera- ture switch, making unauthorized changes to the switch settings, or using accessories other than the ones recommended by Mit- subishi Electric may result in smoke, fire, or explosion. To reduce the risk of shorting, current leak- age, electric shock, malfunctions, smoke, or fire, do not splash water on electric parts. To reduce the risk of electric shock, mal- functions, smoke or fire, do not operate the switches/buttons or touch other electrical parts with wet hands. To reduce the risk of pipe burst and explo- sion, do not allow gas refrigerant and refrig- erant oil to be trapped in the refrigerant circuit. To reduce the risk of burns or frost bites, do not touch the refrigerant pipes or refrigerant circuit components with bare hands during and immediately after operation. To reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any electrical parts with bare hands during or immediately after stopping operation. To reduce the risk of injury from falling tools, keep children away while installing, inspecting, or repairing the unit. Keep the space well ventilated. Refrigerant can displace air and cause oxygen starva- tion. If leaked refrigerant comes in contact with a heat source, toxic gas may be gener- ated.

Page 3

ii [2] Transportation and Installation Always replace a fuse with one with the cor- rect current rating. The use of improperly rated fuses or a substitution of fuses with steel or copper wire may result in bursting, fire or explosion. To reduce the risk of electric shock, smoke, and fire due to infiltration of dust and water, properly install all required covers. To reduce the risk of electric shock, smoke, and fire due to infiltration of dust and water, properly install all required terminal block covers and insulation sheets. To reduce the risk of electric shock, smoke, and fire due to infiltration of dust and water, properly install all required covers and pan- els on the terminal box and control box. To reduce the risk of injury from units falling or falling over, periodically check the instal- lation base for damage. Consult an authorized agency for the proper disposal of the unit. Refrigerant oil and re- frigerant that may be left in the unit pose a risk of fire, explosion, or environmental pol- lution. To reduce the risk of fire or explosion, do not place flammable materials or use flam- mable sprays around the unit. To reduce the risk of being caught in rotat- ing parts, electric shock, and burns, do not operate the unit without all required panels and guards being installed. To reduce the risk of injury, do not sit, stand, or place objects on the unit. The unit described in this manual is not in- tended for use with food, animals, plants, precision instruments, or art work. To reduce the risk of water leakage and mal- functions, do not turn off the power immedi- ately after stopping operation. Leave the unit turned on for at least 5 minutes before turning off the power. Do not install the unit over things that are vulnerable to water damage from condensa- tion dripping. To reduce the risk of injury, electric shock, and malfunctions, do not touch or allow ca- bles to come in contact with the edges of components. To reduce the risk of injury, do not touch the heat exchanger fins or sharp edges of com- ponents with bare hands. Always wear protective gears when touch- ing electrical components on the unit. Sev- eral minutes after the power is switched off, residual voltage may still cause electric shock. To reduce the risk of electric shock and burns, always wear protective gear when working on units. To reduce the risk of injury, do not insert fin- gers or foreign objects into air inlet/outlet grills. If the unit is left on a damaged base, it may fall and cause injury. To reduce the risk of injury, always wear protective gear when working on units. Do not release refrigerant into the atmo- sphere. Collect and reuse the refrigerant, or have it properly disposed of by an autho- rized agency. Refrigerant poses environ- mental hazards if released into the air. Transportation and Installation Lift the unit by placing the slings at desig- nated locations. Support the outdoor unit securely at four points to keep it from slip- ping and sliding. If the unit is not properly supported, it may fall and cause personal injury.

Page 4

iii [3] Installation To reduce the risk of injury, do not carry the product by the PP bands that are used on some packages. To reduce the risk of injury, products weigh- ing 20 kg or more should be carried by two or more people. Installation Do not install the unit where there is a risk of leaking flammable gas. If flammable gas accumulates around the unit, it may ignite and cause a fire or explo- sion. To reduce the risk of injury from coming in contact with units, install units where they are not accessible to people other than maintenance personnel. To reduce the risk of injury, properly dis- pose of the packing materials so that chil- dren will not play with them. Properly dispose of the packing materials. Plastic bags pose suffocation hazard to children. All drainage work should be performed by the dealer or qualified personnel according to the instructions detailed in the Installa- tion Manual. Improper drainage work may cause water leakage and resultant damage to the furnishings. Remove packing materials from the unit be- fore operating the unit. Note that some ac- cessories may be taped to the unit. Properly install all accessories that are required. Fail- ing to remove the packing materials or fail- ing to install required accessories may result in refrigerant leakage, oxygen depri- vation, smoke, or fire. Consult your dealer and take appropriate measures to safeguard against refrigerant leakage and resultant oxygen starvation. An installation of a refrigerant gas detector is recommended. Any additional parts must be installed by the dealer or qualified personnel. Only use the parts specified by Mitsubishi Electric. Installation by unauthorized personnel or use of unauthorized parts or accessories may result in water leakage, electric shock, or fire. Take appropriate safety measures against wind gusts and earthquakes to prevent the unit from toppling over and causing injury. To reduce the risk of injury from units falling or falling over, install the unit on a surface that is strong enough to support its weight. To reduce the risk of injury from units falling or falling over, periodically check the instal- lation base for damage. Do not install the unit over things that are vulnerable to water damage. Provide an ad- equate collective drainage system for the drain water from unit as necessary. Do not install the unit over things that are vulnerable to water damage. When the in- door humidity exceeds 80% or if the drain water outlet becomes clogged, condensa- tion may drip from the indoor unit onto the ceiling or floor. To reduce the risk of damage to the unit and resultant electric leak and electric shock, keep small animals, snow, and rain water from entering the unit by closing the gap in the pipe and wire access holes. To reduce the risk of rain water or drain wa- ter from entering the room and damaging the interior, drainage work must be per- formed by your dealer or qualified person- nel according to the instructions detailed in the Installation Manual.

Page 5

iv [4] Piping Work [5] Wiring Work To reduce the risk of drain water overflow, install the unit horizontally, using a level. Piping Work To reduce the risk of injury, including frost bites, that may result from being blasted with refrigerant, use caution when operat- ing the refrigerant service valve. If refriger- ant leaks out and comes in contact with an open flame, toxic gases may be generated. To reduce the risk of refrigerant catching fire and causing burns, remove the refriger- ant gas and the residual refrigerant oil in the pipes before heating them. To reduce the risk of pipe damage, refriger- ant leakage, and oxygen deprivation, use pipes that meet the pipe thickness specifi- cations, which vary by the type of refriger- ant used, pipe diameter, and pipe material. To reduce the risk of pipe burst or explo- sion, evacuate the refrigerant circuit using a vacuum pump, and do not purge the system with refrigerant. To reduce the risk of explosion and deterio- ration of refrigerant oil caused by chloride, do not use oxygen, flammable gas, or refrig- erant that contains chloride as a pressuriz- ing gas. To prevent explosion, do not heat the unit with refrigerant gas in the refrigerant circuit. To reduce the risk of refrigerant leakage and resultant oxygen deprivation, use the flare nut with holes that is supplied with the re- frigerant service valve. To reduce the risk of refrigerant leakage and resultant oxygen deprivation, use the flare nut that is supplied with the unit or its equiv- alent that meets applicable standards. To reduce the risk of damage to the unit, and resultant refrigerant leakage and oxy- gen deprivation, tighten flare nuts to a spec- ified torque. To reduce the risk of oxygen deprivation and gas poisoning, check for gas leakage and keep fire sources away. Insulate pipe connections after completing the air tightness test. Performing an air tightness test with the pipe being insulated may lead to failure to detect refrigerant leak- age and cause oxygen deprivation. To reduce the risk of pipe damage and re- sultant refrigerant leakage and oxygen de- privation, keep the field-installed pipes out of contact with the edges of components. To reduce the risk of pipe bursting and ex- plosion due to abnormal pressure rise, do not allow any substances other than R410A (such as air) to enter the refrigerant circuit. To reduce the risk of water leakage and re- sultant damage to the furnishings, drain piping work must be performed by your dealer or qualified personnel according to the instructions detailed in the Installation Manual. To keep the ceiling and floor from getting wet due to condensation, properly insulate the pipes. Wiring Work To reduce the risk of wire breakage, over- heating, smoke, and fire, keep undue force from being applied to the wires. To reduce the risk of wire breakage, over- heating, smoke, or fire, properly secure the cables in place and provide adequate slack in the cables so as not to stress the termi- nals.

Page 6

v [6] Relocation and Repairs [7] Additional Precautions To reduce the risk of injury or electric shock, switch off the main power before performing electrical work. All electric work must be performed by a qualified electrician according to the local regulations, standards, and the instructions detailed in the Installation Manual. Capacity shortage to the power supply circuit or im- proper installation may result in malfunc- tion, electric shock, smoke, or fire. To reduce the risk of electric shock, smoke, or fire, install an earth leakage breaker on the power supply to each unit. To reduce the risk of electric shock, smoke, or fire, install an inverter circuit breaker on the power supply to each unit. (Applicable to inverter units only) Use properly rated breakers and fuses (earth leakage breaker, local switch , no-fuse breaker). The use of a breaker with a breaking capacity greater than the specified capacity may cause elec- tric shock, malfunctions, smoke, or fire. Use properly rated breakers and fuses (in- verter circuit breaker, local switch , no-fuse breaker). The use of a break- er with a breaking capacity greater than the specified capacity may cause electric shock, malfunctions, smoke, or fire. (Appli- cable to inverter units only) To reduce the risk of current leakage, over- heating, smoke, or fire, use properly rated cables with adequate current carrying ca- pacity. Proper grounding must be provided by a li- censed electrician. Do not connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod, or telephone wire. Improper grounding may result in electric shock, smoke, fire, or malfunction due to electrical noise interference. To reduce the risk of current leakage, wire breakage, smoke, or fire, keep the wiring out of contact with the refrigerant pipes and other parts, especially sharp edges. Relocation and Repairs To reduce the risk of refrigerant leakage, water leakage, injury, electric shock, and fire, units should only be moved or repaired by your dealer or qualified personnel. To reduce the risk of wire shorting, electric leak, electric shock, smoke, or fire, do not perform maintenance work in the rain. To reduce the risk of injury, electric shock, and fire, properly reinstall all removed com- ponents after completing repair work. To reduce the risk of wire shorting, electric shock, malfunctions, or fire, keep circuit boards dust free, and do not touch them with your hands or tools. To reduce the risk of refrigerant and water leakage, check the pipe supports and insu- lation for damage during inspection or re- pair, and replace or repair the ones that are found to be deteriorated. Additional Precautions To avoid damage to the unit, use appropri- ate tools to install, inspect, or repair the unit.

Page 7

vi To reduce the risk or malfunction, turn on the power at least 12 hours before starting operation, and leave the power turned on throughout the operating season. Recover all refrigerant in the units, and dis- pose of it properly according to any applica- ble laws and regulations. To reduce the risk of deterioration of refrig- erant oil and compressor malfunctions caused by a refrigerant that contains chlo- ride, such as R22, only use R410A. Provide a maintenance access to allow for the inspection of pipes above the ceiling or the buried pipes. Take appropriate measures against electri- cal noise interference when installing the air conditioners in hospitals or facilities with radio communication capabilities. Inverter, high-frequency medical, or wireless com- munication equipment as well as power generators may cause the air conditioning system to malfunction. Air conditioning system may also adversely affect the opera- tion of these types of equipment by creating electrical noise. To reduce the risk of damage to the unit, leave the valves on the unit closed until re- frigerant charging is completed. Place a wet towel on the refrigerant service valve before brazing the pipes to keep its temperature from rising above 120ºC and damaging the surrounding equipment. Direct the blazing torch flame away from the adjacent cables and sheet metal to keep them from being overheated and damaged. Prepare tools for exclusive use with R410A. Do not use the following tools if they have been used with the conventional refrigerant (R22): gauge manifold, charging hose, re- frigerant leak detector, check valve, refrig- erant charge spout, vacuum gauge, and refrigerant recovery equipment. R410A does not contain chloride, so leak detectors for use with older types of refrigerants will not detect an R410A leak. Infiltration of the residual refrigerant, refrigerant oil, or water on these tools may cause the refrigerant oil in the new system to deteriorate or damage the compressor. To reduce the risk of the vacuum pump oil backflowing into the refrigerant cycle and causing the refrigerant oil to deteriorate, use a vacuum pump with a check valve. Have a set of tools for exclusive use with R410A. Consult your nearest Mitsubishi Electric Dealer. Keep dust, dirt, and water off charging hose and flare tool. Infiltration of dust, dirt, or wa- ter into the refrigerant circuit may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate or damage the compressor. Use refrigerant piping and couplings that meet the applicable standards. For refriger- ant pipes, use pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. Keep the inner and out- er surfaces of pipes and couplings clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur, ox- ides, dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and moisture. Failure to follow these directions may result in the deterioration of refrigerant oil or compressor damage. Store the piping materials indoors, and keep both ends of the pipes sealed until im- mediately before brazing. Keep elbows and other joints in plastic bags. Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant cir- cuit may cause the refrigerant oil to deterio- rate or damage the compressor. Apply ester oil, ether oil, or a small amount of alkyl benzene to flares and flanges. The use and accidental infiltration of mineral oil into the system may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate or damage the compres- sor. To reduce the risk of oxidized film from en- tering the refrigerant pipe and causing the refrigerant oil to deteriorate or damaging the compressor, braze pipes under nitrogen purge. Do not use the existing refrigerant piping. A large amount of chloride that is contained in the residual refrigerant and refrigerant oil in the existing piping may cause the refriger- ant oil in the new unit to deteriorate or dam- age the compressor. Charge refrigerant in the liquid state. If re- frigerant is charged in the gas phase, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylin- der will change, compromising the unit's performance.

Page 8

vii Do not use a charging cylinder. The use of a charging cylinder will change the composi- tion of the refrigerant, compromising the unit's performance. Charge the system with an appropriate amount of refrigerant in the liquid phase. Refer to the relevant sections in the manu- als to calculate the appropriate amount of refrigerant to be charged. Refrigerant over- charge or undercharge may result in perfor- mance drop or abnormal stop of operation. To reduce the risk of power capacity short- age, always use a dedicated power supply circuit. To reduce the risk of both the breaker on the product side and the upstream breaker from tripping and causing problems, split the power supply system or provide protection coordination between the earth leakage breaker and no-fuse breaker. Have a backup system, if failure of the unit has a potential for causing significant prob- lems or damages.

Page 10

Contents

Hwe13080

Gb

Chapter 1 Check Before Servicing 1-1 Preparation for Piping Work.................................................................................................................. 3 1-2 Handling and Characteristics of Piping Materials, Refrigerant, and Refrigerant Oil ....................... 5 1-3 Working with Refrigerant Piping......................................................................................................... 10 1-4 Precautions for Wiring......................................................................................................................... 15 Chapter 2 Restrictions 2-1 System Configurations ........................................................................................................................ 19 2-2 Types and Maximum Allowable Length of Cables ............................................................................ 20 2-3 Switch Settings..................................................................................................................................... 21 2-4 M-NET Address Settings ..................................................................................................................... 22 2-5 Demand Control Overview .................................................................................................................. 29 2-6 System Connection Example .............................................................................................................. 30 2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller .............................................................................. 32 2-8 Example System with an ME Remote Controller............................................................................... 46 2-9 Example System with an MA and an ME Remote Controller............................................................ 48 2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ...................................................................................................... 51 Chapter 3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 3-1 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of Outdoor Unit ................................. 65 3-2 Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams ....................................................................................... 67 3-3 Functions of the Major Components of Outdoor Unit ...................................................................... 69 3-4 Functions of the Major Components of Indoor Unit ......................................................................... 72 3-5 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of BC Controller................................ 73 3-6 BC Controller Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams ...................................................................................... 76 3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller ..................................................................... 79 Chapter 4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams 4-1 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Arrangement .......................................................................................... 87 4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components .......................................................................................... 90 4-3 Outdoor Unit Electrical Wiring Diagrams........................................................................................... 98 4-4 Transmission Booster Electrical Wiring Diagrams......................................................................... 100 4-5 BC Controller Circuit Board Arrangement....................................................................................... 101 4-6 BC Controller Circuit Board Components ....................................................................................... 102 4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ....................................................................................... 104 Chapter 5 Control 5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings...................................................................................... 117 5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ......................................................................................................................... 124 5-3 BC Controller Control ........................................................................................................................ 139 5-4 Operation Flowcharts ........................................................................................................................ 140 Chapter 6 Test Run 6-1 Read before Test Run ........................................................................................................................ 149 6-2 MA and ME Remote Controller Functions and Specifications....................................................... 150 6-3 Making the Group and Interlock Settings from an ME Remote Controller ................................... 151 6-4 Selecting Remote Controller Functions from an ME Remote Controller...................................... 155 6-5 Making Interlock Settings from an MA Remote Controller............................................................. 157 6-6 Changing the Room Temperature Detection Position.................................................................... 159 6-7 Test Run Method ................................................................................................................................ 160 6-8 Operation Characteristics and Refrigerant Charge ........................................................................ 161 6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge.................................................................................161 6-10 The Following Symptoms Are Normal ............................................................................................. 166 6-11 Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ..................................................................................... 167 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists .................................................................................175 7-2 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [0 - 999]................................................................... 179

Page 11

Contents

Hwe13080

Gb

7-3 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [1000 - 1999]........................................................... 180 7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999]........................................................... 184 7-5 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [3000 - 3999]........................................................... 191 7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999]........................................................... 192 7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999]........................................................... 210 7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999]........................................................... 223 7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999]........................................................... 239 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-1 MA Remote Controller Problems ...................................................................................................... 251 8-2 ME remote Controller Problems ....................................................................................................... 255 8-3 Refrigerant Control Problems ........................................................................................................... 259 8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference.................................... 264 8-5 Pressure Sensor Circuit Configuration and Troubleshooting Pressure Sensor Problems ........ 267 8-6 Troubleshooting Solenoid Valve Problems ..................................................................................... 269 8-7 Troubleshooting Outdoor Unit Fan Problems ................................................................................. 272 8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems........................................................................................................ 273 8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ........................................ 277 8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU).................................................................................... 288 8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ................................................................................... 298 8-12 Control Circuit (TKMU) ...................................................................................................................... 307 8-13 Control Circuit (YKMU) ...................................................................................................................... 309 8-14 Measures for Refrigerant Leakage ................................................................................................... 311 8-15 Compressor Replacement Instructions ........................................................................................... 313 8-16 Solenoid Valve Block and Check Valve Replacement Instructions .............................................. 315 8-17 BC Controller Maintenance Instructions.......................................................................................... 319 8-18 Troubleshooting Problems Using the LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit..................... 322 Chapter 9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 9-1 LED Status Indicators ........................................................................................................................ 325 9-2 LED Status Indicators Table ............................................................................................................. 328

Page 12

  • 1 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 1 Check Before Servicing 1-1 Preparation for Piping Work ................................................................................................................ 3 1-1-1 Read before Servicing ............................................................................................................................ 3 1-1-2 Tool Preparation ..................................................................................................................................... 4 1-2 Handling and Characteristics of Piping Materials, Refrigerant, and Refrigerant Oil...................... 5 1-2-1 Piping Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 5 1-2-2 Storage of Piping Materials..................................................................................................................... 7 1-2-3 Pipe Processing...................................................................................................................................... 7 1-2-4 Characteristics of the New and Conventional Refrigerants .................................................................... 8 1-2-5 Refrigerant Oil......................................................................................................................................... 9 1-3 Working with Refrigerant Piping ....................................................................................................... 10 1-3-1 Pipe Brazing.......................................................................................................................................... 10 1-3-2 Air Tightness Test................................................................................................................................. 11 1-3-3 Vacuum Drying ..................................................................................................................................... 12 1-3-4 Refrigerant Charging............................................................................................................................. 14 1-4 Precautions for Wiring ....................................................................................................................... 15

    Page 13

  • 2 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 14

    [1-1 Preparation for Piping Work ]

  • 3 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1 Check Before Servicing 1 Check Before Servicing 1-1 Preparation for Piping Work 1-1-1 Read before Servicing
  • Check the type of refrigerant used in the system to be serviced.
  • Refrigerant Type Multi air conditioner for building application CITY MULTI H2i (Hyper Heating Inverter) R2 TKMU-A-H, YKMU-A series : R410A
  • Check the symptoms exhibited by the unit to be serviced.
  • Refer to this service handbook for symptoms relating to the refrigerant cycle.
  • Thoroughly read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual.
  • Preparing necessary tools: Prepare a set of tools to be used exclusively with each type of refrigerant.
  • For information about the correct use of tools, refer to the following page(s). [1-1-2 Tool Preparation](page 4)
  • Verification of the connecting pipes: Verify the type of refrigerant used for the unit to be moved or replaced.
  • ŒUse refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides, dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water. ŒThese types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate.
  • If there is a leak of gaseous refrigerant and the remaining refrigerant is exposed to an open flame, a poisonous gas
  • hydrofluoric acid may form. Keep workplace well ventilated.

    Caution

    ŒInstall new pipes immediately after removing old ones to keep moisture out of the refrigerant circuit. ŒThe use of refrigerant that contains chloride, such as R22, will cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

    Page 15

    [1-1 Preparation for Piping Work ]

  • 4 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1-1-2 Tool Preparation Prepare the following tools and materials necessary for installing and servicing the unit. Tools for use with R410A (Adaptability of tools that are for use with R22 or R407C)
  • To be used exclusively with R410A (not to be used if used with R22 or R407C)
  • Tools and materials that may be used with R410A with some restrictions
  • Tools and materials that are used with R22 or R407C that may also be used with R410A
  • Tools and materials that must not be used with R410A
  • Tools for R410A must be handled with special care to keep moisture and dust from infiltrating the cycle. Tools/Materials Use Notes Gauge Manifold Evacuation and refrigerant charging Higher than 5.09MPa[738psi] on the high-pressure side Charging Hose Evacuation and refrigerant charging The hose diameter is larger than the conventional model. Refrigerant Recovery Cylinder Refrigerant recovery Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging The refrigerant type is indicated. The cylinder is pink. Charging Port on the Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging The charge port diameter is larger than that of the current port. Flare Nut Connection of the unit with the pipes Use Type-2 Flare nuts. Tools/Materials Use Notes Gas Leak Detector Gas leak detection The ones for use with HFC refrigerant may be used. Vacuum Pump Vacuum drying May be used if a check valve adapter is attached. Flare Tool Flare processing Flare processing dimensions for the piping in the system using the new re- frigerant differ from those of R22. Re- fer to the following page(s). [1-2-1 Piping Materials](page 5) Refrigerant Recovery Equipment Refrigerant recovery May be used if compatible with

    R410A.

    Tools/Materials Use Notes Vacuum Pump with a Check Valve Vacuum drying Bender Bending pipes Torque Wrench Tightening flare nuts Only the flare processing dimensions for pipes that have a diameter of ø12.7 (1/2") and ø15.88 (5/8") have been changed. Pipe Cutter Cutting pipes Welder and Nitrogen Cylinder Welding pipes Refrigerant Charging Meter Refrigerant charging Vacuum Gauge Vacuum level check Tools/Materials Use Notes Charging Cylinder Refrigerant charging Prohibited to use

    Page 16

    [1-2 Handling and Characteristics of Piping Materials, Refrigerant, and Refrigerant Oil ]

  • 5 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1 Check Before Servicing 1-2 Handling and Characteristics of Piping Materials, Refrigerant, and Refrigerant Oil 1-2-1 Piping Materials
  • Copper pipe materials
  • ŒThe distinction between O-materials (Annealed) and 1/2H-materials (Drawn) is made based on the strength of the pipes them- selves. ŒO-materials (Annealed) can easily be bent with hands. Œ1/2H-materials (Drawn) are considerably stronger than O-material (Annealed) at the same thickness.
  • Types of copper pipes
  • Piping materials/Radial thickness
  • Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. The operation pressure of the units that use R410A is higher than that of the units that use R22. Use pipes that have at least the radial thickness specified in the chart below. (Pipes with a radial thickness of 0.7 mm or less may not be used.) ŒThe pipes in the system that uses the refrigerant currently on the market are made with O-material (Annealed), even if the pipe diameter is less than ø19.05 (3/4"). For a system that uses R410A, use pipes that are made with 1/2H-material (Drawn) unless the pipe diameter is at least ø19.05 (3/4") and the radial thickness is at least 1.2t. ŒThe figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes that meet the local standards. O-material (Annealed) Soft copper pipes (annealed copper pipes). They can easily be bent with hands. 1/2H-material (Drawn) Hard copper pipes (straight pipes). They are stronger than the O-material (Annealed) at the same radial thickness. Maximum working pressure Refrigerant type 3.45 MPa [500psi] R22, R407C etc. 4.30 MPa [624psi] R410A etc. Pipe size (mm[in]) Radial thickness (mm) Type ø6.35 [1/4"] 0.8t O-material (Annealed) ø9.52 [3/8"] 0.8t ø12.7 [1/2"] 0.8t ø15.88 [5/8"] 1.0t ø19.05 [3/4"] 1.0t 1/2H-material, H-material (Drawn) ø22.2 [7/8"] 1.0t ø25.4 [1"] 1.0t ø28.58 [1-1/8"] 1.0t ø31.75 [1-1/4"] 1.1t ø34.93 [1-3/8"] 1.1t ø41.28 [1-5/8"] 1.2t Do not use the existing piping!

    Page 17

    [1-2 Handling and Characteristics of Piping Materials, Refrigerant, and Refrigerant Oil ]

  • 6 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

  • Thickness and refrigerant type indicated on the piping materials
  • Ask the pipe manufacturer for the symbols indicated on the piping material for new refrigerant.
  • Flare processing (O-material (Annealed) and OL-material only)
  • The flare processing dimensions for the pipes that are used in the R410A system are larger than those in the R22 system. If a clutch-type flare tool is used to flare the pipes in the system using R410A, the length of the pipes must be between 1.0 and 1.5 mm. For margin adjustment, a copper pipe gauge is necessary.
  • Flare nut
  • The flare nut type has been changed to increase the strength. The size of some of the flare nuts have also been changed. The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes that meet the local standards. Flare processing dimensions (mm[in]) Pipe size (mm[in]) A dimension (mm)

    R410A

    R22, R407C

    ø6.35 [1/4"] 9.1 9.0 ø9.52 [3/8"] 13.2 13.0 ø12.7 [1/2"] 16.6 16.2 ø15.88 [5/8"] 19.7 19.4 ø19.05 [3/4"] 24.0 23.3 Flare nut dimensions (mm[in]) Pipe size (mm[in]) B dimension (mm)

    R410A

    R22, R407C

    ø6.35 [1/4"] 17.0 17.0 ø9.52 [3/8"] 22.0 22.0 ø12.7 [1/2"] 26.0 24.0 ø15.88 [5/8"] 29.0 27.0 ø19.05 [3/4"] 36.0 36.0 Dimension A Dimension B

    Page 18

    [1-2 Handling and Characteristics of Piping Materials, Refrigerant, and Refrigerant Oil ]

  • 7 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1 Check Before Servicing 1-2-2 Storage of Piping Materials
  • Storage location
  • Store the pipes to be used indoors. (Warehouse at site or owner's warehouse) If they are left outdoors, dust, dirt, or moisture may infiltrate and contaminate the pipe.
  • Sealing the pipe ends
  • Both ends of the pipes should be sealed until just before brazing. Keep elbow pipes and T-joints in plastic bags. The new refrigerator oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional refrigerating machine oil (such as Suniso) and, if not handled with care, could easily introduce moisture into the system. Keep moisture out of the pipes, for it will cause the oil to deteriorate and cause a compressor failure. 1-2-3 Pipe Processing Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges. ŒUse a minimum amount of oil. ŒUse only ester oil, ether oil, and alkylbenzene.

    Page 19

    [1-2 Handling and Characteristics of Piping Materials, Refrigerant, and Refrigerant Oil ]

  • 8 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1-2-4 Characteristics of the New and Conventional Refrigerants
  • Chemical property
  • As with R22, the new refrigerant (R410A) is low in toxicity and chemically stable nonflammable refrigerant. However, because the specific gravity of vapor refrigerant is greater than that of air, leaked refrigerant in a closed room will accumulate at the bottom of the room and may cause hypoxia. If exposed to an open flame, refrigerant will generate poisonous gases. Do not perform installation or service work in a con- fined area. *1 When CFC11 is used as a reference *2 When CO2 is used as a reference
  • Refrigerant composition
  • R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use. If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced.
  • Pressure characteristics
  • The pressure in the system using R410A is 1.6 times as great as that in the system using R22. New Refrigerant (HFC type) Conventional Refriger- ant (HCFC type)

    R410A

    R407C

    R22

    R32/R125

    R32/R125/R134a

    R22

    Composition (wt%) (50/50) (23/25/52) (100) Type of Refrigerant Pseudo-azeotropic Refrigerant Non-azeotropic Refrigerant Single Refrigerant Chloride Not included Not included Included Safety Class

    A1/A1

    A1/A1

    A1

    Molecular Weight 72.6 86.2 86.5 Boiling Point (°C/°F) -51.4/-60.5 -43.6/-46.4 -40.8/-41.4 Steam Pressure (25°C,MPa/77°F,psi) (gauge) 1.557/226 0.9177/133 0.94/136 Saturated Steam Density (25°C,kg/m3/77°F,psi) 64.0 42.5 44.4 Flammability Nonflammable Nonflammable Nonflammable Ozone Depletion Coefficient (ODP)*1 0 0 0.055 Global Warming Coefficient (GWP)*2 1730 1530 1700 Refrigerant Charging Method Refrigerant charging in the liquid state Refrigerant charging in the liquid state Refrigerant charging in the gaseous state Replenishment of Refrigerant after a Refrigerant Leak Available Available Available Temperature (°C/°F) Pressure (gauge)

    R410A

    R407C

    R22

    MPa/psi MPa/psi MPa/psi -20/-4 0.30/44 0.18/26 0.14/20 0/32 0.70/102 0.47/68 0.40/58 20/68 1.34/194 0.94/136 0.81/117 40/104 2.31/335 1.44/209 1.44/209 60/140 3.73/541 2.44/354 2.33/338 65/149 4.17/605 2.75/399 2.60/377

    Page 20

    [1-2 Handling and Characteristics of Piping Materials, Refrigerant, and Refrigerant Oil ]

  • 9 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1 Check Before Servicing 1-2-5 Refrigerant Oil
  • Refrigerating machine oil in the HFC refrigerant system
  • HFC type refrigerants use a refrigerating machine oil different from that used in the R22 system. Note that the ester oil used in the system has properties that are different from commercially available ester oil.
  • Effects of contaminants*1
  • Refrigerating machine oil used in the HFC system must be handled with special care to keep contaminants out. The table below shows the effect of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle.
  • The effects of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle.
  • Refrigerant Refrigerating machine oil

    R22

    Mineral oil

    R407C

    Ester oil

    R410A

    Ester oil *1. Contaminants is defined as moisture, air, processing oil, dust/dirt, wrong types of refrigerant, and refrigerating machine oil. Cause Symptoms Effects on the refrigerant cycle Water infiltration Frozen expansion valve and capillary tubes Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes Poor cooling performance Compressor overheat Motor insulation failure Burnt motor Coppering of the orbiting scroll Lock Burn-in on the orbiting scroll Hydrolysis Sludge formation and ad- hesion Acid generation Oxidization Oil degradation Air infiltration Oxidization Infiltration of contaminants Dust, dirt Adhesion to expansion valve and capillary tubes Clogged expansion valve, capillary tubes, and drier Poor cooling performance Compressor overheat Infiltration of contaminants into the com- pressor Burn-in on the orbiting scroll Mineral oil etc. Sludge formation and adhesion Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes Poor cooling performance Compressor overheat Oil degradation Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

    Page 21

    [1-3 Working with Refrigerant Piping ]

  • 10 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1-3 Working with Refrigerant Piping 1-3-1 Pipe Brazing No changes have been made in the brazing procedures. Perform brazing with special care to keep foreign objects (such as oxide scale, water, and dust) out of the refrigerant system. Example: Inside the brazed connection
  • Items to be strictly observed
  • ŒDo not conduct refrigerant piping work outdoors if raining. ŒUse inert gas during brazing. ŒUse a brazing material (BCuP-3) that requires no flux when brazing between copper pipes or between a copper pipe and copper coupling. ŒIf installed refrigerant pipes are not immediately connected to the equipment, then braze and seal both ends.
  • Reasons
  • ŒThe new refrigerating machine oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional oil and is more likely to cause unit failure if water infiltrates into the system. ŒFlux generally contains chloride. Residual flux in the refrigerant circuit will cause sludge to form.
  • Notes
  • Do not use commercially available antioxidants because they may cause the pipes to corrode or refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate. Use of no inert gas during brazing Use of inert gas during brazing

    Page 22

    [1-3 Working with Refrigerant Piping ]

  • 11 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1 Check Before Servicing 1-3-2 Air Tightness Test No changes have been made in the detection method. Note that a refrigerant leak detector for R22 will not detect an R410A leak.
  • Items to be strictly observed
  • ŒPressurize the equipment with nitrogen up to the design pressure (4.15MPa[601psi]), and then judge the equipment's air tight- ness, taking temperature variations into account. ŒRefrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state (vs. gaseous state).
  • Reasons
  • ŒOxygen, if used for an air tightness test, poses a risk of explosion. (Only use nitrogen to check air tightness.) ŒRefrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state. If gaseous refrigerant in the cylinder is drawn out first, the composition of the remaining refrigerant in the cylinder will change and become unsuitable for use.
  • Notes
  • Procure a leak detector that is specifically designed to detect an HFC leak. A leak detector for R22 will not detect an HFC(R410A) leak. Halide torch R22 leakage detector

    Page 23

    [1-3 Working with Refrigerant Piping ]

  • 12 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1-3-3 Vacuum Drying
  • Vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve (Photo1)
  • To prevent the vacuum pump oil from flowing into the refrigerant circuit during power OFF or power failure, use a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve. A reverse-flow check valve may also be added to the vacuum pump currently in use.
  • Standard of vacuum degree (Photo 2)
  • Use a vacuum pump that attains 0.5Torr(65Pa) or lower degree of vacuum after 5 minutes of operation, and connect it directly to the vacuum gauge. Use a pump well-maintained with an appropriate lubricant. A poorly maintained vacuum pump may not be able to attain the desired degree of vacuum.
  • Required precision of vacuum gauge
  • Use a vacuum gauge that registers a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa) and measures at intervals of 1Torr(130Pa). (A recom- mended vacuum gauge is shown in Photo2.) Do not use a commonly used gauge manifold because it cannot register a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa).
  • Evacuation time
  • ŒAfter the degree of vacuum has reached 5Torr(650Pa), evacuate for an additional 1 hour. (A thorough vacuum drying re- moves moisture in the pipes.) ŒVerify that the vacuum degree has not risen by more than 1Torr(130Pa) 1hour after evacuation. A rise by less than 1Torr(130Pa) is acceptable. ŒIf the vacuum is lost by more than 1Torr(130Pa), conduct evacuation, following the instructions in section 6. Special vacuum drying.
  • Procedures for stopping vacuum pump
  • To prevent the reverse flow of vacuum pump oil, open the relief valve on the vacuum pump side, or draw in air by loosening the charge hose, and then stop the operation. The same procedures should be followed when stopping a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve.
  • Special vacuum drying
  • ŒWhen 5Torr(650Pa) or lower degree of vacuum cannot be attained after 3 hours of evacuation, it is likely that water has pen- etrated the system or that there is a leak. ŒIf water infiltrates the system, break the vacuum with nitrogen. Pressurize the system with nitrogen gas to 0.5kgf/cm2G(0.05MPa) and evacuate again. Repeat this cycle of pressurizing and evacuation either until the degree of vac- uum below 5Torr(650Pa) is attained or until the pressure stops rising. ŒOnly use nitrogen gas for vacuum breaking. (The use of oxygen may result in an explosion.) (Photo1) 15010H (Photo2) 14010 Recommended vacuum gauge: ROBINAIR 14010 Thermistor Vacuum Gauge

    Page 24

    [1-3 Working with Refrigerant Piping ]

  • 13 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1 Check Before Servicing
  • Triple Evacuation
  • The method below can also be used to evacuate the system. ŒEvacuate the system to 4,000 microns from both service valves. System manifold gauges must not be used to measure vac- uum. A micron gauge must be used at all times. Break the vacuum with Nitrogen (N2) into the discharge service valve to 0

    Psig.

    ŒEvacuate the system to 1,500 microns from the suction service valve. Break the vacuum with Nitrogen (N2) into the discharge service valve to 0 PSIG. ŒEvacuate the system to 500 microns. System must hold the vacuum at 500 microns for a minimum of 1 hour. ŒConduct a rise test for a minimum of 30 minutes
  • Notes
  • ŒTo evacuate air from the entire system Applying a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve on the high and low pressure sides (BV1 and 2) is not enough to attain the desired vacuum pressure. Be sure to apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve on the high and low pressure sides (BV1 and 2) and also through the check joints on the high and low pressure sides (CJ1 and 2). ŒTo evacuate air only from the outdoor units Apply a vacuum through the check joints on the high and low pressure sides (CJ1, and 2). ŒTo evacuate air from the indoor units and extension pipes Apply a vacuum through the check joints at the refrigerant service valve on the high and low pressure sides (BV1 and 2).

    Page 25

    [1-3 Working with Refrigerant Piping ]

  • 14 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1-3-4 Refrigerant Charging
  • Reasons
  • R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend (boiling point R32=-52°C[-62°F], R125=-49°C[-52°F]) and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and be- come unsuitable for use.
  • Notes
  • When using a cylinder with a siphon, refrigerant is charged in the liquid state without the need for turning it upside down. Check the type of the cylinder on the label before use. If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced. (Charge refrigerant in the liquid state.) Refer to the following page(s).[8-14 Measures for Refrigerant Leakage](page 311) Cylinder with a siphon Cylinder color R410A is pink. Refrigerant charging in the liquid state Cylin- der liquid Valve Valve liquid Cylin- der Cylinder without a siphon

    Page 26

    [1-4 Precautions for Wiring ]

  • 15 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1 Check Before Servicing 1-4 Precautions for Wiring ŒControl boxes house high-voltage and high-temperature electrical parts. ŒThey may still remain energized or hot after the power is turned off. ŒWhen opening or closing the front cover of the control box, keep out of contact with the internal parts. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, leave the unit turned off for at least 10 minutes, and check that the voltage of the electrolytic capacitor (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less. It will take approximately 10 minutes until the voltage is discharged after power off. ŒDisconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. Before connecting or disconnecting the connector, check that the outdoor unit fan is stopped and that the voltage of the main circuit capacitor has dropped to 20 VDC or below. If the outdoor unit fan is rotated by external forces such as strong winds, the main circuit capacitor can be charged and cause an electric shock. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details. Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work. ŒWhen the unit is turned on, the compressor will remain energized even when it is stopped to vaporize the liquid refrigerant that accumulates in the compressor. ŒBefore connecting wiring to TB7, check that the voltage has dropped below 20 VDC. ŒWhen a system controller is connected to the centralized control transmission cable to which power is supplied from the out- door unit (power jumper on the outdoor unit is connected to CN40), be aware that power can be supplied to the centralized control transmission and the system controller may detect an error and send an error notice if the outdoor unit fan is rotated by external forces, such as strong winds, even when power to the outdoor unit is turned off. ŒWhen replacing the internal electrical components of the control box, tighten the screws to the recommended tightening torque as specified below. Recommended tightening torque for the internal electrical components of the control box ∗1 When replacing semiconductor modules (e.g., diode stack, IPM, INV board (with IPM), fan board (with IPM)), apply heat- sink silicone evenly to the mounting surface of the semiconductor module (or the semiconductor module on the back of the circuit board). Next, tighten the screws holding the semiconductor module to one-third of the specified torque, and then tighten the screws to the specified torque. ∗2 Deviating from the recommended tightening torque may cause damage to the unit or its parts. Take the following steps to ensure that the screws are properly tightened. 1) Ensure that the spring washers are parallel to the terminal block. Even if the tightening torque is observed, if the washers are not parallel to the terminal block, then the semiconductor module is not installed properly. Screw Recommended tightening torque (N·m)

    M3

    0.69

    M4

    1.47

    M5

    2.55

    M6

    2.75

    M8

    6.20 Proper installation Loose screws Spring washers are parallel to the terminal block

    Page 27

    [1-4 Precautions for Wiring ]

  • 16 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2) Check the wires are securely fastened to the screw terminals. ŒScrew the screws straight down so as not to damage the screw threads. Hold the two round terminals back to back to ensure that the screw will screw down straight. ŒAfter tightening the screw, mark a line through the screw head, washer, and terminals with a permanent marker. Example Poor contact caused by loose screws may result in overheating and fire. Continued use of the damaged circuit board may cause overheating and fire. Daisy-chain Power supply terminal block, indoor-outdoor transmission line terminal block, and centralized controller transmission line Mark a line. Place the round terminals back to back. Power wires, transmission lines, centralized transmission lines

    Page 28

  • 17 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 2 Restrictions 2-1 System Configurations....................................................................................................................... 19 2-2 Types and Maximum Allowable Length of Cables........................................................................... 20 2-3 Switch Settings ................................................................................................................................... 21 2-4 M-NET Address Settings.................................................................................................................... 22 2-4-1 Address Settings List ............................................................................................................................ 22 2-4-2 Outdoor Unit Power Jumper Connector Connection............................................................................. 24 2-4-3 Outdoor Unit Centralized Controller Switch Setting.............................................................................. 24 2-4-4 Room Temperature Detection Position Selection................................................................................. 24 2-4-5 Start/Stop Control of Indoor Units......................................................................................................... 25 2-4-6 Miscellaneous Settings ......................................................................................................................... 25 2-4-7 Various Control Methods Using the Signal Input/Output Connector on Outdoor Unit .......................... 26 2-5 Demand Control Overview................................................................................................................. 29 2-6 System Connection Example............................................................................................................. 30 2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ............................................................................. 32 2-7-1 Single Refrigerant System (Automatic Indoor/Outdoor Address Startup)............................................. 32 2-7-2 Single Refrigerant System with Two or More LOSSNAY Units ............................................................ 34 2-7-3 Grouped Operation of Units in Separate Refrigerant Circuits............................................................... 36 2-7-4 System with a Connection of System Controller to Centralized Control Transmission Line................. 38 2-7-5 System with a Connection of System Controller to Indoor-Outdoor Transmission Line ....................... 40 2-7-6 System with Multiple BC Controllers..................................................................................................... 42 2-8 Example System with an ME Remote Controller ............................................................................. 46 2-8-1 System with a Connection of System Controller to Centralized Control Transmission Line................. 46 2-9 Example System with an MA and an ME Remote Controller .......................................................... 48 2-9-1 System with a Connection of System Controller to Centralized Control Transmission Line................. 48 2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes..................................................................................................... 51 2-10-1 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipe Length ............................................................................................... 51 2-10-2 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipe Size ................................................................................................... 57 2-10-3 BC Controller Connection Method ........................................................................................................ 58

    Page 29

  • 18 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 30

    [2-1 System Configurations ]

  • 19 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions 2 Restrictions2-1 System Configurations
  • Table of compatible indoor units
  • The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of outdoor units. 1) "Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units" refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names. 2) If the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given outdoor unit exceeds the capacity of the outdoor unit, the indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously. Select a combination of units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the outdoor unit whenever possible. Outdoor units Composing units Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units Maximum number of connectable in- door units Types of connectable in- door units 72
  • -
  • 36 - 108 18 P06 - P96 models R410A series indoor units 96
  • -
  • 48 - 144 24 144 72 72 72 - 216 36 192 96 96 96 - 288 48

    Page 31

    [2-2 Types and Maximum Allowable Length of Cables ]

  • 20 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2-2 Types and Maximum Allowable Length of Cables
  • Wiring work
  • (1) Notes 1) Have all electrical work performed by an authorized electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this man- ual. 2) Install external transmission cables at least 5cm [1-31/32"] away from the power supply cable to avoid noise interference. (Do not put the control cable and power supply cable in the same conduit tube.) 3) Provide grounding for the outdoor unit as required. 4) Run the cable from the electric box of the indoor or outdoor unit in such way that the box is accessible for servicing. 5) Do not connect power supply wiring to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the electronic compo- nents on the terminal block. 6) Use 2-core shielded cables as transmission cables. Use a separate 2-core control cable for each refrigerant system. Do not use a single multiple-core cable to connect indoor units that belong to different refrigerant systems. The use of a multiple-core cable may result in signal transmission errors and malfunctions. 7) When extending the transmission cable, be sure to extend the shield wire. (2) Control wiring Different types of control wiring are used for different systems. Before performing wiring work, refer to the following page(s). [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller](page 32) [2-8 Example System with an ME Remote Controller](page 46) [2-9 Example System with an MA and an ME Remote Controller](page 48) Types and maximum allowable length of cables Control lines are categorized into 2 types: transmission line and remote controller line. Use the appropriate type of cables and observe the maximum allowable length specified for a given system. If a given system has a long transmission line or if a noise source is located near the unit, place the unit away from the noise source to reduce noise interference. 1) M-NET transmission line Cable type Facility type All facility types Type Shielded cable CVVS, CPEVS, MVVS Number of cores 2-core cable Cable size Larger than 1.25mm2 [AWG16] Maximum transmission line distance between the outdoor unit and the far- thest indoor unit 200 m [656ft] max. Maximum transmission line distance for central- ized control and Indoor/ outdoor transmission line (Maximum line distance via outdoor unit) 500 m [1640ft] max. *The maximum overall line length from the power supply unit on the transmission lines for centralized control to each outdoor unit or to the system controller is 200m [656ft] max.

    Tb

    3

    Tb

    7

    Tb

    3

    Tb

    7

    Tb

    3

    Tb

    7

    Tb

    3

    Tb

    7

    Tb

    3

    Tb

    7

    Tb

    3

    Tb

    7

    Tb

    3

    Tb

    7

    Tb

    3

    Tb

    7 TB3: Terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line TB7: Terminal block for centralized control multiple-core cable BC Controller Indoor unit Remote Controller Remote Controller 2-core shielded cable 2-core shielded cable Outdoor unit BC Controller Indoor unit Outdoor unit

    Page 32

    [2-3 Switch Settings ]

  • 21 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions 2) Remote controller wiring *1 MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAU, PAR-21MAAU, PAR-30MAAU), Simple MA Re- mote Controller, and wireless remote controller. *2 The use of cables that are smaller than 0.75mm2 (AWG18) is recommended for easy handling. *3 When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the cable size specifi- cations shown in the parenthesis. *4 When connecting PAR-30MAAU, use a 0.3mm2 sheathed cable. *5 ME remote controller refers to ME remote controller and Simple ME Remote Controller. 2-3 Switch Settings
  • Switch setting
  • The necessary switch settings depend on system configuration. Before performing wiring work, refer to the following page(s). [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller](page 32) [2-8 Example System with an ME Remote Controller](page 46) [2-9 Example System with an MA and an ME Remote Controller](page 48) If the switch settings are changed while the unit is being powered, those changes will not take effect, and the unit will not function properly. *1. Applicable when LOSSNAY units are connected to the indoor-outdoor transmission line. *2. The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). *3. Turn off the power to all the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit. *4. When a PAR-30MAAU is connected to a group, no other MA remote controllers can be connected to the same group. *5. When setting the switch SW4 of the control board, set it with the outdoor unit power on. Refer to the following page(s). [5-1-1 Outdoor Unit Switch Functions and Factory Settings](page 117) MA remote controller*1 ME remote controller*5 Cable type Type

    Cvv

    Cvv

    Number of cores 2-core cable 2-core cable Cable size 0.3 to 1.25mm2 *2 *4 [AWG22 to 16] (0.75 to 1.25mm2 ) *3 [AWG18 to 16] 0.3 to 1.25mm2 *2 [AWG22 to 16] (0.75 to 1.25mm2 ) *3 [AWG18 to 16] Maximum overall line length 200 m [656ft] max. The section of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in the maximum in- door-outdoor transmission line distance. Units on which to set the switches Symbol Units to which the power must be shut off CITY MULTI indoor unit Main/sub unit

    Ic

    Outdoor units *3 and Indoor units LOSSNAY, OA processing unit *1

    Lc

    Outdoor units *3 and LOSSNAY ME remote controller Main/sub remote controller

    Rc

    Outdoor units *3 MA remote controller *4 Main/sub remote controller

    Ma

    Indoor units CITY MULTI outdoor unit*2

    Oc,Os

    Outdoor units *3 BC controller Main

    Bc

    Outdoor units *3 and BC controller Sub1, 2

    Bs1, Bs2

    Outdoor units *3 *5 and BC controller

    Page 33

    [2-4 M-NET Address Settings ]

  • 22 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2-4 M-NET Address Settings 2-4-1 Address Settings List
  • M-NET Address settings
  • (1) Address settings table The need for address settings and the range of address setting depend on the configuration of the system. *1. If a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to other units, use a different, unused address within the setting range. *2. To set the outdoor unit address or the auxiliary outdoor unit address to "100," set the rotary switches to "50." *3. To set the ME remote controller address to "200," set the rotary switches to "00." *4. Some models of indoor units have two or three control boards. Assign an address to the No.1, No. 2, and No. 3 control boards so that the No. 2 control board address equals the No. 1 control board address plus 1, and that the No. 3 control board address equals the No. 1 control board address plus 2. *5. The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, and OS. They are designated as OC, and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). *6. No address settings are required for units in a system with a single outdoor unit (with some exceptions). Address setting is required if a sub BC controller is connected. *7. When a PAR-30MAAU is connected to a group, no other MA remote controllers can be connected to the same group. Unit or controller Sym- bol Address setting range Setting method Factory address setting

    City Multi

    indoor unit Main/sub unit

    Ic

    0, 01 to 50*1 *4 *6 Assign the smallest address to the main indoor unit in the group, and assign sequential address numbers to the rest of the indoor units in the same group. In an R2 system with a sub BC controller, make the set- tings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. 00

    M-Net

    adapter M-NET con- trol interface Free Plan adapter LOSSNAY, OA processing unit

    Lc

    0, 01 to 50*1 *4 *6 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. 00 ME remote controller Main remote controller

    Rc

    101 to 150 Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the same group. 101 Sub remote controller

    Rc

    151 to 200*3 Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the same group. MA remote controller

    Ma

    No address settings required. (The main/sub setting must be made if 2 remote controllers are connected to the system.) *7 Main CITY MULTI outdoor unit

    Oc

    Os

    0, 51 to 100*1 *2 *6 ŒAssign an address that equals the lowest address of the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit plus 50. ŒAssign sequential addresses to the outdoor units in the same re- frigerant circuit. The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. *5 00 Auxiliary outdoor unit BC controller (main)

    Bc

    0, 51 to 100*1 *2 *6 ŒAssign an address that equals the address of the outdoor unit in the same refrigerant system plus 1. ŒIf a given address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the outdoor units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. 00 BC controller (sub1, 2)

    Bs1

    Bs2

    51 to 100 *2 ŒAssign an address to both the sub BC controller 1 and 2 that equals the lowest address of the indoor units that are connected to each of them plus 50. ŒIf a sub BC controller is connected, the automatic startup function is not available.

    Page 34

    [2-4 M-NET Address Settings ]

  • 23 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions Unit or controller Sym- bol Address setting range Setting method Factory address setting System controller Group remote con- troller

    Gr

    Sc

    201 to 250 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest group number of the group to be controlled and 200. 201 System remote con- troller

    Sr

    Sc

    Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. ON/OFF remote con- troller

    An

    Sc

    Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest group number of the group to be controlled and 200. Schedule timer (com- patible with M-NET)

    St

    Sc

    Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. 202 Central controller

    Ag-150A

    G(B)-50A

    Gb-24A

    Tr

    Sc

    000 201 to 250 Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. The address must be set to "000" to control the K-control unit. 000 Expansion controller

    Pac-Yg50Eca

    Tr

    000 201 to 250 Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. The address must be set to "000" to control the K-control unit. 000 BM adapter

    Bac-Hd150

    Sc

    000 201 to 250 Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. The address must be set to "000" to control the K-control unit. 000 LM adapter

    Lmap03U

    Sc

    201 to 250 Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the range listed on the left to each unit. 247

    Page 35

    [2-4 M-NET Address Settings ]

  • 24 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2-4-2 Outdoor Unit Power Jumper Connector Connection There are limitations on the total number of units that are connectable to each refrigerant system. Refer to the DATABOOK for details. *1 The need for a power supply unit for transmission lines depends on the system configuration. *2 The replacement of the power jumper connector from CN41 to CN40 must be performed on only one outdoor unit in the system. 2-4-3 Outdoor Unit Centralized Controller Switch Setting *1 Set SW5-1 on all outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit to the same setting. *2 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW5-1 to OFF (as it is). 2-4-4 Room Temperature Detection Position Selection To stop the fan during heating Thermo-OFF (SW1-7 and 1-8 on the indoor units to be set to ON), use the built-in thermistor on the remote controller or an optional thermistor. 1) To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 to ON. (Factory setting: SW1-1 set to "OFF".) ŒSome models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor. Use the built-in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead. ŒWhen using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected. (Note) Factory setting for SW1-1 on the indoor unit of the All-Fresh Models is ON. 2) When an optional temperature sensor is used, set SW1-1 to OFF, and set SW3-8 to ON. ŒWhen using an optional temperature sensor, install it where room temperature can be detected. System configura- tion Connection to the system con- troller Power supply unit for transmission lines Group operation of units in a sys- tem with multiple outdoor units Power supply switch connector connection System with one outdoor unit _ _ _ Leave CN41 as it is (Factory setting) System with multi- ple outdoor units Not connected _ Not grouped Grouped Disconnect the male connector from the fe- male power supply switch connector (CN41) and connect it to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on only one of the outdoor units.*2 *Connect the S (shielded) terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose CN41 was replaced with CN40 to the ground terminal ( ) on the electric box. With connection to the indoor unit system Not required Grouped/not grouped With connection to the central- ized control sys- tem Not required*1 (Powered from the outdoor unit) Grouped/not grouped Required *1 Grouped/not grouped Leave CN41 as it is (Factory setting) System configuration Centralized control switch (SW5-1) settings *1 Connection to the system controller Not connected Leave it to OFF. (Factory setting) Connection to the system controller Connected *2

    On

    Page 36

    [2-4 M-NET Address Settings ]

  • 25 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions 2-4-5 Start/Stop Control of Indoor Units Each indoor unit (or group of indoor units) can be controlled individually by setting SW 1-9 and 1-10. *1. Do not cut off power to the outdoor unit. Cutting off the power supply to the outdoor unit will cut off the power supply to the belt heater and may cause the compressor to malfunction when the unit is put back into operation. *2. Not applicable to units with a built-in drain pump or humidifier. *3. Models with a built-in drain pump cannot be turned on/off by the plug individually. All the units in the same refrigerant cir- cuits will be turned on or off by the plug. *4. Requires that the dipswitch settings for all the units in the group be made. *5. To control the external input to and output from the air conditioners with the PLC software for general equipment via the G(B)-50A, set SW1-9 and SW1-10 to ON. With these settings made, the power start-stop function becomes disabled. To use the auto recovery function after power failure while these settings are made, set SW1-5 to ON. 2-4-6 Miscellaneous Settings Cooling-only setting for the indoor unit: Cooling only model (Factory setting: SW3-1 "OFF.") When using indoor unit as a cooling-only unit, set SW3-1 to ON. Function Operation of the indoor unit when the operation is resumed after the unit was stopped Setting (SW1)*4 *5 9 10 Power ON/OFF by the plug*1,*2,*3 Indoor unit will go into operation regardless of its operation status before power off (power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes)

    Off

    On

    Automatic restoration after power failure Indoor unit will go into operation if it was in operation when the power was turned off (or cut off due to power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes)

    On

    Off

    Indoor unit will remain stopped regardless of its operation status before power off (power failure).

    Off

    Off

    Page 37

    [2-4 M-NET Address Settings ]

  • 26 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2-4-7 Various Control Methods Using the Signal Input/Output Connector on Outdoor Unit (1) Various connection options *1 For details, refer to section (2) Example of wiring connection. *2 For details, refer to section (2) Example of wiring connection and other relevant sections in the manual. [2-5 Demand Control Overview](page 29) *3 Low-noise mode is valid when Dip SW6-8 on the outdoor unit is set to OFF. When DIP SW6-8 is set to ON, 4 levels of on- DEMAND are possible, using different configurations of low-noise mode input and DEMAND input settings.When 2 or more outdoor units exist in one refrigerant circuit system, 8 levels of on-DEMAND are possible. *4. By setting Dip SW6-7, the Low-noise mode can be switched between the Capacity priority mode and the Low-noise priority mode. When SW6-7 is set to ON: The low-noise mode always remains effective. When SW6-7 is set to OFF: The low noise mode is cancelled when certain outside temperature or pressure criteria are met, and the unit goes into normal operation (capacity priority mode). *5 If multiple outdoor units are connected to the same refrigerant circuit, signal input/output settings need to be made for each outdoor unit. *6 Take out signals from the outdoor unit that is designated as OC if multiple outdoor units in the same system. *7 If the formula TH7>5 holds true, the fan will not go into operation when the contact receives signal input. *8 On the TKMU-A-H models, the error signal output function is disabled at default settings. Change the DipSW4 (No. 974) setting to use the error signal output function. When the setting is changed, base heaters cannot be used. Type Usage Function Terminal to be used*1 Option Input Prohibiting cooling/heating operation (thermo OFF) by an external input to the outdoor unit. *It can be used as the DEMAND control device for each system. DEMAND (level)

    Cn3D*2

    Adapter for external input

    (Pac-

    Sc36Na-E)

    Performs a low level noise operation of the outdoor unit by an ex- ternal input to the outdoor unit.
  • It can be used as the silent operation device for each refrigerant
  • system. Low-noise mode (level) *3*4 Forces the outdoor unit to perform a fan operation by receiving sig- nals from the snow sensor.*5*7 Snow sensor signal input (level)

    Cn3S

    Cooling/heating operation can be changed by an external input to the outdoor unit. Auto-changeover

    Cn3N

    The operation mode of the unit can be changed from normal cool- ing operation (performance priority) to energy-saving cooling mode by an external signal input. Energy-saving mode

    Cn3K

    Out- put How to extract signals from the outdoor unit *It can be used as an operation status display device. *It can be used for an interlock operation with external devices. Operation status of the compressor*5

    Cn51

    Adapter for external out- put

    (Pac-

    Sc37Sa-E)

    Error status*6 *8 Low-noise mod is effective. Capacity priority mode becomes effective. Cooling Heating Cooling Heating TH7<30°C[86°F] and 63HS1<32kg/cm2 TH7>3°C[37°F] and 63LS>4.6kg/cm2 TH7>35°C[95°F] or 63HS1>35kg/cm2 TH7<0°C[32°F] or 63LS<3.9kg/cm2

    Page 38

    [2-4 M-NET Address Settings ]

  • 27 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (2) Example of wiring connection

    Caution

    1) Wiring should be covered by insulation tube with supplementary insulation. 2) Use relays or switches with IEC or equivalent standard. 3) The electric strength between accessible parts and control circuit should have 2750V or more.

    (1) Cn51

    (2) Cn3S

    Cn51

    X

    Y

    L1

    L2

    e cru o s re w o p p m a

    L

    Distant control board Relay circuit 1 Outdoor unit control board Preparations in the field Maximum cable length is 10m 5 4 3

    X

    Y

    L1 : Outdoor unit error display lamp L2 : Compressor operation lamp (compressor running state) X, Y : Relay (coil =<0.9W : DC12V)
  • Optional part : PAC-SC37SA-E or field supply.
  • Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.
  • X : Relay Snow sensor : The outdoor fan runs when X is closed in stop mode or thermostat mode.

    X

    Cn3S

    Preparations in the field Maximum cable length is 10m External input adapter

    Cn51

    Y

    L2

    e cru o s re w o p p m a

    L

    Distant control board Relay circuit 1 Outdoor unit control board Preparations in the field Maximum cable length is 10m 4 3

    Y

    L2 : Compressor operation lamp (compressor running state) Y : Relay (coil =<0.9W : DC12V)
  • Optional part : PAC-SC37SA-E or field supply.
  • On the TKMU-A-H models, the error signal output function is disabled
  • at default settings. Change the DipSW4 (No. 974) setting to use the error signal output function. When the setting is changed, base heaters cannot be used. External input adapter Outdoor unit control board 2 3 1 Contact rating voltage >= DC15V Contact rating current >= 0.1A Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC Relay circuit

    (3) Cn3N

  • Optional part :
  • PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply. Preparations in the field

    Off

    Cooling

    On

    Heating Normal

    Y

    Off

    On

    X

    Contact rating voltage >= DC15V Contact rating current >= 0.1A Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC X : Cooling / Heating Y : Validity / Invalidity of X X,Y : Relay

    Cn3N

    X

    Y

    Relay circuit Outdoor unit control board Maximum cable length is 10m 1 2 3 2 External input adapter 2 External input adapter HP-TKMU-A-H model

    (4) Cn3D

  • Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.
  • X : Low-noise mode X : Low-noise mode Y : Compressor ON/OFF X,Y : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V Contact rating current >= 0.1A Minimum appicable load =< 1mA at DC

    Y

    X

    Cn3D

    Preparations in the field Maximum cable length is 10m External input adapter 2 Outdoor unit control board 3 2 1 Relay circuit
  • Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.
  • X

    Cn3D

    Preparations in the field Maximum cable length is 10m Outdoor unit control board 2 3 1 X : Relay fan frequency and maximum compressor frequency. Contact rating voltage >= DC15V Contact rating current >= 0.1A Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC Low-noise mode : The noise level is reduced by controlling the maximum Relay circuit External input adapter 2

    Page 39

    [2-4 M-NET Address Settings ]

  • 28 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (5) Cn3K

  • Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.
  • X : Energy-saving mode command X : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V Contact rating current >= 0.1A Minimum appicable load =< 1mA at DC

    X

    Cn3K

    Preparations in the field Maximum cable length is 10m Outdoor unit control board 3 2 1 Relay circuit External input adapter 2

    Page 40

    [2-5 Demand Control Overview ]

  • 29 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions 2-5 Demand Control Overview (1) General outline of control Demand control is performed by using the external signal input to the 1-2 and 1-3 pins of CN3D on the outdoor units (OC and OS). Between 2 and 8 steps of demand control is possible by setting Dip SW6-8 on the outdoor units (OC and OS). *1 Available demand functions HP72 - HP96T(Y)KMU-A(-H) models (single-outdoor-unit system) : 2 and 4 steps shown in the rows 1 and 2 in the table above only. HP144 - HP192T(Y)KMU-A(-H) models (two-outdoor-unit system OC+OS) : 2-8 steps shown in the rows 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the table above only. *2 Signal is input to CN3D on the outdoor unit whose SW6-8 is set to ON. When SW6-8 is set to OFF on all outdoor units, the signal is input to the CN3D on the OC. Outdoor units whose SW6-8 is set to ON are selectable in a single refrigerant system. *3 If wrong sequence of steps are taken, the units may go into the Thermo-OFF (compressor stop) mode. Ex) When switching from 100% to 50% (Incorrect) 100%→0%→50% The units may go into the Thermo-OFF mode. (Correct) 100%→75%→50% *4 The percentage of the demand listed in the table above is an approximate value based on the compressor volume and does not necessarily correspond with the actual capacity. *5 Notes on using demand control in combination with the low-noise mode To enable the low-noise mode, it is necessary to short-circuit 1-2 pin of CN3D on the outdoor unit whose SW6-8 is set to OFF. When SW6-8 is set to ON on all outdoor units, the following operations cannot be performed. ŒPerforming 4-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a single-outdoor-unit system. ŒPerforming 8-step demand in combination with the low-noise operation in a two-outdoor-unit system. 1) Contact input and control content 2-step demand control The same control as the Thermo-OFF is performed by closing 1-3 pin of CN3D. 4-step demand control (When SW6-8 is set to ON on an outdoor unit) Demand capacity is shown below. 8-step demand control (When SW6-8 is set to ON on two outdoor units) Demand capacity is shown below. *1. The outdoor units whose SW6-8 is set to ON are designated as No. 1 and No. 2 in the order of address from small to large. Ex) When outdoor units whose SW6-8 is set to ON are designated as OC and OS, OC=No. 1 and OS=No. 2. No Demand control switch Dip SW6-8 Input to CN3D*2

    Oc

    Os

    1 2 steps (0-100%)

    Off

    Off

    Oc

    2 4 steps (0-50-75-100%)

    On

    Off

    Oc

    3

    Off

    On

    Os

    4 8 steps (0-25-38-50-63-75-88-100%)

    On

    On

    OC and OS

    Cn3D

    1-3 Open 100% Close 0%

    Cn3D

    1-2P

    1-3P

    Open Close Open 100% 75% Close 0% 50% 8-step demand No.2 CN3D

    1-2P

    Open Close No.1 CN3D

    1-2P

    1-3P

    Open Close Open Close Open Open 100% 50% 88% 75% Close 50% 0% 38% 25% Close Open 88% 38% 75% 63% Close 75% 25% 63% 50%

    Page 41

    [2-6 System Connection Example ]

  • 30 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2-6 System Connection Example Examples of typical system connection are shown below. Refer to the Installation Manual that came with each device or controller for details. (1) An example of a system to which an MA remote controller is connected (2) An example of a system to which an ME remote controller is connected (3) An example of a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are connected System configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for in- door and outdoor units Notes 1 System with one out- door unit

    No

    Automatic address setup 2 System with one out- door unit

    No

    Manual address setup Connection of multiple LOSS- NAY units 3 Grouping of units in a system with multiple outdoor units

    No

    Manual address setup 4 System with one out- door unit With connection to transmission line for centralized control Manual address setup 5 System with one out- door unit With connection to indoor-outdoor transmission line Manual address setup 6 System with one out- door unit With connection to transmission line for centralized control Manual address setup Connection of multiple LOSS- NAY units System configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for indoor and outdoor units Notes 1 System with one out- door unit With connection to transmission line for centralized control Manual address setup System configuration Connection to the system controller Address start up for in- door and outdoor units Notes 1 System with one out- door unit With connection to transmission line for centralized control Manual address setup *MA remote controller and ME remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group.

    Page 42

    [2-6 System Connection Example ]

  • 31 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions

    Page 43

  • 32 -
  • [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller 2-7-1 Single Refrigerant System (Automatic Indoor/Outdoor Address Startup) (1) Sample control wiring (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. It is not possible to connect a pair of

    Par-30Maau.

    3) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in par- allel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each outdoor unit.) ŒThe table above shows the number of transmission boost- ers that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above- mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be con- nected. 4) Automatic address setup is not available if start-stop input (CN32, CN51, CN41) is used for a group operation of indoor units or when multiple indoor units with different functions are grouped in the same group. Refer to the following page(s). [2-7-2 Single Refrigerant System with Two or More LOSSNAY Units](page 34) 5) For information about connecting two or more LOSSNAY units to a system, refer to the following page(s). [2-7-2 Sin- gle Refrigerant System with Two or More LOSSNAY Units](page 34) (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

    L1 +L2+L3+L4+L5

    200m[656ft]

    L1 +L2+L3+L11+L12+L13

    200m[656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length (0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16]) m1 200m [656ft] m2+m3 200m [656ft] m4+m5 200m [656ft] *When connected to the terminal block on the Simple re- mote controller, use cables that meet the following cable size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-14]. *When connecting PAR-30MAAU, use a 0.3 mm2 sheathed cable.

    Ic

    Tb5

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 00

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 00

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Rc

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    00

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 00 00

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 00

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Group Group Group Group

    A1 B2

    Ma

    m1

    L11

    m2

    L4

    L5

    L12

    L13

    m3 m5 m4 Interlock operation with the ventilation unit *1. When BS is connected to the system, automatic address setup is not available.

    Bc

    00

    Oc

    00

    Tb7

    M1 M2

    S

    Tb3

    Os

    00

    Tb7

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    S

    Tb3

    Tb02

    M1 M2 S

    *1

    Bs

    Tb02

    00

    S

    M1M2

    L3

    L1

    L2

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Number of transmission booster (sold separately) re- quired 1 unit 2 units When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connect- ed indoor units 27 - 50 units
  • When the P72 and P96 models
  • are included in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

    Page 44

    [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ] 33

  • 33 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB3) on the outdoor units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-out- door transmission line (TB02) on the main BC controller (BC), and of the terminal block for indoor-outdoor trans- mission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polar- ized two-wire) ŒOnly use shielded cables. The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are au- tomatically designated as OC and OS in the order of ca- pacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the outdoor units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC controller (BC), and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the shielded cable. 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA remote controller line (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the MA remote controller (MA). (Non-polarized two-wire) When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys- tem When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system, connect terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the two MA remote controllers. ŒSet one of the MA remote controllers as a sub controller. (Refer to the Instruction Manual for the MA remote con- troller for the setting method.) Group operation of indoor units To perform a group operation of indoor units (IC), daisy- chain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on all indoor units (IC) in the same group, and then connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on the in- door unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA re- motecontroller. (Non-polarized two-wire) ŒWhen performing a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, "Automatic indoor/outdoor ad- dresssetup" is not available. 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate ter- minals on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) ŒInterlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the same system will automatically be made. (It is required that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the outdoo- runit.) ŒFor information about certain types of systems (1. Sys- tems in which the LOSSNAY unit is interlocked with only part of the indoor units, 2. Systems in which the LOSS- NAY unit is operated independently from the indoor units, 3. Systems in which more than 16 indoor units are interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit, and 4. Systems to which two ore more LOSSNAY units are connected), re- fer to the following page(s). [2-7-2 Single Refrigerant System with Two or More LOSSNAY Units](page 34) 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (5) Address setting method The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). Proce- dures Unit or controller Address set- ting range Setting method Notes Factory setting 1 Indoor unit Main unit

    Ic

    No settings required.
  • Port number setting is required
  • For information about how to per- form a group operation of indoor units that feature different func- tions, refer to the following page(s). [2-7-2 Single Refrigerant System with Two or More LOSS- NAY Units](page 34) 00 Sub unit

    Ic

    2

    Lossnay

    Lc

    No settings required.
  • 00
  • 3

    Ma

    remote con- troller Main remote con- troller

    Ma

    No settings required.
  • It is not possible to connect a pair
  • of PAR-30MAAU. Main Sub remote con- troller

    Ma

    Sub remote con- troller Settings to be made with the Sub/Main switch 4 Outdoor unit

    Oc

    Os

    No settings required.
  • 00
  • 5 Auxiliary outdoor unit

    Bc

    controller

    Bc

    No settings required.
  • 00
  • Page 45

  • 34 -
  • [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    2-7-2 Single Refrigerant System with Two or More LOSSNAY Units (1) Sample control wiring (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. It is not possible to connect a pair of PAR-

    30Maau.

    3) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold sepa- rately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each outdoor unit.) ŒThe table above shows the number of transmission boost- ers that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above- mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be con- nected. ŒRefer to the DATABOOK for further information about how many booster units are required for a given system. (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Same as 2-7-1 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1

    L3

    Bc

    53

    Oc

    51

    Tb7

    S

    Tb3

    Tb02

    S

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 01

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 02

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    05

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 04 03

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    06

    A1 B2

    Ma

  • If the BC address overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to either the OC, OS, or BS, use a different, unused address.
  • OC, OS, and BS addresses (lowest indoor unit address in the group plus +50) have higher priority than the BS address.

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 08 07

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    M1M2

    M1M2

    L11

    L4

    L5

    L12

    L13

    Os

    52

    Tb7

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    S

    Tb3

    M1 M2

    Tb02

    S

    57

    Bs

    L1

    L2

    Group Group Group Interlock operation with the ventilation unit Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    m1 m2 m3 Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units When the P72 and P96 models are not in- cluded in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units
  • When the P72 and P96 models are includ-
  • ed in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

    Page 46

    [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ] 35

  • 35 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB3) on the outdoor units (OC and OS), of the terminal block for indoor-out- door transmission line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), and of the terminal block for in- door-outdoor transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire) ŒOnly use shielded cables. The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are au- tomatically designated as OC and OS in the order of ca- pacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the outdoor units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on BC and BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the shielded cable. 2) Transmission line for centralized control No connection is required. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys- tem Same as 2-7-1 Group operation of indoor units Same as 2-7-1 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-po- larized two-wire) ŒInterlock setting between the indoor units and LOSS- NAY units must be entered on the remote controller. For information about how to interlock the operation of indoor and LOSSNAY units, refer to the following page(s) in this Service Handbook. [6-5 Making Interlock Settings from an MA Remote Con- troller](page 157) 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (5) Address setting method The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). Proce- dures Unit or controller Address setting range Setting method Notes Fac- tory set- ting 1 Indoor unit Main unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 ŒAssign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. ŒIn a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. ŒPort number setting is required ŒTo perform a group op- eration of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2

    Lossnay

    Lc

    01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an ad- dress to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 3

    Ma

    remote controller Main remote controller

    Ma

    No set- tings re- quired.
  • It is not possible to con-
  • nect a pair of PAR-

    30Maau.

    Main Sub remote controller

    Ma

    Sub remote controller Settings to be made with the Sub/ Main switch 4 Outdoor unit

    Oc

    Os

    51 to 100 ŒAssign sequential address to the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit. ŒThe outdoor units are automatically des- ignated as OC and OS.(Note) ŒTo set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. ŒIf the addresses that is as- signed to the main BC con- troller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the outdoor units or to the sub BC controller, use a dif- ferent, unused address with- in the setting range. ŒThe use of a sub BC control- ler requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 5 Auxiliary outdoor unit BCcon- troller (Sub)

    Bs

    51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC control- ler (Main)

    Bc

    OC (or OS if it exists) +1

    Page 47

  • 36 -
  • [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    2-7-3 Grouped Operation of Units in Separate Refrigerant Circuits (1) Sample control wiring (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. It is not possible to connect a pair of

    Par-30Maau.

    3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different outdoor units with each other. 4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be performed only on one of the outdoor units. 5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only one of the outdoor units. 6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in par- allel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each outdoor unit.) ŒThe left table shows the number of transmission boost- ers that is required by the system with three BC control- lers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. ŒRefer to the DATABOOK for further information about how many booster units are required for a given system. (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

    L11+L12

    200m [656ft]

    L21+L22

    200m [656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control

    L31+L21

    200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 4) Maximum line distance via outdoor unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

    L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21)

    500m [1640ft]

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 01

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 03

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    07

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 1 2 04 02

    Ic

    Tb5

    Tb15

    S

    05

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Group

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 06

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Group Group Group To be left unconnected m2 m3 Interlock operation with the ventilation unit

    L12

    L22

    L11

    L21

    Oc

    Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    51

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    S

    52

    Oc

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    55

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    56

    L31

    To be left unconnected

    S

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    53

    Bc

    Tb02

    57 To be left unconnected To be connected m1 m4 m5 Number of transmission boost- er (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units When the P72 and P96 mod- els are not included in the con- nected indoor units 27 - 50 units
  • When the P72 and P96 mod-
  • els are included in the con- nected indoor units 21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

    Page 48

    [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ] 37

  • 37 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Same as 2-7-2 Shielded cable connection Same as 2-7-2 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the out- door units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS (Note a) in the same refrigerant circuit. If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper con- nector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units. a) The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automat- ically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). b) If TB7's on the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are not daisy-chained, connect the transmission line for the central control system to TB7 of the OC. (Note a).To main- tain the central control even during an OC failure or a power failure, connect TB7 on OC and OS together. (If there is a problem with the outdoor unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40, central control is not possible, even if TB7's are daisy-chained.) c) When connecting TB7, only commence after checking that the voltage is below 20 VDC. ŒOnly use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor units (OC, OS) with the shield wire of the shield- ed cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S ter- minal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as 2-7-1 Group operation of indoor units Same as 2-7-1 4) LOSSNAY connection Same as 2-7-2 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (5) Address setting method The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). Proce- dures Unit or controller Address setting range Setting method Notes Fac- tory set- ting 1 Indoor unit Main unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 ŒAssign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. ŒIn a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. ŒPort number setting is required ŒTo perform a group op- eration of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2

    Lossnay

    Lc

    01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an ad- dress to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 3

    Ma

    remote controller Main remote controller

    Ma

    No set- tings re- quired.
  • It is not possible to con-
  • nect a pair of PAR-

    30Maau.

    Main Sub remote controller

    Ma

    Sub remote controller Settings to be made with the Sub/ Main switch 4 Outdoor unit

    Oc

    Os

    51 to 100 ŒAssign sequential address to the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit. ŒThe outdoor units are automatically des- ignated as OC and OS.(Note) ŒTo set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. ŒIf the addresses that is as- signed to the main BC con- troller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the outdoor units or to the sub BC controller, use a dif- ferent, unused address with- in the setting range. ŒThe use of a sub BC control- ler requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 5 Auxiliary outdoor unit BCcon- troller (Sub)

    Bs

    51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC control- ler (Main)

    Bc

    OC (or OS if it exists) +1

    Page 49

  • 38 -
  • [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    2-7-4 System with a Connection of System Controller to Centralized Control Transmission Line (1) Sample control wiring An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the transmission cable for the centralized control system and the power is supplied from the outdoor unit (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connect- ed to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. It is not possible to connect a pair of PAR-30MAAU. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are con- nected to different outdoor units with each other. 4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be per- formed only on one of the outdoor units. 5) When the System controller is connected TB7 side and TKMU outdoor unit model is used, connect a PAC-SC51KUA to TB7 side. If a PAC- SC51KUA cannnot be used, connect the System controller to TB3 side. When YKMU outdoor unit model is used, the male power supply connec- tor can be connected to CN40, and the System controller can be connect- ed to TB7 side. 6) Short-circuit the shield terminal (S terminal) and the earth terminal ( ) on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 7) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each outdoor unit.) ŒThe left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-men- tioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. ŒRefer to the DATABOOK for further information about how many booster units are required for a given system. 8) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connec- tor on CN41 as it is (factory setting). (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Same as 2-7-3 2) Transmission line for centralized control

    L31+L32(L21)

    200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 4) Maximum line distance via outdoor unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

    L32+L31+L12(L11)

    500m [1640ft]

    L32+L22(L21)

    500m [1640ft]

    L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21)

    500m[1640ft]

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 01

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 02

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    07

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 05 04

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    08

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 03

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 06

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    m3

    L31

    System controller

    A B S

    Note1

    L32

    Oc

    To be connected m2 m1 Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW5-1 to OFF (as it is). Note2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    51

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    S

    52

    Oc

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    55

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    56 Group Group Group Group Group Interlock operation with the ventilation unit Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off

    To be left unconnected To be left unconnected To be left unconnected

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    53

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    57

    L22

    L21

    L12

    L11

    Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected in- door units 27 - 50 units
  • When the P72 and P96 models are
  • included in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

    Page 50

    [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ] 39

  • 39 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Same as 2-7-2 Only use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Same as 2-7-2 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the system controller, ter- minals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the outdoor units (OC) in dif- ferent refrigerant circuits and on the outdoor units (OC and OS) in the same refrigerant circuit. (Note b) If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper con- nector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units. If a system controller is connected, set the central control switch (SW5-1) on the control board of all outdoor units to

    "On."

    a) The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automat- ically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). b) If TB7's on the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are not daisy-chained, connect the transmission line for the central control system to TB7 of the OC. (Note a).To main- tain the central control even during an OC failure or a power failure, connect TB7 on OC and OS together. (If there is a problem with the outdoor unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40, central control is not possible, even if TB7's are daisy-chained.) c) When connecting TB7, only commence after checking that the voltage is below 20 VDC. ŒOnly use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the S terminal of the terminal block (TB7) on the system controller, OC, and OS with the shield of the shield- ed cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S ter- minal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as 2-7-1 Group operation of indoor units Same as 2-7-1 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) ŒIndoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit us- ing the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock set- ting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF re- mote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (5) Address setting method The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). Proce- dures Unit or controller Ad- dress setting range Setting method Notes Fac- tory set- ting 1 Indoor unit Main unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 ŒAssign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. ŒIn a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the fol- lowing order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. ŒPort number setting is re- quired ŒTo perform a group opera- tion of indoor units that fea- ture different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2

    Lossnay

    Lc

    01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may over- lap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 3

    Ma

    remote controller Main remote con- troller

    Ma

    No set- tings re- quired.
  • Make the same indoor unit group
  • settings with the system controller as the ones that were made with the MA remote controller. It is not possi- ble to connect a pair of PAR-

    30Maau.

    Main Sub remote con- troller

    Ma

    Sub remote controller Settings to be made with the Sub/ Main switch 4 Outdoor unit (Note)

    Oc

    Os

    51 to 100 ŒAssign sequential address to the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit. ŒThe outdoor units are automatically desig- nated as OC and OS.(Note) ŒTo set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. ŒIf the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are as- signed to the outdoor units or to the sub BC controller, use a differ- ent, unused address within the setting range. ŒThe use of a sub BC controller re- quires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 5 Auxiliary outdoor unit BCcon- troller (Sub)

    Bs

    51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC control- ler (Main)

    Bc

    OC (or OS if it exists) +1

    Page 51

  • 40 -
  • [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    2-7-5 System with a Connection of System Controller to Indoor-Outdoor Transmission Line (1) Sample control wiring (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con- nected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. It is not possible to connect a pair of PAR-30MAAU. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different outdoor units with each other. 4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be per- formed only on one of the outdoor units. 5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for transmis- sion line for centralized control (TB7) on only one of the outdoor units. 6) A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to the indoor- outdoor transmission line, with the exception that only one G(B)-50A may be connected. 7) When the total number of indoor units exceeds 20 (12 if one or more indoor units of the 72 model or above is connected), it may not be possible to connect a system controller to the indoor-outdoor trans- mission line. 8) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each outdoor unit.) ŒThe table above shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC con- troller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two ad- ditional indoor units can be connected. ŒRefer to the DATABOOK for further information about how many booster units are required for a given system. (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

    L11+L12

    200m [656ft]

    L21+L22

    200m [656ft]

    L25

    200m [656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control

    L31+L21

    200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 4) Maximum line distance via outdoor unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

    L25+L31+L12(L11)

    500m [1640ft]

    L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21)

    500m [1640ft]

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 01

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 02

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    07

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 05 04

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    08

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 03

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 06

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    A

    1

    B

    2

    Ma

    Group Group Group Group Group m3 Interlock operation with the ventilation unit

    Oc

    Connect m2 m1 Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the indoor-outdoor transmission line.

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    51

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    52

    Oc

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    55

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    56

    L31

    A B S

    L25

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    M2

    M1

    Not Connect Not Connect Not Connect CN41 CN40 Replace

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. System controller Note1

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    53

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    57

    L22

    L21

    L12

    L11

    Number of transmission boost- er (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units
  • When the P72 and P96 models are in-
  • cluded in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

    Page 52

    [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ] 41

  • 41 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor- outdoor transmission line (TB3) on the outdoor units (OC and OS) (Note a), of the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), of the ter- minal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB5) on each in- door unit (IC), and the S terminal of the system controller.(Non- polarized two-wire) ŒOnly use shielded cables. a) The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the outdoor units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC and BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the shielded cable. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmis- sion line for centralized control (TB7) on the outdoor units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the OC and OS in the same re- frigerant circuit. (Note b) If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the con- trol board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units. Set the central control switch (SW5-1) on the control board of all out- door units to "ON." b) If TB7's on the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are not daisy-chained, connect the transmission line for the central control system to TB7 of the OC. (Note a).To maintain the central control even during an OC failure or a power failure, connect TB7 on OC and OS together. (If there is a problem with the outdoor unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40, central control is not possible, even if TB7's are daisy-chained.) c) When connecting TB7, only commence after checking that the volt- age is below 20 VDC. ŒOnly use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the out- door units (OC, OS) with the shield wire of the shielded cable. Short- circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system Same as 2-7-1 Group operation of indoor units Same as 2-7-1 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the in- door units (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-po- larized two-wire) ŒIndoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone is con- nected. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (5) Address setting method The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). Proce- dures Unit or controller Address setting range Setting method Notes Facto- ry set- ting 1 Indoor unit Main unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 ŒAssign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. ŒIn a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the fol- lowing order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. ŒPort number setting is required ŒTo perform a group op- eration of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2

    Lossnay

    Lc

    01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 3

    Ma

    remote controller Main remote con- troller

    Ma

    No set- tings re- quired.
  • Make the same indoor unit
  • group settings with the system controller as the ones that were made with the MA remote controller. It is not possible to connect a pair of PAR-30MAAU. Main Sub remote con- troller

    Ma

    Sub remote controller Settings to be made with the Sub/ Main switch 4 Outdoor unit

    Oc

    Os

    51 to 100 ŒAssign sequential address to the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit. ŒThe outdoor units are automatically desig- nated as OC and OS.(Note) ŒTo set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. ŒIf the addresses that is as- signed to the main BC con- troller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the outdoor units or to the sub BC controller, use a dif- ferent, unused address with- in the setting range. ŒThe use of a sub BC control- ler requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 5 Auxiliary outdoor unit BCcon- troller (Sub)

    Bs

    51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC control- ler (Main)

    Bc

    OC (or OS if it exists) +1

    Page 53

  • 42 -
  • [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    2-7-6 System with Multiple BC Controllers (1) Sample control wiring (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con- nected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. It is not possible to connect a pair of PAR-30MAAU. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different outdoor units with each other. 4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41) must be per- formed only on one of the outdoor units. 5) Short-circuit the S (shield) terminal of the terminal block for the cen- tral control unit (TB7) and the ground terminal ( ) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40. 6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each outdoor unit.) ŒThe table above shows the number of transmission boost- ers that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above- mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be con- nected. ŒRefer to the DATABOOK for further information about how many booster units are required for a given system. 7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connec- tor on CN41 as it is (factory setting). (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

    L11+L12

    200m [656ft]

    L21+L22

    200m [656ft] 2) Transmission line for centralized control

    L31+L32(L21)

    200m [656ft] 3) MA remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length (0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16]) m1 200m [656ft] m2+m3 200m [656ft] 4) Maximum line distance via outdoor unit (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)

    L32+L31+L12(L11)

    500m [1640ft]

    L32+L22(L21)

    500m [1640ft]

    L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21)

    500m[1640ft]

    L11

    L21

    Oc

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    51

    L31

    A B S

    L32

    Os1

    Tb3

    Tb7

    M1M2

    S

    52

    Oc

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    54

    Os1

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    55

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40 Group Group Group Group Group Group Group To be left unconnected To be left unconnected To be left unconnected To be connected

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    *1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW5-1 to OFF (as it is). *2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 01

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 02

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 04

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 06

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 05 03

    L12

    L22

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 07

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 08

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 09

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 10

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Bc

    Bc

    Tb02

    S

    53 57

    Tb02

    M1M2 S

    Bs

    Tb02

    S

    Bs

    Tb02

    S

    1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 2 57 1 1 2 1 1

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    14 3 2 3 1 Numbers in the square indicate port numbers. Connection to BC controllers 56 59 Interlock operation with the ventilation unit

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 11

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 12

    A1 B2

    Ma

    61

    Bs

    Tb02

    S

    1 2

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    13 1 2 m2 m3 m1

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. System controller Note1

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units When the P72 and P96 models are not in- cluded in the connected indoor units 27 - 50 units
  • When the P72 and P96 models are includ-
  • ed in the connected indoor units 21 - 39 units 40 - 50 units

    Page 54

    [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ] 43

  • 43 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 of the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB3) on the outdoor units (OC and OS) (Note a), of the terminal block for in- door-outdoor transmission line (TB02) on the main and sub BC controllers (BC and BS), and of the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB5) on each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire) ŒOnly use shielded cables. a) The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are auto- matically designated as OC and OS in the order of ca- pacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the outdoor units (OC and OS), the S terminal of the terminal block (TB02) on the BC and BS, and the S terminal of the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield of the shielded cable. 2) Transmission line for centralized control Daisy-chain terminals A and B of the system controller, M1 and M2 terminals of TB7 (terminal block for central- ized control system connection) on the outdoor units (OC) in different refrigerant systems, and M1 and M2 ter- minals of TB7 (terminal block for centralized control sys- tem connection) on the outdoor units (OC and OS ) in the same refrigerant circuit. (Note b) If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmis- sion line for centralized control, replace the power jump- er connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units. When connecting a system controller, set the centralized control switch (SW5-1) on the control board of all indoor units to "ON." b) If TB7's on the outdoor units in the same refrigerant cir- cuit are not daisy-chained, connect the transmission line for the central control system to TB7 of the OC. (Note a).To maintain the central control even during an OC fail- ure or a power failure, connect TB7 on OC and OS to- gether. (If there is a problem with the outdoor unit whose power jumper was moved from CN41 to CN40, central control is not possible, even if TB7's are daisy-chained.) c) When connecting TB7, only commence after checking that the voltage is below 20 VDC. ŒOnly use shielded cables. Shielded cable connection Daisy-chain the S terminal of the terminal block (TB7) on the system controller, OC, and OS with the shield of the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( ) and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40. 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys- tem Same as 2-7-1 Group operation of indoor units Same as 2-7-1 4) LOSSNAY connection Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire) ŒIndoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit using the system controller. (Refer to the operation man- ual for the system controller for the setting method.) In- terlock setting from the remote controller is required if the ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone is connected. 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows.

    Page 55

  • 44 -
  • [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    (5) Address setting method The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). Pro- ce- dur es Unit or controller Address setting range Setting method Notes Fac- tory set- ting 1 Indoor unit Main unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 ŒAssign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. ŒIn a system with a sub BC controller, make the set- tings for the indoor units in the following order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC control- ler (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. ŒPort number setting is re- quired ŒTo perform a group opera- tion of indoor units that feature different functions, designate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of func- tions as the main unit. 00 Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2

    Lossnay

    Lc

    01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit ad- dresses. 00 3

    Ma

    remote control- ler Main re- mote controller

    Ma

    No set- tings re- quired.
  • Make the same indoor unit group
  • settings with the system controller as the ones that were made with the MA remote controller. It is not possible to connect a pair of PAR-30MAAU. Main Sub re- mote con- troller

    Ma

    Sub re- mote controller Settings to be made with the Sub/Main switch 4 Outdoor unit

    Oc

    Os

    51 to 100 ŒThe sum of the smallest address of the indoor units in the same system and 50. ŒAssign sequential address to the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit. ŒThe outdoor units are automatically designated as OC and OS.(Note) ŒTo set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. 00 5 Auxilia- ry out- door unit

    Bc

    controller (Sub)

    Bs

    51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. ŒTo set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. ŒIf the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller over- laps any of the addresses that are assigned to the outdoor units or to the sub BC control- ler, use a different, unused ad- dress within the setting range. ŒThe use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 BC con- troller (Main)

    Bc

    51 to 100 OC (or OS if it exists) +1

    Page 56

    [2-7 Example System with an MA Remote Controller ] 45

  • 45 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions

    Page 57

  • 46 -
  • [2-8 Example System with an ME Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    2-8 Example System with an ME Remote Controller 2-8-1 System with a Connection of System Controller to Centralized Control Transmission Line (1) Sample control wiring (2) Cautions 1) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. 2) No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different outdoor units with each other. 4) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units. 5) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized control on only one of the out- door units. 6) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in par- allel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each outdoor unit.) ŒThe left table shows the number of transmission boosters that is required by the system with three BC controllers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-men- tioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. ŒRefer to the DATABOOK for further information about how many booster units are required for a given system. 7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connec- tor on CN41 as it is (factory setting). (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Same as 2-7-3 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as 2-7-4 3) ME remote controller wiring Maximum overall line length (0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16]) m1 10m [32ft] m2+m3 10m [32ft] If the standard-supplied cable must be extended, use a cable with a diameter of 1.25mm2 [AWG16]. The section of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in the maximum indoor-outdoor transmission line distance described in (1). When connected to the terminal block on the Simple re- mote controller, use cables that meet the following cable size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-16]. 4) Maximum line distance via outdoor unit (1.25 mm2 [AWG16] or large) Same as 2-7-4

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 01

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 02

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    07

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 05 04

    Lc

    Tb5

    S

    08

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 03

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 06

    A1 B2

    Rc

    101

    A1 B2

    Rc

    102

    A1 B2

    Rc

    103 Group Group Group Group Group To be connected

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    L31

    A B S

    L32

    Oc

    m1

    Tb3

    Tb7

    M1 M2S

    51

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    S

    52

    Oc

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    55

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    56 To be left unconnected Interlock operation with the ventilation unit *1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW5-1 to OFF (as it is). *2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V. System controller Note1

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    To be left unconnected To be left unconnected 104

    A1 B2

    Rc

    154

    A1 B2

    Rc

    m3 106

    A1 B2

    Rc

    m2

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    53

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    57

    L12

    L11

    L22

    L21

    M1M2

    M1M2

    Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units 3 units When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 15 - 34 units 35 - 50 units
  • When the P72 and P96 models are in-
  • cluded in the connected indoor units 11 - 26 units 27 - 42 units 43 - 50 units

    Page 58

    [2-8 Example System with an ME Remote Controller ] 47

  • 47 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Same as 2-7-2 Shielded cable connection Same as 2-7-2 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as 2-7-4 Shielded cable connection Same as 2-7-4 3) ME remote controller wiring ME remote controller is connectable anywhere on the in- door-outdoor transmission line. When 2 remote controllers are connected to the sys- tem Refer to the section on Switch Setting. Performing a group operation (including the group operation of units in different refrigerant circuits). Refer to the section on Switch Setting. 4) LOSSNAY connection Same as 2-7-4 5) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows. (5) Address setting method The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). Proce- dures Unit or controller Ad- dress setting range Setting method Notes Fac- tory set- ting 1 Indoor unit Main unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 ŒAssign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. ŒIn a system with a sub BC controller, make the settings for the indoor units in the fol- lowing order. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. ŒPort number setting is required ŒTo perform a group op- eration of indoor units that have different func- tions, set the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. 00 Sub unit Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.) 2

    Lossnay

    Lc

    01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 3

    Me

    remote controller Main remote con- troller

    Rc

    101 to 150 Add 100 to the main unit address in the group ŒIt is not necessary to set the 100s digit. ŒTo set the address to 200, set the rotary switches to 00. 101 Sub remote con- troller

    Rc

    151 to 200 Add 150 to the main unit address in the group 4 Outdoor unit

    Oc

    Os

    51 to 100 ŒAssign sequential address to the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit. ŒThe outdoor units are automatically desig- nated as OC and OS.(Note) ŒTo set the address to 100, set the rotary switches to 50. ŒIf the addresses that is as- signed to the main BC con- troller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the outdoor units or to the sub BC controller, use a dif- ferent, unused address with- in the setting range. ŒThe use of a sub BC control- ler requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 5 Auxiliary outdoor unit BCcon- troller (Sub)

    Bs

    51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC control- ler (Main)

    Bc

    OC (or OS if it exists) +1

    Page 59

  • 48 -
  • [2-9 Example System with an MA and an ME Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    2-9 Example System with an MA and an ME Remote Controller 2-9-1 System with a Connection of System Controller to Centralized Control Transmission Line (1) Sample control wiring (2) Cautions 1) Be sure to connect a system controller. 2) ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be con- nected to the same group of indoor units. 3) Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote controller ad- dresses that are smaller than those of the indoor units that are con- nected to the ME remote controller. 4) No more than 2 ME remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. 5) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units. It is not possible to connect a pair of PAR-30MAAU. 6) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor units that are connected to different outdoor units with each other. 7) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units. 8) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on the terminal block for centralized control on only one of the outdoor units. 9) When the number of the connected indoor units is as shown in the table below, one or more transmission boosters (sold separately) are required. To connect two transmission boosters, connect them in parallel. (Observe the maximum number of connectable indoor units that are listed in the specifications for each outdoor unit.) ŒThe left table shows the number of transmission boost- ers that is required by the system with three BC control- lers. For each BC controller that is subtracted from the above-mentioned system, two additional indoor units can be connected. ŒRefer to the DATABOOK for further information about how many booster units are required for a given system. 10) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmis- sion line for centralized control, leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 01

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 02

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 06 106

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 05

    A1 B2

    Ma

    A1 B2

    Rc

    A1 B2

    Ma

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    1 2

    Tb15

    Ic

    Tb5

    S

    Tb15

    1 2 04 03 104

    A1 B2

    Rc

    Oc

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    51

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    52

    Oc

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    54

    Os

    Tb3

    Tb7

    S

    55

    L31

    A B S

    L32

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is. To be left unconnected To be left unconnected To be left unconnected To be connected System controller Note1 *1 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW5-1 to OFF (as it is). *2 LM adapters require the power supply capacity of single-phase AC 208 - 230V.

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    M1 M2

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    53

    S

    Bc

    Tb02

    56

    L22

    L21

    L12

    L11

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Leave the male connector on CN41 as it is.

    Sw5-1 Off On

    Move the male connector from CN41 to CN40. Group Group Group Group

    M1M2

    Number of transmission booster (sold separately) required 1 unit 2 units 3 units When the P72 and P96 models are not included in the connected indoor units 15 - 34 units 35 - 50 units
  • When the P72and P96 models
  • are included in the connected in- door units 11 - 26 units 27 - 42 units 43 - 50 units

    Page 60

    [2-9 Example System with an MA and an ME Remote Controller ] 49

  • 49 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (3) Maximum allowable length 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Same as 2-7-3 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as 2-7-4 3) MA remote controller wiring Same as 2-7-1 4) ME remote controller wiring Same as 2-8 5) Maximum line distance via outdoor unit (1.25 mm2 [AWG16] or larger) Same as 2-7-4 (4) Wiring method 1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line Same as 2-7-2 Shielded cable connection Same as 2-7-2 2) Transmission line for centralized control Same as 2-7-4 Shielded cable connection Same as 2-7-4 3) MA remote controller wiring (When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system) (Group operation of indoor units) Same as 2-7-1 4) ME remote controller wiring (When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system) (Group operation of indoor units) Same as 2-8 5) LOSSNAY connection Same as 2-7-4 6) Switch setting Address setting is required as follows.

    Page 61

  • 50 -
  • [2-9 Example System with an MA and an ME Remote Controller ]

    Gb

    Hwe13080

    (5) Address setting method The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC and OS. They are designated as OC and OS in the descending order of capacity (ascending order of address if the capacities are the same). Pro- ce- dure s Unit or controller Ad- dress set- ting range Setting method Notes Facto- ry set- ting 1 Opera- tion with the MA re- mote controller In- door unit Main unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 ŒAssign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. ŒIn a system with a sub BC con- troller, make the settings for the indoor units in the following or- der. (i) Indoor unit to be connected to the main BC controller (ii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 1 (iii) Indoor unit to be connected to sub BC controller 2 Make the settings for the indoor units in the way that the formula "(i) < (ii) < (iii)" is true. ŒAssign an address smaller than that of the indoor unit that is connected to the ME remote controller. ŒEnter the same indoor unit group set- tings on the system controller as the ones that were entered on the MA re- mote controller. ŒTo perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, des- ignate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. ŒPort number setting is required. 00 Sub unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 Assign sequential numbers start- ing with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

    Ma

    re- mote con- troller Main re- mote control- ler

    Ma

    No set- tings re- quired.
  • It is not possible to connect a pair
  • of PAR-30MAAU. Main Sub remote control- ler

    Ma

    Sub remote control- ler Settings to be made according to the remote controller func- tion selection 2 Opera- tion with the ME re- mote controller In- door unit Main unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the group. ŒAssign an address higher than those of the indoor units that are connected to the MA remote controller. ŒMake the initial settings for the indoor unit group settings via the system con- troller. ŒTo perform a group operation of indoor units that have different functions, des- ignate the indoor unit in the group with the greatest number of functions as the main unit. ŒPort number setting is required. ŒAddresses that are assigned to the in- door units that are connected to the sub BC controller should be higher than the addresses that are assigned to the in- door units that are connected to the main BC controller. 00 Sub unit

    Ic

    01 to 50 Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in the same group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

    Me

    re- mote con- troller Main re- mote control- ler

    Rc

    101 to 150 Add 100 to the main unit ad- dress in the group. ŒIt is not necessary to set the 100s digit. ŒTo set the address to 200, set it to
  • 101
  • Sub remote control- ler

    Rc

    151 to 200 Add 150 to the main unit ad- dress in the group. 3

    Lossnay

    Lc

    01 to 50 Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of these units after assigning an address to all indoor units. None of these addresses may over- lap any of the indoor unit addresses. 00 4 Outdoor unit

    Oc

    Os

    51 to 100 ŒAssign sequential address to the outdoor units in the same refrig- erant circuit. ŒThe outdoor units are automati- cally designated as OC and OS.(Note) ŒTo set the address to 100, set it to 50. ŒIf the addresses that is assigned to the main BC controller overlaps any of the addresses that are assigned to the out- door units or to the sub BC controller, use a different, unused address within the setting range. ŒThe use of a sub BC controller requires the connection of a main BC controller. 00 5 Auxiliary outdoor unit BCcontroller (Sub)

    Bs

    51 to 100 Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest address of the indoor units that are connected to the sub BC controller and 50. BC controller (Main)

    Bc

    OC (or OS if it exists) +1

    Page 62

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 51 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions 2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes 2-10-1 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipe Length (1) System that requires 16 BC controller ports or fewer 1) To connect the P72 through P96 models of indoor units, use an optional twinning pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two ports before connecting them. 2) Do not connect the P72 or P96 models of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port. 3) Note the following when connecting multiple indoor units to a single port. ŒThose indoor units connected to the same port must be installed in the same room. ŒSet the indoor temperature via the connected remote controller, and when connecting multiple remote controllers, configure these controllers as a group by making appropriate settings. These indoor units can only be operated in the same mode. a b

    H

    H'

    h1

    A

    h2 Outdoor unit BC controller Reducer (P06 - P18 models) (Supplied with the BC Controller)

    B

    d c Junction pipe

    (Cmy-R160-J)

    *Use a main BC controller when connecting the outdoor units of P144 model or above. Branch joint

    (Cmy-Y102S-G2)

    Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor (P06 - P54 models) (P72 - P96 models) Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below Unit: m [ft] Operation Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes Length Total pipe length A+B+a+b+c+d Refer to the restrictions on the total piping length in the graph on the next page. Total pipe length from the outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit A+B+d 165 [541] or less (Equivalent length 190 [623] or less) Between outdoor unit and BC control- ler

    A

    110 [360] or less Between BC controller and indoor unit B+d 40 [131] or less*1 Height difference Between indoor and outdoor units Outdoor unit above indoor unit

    H

    50 [164] or less Outdoor unit be- low indoor unit

    H'

    40 [131] or less Between indoor unit and BC controller h1 15[49](10[32]) or less*2 Between indoor units h2 15[49](10[32]) or less *2 *1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below. (Except the P96 models) *2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference.

    Page 63

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 52 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 5 10 15 Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units [32] [16] [32] [49] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229]

    Page 64

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 53 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (2) System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers Unit: m [ft] Operation Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes Length Total pipe length A+B+C+D+E+a+b+c+d+e+f Refer to the restrictions on the total pip- ing length in the graphon the next page. Total pipe length from the out- door unit to the farthest indoor unit A+C+E+f 165 [541] or less (Equivalent length 190 [623] or less) Between outdoor unit and BC controller

    A

    110 [360] or less Between BC controller and in- door unit B+d or C+D+e or C+E+f 40 [131] or less*1 *1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below. (Except the P96 models) Height differ- ence Between indoor and outdoor units Outdoor unit above in- door unit

    H

    50 [164] or less Outdoor unit below in- door unit

    H'

    40 [131] or less Between indoor unit and BC controller h1 15 [49](10[32]) or less*2 *2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference. Between indoor units h2 15 [49](10[32]) or less *2 Between the BC controller (main or sub) and the sub BC controller h3 15 [49] or less Branch joint

    (Cmy-Y202-G2)

    (Cmy-Y102L-G2)

    (Cmy-Y102S-G2)

    Branch joint

    (Cmy-Y102S-G2)

    a

    C

    b

    H

    H'

    h1 h1

    B

    c d f h3

    D

    E

    A

    e h1 h2 Outdoor unit BC controller (main) BC controller (sub) BC controller (sub) Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Reducer (P06 - P18 models) (Supplied with the BC Controller) (P06 - P54 models) (P72 - P96 models) Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below Junction pipe

    (Cmy-R160-J)

    Page 65

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 54 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1) A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers (main and sub), and three pipes will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers. 2) When connecting two sub BC controllers, observe the maximum allowable length in the table above. 3) When connecting two sub BC controllers, install them in parallel. 4) To connect the P72 through P96 models of indoor units, use an optional twinning pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two ports before connecting them. 5) Do not connect the P72 or P96 models of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port. 6) Note the following when connecting multiple indoor units to a single port. ŒThose indoor units connected to the same port must be installed in the same room. ŒSet the indoor temperature via the connected remote controller, and when connecting multiple remote controllers, configure these controllers as a group by making appropriate settings. These indoor units can only be operated in the same mode. 7) The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to the CMB-P-NU-GB types of sub BC controllers is P126 or below (when two GB type controllers are connected P126 or below for both combined). The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB-P1016NU-HB is P126 or below. If at least one CMB-P1016NU-HB unit is connected, the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with two sub controllers is P168 or below. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 5 10 15 Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units [32] [16] [32] [49] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229]

    Page 66

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 55 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (3) System that requires more than 16 BC controller ports or with multiple BC controllers Unit: m [ft] Operation Pipe sections Allowable length of pipes Length Total pipe length F+G+A+B+C+D+E+a+b+c+d+e +f Refer to the restrictions on the total pip- ing length in the graph on the next page. Total pipe length from the out- door unit to the farthest indoor unit F(G)+A+C+E+f 165 [541] or less (Equivalent length 190 [623] or less) Between outdoor unit and BC controller

    F(G)+A

    110 [360] or less Between BC controller and in- door unit B+d or C+D+e or C+E+f 40 [131] or less*1 *1. When the overall pipe length between the BC controller and the farthest indoor unit exceeds 40m [131ft], observe the restrictions in the figure titled "Restrictions on pipe length" below. (Except the P96 models) Between indoor units

    F+G

    5 [16] or less Height differ- ence Between indoor and outdoor units Outdoor unit above in- door unit

    H

    50 [164] or less Outdoor unit below in- door unit

    H'

    40 [131] or less Between indoor unit and BC controller h1 15 [49](10[32]) or less*2 *2. When the capacity of the connected indoor units is P72 or above, use the figures in the parentheses as a reference. Between indoor units h2 15 [49](10[32]) or less *2 Between the BC controller (main or sub) and the sub BC controller h3 15 [49] or less Between outdoor units h4 0.1 [0.3] or less h1 h3 h1 h2 f

    D

    E

    e Branch joint (CMY-R100CBK2) The distributor on the low-pressure side must be placed in the outdoor unit that has a larger capacity index of the two, regardless of the relative positions of the outdoor units or their addresses. If the distributor is placed in the outdoor unit that has a smaller capacity, refrigerant will not be properly distributed and compressor failure may result. (If outdoor units that have the same capacity are used in combination, the distributor can be placed in either outdoor unit.) a

    C

    b

    B

    c d

    A

    G

    F

    h4 Outdoor unit 1 Outdoor unit 2

    H

    H'

    h1 BC controller (main) Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor BC controller (sub) BC controller (sub) Branch joint

    (Cmy-Y202-G2)

    (Cmy-Y102L-G2)

    (Cmy-Y102S-G2)

    Branch joint

    (Cmy-Y102S-G2)

    (P06 - P54 models) (P72 - P96 models) Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below Reducer (P06 - P18 models) (Supplied with the BC Controller) Junction pipe

    (Cmy-R160-J)

    Page 67

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 56 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1) A system that requires more than 16 BC controller ports requires two or three BC controllers (main and sub), and three pipes will be used between the main and the sub BC controllers. 2) When connecting two sub BC controllers, observe the maximum allowable length in the table above. 3) When connecting two sub BC controllers, install them in parallel. 4) To connect the P72 through P96 models of indoor units, use an optional twinning pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) and merge the two ports before connecting them. 5) Do not connect the P72 or P96 models of indoor units and other models of indoor units at the same port. 6) Note the following when connecting multiple indoor units to a single port. ŒThose indoor units connected to the same port must be installed in the same room. ŒSet the indoor temperature via the connected remote controller, and when connecting multiple remote controllers, configure these controllers as a group by making appropriate settings. These indoor units can only be operated in the same mode. 7) The maximum capacity of the indoor units that is connectable to the CMB-P-NU-GB types of sub BC controllers is P126 or below (when two GB type controllers are connected P126 or below for both combined) . The maximum total capacity of indoor units that is connectable to the sub BC controller CMB-P1016NU-HB is P126 or below. If at least one CMB-P1016NU-HB unit is connected, the maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units to a system with two sub controllers is P168 or below. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 5 10 15

    [Pury-Hp192Tskmu-A-H]

    [Pury-Hp192Yskmu-A]

    The height difference and the pipe length between BC controller and indoor units Restrictions on pipe length Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft]) Pipe length between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) Height difference between main BC controller and farthest indoor unit (m[ft]) [32] [16] [32] [49] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] 110 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Pipe length between outdoor unit and BC controller (m[ft]) [32] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360] [3280] [2952] [2624] [2296] [1968] [1640] [1312] [984] [656] 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft]) Pipe length between outdoor unit and BC controller (m[ft]) [32] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360] [3280] [2952] [2624] [2296] [1968] [1640] [1312] [984] [656] 1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 Aggregate length of all pipes(m[ft]) Pipe length between outdoor unit and BC controller (m[ft]) [32] [64] [98] [131] [164] [196] [229] [262] [295] [328] [360] [3280] [2952] [2624] [2296] [1968] [1640] [1312] [984] [656]

    [Pury-Hp72, P96Tkmu-A-H]

    [Pury-Hp72, P96Ykmu-A]

    [Pury-Hp144Tskmu-A-H]

    [Pury-Hp144Yskmu-A]

    Page 68

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 57 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions 2-10-2 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipe Size (1) Between outdoor unit and the first twinning pipe (Part A) (2) Between BC controller and indoor unit (Sections a, b, c, d, e, and f ) (3) Between the main and sub BC controllers (Section C) Select the proper size pipes for the main unit based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to both sub BC controllers. Select the proper size pipes for the sub controller side based on the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to the sub controller. Unit : mm [inch] Outdoor units Refrigerant pipe size Connection to outdoor unit and BC controller Low-pressure pipe High-pressure pipe Low-pressure pipe High-pressure pipe 72 ø19.05 [3/4"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø15.88 [5/8"] 96 ø22.2 [7/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø22.2 [7/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"] 144 ø28.58 [1-1/8"] ø22.2[7/8"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] 192 Unit : mm [inch] Indoor unit Refrigerant pipe size Indoor unit connection (Flare connection for all models) Liquid pipe Gas pipe Liquid pipe Gas pipe

    P06, P08, P12, P15, P18

    ø6.35 [1/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø6.35 [1/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"]

    P24, P27, P30

    ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

    P36, P48, P54

    P72

    ø12.7 [1/2"] ø19.05 [3/4"] ø12.7 [1/2"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

    P96

    ø22.2 [7/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] Unit : mm [inch] Indoor unit Refrigerant pipe size (Brazed connection on all models ) Liquid pipe High-pressure gas pipe Low-pressure gas pipe

    - P72

    ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

    P73 - P108

    ø19.05 [3/4"] ø22.2 [7/8"]

    P109 - P126

    ø12.7 [1/2"] ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

    P127 - P144

    ø22.2 [7/8"]

    P145 - P168

    ø15.88 [5/8"]

    Page 69

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 58 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2-10-3 BC Controller Connection Method (1) Size of the pipe that fits the standard BC controller ports HP72 - HP96 models
  • BC controllers can only be connected to HP72 - HP96 models of outdoor units.
  • Unit : mm [inch] Operation Pipe sections High-pressure side (gas) Low-pressure side (gas) Outdoor unit side

    Pury-Hp72Tkmu-A-H

    Pury-Hp72Ykmu-A

    ø15.88 [5/8"] (Brazed connection) ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection)

    Pury-Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    Pury-Hp96Ykmu-A

    ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection) Indoor unit side ø9.52 [3/8"] (Flare connection) ø15.88 [5/8"] (Flare connection) Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor BC controller Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below (All units connected to the same port must be in the same operating mode.) Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)

    (Optional accessory) *2 Junction pipe kit (Model name:

    Cmy-R160-J)

    (Optional accessory) P18 model or below P24 - P54 models P72 - P96 models The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24 - P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor units, follow the procedure below. 3*

    A

    B

    *1 Reducer (Standard supplied parts) To outdoor unit Connection: Brazed connection

    Page 70

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 59 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions 1) To connect P06 - P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller. 2) To connect P72 - P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units exceeds P55), use a junction pipe kit and merge the two nozzles. 3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe) ŒMaximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below) ŒMaximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units ŒBranch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory). ŒRefrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes A and B in the previous page) : Select the proper size pipes based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference. Unit : mm [inch] Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

    P55 - P72

    ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

    P73 - P96

    ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] Liquid pipe side: 6.35[1/4"]ID Gas pipe side: 12.7[1/2"]ID Liquid pipe side:3/8F (Flare connection) Gas pipe side:5/8F (Flare connection) Note) Use the flare nut that is supplied with the BC controller. 50 [1-31/32"] Liquid pipe side: 9.52[3/8”]ID Gas pipe side: 19.05[3/4”]ID(*1) 234 [9-7/32"] Supplied with a thermal insulation cover Liquid pipe side:3/8F (Flare connection) Gas pipe side:5/8F (Flare connection)

    Page 71

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 60 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (2) Size of the pipe that fits the main BC controller ports HP72 - HP192 models The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24 - P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor units, follow the procedure below. 1) To connect P06 - P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller. 2) To connect the P72 through P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units is P55 or above), use an optional twinning pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) to merge two ports before connecting them. 3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe) ŒMaximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below) ŒMaximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units ŒBranch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory). ŒRefrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference. Unit : mm [inch] Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

    P55 - P72

    ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

    P73 - P96

    ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] Unit : mm [inch] Operation Pipe sections High pressure side (Liquid) Low-pressure side (Gas) Outdoor unit side

    Pury-Hp72Tkmu-A-H

    Pury-Hp72Ykmu-A

    ø15.88 [5/8"] (Brazed connection) ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection)

    Pury-Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    Pury-Hp96Ykmu-A

    ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection)

    Pury-Hp144Tskmu-A-H

    Pury-Hp144Yskmu-A

    ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection) ø28.58 [1-1/8"] (Brazed connection)

    Pury-Hp192Tskmu-A-H

    Pury-Hp192Yskmu-A

    Indoor unit side ø9.52 [3/8"] (Flare connection) ø15.88 [5/8"] (Flare connection)

    A

    B

    Indoor Indoor Indoor P18 model or below P24 - P54 models P72 - P96 models *2 Junction pipe kit (Model name:CMY-R160-J) (Optional accessory) BC controller (main) To outdoor unit Connection: Brazed connection *1 Reducer (Standard supplied parts) Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below (All units connected to the same port must be in the same operating mode.) 3* Indoor Indoor Indoor Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)

    (Optional accessory)

    Page 72

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 61 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2 Restrictions (3) Size of the pipe that fits the sub BC controller ports The ports of the BC controller accommodates the pipes on P24 - P54 models of indoor units. To connect other types of indoor units, follow the procedure below. 1) To connect P06 - P18 models of indoor units use the reducer that is supplied with the BC controller. 2) To connect the P72 through P96 models of indoor units (or when the total capacity of indoor units is P55 or above), use an optional twinning pipe kit (Model: CMY-R160-J) to merge two ports before connecting them. 3) To connect multiple indoor units to a port (or to a junction pipe) ŒMaximum total capacity of connected indoor units: P54 or below (in a system with a junction pipe: P96 or below) ŒMaximum number of connectable indoor units: 3 units ŒBranch joint: Use CMY-Y102S-G2 (optional accessory). ŒRefrigerant pipe selection (size of the pipes in sections A and B in the figure above): Select the proper based on the total capacity of the downstream indoor units, using the table below as a reference. Unit : mm [inch] Total capacity of indoor units Liquid pipe Gas pipe P54 or below ø9.52 [3/8"] ø15.88 [5/8"]

    P55 - P72

    ø9.52 [3/8"] ø19.05 [3/4"]

    P73 - P96

    ø9.52 [3/8"] ø22.2 [7/8"] Unit : mm [inch] Operation Pipe sections High-pressure side (liquid) Low-pressure side (gas) Liquid pipe side Total capacity of the in- door units that are con- nected to the BC controller On the BC controller side P72 model or below ø15.88 [5/8"] (Brazed connection) ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) ø9.52 [3/8"] (Brazed connection)

    P73 - P108

    ø19.05 [3/4"] (Brazed connection) ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection)

    P109 - P126

    ø28.58 [1-1/8"] (Brazed connection) ø12.7 [1/2"] (Brazed connection)

    P127 - P144

    ø22.2 [7/8"] (Brazed connection)

    P145 - P168

    ø15.88 [5/8"] (Brazed connection)

    A

    B

    Indoor Indoor Indoor P18 model or below P24 - P54 models P72 - P96 models *2 Junction pipe kit (Model name:

    Cmy-R160-J)

    (Optional accessory) BC controller (sub) To Main BC controller Connection: Brazed connection *1 Reducer (Standard supplied parts) Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below (All units connected to the same port must be in the same operating mode.) 3* Indoor Indoor Indoor Branch joint (Model name:CMY-Y102S-G2)

    (Optional accessory)

    Page 73

    [2-10 Restrictions on Refrigerant Pipes ]

  • 62 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 74

  • 63 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 3-1 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of Outdoor Unit................................ 65 3-1-1 External Appearance of Outdoor Unit................................................................................................... 65 3-1-2 Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Circuits.......................................................................................................... 66 3-2 Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams...................................................................................... 67 3-3 Functions of the Major Components of Outdoor Unit..................................................................... 69 3-4 Functions of the Major Components of Indoor Unit........................................................................ 72 3-5 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of BC Controller .............................. 73 3-6 BC Controller Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams..................................................................................... 76 3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller.................................................................... 79

    Page 75

  • 64 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 76

    [3-1 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of Outdoor Unit ]

  • 65 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 3-1 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of Outdoor Unit 3-1-1 External Appearance of Outdoor Unit

    (1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    Fan guard Fan guard Fan Fan Control box Control box Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Relay box (TKMU-A-H only) Relay box (TKMU-A-H only) Front panels Front panels Fin guard Fin guard Side panels Side panels Side panels Side panels

    Page 77

    [3-1 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of Outdoor Unit ]

  • 66 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3-1-2 Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Circuits

    (1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    Check valve (CV5a) Check valve (CV7a) Check valve (CV3a) Check valve (CV9a) Check valve (CV8a) Check valve (CV2a) Check valve (CV4a) Check valve (CV6a) 4-way valve (21S4a) Solenoid valve (SV9) Solenoid valve (SV10) Solenoid valve (SV11) Solenoid valve (SV5b) Solenoid valve (SV1a) Low-pressure sensor (63LS) High-pressure switch

    (63H1)

    High-pressure sensor

    (63Hs1)

    Transformer box (YKMU-A only) Accumulator Compressor cover Compressor Oil separator High-pressure check joint Low-pressure check joint Base heater (TKMU-A-H only)

    Lev4

    LEV5a Refrigerant service valve on the low pressure side Refrigerant service valve on the high pressure side

    Page 78

    [3-2 Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams ]

  • 67 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 3-2 Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams

    (1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H(-Bs)

    Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A(-Bs)

    Solenoid valve block

    Th4

    Cj2

    Bv2

    Comp

    21S4a

    St1

    63Ls

    Bv1

    CV8a CV6a

    Th7

    SV4a SV4b SV4d

    Acc

    St6

    St7

    St17

    Th5

    Th6

    CV9a

    Th9

    Th11

    Sv9

    Sv10

    Sv11

    CV4a CV2a CV7a CV3a CV5a

    Cj1

    SV5b

    Hex

    St18

    63Hs1

    63H1

    St3

    Cp1

    SV1a LEV5a

    Lev4

    *1 *1

    Cp3

    Cp2

    Cp4

    Cp5

    O/S

    Page 79

    [3-2 Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams ]

  • 68 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (2) Pury-Hp144, Hp192Tskmu-A-H(-Bs)

    Pury-Hp144, Hp192Yskmu-A(-Bs)

    *1 Low-pressure side distributor High-pressure side junction pipe Solenoid valve block Solenoid valve block

    O/S

    Th4

    Cj2

    Bv2

    Comp

    21S4a

    St1

    63Ls

    Bv1

    CV8a CV6a

    Th7

    SV4a SV4b SV4d

    Acc

    St6

    St7

    St17

    Th5

    Th6

    CV9a

    Th9

    Th11

    Sv9

    Sv10

    Sv11

    CV4a CV2a CV7a CV3a CV5a

    Cj1

    SV5b

    Hex

    St18

    63Hs1

    63H1

    St3

    Cp1

    SV1a LEV5a

    Lev4

    *1

    Cp3

    Cp2

    Cp4

    Cp5

    O/S

    Th4

    Cj2

    Bv2

    Comp

    21S4a

    St1

    63Ls

    Bv1

    CV8a CV6a

    Th7

    SV4a SV4b SV4d

    Acc

    St6

    St7

    St17

    Th5

    Th6

    CV9a

    Th9

    Th11

    Sv9

    Sv10

    Sv11

    CV4a CV2a CV7a CV3a CV5a

    Cj1

    SV5b

    Hex

    St18

    63Hs1

    63H1

    St3

    Cp1

    SV1a LEV5a

    Lev4

    *1 *1

    Cp3

    Cp2

    Cp4

    Cp5

    Page 80

    [3-3 Functions of the Major Components of Outdoor Unit ]

  • 69 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 3-3 Functions of the Major Components of Outdoor Unit Part name Symbols (functions) Notes Usage Specifications Check method Com- pressor

    Mc1

    (Comp1) Adjusts the amount of circulating refrigerant by adjusting the operat- ing frequency based on the oper- ating pressure data HP72, HP96 models Low-pressure shell scroll compressor Wirewound resistance

    20°C[68°F] :

    0.092ohm (TKMU) 0.323ohm (YKMU) High pressure sensor

    63Hs1

    1) Detects high pressure 2) Regulates frequency and pro- vides high-pressure protec- tion Low pressure sensor

    63Ls

    1) Detects low pressure 2) Provides low-pressure pro- tection Pres- sure switch

    63H1

    1) Detects high pressure 2) Provides high-pressure pro- tection 4.15MPa[601psi] OFF set- ting Power supply trans- former Trans former

    Ykmu

    only Decreases the power supply volt- age (460V) supplied to the circuit board Primary rated voltage: 460V, 50/60Hz Secondary rated voltage:

    229V

    (No-load voltage) Thermis- tor

    Th4

    (Discharge) 1) Detects discharge air temper- ature 2) Provides high-pressure pro- tection Degrees Celsius Resistance check 0°C[32°F] :698kohm 10°C[50°F] :413kohm 20°C[68°F] :250kohm 30°C[86°F] :160kohm 40°C[104°F] :104kohm 50°C[122°F] : 70kohm 60°C[140°F] : 48kohm 70°C[158°F] : 34kohm 80°C[176°F] : 24kohm 90°C[194°F] :17.5kohm 100°C[212°F] :13.0kohm 110°C[230°F] : 9.8kohm Pressure 0~4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69 Pressure [psi] =(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) Con- nector

    63Hs1

    1 1 2 3 2 3 Pressure 0~1.7 MPa [247psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.173V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283 Pressure [psi] =(0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283) x 145 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) Con- nector

    63Ls

    1 1 2 3 2 3 R = 7.465k 120

    R = 4057

    R =

    7.465 25/120 t 4057 273 t 1 393 1 exp

    Page 81

    [3-3 Functions of the Major Components of Outdoor Unit ]

  • 70 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Thermis- tor

    Th7

    (Outdoor tem- perature) 1) Detects outdoor air tempera- ture 2) Controls fan operation Degrees Celsius 0°C[32°F] :15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm Resistance check

    Th5

    Fan operated on the 63LS and TH5 values.

    Th6

    Controls defrosting during heating operation

    Th9

    (Pipe temperature)

    Th11

    (Pipe temperature)

    Thhs

    Inverter heat sink tem- perature Controls inverter cooling fan based on THHS temperature Degrees Celsius 0°C[32°F] :161kohm 10°C[50°F] :97kohm 20°C[68°F] :60kohm 25°C[77°F] :48kohm 30°C[86°F] :39kohm 40°C[104°F] :25kohm

    Thbox

    Control box internal tem- perature de- tection Solenoid valve SV1a Discharge- suction bypass 1) High/low pressure bypass at start-up and stopping, and capacity control during low- load operation 2) High-pressure-rise preven- tion

    Ac208 - 230V

    Open while being powered/ closed while not being pow- ered Continuity check with a tester SV4a - SV4d Heat exchanger capacity con- trol Controls outdoor unit heat ex- changer capacity SV5b Heat exchanger capacity con- trol Prevents high-pressure-rise Controls defrost cycle

    Ac208 - 230V

    Closed while being powered/ open while not being pow- ered

    Sv9

    High-pressure-rise prevention

    Ac208 - 230V

    Open while being powered/ closed while not being pow- ered

    Sv10

    ON-defrost control

    Ac208 - 230V

    Open while being powered/ closed while not being pow- ered

    Sv11

    Lev

    Lev4

    Injection amount control

    Dc12V

    Opening of stepping motor driving valve 0-3000 pulses Refer to the section "Continuity Test with a Tester". Continuity between white and orange. Continuity between yellow, brown, and blue. LEV5a Evaporating temperature control Part name Symbols (functions) Notes Usage Specifications Check method R = 15k 0

    R = 3460

    R = 15

    0/80 t 3460 273 t 1 273 1 exp R = 17k 50

    R = 4016

    R = 17

    25/120 t 4016 273 t 1 323 1 exp Yellow White Orange Brown Blue

    M

    Page 82

    [3-3 Functions of the Major Components of Outdoor Unit ]

  • 71 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 4-way valve 21S4a Changeover between heating and cooling

    Ac208-230V

    Dead: cooling cycle Live: heating cycle Continuity check with a tester Fan mo- tor FAN motor Regulates the heat exchanger ca- pacity by adjusting the operating frequency and operating the pro- peller fan based on the operating pressure.

    (Tkmu)

    Ac200-230V, 920W

    (Ykmu)

    Ac380-460V, 920W

    Part name Symbols (functions) Notes Usage Specifications Check method

    Page 83

    [3-4 Functions of the Major Components of Indoor Unit ]

  • 72 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3-4 Functions of the Major Components of Indoor Unit Part Name Symbol (functions) Notes Usage Specification Check method Linear expan- sion valve

    Lev

    1) Adjusts superheat at the indoor heat exchanger outlet during cooling 2) Adjusts subcool at the heat exchanger outlet of the indoor unit during cooling

    Dc12V

    Opening of stepping motor driving valve 0-(1800) pulses Refer to the section "Continuity Test with a Tester". Continuity between white, red, and or- ange. Continuity between yellow, brown, and blue. Thermis- tor

    Th1

    (Suction air tem- perature) Indoor unit control (Thermo) 0°C [32°F]:15 kΩ 10°C [50°F] :9.7 kΩ 20°C [68°F]:6.4 kΩ 25°C [77°F] :5.3 kΩ 30°C [86°F] :4.3 kΩ 40°C [104°F] :3.1 kΩ Resistance check

    Th2

    (Pipe tempera- ture) 1) Indoor unit control (Frost prevention, Hot adjust) 2) LEV control during heat- ing operation (subcool detection).

    Th3

    (Gas pipe tem- perature) LEV control during cooling op- eration (superheat detection)

    Th4

    (Outdoor air temperature) Indoor unit control (Thermo) Temperature sensor (Indoor air temperature) Indoor unit control (Thermo) Yellow White Red Orange Brown Blue

    M

    1 273+t R0=15k

    R0/80=3460

    Rt = 15exp{3460( - )} 1 273

    Page 84

    [3-5 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of BC Controller ]

  • 73 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 3-5 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of BC Controller

    1. Cmb-P

    Nu-G, Ga, Ha

    (1) Front (2) Rear view Liquid pipe (Indoor unit side) Gas pipe (Indoor unit side)

    Th12

    Th15

    Th16

    Th11

    Svm1

    Lev1

    Lev3

    Ps1

    Ps3

    Tube in tube heat exchanger Gas/Liquid separator

    Page 85

    [3-5 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of BC Controller ]

  • 74 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (3) Rear view (4) Rear view

    Th12

    Th15

    Th16

    Th11

    Svm2

    Svm1

    Lev1

    Lev3

    Lev2

    Ps1

    Ps3

    Tube in tube heat exchanger Gas/Liquid separator Gas/Liquid separator

    Lev3

    Lev1

    Lev2

    Svm2

    SVM2b SVM1b

    Svm1

    Th16

    Th15

    Th12

    Th11

    Ps1

    Ps3

    Tube in tube heat exchanger

    Page 86

    [3-5 External Appearance and Refrigerant Circuit Components of BC Controller ]

  • 75 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits

    2. Cmb-P

    Nu-Gb, Hb

    (1) Front (2) Rear view Liquid pipe (Indoor unit side) Gas pipe (Indoor unit side)

    Th15

    Th12

    Lev3

    Page 87

    [3-6 BC Controller Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams ]

  • 76 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3-6 BC Controller Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams

    (1) Cmb-P104 - P1016Nu-G

    Th15

    Th12

    Hic-B

    Hic-A

    Lev3

    Lev1

    Th16

    Ps3

    Ps1

    Th11

    Svm1

    Gas/Liquid separator Check valve block Solenoid valve block

    Svc/Sva/Svb

    Page 88

    [3-6 BC Controller Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams ]

  • 77 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits (2) CMB-P108, P1010, P1013, P1016NU-GA (main) (3) CMB-P104, P108NU-GB (sub)

    Th15

    Th12

    Lev3

    Svm2

    Lev1

    Lev2

    Th16

    Ps3

    Ps1

    Th11

    Svm1

    Hic-B

    Hic-A

    Gas/Liquid separator Check valve block Solenoid valve block

    Svc/Sva/Svb

    Th15

    Th12

    Hic-C

    Cp

    Lev3

    Check valve block Solenoid valve block

    Svc/Sva/Svb

    Page 89

    [3-6 BC Controller Refrigerant Circuit Diagrams ]

  • 78 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (4) CMB-P1016V-HA (main) (5) CMB-P1016NU-HB (sub)

    Th15

    Th12

    Gas/Liquid separator

    Lev3

    Lev1

    Th16

    Ps1

    Ps3

    Th11

    Sva,Svb,Svc

    Svm1

    Svm2

    Hic-A

    Hic-B

    Lev2

    SVM1b SVM2b

    Th15

    Th12

    Hic-C

    Cp

    Lev3

    Check valve block Solenoid valve block

    Svc/Sva/Svb

    Page 90

    [3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller ]

  • 79 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits 3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller (1) G type Part name Symbols (functions) Part code Usage Specifications Check method Pressure sensor

    Ps1

    (High pres- sure side) 1) Detects high pressure 2) LEV control

    Ps3

    (Intermedi- ate pres- sure) 1) Detects intermediate pressure 2) LEV control Thermistor

    Th11

    (Liquid inlet tempera- ture) LEV control (Liquid level control) 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

    Th12

    (Bypass outlet tem- perature) LEV control (Superheat)

    Th15

    (Bypass in- let tempera- ture) LEV control (Superheat)

    Th16

    (Liquid re- frigerant tempera- ture) LEV control (Subcool) Solenoid valve

    Svm1

    Opens during cooling and de- frost modes

    Ac208-230V

    Open while being powered/ closed while not being pow- ered Continuity check with a tester

    Sv

    A

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Sv

    B

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation

    Sv

    C

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Lev

    Lev1

    1) Liquid level control 2) Pressure differential con- trol

    Dc12V

    Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0-2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV

    Lev3

    Pressure 0~4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69 Pressure [psi] =(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) Con- nector

    Ps1

    1 1 2 3 2 3 R = 15k 0

    R = 3460

    R = 15

    0/80 t 3460 273 t 1 273 1 exp

    Page 91

    [3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller ]

  • 80 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (2) GA type Part name Symbols (functions) Part code Usage Specifications Check method Pressure sensor

    Ps1

    (High pres- sure side) 1) Detects high pressure 2) LEV control

    Ps3

    (Intermedi- ate pres- sure) 1) Detects intermediate pressure 2) LEV control Thermistor

    Th11

    (Liquid inlet tempera- ture) LEV control (Liquid level control) 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

    Th12

    (Bypass outlet tem- perature) LEV control (Superheat)

    Th15

    (Bypass in- let tempera- ture) LEV control (Superheat)

    Th16

    (Liquid re- frigerant tempera- ture) LEV control (Subcool) Solenoid valve

    Svm1

    Opens during cooling and de- frost modes

    Ac208-230V

    Open while being powered/ closed while not being pow- ered Continuity check with a tester

    Svm2

    Pressure differential control

    Sv

    A

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Sv

    B

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation

    Sv

    C

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Lev

    Lev1

    Lev2

    1) Liquid level control 2) Pressure differential con- trol

    Dc12V

    Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0-2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV

    Lev3

    Subcool control Pressure 0~4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69 Pressure [psi] =(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) Con- nector

    Ps1

    1 1 2 3 2 3 R = 15k 0

    R = 3460

    R = 15

    0/80 t 3460 273 t 1 273 1 exp

    Page 92

    [3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller ]

  • 81 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits (3) GB type Part name Symbols (functions) Part code Usage Specifications Check method Thermistor

    Th12

    (Bypass outlet tem- perature) LEV control (Superheat) 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

    Th15

    (Bypass in- let tempera- ture) LEV control (Superheat) Solenoid valve

    Sv

    A

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Ac208-230V

    Open while being powered/ closed while not being pow- ered Continuity check with a tester

    Sv

    B

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation

    Sv

    C

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Lev

    Lev3

    Pressure differential control

    Dc12V

    Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0-2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV R = 15k 0

    R = 3460

    R = 15

    0/80 t 3460 273 t 1 273 1 exp

    Page 93

    [3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller ]

  • 82 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (4) HA type Part name Symbols (functions) Part code Usage Specifications Check method Pressure sensor

    Ps1

    (High pres- sure side) 1) Detects high pressure 2) LEV control

    Ps3

    (Intermedi- ate pres- sure) 1) Detects intermediate pressure 2) LEV control Thermistor

    Th11

    (Liquid inlet tempera- ture) LEV control (Liquid level control) 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

    Th12

    (Bypass outlet tem- perature) LEV control (Superheat)

    Th15

    (Bypass in- let tempera- ture) LEV control (Superheat)

    Th16

    (Liquid re- frigerant tempera- ture) LEV control (Subcool) Solenoid valve

    Svm1

    Opens during cooling and de- frost modes

    Ac208-230V

    Open while being powered/ closed while not being pow- ered Continuity check with a tester SVM1b Opens during cooling and de- frost modes

    Svm2

    Pressure differential control SVM2b Pressure differential control

    Sv

    A

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Sv

    B

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation

    Sv

    C

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Lev

    Lev1

    Lev2

    1) Liquid level control 2) Pressure differential con- trol

    Dc12V

    Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0-2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV

    Lev3

    Subcool control Pressure 0~4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5~3.5V 0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi] Pressure [MPa] =1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69 Pressure [psi] =(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC5V) (Red) Con- nector

    Ps1

    1 1 2 3 2 3 R = 15k 0

    R = 3460

    R = 15

    0/80 t 3460 273 t 1 273 1 exp

    Page 94

    [3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller ]

  • 83 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 Major Components, Their Functions and Refrigerant Circuits (5) HB type Part name Symbols (functions) Part code Usage Specifications Check method Thermistor

    Th12

    (Bypass outlet tem- perature) LEV control (Superheat) 0°C[32°F] : 15kohm 10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm 20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm 25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm 30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm 40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

    Th15

    (Bypass in- let tempera- ture) LEV control (Superheat) Solenoid valve

    Sv

    A

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Ac208-230V

    Open while being powered/ closed while not being pow- ered Continuity check with a tester

    Sv

    B

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in heating operation

    Sv

    C

    Provides refrigerant to indoor unit in cooling operation

    Lev

    Lev3

    Pressure differential control

    Dc12V

    Opening of a valve driven by a stepping motor 0-2000 pulses Same as indoor LEV R = 15k 0

    R = 3460

    R = 15

    0/80 t 3460 273 t 1 273 1 exp

    Page 95

    [3-7 Functions of the Major Components of BC Controller ]

  • 84 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 96

  • 85 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams 4-1 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Arrangement......................................................................................... 87 4-1-1 Outdoor Unit Control Box...................................................................................................................... 87 4-1-2 Transformer Box ................................................................................................................................... 89 4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ......................................................................................... 90 4-2-1 Control Board........................................................................................................................................ 90 4-2-2 M-NET Board (Transmission Power Supply Board) ............................................................................. 91 4-2-3 INV Board ............................................................................................................................................. 92 4-2-4 Fan Board ............................................................................................................................................. 94 4-2-5 Noise Filter............................................................................................................................................ 96 4-3 Outdoor Unit Electrical Wiring Diagrams ......................................................................................... 98 4-4 Transmission Booster Electrical Wiring Diagrams ....................................................................... 100 4-5 BC Controller Circuit Board Arrangement ..................................................................................... 101 4-5-1 BC Controller Control Box................................................................................................................... 101 4-6 BC Controller Circuit Board Components...................................................................................... 102 4-6-1 BC Board ............................................................................................................................................ 102 4-6-2 Four-Relay Board................................................................................................................................ 103 4-6-3 Ten-Relay Board................................................................................................................................. 103 4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams...................................................................................... 104

    Page 97

  • 86 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 98

    [4-1 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Arrangement ]

  • 87 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams 4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams 4-1 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Arrangement 4-1-1 Outdoor Unit Control Box

    1. Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the water- proof and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components. 2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the ter- minals to remove them. 3) Control box houses high temperature parts. Be well careful even after turning off the power source. 4) Disconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. To plug or unplug- connectors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details. 5) To connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20 VDC or below. 6) Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work. 7) When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the capacitor voltage (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less. It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off. 8) When the power is turned on, the compressor is energized even while it is not operating. Before turning on the power, discon- nect all power supply wires from the compressor terminal block, and measure the insulation resistance of the compressor. Check the compressor for a graound fault. If the insulation resistance is 1.0 MΩ or below, connect all power supply wires to the compressor and turn on the power to the outdoor unit. The liquid refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate by energizing the compressor.

    Control box houses high-voltage parts. When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and check that the the voltage of the electrolytic capacitor (Inverter main circuit) is 20VDC or below. (It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.) FAN INV board Control board M-NET board

    Ipm

    Note 2 Noise filter Rush current protection resistor (R1) Note 2 DC reactor

    (Dcl)

    INV board Current sensor

    (Acct1)

    Current sensor

    (Dcct1)

    Current sensor

    (Acct2)

    Diode stack Electromagnetic contactor (72C) Ground terminal Note 1 Smoothing capacitor (C1) Terminal block for transmission line

    (Tb3, Tb7)

    Terminal block for power supply

    (Tb1)

    Page 99

    [4-1 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Arrangement ]

  • 88 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    2. Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the water- proof and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components. 2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the ter- minals to remove them. 3) Control box houses high temperature parts. Be well careful even after turning off the power source. 4) Disconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. To plug or unplug- connectors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details. 5) To connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20VDC or below. 6) Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work. 7) When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the capacitor voltage (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 V DC or less. It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off. 8) When the power is turned on, the compressor is energized even while it is not operating. Before turning on the power, discon- nect all power supply wires from the compressor terminal block, and measure the insulation resistance of the compressor. Check the compressor for a graound fault. If the insulation resistance is 1.0 MΩ or below, connect all power supply wires to the compressor and turn on the power to the outdoor unit. The liquid refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate by energizing the compressor. INV board Noise filter DC reactor

    (Dcl)

    (72C)

    Capacitor

    (C100)

    FAN INV board Control board Electromagnetic relay Note 2 Rush current protection resistor (R1, R5) Note 2 M-NET board Note 1 Ground terminal Fuse (F5) Fuse (F4) Terminal block for power supply

    (Tb1)

    Terminal block for transmission line

    (Tb3, Tb7)

    Page 100

    [4-1 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Arrangement ]

  • 89 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams 4-1-2 Transformer Box

    (1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    Transformer

    (T03)

    Transformer

    (T02)

    Page 101

    [4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ]

  • 90 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components 4-2-1 Control Board *For information about the display of SW4 function settings, refer to the following page(s). [5-1-1 Outdoor Unit Switch Func- tions and Factory Settings](page 117)

    (208/230 Vac)

    /Base heater output

    Page 102

    [4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ]

  • 91 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams 4-2-2 M-NET Board (Transmission Power Supply Board) Power supply output for centralized control system (30VDC) Indoor/outdoor transmission line input/output (30VDC)

    Cn102

    Cns2

    Transmission line input/output for centralized control system (30VDC)

    Cnit

    12VDC Input

    Gnd

    5VDC Input Power supply detection output Power supply ON/OFF signal input

    Led1

    Power supply for indoor transmission line

    Tp1,2

    Check pins for indoor/outdoor transmission line

    Tb7

    Terminal block for centralized control transmission line

    Tb3

    Indoor/outdoor transmission block Ground terminal for transmission line Grounding Grounding

    Cn04

    Bus voltage input

    P

    N

    Grounding

    Page 103

    [4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ]

  • 92 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4-2-3 INV Board

    (1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    1) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the ter- minals to remove them. 2) When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the capacitor voltage (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less. It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off. 3) Control box houses high temperature parts. Be well careful even after turning off the power source. 4) Disconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. To plug or unplug connectors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details. 5) To connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20 VDC or below. 6) Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work. 7) When the power is turned on, the compressor is energized even while it is not operating. Before turning on the power, discon- nect all power supply wires from the compressor terminal block, and measure the insulation resistance of the compressor. Check the compressor for a ground fault. If the insulation resistance is 1.0 MΩ or below, connect all power supply wires to the compressor and turn on the power to the outdoor unit. The liquid refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate by energizing the compressor.

    Page 104

    [4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ]

  • 93 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams

    (2) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    1) When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the capacitor voltage (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less. It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off. 2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the ter- minals to remove them. 3) Control box houses high temperature parts. Be well careful even after turning off the power source. 4) Disconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. To plug or unplugb connectors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details. 5) To connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20 VDC or below. 6) Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work. 7) When the power is turned on, the compressor is energized even while it is not operating. Before turning on the power, discon- nect all power supply wires from the compressor terminal block, and measure the insulation resistance of the compressor. Check the compressor for a ground fault. If the insulation resistance is 1.0 MΩ or below, connect all power supply wires to the compressor and turn on the power to the outdoor unit. The liquid refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate by energizing the compressor.

    Page 105

    [4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ]

  • 94 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4-2-4 Fan Board

    (1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    1) When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the capacitor voltage (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less. It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off. 2) Control box houses high temperature parts. Be well careful even after turning off the power source. 3) Disconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. To plug or unplug- connectors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details. 4) To connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20 VDC or below. 5) Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work.

    Page 106

    [4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ]

  • 95 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams

    (2) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    1) When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the capacitor voltage (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less. It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off. 2) Control box houses high temperature parts. Be well careful even after turning off the power source. 3) Disconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. To plug or unplug- connectors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details. 4) To connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20 VDC or below. 5) Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work.

    Page 107

    [4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ]

  • 96 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4-2-5 Noise Filter

    (1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    Ground Ground

    Tb31

    Bus voltage output (P)

    Cn110

    Power supply detection signal output

    Cn012

    Output

    Cn001

    Input

    Cnr1

    Rush current protection registor (R1) connection

    Tb21

    Input (L1)

    Tb22

    Input (L2)

    Tb23

    Input (L3)

    F002

    Fuse

    250 Vac 6.3A T

    F001

    Fuse

    250 Vac 6.3A T

    Tb42

    Bus voltage output (N)

    X001

    Electromagnetic relay

    (72C)

    Cn72C

    72C drive input

    F003

    Fuse

    250 Vac 6.3A T

    Diode stack Rectifier voltage input (Diode stack output) Output (Diode stack input)

    L3

    L2

    L1

    L2

    L1

    Page 108

    [4-2 Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Components ]

  • 97 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams

    (2) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    Cn4

    Output (Rectified L2-L3 current)

    P

    N

    Cn5

    Output (Rectified L2-L3 current)

    P

    N

    Tb21

    Input/output(L1)

    Tb22

    Input/output(L2)

    Tb23

    Input/output(L3)

    Cn1B

    Input

    L3

    L2

    Cn1A

    Input

    L1

    Grounding

    F1,F2,F3,F4

    Fuse

    250Vac 6.3A

    Cn6

    Input

    L2

    L3

    Grounding

    Cn2

    Surge absorber circuit Surge absorber circuit Short circuit Short circuit

    Page 109

    [4-3 Outdoor Unit Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 98 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4-3 Outdoor Unit Electrical Wiring Diagrams

    (1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    For opening/closing the bypass circuit Terminal block Central control transmission cable Power supply Function setting connector IPM temperature Heat exchanger outlet pipe temperature ACC inlet pipe temperature Discharge pipe temperature Thermistor

    Sv9

    Tb1

    Tb3

    Tb7

    Th4

    Th5

    Th6

    Thhs

    Z24,25,26

    DC reactor Current sensor(AC) Low pressure Discharge pressure High pressure protection for the outdoor unit Pressure switch Pressure sensor Explanation Explanation 4-way valve (Cooling/Heating switching) For opening/closing the bypass circuit under the O/S Solenoid valve Solenoid valve

    Dcl

    LEV5a

    Acct1,2

    63Ls

    63Hs1

    63H1

    Symbol Symbol 21S4a

    C1

    Dcct1

    SV1a SV5b Outdoor unit heat exchanger capacity control SV4a,b,d Subcooled liquid refrigerant temperature *1. Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not

    supplied with the unit. *2. Dot-dash lines indicate the control box

    boundaries. *3. Refer to the Data book for connecting

    input/output signal connectors. *4. Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the outdoor

    units in the same refrigerant system together. *5. Faston terminals have a locking function.

    Make sure the terminals are securely locked

    in place after insertion. Press the tab on

    the terminals to removed them. *6. Control box houses high-voltage parts.

    Before inspecting the inside of the control box,

    turn off the power,keep the unit off for at

    least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage

    at both ends of the main capacitor (C1) has

    dropped to DC20V or less.

    X001

    For inrush current prevention

    R1

    Choke coil (for high frequency noise reduction)

    L

    Indoor/Outdoor transmission cable Magnetic relay (inverter main circuit)72C Heat exchanger capacity control Linear expansion valve (for the control of evaporating temperature) Resistor For current detection

    Rsh01

    Capacitor (inverter main circuit) Current sensor(DC) For opening/closing the injection circuit

    Lev4

    For opening/closing the defrost circuit

    Sv10,11

    OA temperature

    Th7

    Th9,11

    Ground

    L3

    L2

    L1

    X14

    X13

    6 1 3 5 1 2 red

    Cnps

    1 3 2 1

    Tp1 Tp2

    Tb3

    2 3

    Tb7

    M1 M2

    M1 M2 S

    5 1 2 3 4 1 2 t° 1 2 1 3 2 3 4 6 1 2 2

    Cn82

    blue 1 3 4

    Cn83

    black 3 1 6

    X12

    1 3

    Cn508

    blue

    Cn4

    black 2 3 1 t

    Sw001

    1 3 °

    Cn2

    7 1 2 1 3 3 1 4 3 2 2 3 1 1

    Th4

    t 4 ° 1 1

    Cn211

    green 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1 6

    Cnsnr

    5 4 3 2 1

    U

    V

    W

    Fan motor (Heat exchanger)

    Ms

    3~ 4 1 6

    Cninv

    2

    Sw1

    1 6

    Off On

    3 2 2 3 Power failure detection circuit red 1 Surge absorber 2 3 1

    Tb1

    L3

    L2

    L1

    2 1 INV Board °t 2

    L

    yellow

    Cnpow

    t° 6 5 4 5

    Cnvdc

    4

    Cndc2

    1

    Acct2

    F02

    Ac250V

    3.15A T

    C1

    Ipm

    4

    X10

    On

    X08

    Unit address setting LED3:Charge 6 3 1 6

    F001

    Ac250V

    6.3A T

    F002

    Ac250V

    6.3A T

    Rsh01

    Cn001

    5 3 1

    Tb22

    Tb23

    Tb21

    Diode stack~ ~ ~ 1 2 3 4 3 green

    Cn62

    Cn990

    green

    Cntyp4

    Cn201

    Z25

    1

    Th5

    2

    Swu2

    Led1

    Sw6

    10 Control Board

    Cn40

    63Hs1

    Cn41

    Th7

    1 5 5 4 3 1

    Sw4

    Led3

    2 LEV5a 3

    Set Up(Sw6-10)

    V

    M

    Off

    Cn506

    red yellow

    Cn3K

    *3 Compressor ON/OFF output Error detection output

    Dc12V Cn51

    SV5b

    W

    blue

    Cn3N

    1 3 3 4 TB7 Power selecting connector

    Cnvdc

    Ipm

    5 1 2 6

    On

    Off

    M-NET power supply circuit 1 2 M-NET Board Power failure detection circuit Indoor/Outdoor transmission cable

    On

    1's digit

    Cn102

    1 4 1

    U

    10's digit

    Off

    LED2:Normal operation(Lit) / Error(Blink) yellow

    Cndc

    red

    Ms

    3~ 2

    Th6

    U

    LED1:Power supply to Indoor/Outdoor transmission line

    Znr400

    Central control transmission cable

    On

    Off

    Motor (Compressor) red

    Cn3S

    1

    Cn04

    red

    Cn43

    yellow

    Cn61

    green

    Cn202

    red 8 / Error(Blink) *4 2

    P

    63H1

    4 1

    Sw5

    10 5

    Cn3D

    1 CPU power supply circuit black

    Cnac2

    1 *3

    On

    Off

    10

    Swu1

    N

    Cn212

    red

    W

    U

    P

    6

    Cndc1

    1 4

    V

    1

    Cn80

    25

    F301

    Ac250V

    15A T

    Cnipm

    Cntyp5

    green LED4:CPU in operation

    Ft-N

    LED1:Normal operation(Lit) / Error(Blink)

    Cn801

    red

    Swp1

    Cn012

    1 3 FAN Board

    63Ls

    U

  • +
  • Znr005

    Z24

    2

    Cn507

    black 3

    F003

    Ac250V

    6.3A T

    Tb42

    6 4

    X001

    Cn213

    green black *5

    Sv9

    Function setting

    Led1

    Display setting/ Function setting red LED4:CPU in operation 5 1

    Sc-P1

    Dcl

    black

    Cn72C

    red 3 1

    Dcct1

    1 2 1 4 1

    Cnlva

    1

    Cnr1

    red black

    F01

    Ac250V

    3.15A T

    Tb31

    R1

    white red

    Cnit

    red

    X001

    1 2 Power Source 3~ 60Hz

    208/230V

    Cnct

    red white

    Acct1

    5 6

    Cn110

    Noise filter 3 1 6 4 1 2 IPM power supply circuit

    Cnfg2

    Noise Filter black 4 3 2 1

    Cnct2

    blue 4 3 2 1

    X05

    X06

    3 5 1 6

    Cn505

    1 3 1 2

    Cnfg

    blue 1 2 black red white *5 black red

    Thhs

    °t

    Z26

    Cntyp

    2

    Cnth

    green 2 1

    Cn110

    black 2 1 red 1 2 1

    Cnac

    Cn81

    green 1 2 5 1 3 4 4 SV4a 4

    Cn2

    C310,C311

    SV4d SV1a SV4b 21S4a 1 2 3 4 6

    M

    Cnlve

    yellow

    Lev4

    Th9

    Th11

    t° 2

    Cn509

    yellow

    Cns2

    3 2 3 1

    X04

    yellow

    Cn504

    Sv11

    3 1

    X03

    green

    Cn503

    Sv10

    Cn72C

    green LED1:Normal operation(Lit)

    Page 110

    [4-3 Outdoor Unit Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 99 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams

    (2) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    For opening/closing the bypass circuit Terminal block Central control transmission cable Indoor/Outdoor transmission cable Power supply Function setting connector IPM temperature OA temperature ACC inlet pipe temperature Discharge pipe temperature Thermistor

    Sv9

    Tb1

    Tb3

    Tb7

    Th4

    Th5

    Th6

    Th7

    Thhs

    Z24,25

    DC reactor Current sensor(AC) Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit) Low pressure Discharge pressure High pressure protection for the outdoor unit Pressure switch Pressure sensor Explanation 4-way valve(Cooling/Heating switching) For opening/closing the bypass circuit under the O/S Solenoid valve

    Dcl

    LEV5a

    Ct12,22,3

    72C

    63Ls

    63Hs1

    63H1

    Symbol 21S4a SV1a SV5b Outdoor unit heat exchanger capacity control Subcooled liquid refrigerant temperature *1. Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied

    with the unit. *2. Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries. *3. Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output

    signal connectors. *4. Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the outdoor units in the

    same refrigerant system together. *5. Faston terminals have a locking function.

    Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place

    after insertion. Press the tab on the terminals to

    removed them. *6. Control box houses high-voltage parts.

    Before inspecting the inside of the control box,turn off

    the power,keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and

    confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on

    INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. For inrush current prevention Resistor

    R1,5

    Heat exchanger capacity control SV4a,b,d

    L

    Capacitor (inverter main circuit)

    C30~C37

    For current detection

    Rsh01,Rsh1

    Linear expansion valve (for the control of evaporating temperature) Choke coil (for high frequency noise reduction)

    Lev4

    For opening/closing the injection circuit For opening/closing the defrost circuit

    Sv10,11

    Heat exchanger outlet pipe temperature

    Th9,11

    1 2

    L3

    red

    Cnps

    1 3 2 1

    Tp1 Tp2

    Tb3

    2 3

    Tb7

    M1 M2

    M1 M2 S

    1 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 t° 1 2 1 3 2 3 4 6 3 6 1 5 3 1 2 2

    Cn82

    blue 1 3 4

    Cn83

    black

    L1

    L2

    3 1 Fan motor (Heat exchanger)

    U

    V

    W

    Cninv

    7 1 4 3 4

    Cn4

    black 1 1 3 2 3 1 t 3

    Sw001

    1 4 °

    Cn2

    1 1 2 1 3 3 1 4 3 2 2 3 1 1

    Cnsnr

    Th4

    t 4 ° 1 1 1

    Cn211

    green 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 1

    U

    5 Transformer Box

    Cntr3

    3 4

    Cntr2

    T02

    (Transformer) 2 2 3 4

    T03

    (Transformer) 1 1 2 5 4 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1

    Cn6

    2 1 °t 2 yellow

    Cnpow

    t° 1 6 5 4

    X10

    On

    X08

    Unit address setting

    Ct12

    Cn5

    red

    D1

    R4

  • Z5

  • 1 + 3 1 6

    Cntr1 1

    2

    L1 L2 L2

    3

    L3

    4 5 6 7 8

    Rsh01

    white Ground 1 2 3 4 3 white red black black white red

    F4

    Ac600V

    6A F

    F5

    Ac600V

    6A F

    green

    Cn62

    Cn990

    green

    Cntyp4

    F4

    Ac250V

    6.3A T

    R5

    Cn201

    Z25

    1

    Th5

    2

    Swu2

    Led1

    Sw6

    10 Control Board

    Cn40

    63Hs1

    Cn41

    Th7

    1 5 2 3 4 1

    Sw4

    Led3

    5 LEV5a 3 3

    Set Up(Sw6-10)

    Sc-V

    Ct22

    Sc-U

    V

    Cn4

    blue red

    M

    Off

    t black

    Cn506

    red

    Cntyp2

    black 6 yellow

    Cn3K

    *3 Compressor ON/OFF output Error detection output

    Tb21

    Dc12V Cn51

    SV5b

    Cn1A

    U

    Cn2

    blue

    Cn3N

    1 3 + 3 4

    Tb1

    Cn1B

    TB7 Power selecting connector

    Cnvdc

    1

    Ipm

    2 5 6

    L3

    Dcl

    black

    72C

    white red 2 6

    On

    Off

    M-NET power supply circuit 1 2 M-NET Board Power failure detection circuit Indoor/Outdoor transmission cable INV Board red

    Tb23

    L2

    L1

    +

    On

    1's digit

    Thhs

    Cn102

    C31,C33,

    C35,C37

    1 4 1

    W

    10's digit

    Off

    LED2:Normal operation(Lit) / Error(Blink) yellow

    Cndc

    red red

    Ms

    3~ 2

    C100

    *5

    Th6

    U

    LED1:Power supply to Indoor/Outdoor transmission line

    Znr400

    + black Central control transmission cable *6

    Sc-L1

    On

    Off

    Ft-N

    R30,R32,

    R34

    Motor (Compressor) red

    Cn3S

    1

    Cn04

    red

    Cn43

    1

    Sc-P2

    P

    Cn61

    green

    Cn202

    red

    C30,C32,

    C34,C36

    8

    N

    Cn1

    LED1: Normal operation(Lit) / Error(Blink) *4

    Sc-W

    Sc-L3

    2

    P

    63H1

    4 1

    Sw5

    10 5

    Cn3D

    1 CPU power supply circuit black

    Cnac2

    1 *3

    On

    Off

    10

    Swu1

    white

    Cn212

    red

    Sc-L2

    6 2

    Cn80

    F301

    Dc700V

    4A T

    Cntyp5

    green LED4:CPU in operation LED1:Normal operation(Lit) / Error(Blink)

    Cn801

    red 5 °

    Ipm

    4

    Sc-P1

    Ft-P

    black red

    Db1

    Ct3

    C1

    Cntyp

    black black

    Tb22

    Swp1

    Rsh1

    R6

    C11

    FAN Board

    63Ls

    Znr1

    U

    L

    Noise Filter

    Z24

    2

    Cn507

    black 3 3 6 4

    Cn213

    green

    Cn6

    yellow

    Sv9

    Function setting

    Led1

    Display setting/ Function setting

    72C

    Noise filter Noise filter 6 7 red Surge absorber 1 2 1

    Cnlva

    1

    F01

    Ac250V

    3.15A T

    Ms

    3~ white black 1

    Cnit

    red

    L1

    L2

    L3

    R31,R33,

    R35

    3 4 1

    R1,R5

    X05

    X06

    3 5 1 6

    Cn505

    1 3

    X13

    SV4d

    X14

    X12

    1 6 3

    Cn508

    blue 1 6 3

    Cnac

    Cn81

    green 1 2 5 1 3 4 SV4a SV4b 4 4

    Cn2

    C310,C311

    SV1a 21S4a 5 Power Source 3~ 60Hz

    460V

    1 2 3 4 6

    M

    Cnlve

    Lev4

    yellow

    Th9

    Th11

    t° 2

    Cns2

    Cn509

    yellow

    X04

    3 1 yellow

    Sv11

    Cn504

    X03

    3 1 green

    Cn503

    Sv10

    green

    Cn72

    yellow

    Page 111

    [4-4 Transmission Booster Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 100 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4-4 Transmission Booster Electrical Wiring Diagrams

    Ac208V/230V

    L

    Red Red Red White Green

    250V 2A

    Grounding Red Red Red

    U

    U

    White White White White White White Blue Red Red

    Dsa

    White White Blue Red Red Red Red Varistor Varistor Noise filter Stabilized power supply 4 3 2 1 1 2 3

    Cn2

    Cn1

    Black Black Black Black Green/Yellow 1 2 3

    E

    4 Choke coil 1 2

    Cn3

    1 2 1 2

    Cn4

    Cn2

    1 2

    Cn1

    Electronic control board Black White Red Red Black

    S

    B

    A

    S

    B

    A

    Terminal block 2 for transmission line (TB3) Expanded (indoor unit) side Terminal block 1 for transmission line (TB2) Expanded (outdoor unit) side Terminal block for power supply

    (Tb1)

    Page 112

    [4-5 BC Controller Circuit Board Arrangement ]

  • 101 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams 4-5 BC Controller Circuit Board Arrangement 4-5-1 BC Controller Control Box

    1. Cmb-P1016Nu-G, Ga, Ha

    Relay board Transformer Terminal block for transmission line BC board Terminal block for power supply

    Page 113

    [4-6 BC Controller Circuit Board Components ]

  • 102 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4-6 BC Controller Circuit Board Components 4-6-1 BC Board

    Sw1

    Sw2

    Sw5

    Sw6

    Sw4

    Page 114

    [4-6 BC Controller Circuit Board Components ]

  • 103 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams 4-6-2 Four-Relay Board 4-6-3 Ten-Relay Board

    Page 115

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 104 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams (1) CMB-P104NU-G model (Red)

    Cntr

    Znr02

    Znr01

    L2

    X21

    CN36(Green) 3 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

    Svm1

    CN29(Green)

    X33

    X7

    X8

    1 3 5 7 1 4 3 2 1 14 16 15

    Sv4A

    Sv4C

    Sv4B

    11 12 13 14 15 16 11 12 13 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 CN28(Blue) CN27(Red)

    X32

    X5

    X6

    X31

    X3

    X4

    X30

    X1

    X2

    1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7

    Sv1B

    Sv1A

    Sv1C

    5 6 7 8 9 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 3 4 2

    Sv2A

    Sv2C

    Sv3C

    Sv2B

    Sv3B

    Sv3A

    3 4 1 2 10 3 2 4 8 9 10 4 3 2 1

    L1

    M1

    M2

    S(Shield)

    Lev3

    Tb01

    Lev1

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    Ps3

    Ps1

    Th16

    Th15

    Th12

    Th11

    Cn07

    Cn11

    Cn10

    Cn13

    Cn03

    1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2

    Cnp3

    3 2 1

    Cnp1

    3

    Cn02

    2 1

    Cont.B

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    Cn05

    3 5 1

    Cn12

    1 3

    Cn26

    Tb02

    Tr

    Svm1

    Solenoid valve Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

    F01

    Terminal

    T1~4

    Terminal block (for Transmission)

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb01

    Solenoid valve

    Sv1~4A,B,C

    Expansion valve Thermistor sensor Transformer Name Symbol

    Tr

    Th11,12,15,16

    Lev1,3

    Ps1,3

    Pressure sensor

    Cont.B

    Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission Line ~208V-230V 60Hz

    Power Supply

    Breaker(15A)

    Fuse(15A)

    Pull Box

    To Next Indoor Unit

    G

    T4

    T1

    T3

    T2

    1 3 1 3

    G

    2 2 8 1

    On

    Sw4

    8

    Off

    Sw5

    1

    Off

    On

    Dsa

    (Yellow) (Red) (Yellow) (Red) (Black)

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    10 1

    Sw1

    Sw2

    Circuit board (Symbol explanation) BC controller

    Page 116

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 105 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams (2) CMB-P105,106NU-G models CN36(Green)

    L2

    L1

    Znr02

    CN29(Green) CN28(Blue) CN27(Red)

    Znr01

    Cn05

    Cn07

    S(Shield)

    M1

    M2

    Tb02

    X21

    1 3

    Svm1

    3 2 1 2 3 1

    Tr

    Cn26

    3

    Cntr

    1

    Cn12

    1 5 3 6 5 4 3 2 1

    Cont.B

    1 2

    Cn02

    3

    Cnp1

    1 2 3

    Cnp3

    2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1

    Cn03

    Cn13

    Cn10

    Cn11

    Th11

    Th12

    Th15

    Th16

    Ps1

    Ps3

    6 5 4 3 2 1

    Tb01

    Lev3

    Lev1

    1 2 3 4 10 9 8 4 2 3 10 2 1 4 3

    Sv3A

    Sv3B

    Sv2B

    Sv3C

    Sv2C

    Sv2A

    2 4 3 7 5 6 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 9 8 7 6 5

    Sv1C

    Sv1A

    Sv1B

    7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1

    X2

    X1

    X30

    X4

    X3

    X31

    X6

    X5

    X32

    1 1 1 1 2 3 4 13 12 11 16 15 14 13 12 11

    Sv5A

    Sv5C

    Sv4B

    Sv5B

    Sv4C

    Sv4A

    15 16 14 1 2 1 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    Sv6C

    Sv6A

    Sv6B

    1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1

    X8

    X7

    X33

    X10

    X9

    X34

    X12

    X11

    X35

    CN30(Black) CN31(Yellow) Solenoid valve

    Svm1

    Cont.B

    Pressure sensor

    Tr

    Th11,12,15,16

    Lev1,3

    Ps1,3

    Symbol Name Transformer Thermistor sensor Expansion valve

    Sv1~6A,B,C

    Solenoid valve

    Tb01

    Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for Transmission)

    T1~6

    Terminal

    F01

    Fuse AC250V 6.3A F Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    To Next Indoor Unit

    Pull Box

    Fuse(15A)

    Breaker(15A)

    Power Supply

    ~208V-230V 60Hz

    G

    G

    Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line 2 2 3 1 3 1

    T2

    T3

    T1

    T6

    T4

    T5

    On

    Off

    1

    Sw5

    Off

    8

    Sw4

    On

    1 8 (Yellow) (Red)

    Dsa

    (Red) (Yellow) (Red) (Black)

    Sw2

    Sw1

    1 10

    Cmb-P106Nu-G Only

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    BC controller (Symbol explanation) Circuit board

    Page 117

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 106 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (3) CMB-P108,1010NU-G models 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    Pressure sensor

    Tr

    Th11,12,15,16

    Lev1,3

    Ps1,3

    Sv1~10A,B,C

    Symbol Name Transformer Thermistor sensor Expansion valve Solenoid valve

    Tb01

    Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for Transmission)

    Cont.B

    T1~10

    Terminal Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

    F01

    Solenoid valve

    Svm1

    Cn51

    Cn53

    6 5 4 3 2 11 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 (Red)

    Znr01

    Znr02

    L1

    Tb01

    L2

    CN31(Yellow) CN30(Black) CN29(Green) CN28(Blue) CN27(Red)

    Cn05

    Cn07

    Cn13

    Cnp1

    M1

    M2

    Tb02

    S(Shield)

    X21

    3 1 CN36(Green)

    Cn12

    3 3 3 1 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 7 5

    X20

    X19

    X39

    X38

    X17

    X18

    X16

    X15

    X37

    X36

    X13

    X14

    CN34(Black) CN33(Red)

    Cn32

    CN35(Blue) 16 16 13 14 15 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 4 4 5 6 8 7 9 12 11 10 15 14 13

    Sv10C

    Sv9C

    Sv8C

    Sv7C

    Sv10A

    Sv9A

    Sv8A

    Sv7A

    Sv10B

    Sv9B

    Sv8B

    Sv7B

    4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    X30

    X1

    X2

    1 3 5 4 3 2 1

    Sv1B

    Sv1A

    Sv1C

    1 2 3 4 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1

    X35

    X11

    X12

    X34

    X9

    X10

    X33

    X7

    X8

    X32

    X5

    X6

    X31

    X3

    X4

    7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2

    Sv2C

    Sv2A

    Sv2B

    Sv3C

    Sv3A

    Sv3B

    Sv4C

    Sv4A

    Sv4B

    Sv5B

    Sv5A

    Sv5C

    1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 11 12 13 8 9 10 5 6 7 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 5 6 7 14 15 16 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    Sv6C

    Sv6A

    Sv6B

    7 6 5 4 3 2 1

    Cn39

    3 1

    Cn52

    Cont.B

    6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

    Lev3

    Lev1

    1 2 3 1 2 3

    Cnp3

    2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1

    Cn03

    Cn02

    Cn10

    Cn11

    Th11

    Th12

    Th15

    Th16

    Tr

    Ps1

    Ps3

    Cn50

    7 6 5 4 3 2 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 3 5 1 3

    Cn38

    Cn26

    3 1

    Cntr

    1 2 3 1 2 3

    Svm1

    Rel.B

    Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it.

    G

    G

    To Next Indoor Unit

    Pull Box

    Fuse(15A)

    Breaker(15A)

    Power Supply

    ~208V-230V 60Hz Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line

    T10

    T9

    T8

    T7

    T1

    T5

    T4

    T3

    T2

    T6

    1 3 2 3 1 2 1 8

    On

    Off

    Sw5

    Sw4

    On

    Off

    1 8 (Symbol explanation) Circuit board BC controller

    Rel.B

    Relay

    Cmb-P1010Nu-G Only

    (Yellow)

    Dsa

    (Red) (Yellow) (Red) (Black)

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    Cmb-P1010Nu-G Only

    10 1

    Sw1

    Sw2

    Page 118

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 107 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams (4) CMB-P1013,1016NU-G models

    Znr01

    Znr02

    L1

    L2

    Tb01

    M1

    M2

    Tb02

    S(Shield)

    Cn32

    CN33(Red) CN34(Black) CN35(Blue) CN36(Green) CN31(Yellow) CN30(Black) CN29(Green) CN28(Blue) CN27(Red) (Red) (Blue) (Yellow)

    Cn07

    Cn05

    Cn13

    Lev1

    Lev3

    X21

    3 1 2 1

    Cnvcc1

    3

    Cnvcc2

    3 1 2

    Cont.B

    Cn39

    1 3 1 3 5

    Cn12

    Cnout3

    Cnout1

    1 3 1 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4

    Cnout2

    Cnout4

    6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3

    Cnp1

    1 2 3

    Cnp3

    2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1

    Cn03

    Cn02

    Cn10

    Cn11

    Th11

    Th12

    Th15

    Th16

    Tr

    Cn38

    Cn26

    3 1

    Cntr

    4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 2 1

    Ps1

    Ps3

    CN44(Yellow) CN45(Green) CN41(Green) CN43(Red) (Yellow)

    Sv1B

    Sv1A

    Sv1C

    5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 2 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 4 5 6 7 14 15 16 4 3 2

    Sv2C

    Sv2A

    Sv2B

    Sv3C

    Sv3A

    Sv3B

    Sv4C

    Sv4A

    Sv4B

    Sv5B

    Sv5A

    Sv5C

    4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    Sv6B

    Sv6A

    Sv6C

    1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 3 2 1 2 1

    X35

    X11

    X12

    X34

    X9

    X10

    X33

    X7

    X8

    X32

    X5

    X6

    X31

    X3

    X4

    X30

    X1

    X2

    5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 1 1 1 1

    Sv7A

    Sv7B

    Sv7C

    Sv8B

    Sv8A

    Sv8C

    Sv9B

    Sv9A

    Sv9C

    Sv10B

    Sv10A

    Sv10C

    16 16 13 14 15 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 4 4 5 6 8 7 9 12 11 10 15 14 13 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 7 5 3 1 3 3

    X14

    X13

    X36

    X37

    X15

    X16

    X38

    X39

    X17

    X19

    X18

    X20

    7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1

    Cn40

    Svm1

    2 3 2 1 3 1

    Rel.B

    4 5 6 8 9 7 10 12 11 13 15 14 16 3 4 2 1

    Sv11B

    Sv11A

    Sv11C

    1 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 4 1 5 6 7 14 15 16 4 3 2 1

    Sv12C

    Sv12A

    Sv12B

    Sv13C

    Sv13A

    Sv13B

    Sv14C

    Sv14A

    Sv14B

    Sv15B

    Sv15A

    Sv15C

    4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    Sv16B

    Sv16A

    Sv16C

    1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 4 2 1

    X51

    X55

    X56

    X52

    X53

    X57

    X54

    7 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1

    X45

    X42

    X43

    X40

    X44

    X48

    X47

    X46

    X50

    X49

    Cn42

    5 7 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 5 3 1 3

    X41

    1 Solenoid valve

    Svm1

    Cont.B

    Terminal block (for Transmission)

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb01

    Solenoid valve Expansion valve Thermistor sensor Transformer Name Symbol

    Sv1~16A,B,C

    Tr

    Th11,12,15,16

    Lev1,3

    Ps1,3

    Pressure sensor Terminal

    T1~16

    F01

    Fuse AC250V 6.3A F Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    Indoor Unit

    G G

    Pull Box

    Fuse(15A)

    Breaker(15A)

    Power Supply

    ~208V-230V

    60Hz

    To Next

    Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line 2 2 1 3 1 3

    T1

    T5

    T4

    T3

    T2

    T6

    T10

    T9

    T8

    T7

    T11

    T15

    T14

    T13

    T12

    T16

    1

    On

    Sw4

    8

    Off

    Sw5

    Off

    On

    8 1

    Dsa

    (Blue) (Yellow) (Red) (Red) (Black) 10 1

    Sw1

    Sw2

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    Cmb-P1016Nu-G Only

    Relay

    Rel.B

    BC controller Circuit board (Symbol explanation)

    Page 119

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 108 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (5) CMB-P108,1010NU-GA models Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    F01

    Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

    T1~10

    Terminal Solenoid valve

    Svm1,2

    Cont.B

    Terminal block (for Transmission)

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb01

    Solenoid valve Expansion valve Thermistor sensor Transformer Name Symbol

    Sv1~10A,B,C

    Tr

    Th11,12,15,16

    Lev1~3

    Ps1,3

    Pressure sensor 6 5 4 3 2 1

    Cn53

    6 5 4 3 2 11 2 3 4 5 6

    Cn51

    (Yellow)

    Cn03

    Tb01

    L2

    L1

    CN36(Green) CN30(Black) CN31(Yellow) CN29(Green) CN28(Blue) CN27(Red) (Red)

    Cntr

    Znr01

    Znr02

    M1

    M2

    Tb02

    S(Shield)

    Cn06

    Cn05

    Cn07

    Cn13

    Cnp1

    Lev2

    1 2 3 4 5 6 1 3

    Cn26

    Cn38

    3 1

    Cn12

    5 3 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 2 3 4 5 6 7

    Cn50

    Ps3

    Ps1

    Tr

    Th16

    Th15

    Th12

    Th11

    Cn11

    Cn10

    Cn02

    1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2

    Cnp3

    3 2 1 3 2 1

    Lev1

    Lev3

    1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

    Cont.B

    Sv6B

    Sv6A

    Sv6C

    1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 16 15 14 7 6 5 13 12 11 10 9 8 16 15 14 7 6 5 10 9 8 13 12 11 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1

    Sv5C

    Sv5A

    Sv5B

    Sv4B

    Sv4A

    Sv4C

    Sv3B

    Sv3A

    Sv3C

    Sv2B

    Sv2A

    Sv2C

    2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 1 1 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7

    X4

    X3

    X31

    X6

    X5

    X32

    X8

    X7

    X33

    X10

    X9

    X34

    X12

    X11

    X35

    1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 4 3 2 1

    Sv1C

    Sv1A

    Sv1B

    1 2 3 4 5 3 1

    X2

    X1

    X30

    X60

    X21

    CN46(Yellow) 3 1 3 1 3 1 CN33(Red) CN34(Black) CN35(Blue)

    Cn39

    Rel.B

    Cn52

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

    Sv7B

    Sv8B

    Sv9B

    Sv10B

    Sv7A

    Sv8A

    Sv9A

    Sv10A

    Sv7C

    Sv8C

    Sv9C

    Sv10C

    13 14 15 10 11 12 9 7 8 6 5 4 4 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 15 14 13 16 16

    Cn32

    X14

    X13

    X36

    X37

    X15

    X16

    X18

    X17

    X38

    X39

    X19

    X20

    5 7 1 7 5 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 1 3 3 3 1 2 3 4 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

    Svm1

    Svm2

    60Hz

    ~208V-230V

    Power Supply

    Breaker(15A)

    Pull Box

    Fuse(15A)

    To Next Indoor Unit

    G

    G

    Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line 2 1 3 2 3 1

    T6

    T2

    T3

    T4

    T5

    T1

    T7

    T8

    T9

    T10

    8 1

    Off

    On

    Sw4

    Sw5

    Off

    On

    8 1 Relay

    Rel.B

    BC controller Circuit board (Symbol explanation)

    Cmb-P1010Nu-Ga Only

    Dsa

    (Blue) (Red) (Yellow) (Red) (Black)

    Sw2

    Sw1

    1 10

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    Page 120

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 109 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams (6) CMB-P1013,1016NU-GA models

    Cntr

    (Red) CN41(Green)

    Cn40

    (Yellow) CN34(Black) CN33(Red) CN35(Blue)

    Znr01

    Znr02

    Cn06

    5 4 3 2 1

    Lev2

    Cn07

    Cn13

    Cnp1

    (Blue)

    Cnvcc1

    (Yellow)

    Cn03

    M1

    M2

    Tb02

    S(Shield)

    6 5 4 3 2 1

    Lev3

    2 1 3

    Cnvcc2

    3 1 2

    Cont.B

    Cn39

    1 3

    Cnout3

    Cnout1

    1 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

    Cnp3

    2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1

    Cn02

    Cn10

    Cn11

    Th11

    Th12

    Th15

    Th16

    Tr

    Cn38

    Cn26

    3 1 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 2 1

    Ps1

    Ps3

    X45

    X42

    X43

    X40

    X44

    X47

    X46

    Cn42

    X41

    Sv1B

    Sv1A

    Sv1C

    5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 2 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 4 5 6 7 14 15 16 4 3 2

    Sv2C

    Sv2A

    Sv2B

    Sv3C

    Sv3A

    Sv3B

    Sv4C

    Sv4A

    Sv4B

    Sv5B

    Sv5A

    Sv5C

    4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    Sv6B

    Sv6A

    Sv6C

    1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 3 3 2 1 2 1 CN31(Yellow) CN30(Black) CN29(Green) CN28(Blue) CN27(Red)

    X35

    X11

    X12

    X34

    X9

    X10

    X33

    X7

    X8

    X32

    X5

    X6

    X31

    X3

    X4

    X30

    X1

    X2

    7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 1 1 1 1

    Sv7A

    Sv7B

    Sv7C

    Sv8B

    Sv8A

    Sv8C

    Sv9B

    Sv9A

    Sv9C

    Sv10B

    Sv10A

    Sv10C

    16 16 13 14 15 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 4 4 5 6 8 7 9 12 11 10 15 14 13 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

    Cn32

    7 5 3 1 3 3

    X14

    X13

    X36

    X37

    X15

    X16

    X38

    X39

    X17

    X19

    X18

    X20

    7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 1 CN36(Green)

    X21

    CN45(Green) CN44(Yellow) CN43(Red)

    Rel.B

    4 5 6 8 9 7 10 12 11 13 15 14 16 3 4 2 1

    Sv11B

    Sv11A

    Sv11C

    1 3 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 4 1 5 6 7 14 15 16 4 3 2 1

    Sv12C

    Sv12A

    Sv12B

    Sv13C

    Sv13A

    Sv13B

    Sv14C

    Sv14A

    Sv14B

    Sv15B

    Sv15A

    Sv15C

    4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    Sv16B

    Sv16A

    Sv16C

    1 2 3 4 1 3 4 3 4 2 1

    X51

    X55

    X56

    X52

    X53

    X57

    X54

    7 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1

    X48

    X50

    X49

    5 7 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 5 3 1 3 1

    Svm2

    Svm1

    3 2 2 3 1 1 2

    Cn05

    6 5 4 3 2 1

    Lev1

    L2

    L1

    Tb01

    1 3 5

    Cn12

    1 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4

    Cnout2

    Cnout4

    3 3 1 CN46(Yellow)

    X60

    Cont.B

    Terminal block (for Transmission)

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb01

    Solenoid valve Expansion valve Thermistor sensor Transformer Name Symbol

    Sv1~16A,B,C

    Tr

    Th11,12,15,16

    Lev1~3

    Ps1,3

    Pressure sensor

    Svm1,2

    T1~16

    Terminal Solenoid valve

    F01

    Fuse AC250V 6.3A F Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block.Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    6 Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line 2 2 1 3 1 3

    T1

    T5

    T4

    T3

    T2

    T6

    T10

    T9

    T8

    T7

    T11

    T15

    T14

    T13

    T12

    T16

    Pull Box

    Fuse(15A) Breaker(15A)

    Indoor Unit

    To Next

    Power Supply

    ~208V-230V

    60Hz

    G G

    1

    On

    Sw4

    8

    Off

    Sw5

    Off

    On

    8 1 (Blue)

    Dsa

    (Blue) (Yellow) (Red) (Black) 10 1

    Sw1

    Sw2

    Cmb-P1016Nu-Ga Only

    (Red)

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    Relay

    Rel.B

    BC controller Circuit board (Symbol explanation)

    Page 121

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 110 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (7) CMB-P104NU-GB model

    Znr02

    Znr01

    CN29(Green) CN28(Blue) CN27(Red)

    Cntr

    (Red)

    Cn07

    L1

    L2

    Tb01

    Cn13

    Cn03

    M1

    M2

    S(Shield)

    Tb02

    X33

    X7

    X8

    1 3 5 7 1 4 3 2 1 14 16 15

    Sv4A

    Sv4C

    Sv4B

    11 12 13 14 15 16 11 12 13 4 3 2 1 1 1 1

    X32

    X5

    X6

    X31

    X3

    X4

    X30

    X1

    X2

    1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7

    Sv1B

    Sv1A

    Sv1C

    5 6 7 8 9 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 3 4 2

    Sv2A

    Sv2C

    Sv3C

    Sv2B

    Sv3B

    Sv3A

    3 4 1 2 10 3 2 4 8 9 10 4 3 2 1

    Lev3

    1 2 3 4 5 6

    Th15

    Th12

    Cn11

    Cn10

    1 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2

    Cn02

    Cont.B

    3 5 1

    Cn12

    1 3

    Cn26

    Tr

    Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

    F01

    Terminal

    T1~4

    Terminal block (for Transmission)

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb01

    Solenoid valve

    Sv1~4A,B,C

    Expansion valve Thermistor sensor Transformer Name Symbol

    Tr

    Th12,15

    Lev3

    Cont.B

    Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    G

    G

    Fuse(15A)

    Breaker(15A)

    Power Supply

    ~208V-230V

    60Hz

    To Next Indoor Unit

    Pull Box

    Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission Line

    T4

    T1

    T3

    T2

    8 1

    On

    Sw4

    8

    Off

    Sw5

    1

    Off

    On

    Dsa

    (Yellow) (Red) (Yellow)

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    10 1

    Sw1

    Sw2

    Circuit board (Symbol explanation) BC controller

    Page 122

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 111 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams (8) CMB-P108NU-GB model CN31(Yellow) CN33(Red) CN34(Black) CN35(Blue) CN30(Black) CN29(Green) CN28(Blue) CN27(Red)

    Tb01

    L1

    L2

    Znr02

    Znr01

    Cn07

    Cn13

    (Red)

    M1

    M2

    S(Shield)

    Tb02

    Cn12

    3 1 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 7 5

    X20

    X19

    X39

    X38

    X17

    X18

    X16

    X15

    X37

    X36

    X13

    X14

    Cn32

    16 16 13 14 15 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 4 4 5 6 8 7 9 12 11 10 15 14 13

    Sv8C

    Sv7C

    Sv8A

    Sv7A

    Sv8B

    Sv7B

    4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    X30

    X1

    X2

    1 3 5 4 3 2 1

    Sv1B

    Sv1A

    Sv1C

    1 2 3 4 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 1

    X35

    X11

    X12

    X34

    X9

    X10

    X33

    X7

    X8

    X32

    X5

    X6

    X31

    X3

    X4

    7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 1 1 4 3 2 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2

    Sv2C

    Sv2A

    Sv2B

    Sv3C

    Sv3A

    Sv3B

    Sv4C

    Sv4A

    Sv4B

    Sv5B

    Sv5A

    Sv5C

    1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 11 12 13 8 9 10 5 6 7 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 5 6 7 14 15 16 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

    Sv6C

    Sv6A

    Sv6B

    7 6 5 4 3 2 1

    Cn39

    3 1

    Cn52

    Cont.B

    6 5 4 3 2 1

    Lev3

    2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 2 1

    Cn03

    Cn02

    Cn10

    Cn11

    Th12

    Th15

    Tr

    Cn50

    7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 3 5 1 3

    Cn38

    Cn26

    3 1

    Cntr

    Rel.B

    F01

    Fuse AC250V 6.3A F Terminal

    T1~8

    Cont.B

    Terminal block (for Transmission)

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb01

    Solenoid valve Expansion valve Thermistor sensor Transformer Name Symbol

    Sv1~8A,B,C

    Tr

    Th12,15

    Lev3

    Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block. Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of switch on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    G

    60Hz

    ~208V-230V

    Power Supply

    Breaker(15A)

    Fuse(15A)

    Pull Box

    To Next Indoor Unit

    G

    Indoor/outdoor (heat source) Transmission line

    T8

    T7

    T1

    T5

    T4

    T3

    T2

    T6

    1 8

    On

    Off

    Sw5

    Sw4

    On

    Off

    1 8

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    Dsa

    (Yellow) (Red) Relay

    Rel.B

    BC controller Circuit board (Symbol explanation) 10 1

    Sw1

    Sw2

    Page 123

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 112 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (9) CMB-P1016NU-HA model

    L1

    L2

    G

    G

    (Blue)

    Cnvcc1

    (Yellow)

    Cn03

    Cn02

    2 2 3 2 3 1 1 1 3 2 1 (Black)

    Cnp1

    1 2 3

    Tr

    Cn38

    1 3 CNTR(Red) 3 1

    Cn26

    X02

    X01

    X30

    7 5 3 1 CN27(Red) 1 3 5 7

    X31

    X03

    X04

    CN28(Blue)

    X06

    X05

    X32

    1 3 5 7 CN29(Green)

    X08

    X07

    X33

    5 3 1 7 CN30(Black)

    X10

    1 3 5 7

    X34

    X09

    CN31(Yellow)

    X12

    1 3

    X11

    X35

    5 7 CN36(Green)

    X21

    1 3 CN46(Yellow)

    X60

    1 3

    Cn47

    X62

    X61

    1 3 6 5 5 3 1

    Cn12

    Znr02

    Znr01

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    Cnout3

    2 3 4 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

    Cnout1

    1 10

    Sw2

    Sw1

    1 8

    Off

    On

    8 1

    Sw4

    Off

    On

    Sw5

    8 1

    Sw6

    Off

    On

    8 7 6 5

    4 Cn10

    3 2

    Cn13

    (Red) 2

    Cnp3

    3 2 1 1 1 3 2 1

    Ps3

    Ps1

    Th11

    Th12

    Cn11

    4 3 2 1

    Th15

    Th16

    4 5 6 3 2 1 (Yellow)

    Cn07

    Cn05

    (Red) 4 5 6 3 2 1 4 5 6 3 2 1 (Blue)

    Cn06

    Indoor/outdoor Transmission line

    Tb02

    S(Shield)

    16 15 14 7 6 5 4 2 3 13 12 11 10 9 8 4 2 3 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 3

    ~208V-230V

    Power Supply

    60Hz

    Breaker(16A)

    Fuse(16A)

    Pull Box

    Indoor Unit

    To Next

    1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1

    Cnout4

    Cnout2

    4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 13 14 15 10 11 12 9 7 8 6 8 7 6 12 11 10 9 15 14 13 16 16 5 4 4 5 CN35(Blue)

    X20

    X19

    X39

    7 5 3 1 CN34(Black)

    X18

    X17

    X38

    7 5 3 1 CN33(Red)

    X16

    X15

    X37

    7 5 3 1

    Cn39

    Cn32

    1 3 5 7

    X36

    X13

    X14

    Cnvcc2

    3 2 1 3 (Blue) 1 (Yellow)

    Cn40

    X41

    X40

    X42

    1 3 5 7 CN41(Green)

    X44

    X43

    X45

    Cn42

    X47

    X46

    X48

    CN43(Red)

    X50

    X49

    X51

    CN44(Yellow)

    X53

    X52

    3 5 1 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 3 5 7 6 5 4 2 3 2 3 6 5 4 7 12 11 10 9 8 11 12 10 7 9 8 1 1 2 3 4 1 2

    X54

    CN45(Green)

    X56

    X55

    X57

    7 5 3 1 7 15 14 13 1 2 4 3 16 14 15 13 5 6 8 7 16 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 8 5 6 7 1 2 4 3 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 3 1 2 1 3 4 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 2 3 4 Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

    F01

    SVM1,2,1b,2b Solenoid valve Solenoid valve

    Sv1~16A,B,C

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for Transmission) Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb01

    Cont.B

    Rel.B

    Tr

    Th11,12,15,16

    Lev1~3

    Ps1,3

    Symbol Name (Symbol explanation) Transformer Thermister sensor Expansion valve Pressure sensor Circuit board Relay BC controller 6 6

    Cont.B

    Rel.B

    M2

    M1

    Sv1B

    Sv1A

    Sv1C

    Sv2C

    Sv2A

    Sv2B

    Sv3C

    Sv3A

    Sv3B

    Sv4C

    Sv4A

    Sv4B

    Sv5C

    Sv5A

    Sv5B

    Sv6C

    Sv6A

    Sv6B

    Sv10C

    Sv10A

    Sv10B

    Sv9C

    Sv9A

    Sv9B

    Sv8C

    Sv8A

    Sv8B

    Sv7C

    Sv7A

    Sv7B

    Sv11C

    Sv11A

    Sv11B

    Sv12C

    Sv12A

    Sv12B

    Sv13C

    Sv13A

    Sv13B

    Sv14C

    Sv14A

    Sv14B

    Sv15C

    Sv15A

    Sv15B

    Sv16C

    Sv16A

    Sv16B

    SVM2b

    Svm2

    Svm1

    SVM1b

    Tb01

    T1

    T2

    T3

    T4

    T5

    T6

    T7

    T8

    T9

    T10

    T11

    T12

    T13

    T14

    T15

    T16

    T1~16

    Terminal

    M

    Lev1

    Lev2

    M

    Lev3

    M

    LD1:CPU in operation

    U

    U

    Dsa

    1 1 3 5 7 3

    Page 124

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 113 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    4 Electrical Components and Wiring Diagrams (10) CMB-P1016NU-HB model

    L2

    L1

    G

    G

    Note:1.TB02 is transmission terminal block.Never connect power line to it. 2.The initial set values of swith on CONT.B are as follows.

    Sw1:0

    Sw2:0

    Tb01

    Sv16B

    Sv16A

    Sv16C

    Sv15B

    Sv15A

    Sv15C

    Sv14B

    Sv14A

    Sv14C

    Sv13B

    Sv13A

    Sv13C

    Sv12B

    Sv12A

    Sv12C

    Sv11B

    Sv11A

    Sv11C

    Sv7B

    Sv7A

    Sv7C

    Sv8B

    Sv8A

    Sv8C

    Sv9B

    Sv9A

    Sv9C

    Sv10B

    Sv10A

    Sv10C

    Sv6B

    Sv6A

    Sv6C

    Sv5B

    Sv5A

    Sv5C

    Sv4B

    Sv4A

    Sv4C

    Sv3B

    Sv3A

    Sv3C

    Sv2B

    Sv2A

    Sv2C

    Sv1C

    Sv1A

    Sv1B

    M1

    M2

    Rel.B

    Cont.B

    4 3 2 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 4 3 1 2 1 3 2 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 3 4 2 1 16 13 15 14 16 3 4 2 1 13 14 15 7 1 3 5 7

    X57

    X55

    X56

    CN45(Green)

    X54

    2 1 4 3 2 1 1 1 8 9 7 10 12 11 8 9 10 11 12 7 4 5 6 3 2 3 2 4 5 6 7 5 3 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 5 3

    X52

    X53

    CN44(Yellow)

    X51

    X49

    X50

    CN43(Red)

    X48

    X46

    X47

    Cn42

    X45

    X43

    X44

    CN41(Green) 7 5 3 1

    X42

    X40

    X41

    Cn40

    (Yellow) 1 (Blue) 3 1 2 3

    Cnvcc2

    X14

    X13

    X36

    7 5 3 1

    Cn32

    Cn39

    1 3 5 7

    X37

    X15

    X16

    CN33(Red) 1 3 5 7

    X38

    X17

    X18

    CN34(Black) 1 3 5 7

    X39

    X19

    X20

    CN35(Blue) 5 4 4 5 16 16 13 14 15 9 10 11 12 6 7 8 6 8 7 9 12 11 10 15 14 13 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4

    Cnout2

    Cnout4

    1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1

    To Next

    Indoor Unit

    Pull Box

    Fuse(15A) Breaker(15A)

    Power Supply

    ~208V-230V

    3 3 2 1 2 1 1 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 2 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 3 2 4 5 6 7 14 15 16

    S(Shield)Tb02

    Indoor/outdoor Transmission line

    Cn07

    (Yellow) 1 2 3 6 5 4

    Th15

    1 2 3 4

    Cn11

    Th12

    1 1 2 (Red)

    Cn13

    2 3

    Cn10

    4 5 6 7 8

    Sw6

    1 8

    Sw5

    Sw4

    1 8

    On

    Off

    On

    Off

    On

    Off

    8 1

    Sw1

    Sw2

    10 1

    Cnout1

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 4 3 2

    Cnout3

    F01

    250Vac

    6.3A F

    Znr01

    Znr02

    Cn12

    1 3 5 7 5

    X35

    X11

    3 1

    X12

    CN31(Yellow)

    X09

    X34

    7 5 3 1

    X10

    CN30(Black) 7 1 3 5

    X33

    X07

    X08

    CN29(Green) 7 5 3 1

    X32

    X05

    X06

    CN28(Blue)

    X04

    X03

    X31

    7 5 3 1 CN27(Red) 1 3 5 7

    X30

    X01

    X02

    Cn26

    1 3 CNTR(Red) 3 1

    Cn38

    Tr

    1 1 1 3 2 3 2 2

    Cn02

    Cn03

    (Yellow)

    Cnvcc1

    (Blue) Terminal

    T1~T16

    Solenoid valve

    Sv1~16A,B,C

    Tb02

    Terminal block (for Transmission) Terminal block (for power source)

    Tb01

    Cont.B

    Rel.B

    Tr

    Th12,15

    Lev3

    Symbol Name Transformer Thermister sensor Expansion valve Circuit board Relay BC controller (Symbol explanation)

    T1

    T2

    T3

    T4

    T5

    T6

    T11

    T12

    T13

    T14

    T15

    T16

    T10

    T9

    T8

    T7

    Fuse AC250V 6.3A F

    F01

    t° t°

    Dsa

    U

    U

    LD1:CPU in operation

    M

    Lev3

    3 3 7 5 3 1 1

    Page 125

    [4-7 BC Controller Electrical Wiring Diagrams ]

  • 114 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 126

  • 115 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 5 Control 5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings .................................................................................... 117 5-1-1 Outdoor Unit Switch Functions and Factory Settings ......................................................................... 117 5-1-2 Indoor Unit Switch Functions and Factory Settings ............................................................................ 121 5-1-3 Remote Controller Switch Functions and Factory Settings................................................................. 122 5-1-4 BC Controller Switch Settings............................................................................................................. 123 5-2 Outdoor Unit Control........................................................................................................................ 124 5-2-1 Overview............................................................................................................................................. 124 5-2-2 Rotation Control.................................................................................................................................. 124 5-2-3 Initial Control....................................................................................................................................... 124 5-2-4 Startup Control.................................................................................................................................... 124 5-2-5 Refrigerant Bypass Control................................................................................................................. 125 5-2-6 Frequency Control .............................................................................................................................. 126 5-2-7 Defrost Operation Control................................................................................................................... 127 5-2-8 ON-defrost operation control............................................................................................................... 129 5-2-9 Refrigerant Recovery Control ............................................................................................................. 129 5-2-10 Oil recovery during compressor operation at low frequency............................................................... 130 5-2-11 Outdoor Unit Fan Control.................................................................................................................... 130 5-2-12 Compressor discharge superheat control (expansion valve )................................................ 131 5-2-13 Evaporation Temperature Control (Expansion Valves )....................................................... 131 5-2-14 Control at Initial Startup ...................................................................................................................... 131 5-2-15 Emergency Operation Mode............................................................................................................... 133 5-2-16 Unit Control Scheme........................................................................................................................... 135 5-2-17 Refrigerant Circuits and Refrigerant Cycle Diagrams ......................................................................... 136 5-2-18 Operation Mode .................................................................................................................................. 137 5-2-19 Demand Control.................................................................................................................................. 138 5-3 BC Controller Control....................................................................................................................... 139 5-4 Operation Flowcharts....................................................................................................................... 140 5-4-1 Operation Sequence Flowchart .......................................................................................................... 140 5-4-2 Actions Performed in Different Modes ................................................................................................ 143

    Page 127

  • 116 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 128

    [5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings ]

  • 117 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5 Control5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings 5-1-1 Outdoor Unit Switch Functions and Factory Settings (1) Control board 1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-" or where the cells are blank, which may be set to OFF for a reason. 2) A: Only the switch on OC needs to be set for the setting to be effective. B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same seeing for the setting to be effective. C: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set. 3) When set to the performance-priority mode, the low-noise mode will be terminated, and the units will operate in the normal mode. Cooling: Ambient temperature or the high pressure is high. Heating: When the outside air temperature is low or when the low pressure is low. Refer to the following page(s). [2-4-7 Var- ious Control Methods Using the Signal Input/Output Connector on Outdoor Unit](page 26) 4) Operation noise is reduced by controlling the compressor frequencies and the rotation speed of the outdoor unit fans. CN3D needs to be set. Refer to the following page(s). [2-4-7 Various Control Methods Using the Signal Input/Output Connec- tor on Outdoor Unit](page 26) Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing Units that require switch setting (Note 2)

    Off

    On

    Swu

    1-2 Unit address set- ting Set to 00 or 51-100 with the dial switch Before power on

    C

    Sw5

    1 Centralized control switch Without connec- tion to the central- ized controller With connection to the centralized con- troller Before power on

    B

    2 Deletion of connec- tion information Normal control Deletion Before power on

    A

    3
  • Preset before shipment
  • 4
  • -
  • 5
  • -
  • 6
  • -
  • 7
  • -
  • Sw6

    4 Model setting (out- door unit/high static pressure setting) Normal static pres- sure High static pres- sure Before power on

    C

    5 Model setting (out- door unit/high static pressure setting) High (60 Pa) High (30 Pa) Before power on

    C

    7 Performance-prior- ity/low-noise mode setting Performance-pri- ority mode (Note 3) Quiet-priority mode Anytime after power on

    A

    8 Low-noise mode/ step demand switching Low-noise mode (Note 4) Step demand mode Before power on

    C

    10 Self-diagnosis/ function setting No. display setting Self-diagnosis monitor display Function setting No. display Anytime after power on

    C

    Page 129

    [5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings ]

  • 118 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1) To change the settings, set SW6-10 to ON, set SW4, and press and hold SWP01 for 2 seconds or longer (OFF↔ON). LED3 will light up when the switch setting is ON, and lights off when OFF. Use the LED3 display to confirm that the settings are properly made. The settings will need to be set again when the control board is replaced. Write down the settings on the electrical wiring drawing label. 2) A: OC: Only the switch on OC needs to be set for the setting to be effective. B: OC: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same seeing for the setting to be effective. C: OC: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set. D: OC: The switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set. 3) For details, refer to the following page(s).[5-2-7 Defrost Operation Control](page 127) 4) The table below shows how the target evaporation temperature is set with SW4 (982). 5) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-" or where the cells are blank, which may be set to OFF for a reason. 6) The settings that are configured with SW4 (SW6-10: ON) will automatically be stored on the indoor units that support the new function*. The stored settings will automatically be restored when the outdoor unit control board is replaced. If none of the connected indoor units supports the new function, no configuration information will be saved. If this is the case, manually record the settings configuration on the control box panel. *The new function is supported on most units that are manufactured in December of 2012 and later. Depending on the model, this function may be added on later date. Ask your dealer for further details. 7) The table below shows the combinations of the settings for items No.929 and No.935 and the Heating Capacity mode setting that corresponds to each combination. 8) The default settings for the setting item No.974 on the PURY-HP-TKMU-A-H series units is "ON." Set this switch to "OFF" to output error signals. When this switchis set to "OFF," base heaters cannot be used. Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing Units that require switch setting (Note 2) OFF (LED3 Unlit) ON (LED3 Lit)

    Sw4

    Sw6-10:

    Off

    1-10

    1:On, 0:Off

    Self-diagnosis/operation monitor Refer to the following page(s). [9 LED Sta- tus Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board](page 325) Anytime after power on

    C

    Sw4

    1-10

    [0:Off,

    1:On]

    (Note 1)

    Sw6-10:On

    No.769 1000000011 Test run mode: ON/OFF Stops all ICs Sends a test-run sig- nal to all IC Anytime after power on

    A

    No.832 0000001011 Cumulative compressor opera- tion time deletion Retained Cleared Anytime after power on (OFF→ON)

    C

    No.848 0000101011 ON-defrost Ineffective Effective Anytime after power on

    A

    No.896 0000000111 Clearance of error his- tory

    Oc

    Retained (IC/OC) Deleted (IC/OC) Anytime after power on (OFF→ON)

    C

    Os

    Retained (OS) Deleted (OS) No.897 1000000111 High sensible heat operation set- ting Normal control High sensible heat operation mode After power on and before compressor startup

    A

    No.912 0000100111 Pump down function Normal control Pump down opera- tion After being energized and while the compres- sor is stopped

    A

    No.913 1000100111 Forced defrost (Note 3) Normal control Forced defrost starts 10 minutes after the completion of defrost op- eration (OFF→ON) or 10 minutes after com- pressor start-up (OFF→ON)

    D

    No.915 1100100111 Defrost start temperature (Note 3)

    Hp72: -10°C [14°F]

    Hp96: -8°C [18°F]

    -5°C [23°F]

    Anytime after power on

    B

    No.916 0010100111 Defrost end temperature (Note 3)

    7°C [45°F]

    12°C [54°F]

    Anytime after power on

    B

    No.921 1001100111 Temperature unit display

    °C

    °F

    Anytime after power on

    C

    No.922 0101100111 Refrigerant amount adjustment Normal control Refrigerant amount adjust mode Anytime after power on (except during initial startup/becomes ineffective 60 minutes after compressor started up.

    A

    No.932 0010010111 Heating backup Disabled Enabled Anytime after power on

    A

    No.929 1000010111 Heating Capacity mode Depends on the setting combination (Note 7) Anytime after power on

    A

    No.935 1110010111 No.972 0011001111 Automatic cooling/heating mode (IC with the smallest address) Normal control Automatic cooling/ heating mode After power on and before compressor startup

    A

    No.974 0111001111 Base heater (Note 8) Ineffective Effective After power on and before compressor startup

    B

    No.982 0110101111 Target evaporation temperature setting Refer to Note 4). Anytime after power on

    A

    Switch No.929

    Off

    On

    No.935

    Off

    Intelligent Heat Standard

    On

    High Heat
  • Sw4(982)

  • Off → On → Off → On → Off → On

    Target evaporating temperature 0 [32 ] [32 ] [32 ] [25 ] -2 [28 ] 0 0 -4 [21 ] -6

    Page 130

    [5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings ]

  • 119 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control (2) INV board

    1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    Functions are switched with the following connector. ŒCN6 short-circuit connector is mated with the mating connector. ŒLeave the short-circuit connector on the mating connector during normal operation to enable error detection and protect the equipment from damage.

    2) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    ŒAll are set to OFF at factory shipment. Unless otherwise specified, set the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to a certain setting for a reason. ŒLeave SW1-1 to OFF during normal operation. If it is set to ON, errors cannot be detected and the unit may be damaged. Connector Function Function according to connec- tor Setting timing Enabled Disabled CN6 short- circuit con- nector Enabling/disabling the following error detection functions; ACCT sensor failure (5301 Detail No. 115) ACCT sensor circuit failure (5301 Detail No.117) IPM open/ACCT erroneous wiring (5301 Detail No. 119) Detection of ACCT erroneous wiring (5301 Detail No.120) Error detec- tion enabled Error detec- tion disable (No load op- eration is pos- sible.) Anytime after power on Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing

    Off

    On

    Sw1

    1 Enabling/disabling the following error detection functions; ACCT/DCCT sensor failure (5301 Detail No. 115, 116) ACCT/DCCT sensor circuit failure (5301 Detail No.117,118) IPM open/Disconnected CNCT2 (5301 Detail No. 119) Detection of erroneous wiring (5301 Detail No.120) Error detec- tion enabled Error detec- tion disable (No load op- eration is pos- sible.) Anytime after power on 2
  • -
  • -
  • 3
  • -
  • -
  • 4
  • -
  • -
  • 5
  • -
  • -
  • 6
  • -
  • -
  • -

    Page 131

    [5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings ]

  • 120 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (3) Fan INV board ŒOnly the addresses are preset before shipment (All other switches are set to OFF.) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason. ŒSet SW1-5 on the fan-box-side fan inverter board to ON (address = 5). Set SW1-6 on the fan-box-side fan inverter board to ON (address = 6). ŒLeave SW1-1 to OFF during normal operation. Setting this switch to ON will disable the error detection function and may result in equipment damage. Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing

    Off

    On

    Sw1

    1 Enabling/Disabling no-load operation No-load operation will continue for approxi- mately 30 seconds, and then the unit will come to an abnormal stop. Refer to the section on "In- verter" for details. [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) No-load oper- ation disabled No-load oper- ation enabled Anytime after power on 2
  • -
  • -
  • 3
  • -
  • -
  • 4
  • -
  • -
  • 5 Address setting (Control box side) 0 5 Before power on 6
  • -
  • -
  • Page 132

    [5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings ]

  • 121 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-1-2 Indoor Unit Switch Functions and Factory Settings (1) Dipswitches

    1) Sw1,3

    The switch setting may vary depending on the indoor unit's type. Refer to relevant Service Handbook for details. (2) Address switch Actual indoor unit address setting varies in different systems. Refer to the installation manual for the outdoor unit for details on how to make the address setting. Each address is set with a combination of the settings for the 10's digit and 1's digit. (Example) When setting the address to "3", set the 1's digit to 3, and the 10's digit to 0. When setting the address to "25", set the 1's digit to 5, and the 10's digit to 2.

    Sw3-1

    Off

    Off

    Off

    On

    On

    On

    Off

    On

    Off

    On

    Off

    On

    Off

    On

    Very Low Low Preset speed Preset speed Preset speed Stop Stop Stop Stop Switch setting

    Sw1-7

    Sw1-8

    Heating Cooling Cooling-only/heat pump Heat pump Cooling-only Heat pump Fan speed during Thermo-OFF Note 2. If both SW1-7 and SW1-8 are set to ON, the fan remains stopped during heating Thermo-OFF. To prevent incorrect temperature detection due to a build-up of warm air around the indoor unit, use the built-in temperature sensor on the remote controller (SW1-1) instead of the one on the indoor unit inlet thermistor. Note 3. By setting SW3-1, SW1-7, and SW1-8 to a certain configuration, the fan can be set to remain stopped during cooling Thermo-OFF. See the table below for details. Note 4. The settings that are configured from the remote controller will automatically be stored on the outdoor unit. The stored settings will automatically be restored when the indoor unit control board is replaced. Switch Function Function according to switch setting

    Off

    On

    Switch setting timing Notes

    Sw1

    Sw3

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Room temperature detection position Clogged filter detection Filter check reminder time setting Outside air intake Remote display option Humidifier control Self-recovery after power failure Fan speed setting for Heating Thermo-OFF Power source start-stop Unit model selection Louver Vane Vane swing function
  • Vane angle limit setting
  • for cooling operation Initial vane position Heating 4°C [7.2°F] up Automatic LEV value conversion function Indoor unit inlet 100h Disabled Fan output 2500h Enabled Thermo-ON signal Built-in sensor on the remote controller Available During heating operation According to the SW1-7 setting Heat pump Always on while in the heating mode Fan speed setting for Heating Thermo-OFF Very Low Low Preset speed Cooling only Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Not available Available Not available Available Not available Not available Available Not available Available Not available Available
  • -
  • -
  • Downblow B,C
  • Horizontal While the unit is stopped (Remote controller OFF) Always set to OFF on PKFY-AM model units Set to ON (built-in sensor on the remote controller) on All Fresh (PEFY-VMH-F) model units Applicable to All Fresh model units (PEFY-VMH-F) only Applicable to All Fresh model units (PEFY-VMH-F) only Always set to OFF on PKFY-VAM model units PLFY-VLMD model only Set to ON on floor-standing (PFFY) type units Note 1. Settings in the shaded areas are factory settings.(Refer to the table below for the factory setting of the switches whose factory settings are not indicated by the shaded cells.) Always set to Downblow B or C on PKFY-VAM model units Disabled SHm setting

    2°C [3.6°F]

    10°C [18°F]

    5°C [9°F]

    15°C [27°F]

    The setting depends on the model and type. The setting depends on the model and type. SCm setting Disabled Forced heating operation at OA temp of 5 C or below
  • -
  • -

    Page 133

    [5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings ]

  • 122 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5-1-3 Remote Controller Switch Functions and Factory Settings (1) MA remote controller (PAR-20MAU) The SW is located at the bottom of the remote controller under the cover. Operate the switches to perform the remote con- troller main/sub setting or other function settings. Normally, do not change the settings of switches other than the SW1 (main/ sub switching switch). (All the switches are set to "ON" at factory setting.) The MA remote controller (PAR-21MAAU,PAR-30MAAU) does not have the switches listed above. Refer to the installation manual for the function setting. Remote controller Switching switch 1

    On

    2 3 4 Switch 2 1 Function Remote controller main/sub setting At power on of the remote controller Normal startup Timer mode startup 3 Cooling/heating display set by automatic setting Displayed Not displayed 4 Suction temperature display (discharge temperature display) Displayed Not displayed Operation by switch settings Switch setting timing

    On

    Off

    Main Sub Before power on Before power on Before power on Before power on When two remote controllers are connected to one group, set either of the remote controllers to "Sub". When the program timer (only few stock products are available) is connected, set to "Timer mode startup" to resume the operation with timer mode after power is restored. When the automatic mode is set and the "Cooling"/"Heating" display is not necessary, set to "Not displayed". When the suction temperature (discharge temperature) display is not necessary, set to "Not displayed".

    Page 134

    [5-1 Dipswitch Functions and Factory Settings ]

  • 123 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control (2) ME remote controller (PAR-F27MEA-US) Set the address of the remote controller with the rotary switch. To set addresses, use a precision slotted screw driver [2.0 mm [0.08 in] (w)], and do not apply than 19.6N. The use of any other tool or applying too much load may damage the switch. 5-1-4 BC Controller Switch Settings 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10's digit 1's digit (left) (right) Remote controller unit Rotary switch Example: In case of address 108 Address setting range Setting method Main remote controller 101-150 Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the same group. Sub remote controller 151-200 Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the same group. Setting of rotary switch Address No. 01-99*1 101-199 with the 100's digit automatically being set to 1*2 00 200 *1. At factory shipment, the rotary switch is set to 01. *2. The address range that can be set with the ME remote controller is between 101 and 200. When the dials are set to a number between 01 and 99, the 100's digit is automatically set to [1]. When the dials are set to 00, the 100's digit is automatically set to [2]. Switch Function Function according to switch setting Switch setting timing

    Off

    On

    Sw4

    1 Model setting

    R410A

  • Always leave this switch to OFF.
  • 2 - 5
  • -
  • -
  • 6 No. of ports 1 2 Before being energized 7, 8
  • -
  • -
  • Sw5

    1 - 6
  • -
  • -
  • 7
  • -
  • -
  • 8
  • -
  • -
  • Page 135

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 124 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5-2 Outdoor Unit Control 5-2-1 Overview ŒThe outdoor units are designated as OC and OS in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large). ŒThe setting of outdoor unit can be verified by using the self-diagnosis switch (SW4). ŒThe OC determines the operation mode and the control mode, and it also communicates with the indoor units. ŒThe OS exercises autonomous distributed control (over defrost, error detection, and actuator control etc.) according to the operation/control mode signals that are sent from the OC. 5-2-2 Rotation Control ŒAt the initial startup, outdoor units start up in the order of "OC and OS." When the cumulative operation time of the OC reaches two hours, the OS will start up before the OC at the next start up. ŒStartup sequence rotation is performed while all the indoor units are stopped. (Even after two hours of operation, startup se- quence rotation is not performed while the compressor is in operation.) In a system with multiple outdoor units (OC and OS), when the integrated operation time of the unit in operation (either OC or OS) reaches one hour during a cooling operation at low outside temperature, that unit will stop and the other unit will go into operation. ŒFor information about rotation control at initial startup, refer to the following page(s). [5-2-14 Control at Initial Startup](page 131) ŒPerforming startup sequence rotation does not change the basic operation of OC and OS. Only startup sequence is changed. ŒStartup sequence of the outdoor units can be checked with the self-diagnosis switch (SW4) on the OC. 5-2-3 Initial Control ŒWhen the power is turned on, the initial processing of the microcomputer is given top priority. ŒDuring the initial processing, control processing of the operation signal is suspended. (The control processing is resumed after the initial processing is completed. Initial processing involves data processing in the microcomputer and initial setting of each of the LEV opening. This process will take up to 5 minutes.) ŒDuring the initial processing, the LED monitor on the outdoor unit's control board displays S/W version → refrigerant type → Model and capacity → and communication address in turn every second. 5-2-4 Startup Control ŒThe upper limit of frequency during the first 3 minutes of the operation is 50 Hz. ŒWhen the power is turned on, normal operation will start after the initial start-up mode (to be described later) has been com- pleted (with a restriction on the frequency).

    Sw4 (Sw6-10:Off)

    Display ŒThe unit is designated as the OC: "oc" appears on the display. ŒThe unit is designated as OS: "oS" appears on the display. ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325)

    On

    1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10

    Sw4 (Sw6-10:Off)

    Display ŒOC→OS: "oc" and the "OC" address appear alternately on the display. ŒOS→OC: "oS" and the "OS" address appear alternately on the display. ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325)

    On

    1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10

    Page 136

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 125 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-2-5 Refrigerant Bypass Control Bypass solenoid valves, which bypass the high- and low- pressure sides, perform the following functions. (1) Bypass solenoid valve (SV1a) (ON = Open) (2) Bypass solenoid valve (SV9) (ON = Open) (3) Bypass solenoid valve (SV5b) (ON = Closed) Operation SV1a

    On

    Off

    When starting-up the compressor of each outdoor unit ON for 4 minutes. After the restoration of thermo or 3 minutes after restart ON for 4 minutes. During cooling or heating operation with the compressor stopped Always ON. Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2MPa[29psi] or less After the operation has stopped ON for 3 minutes. Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2MPa[29psi] or less During defrost operation

    On

    While the compressor is operating at the minimum frequency and when the low pres- sure (63LS) drops (3 or more minutes after compressor startup) When low pressure (63LS) drops below 0.23MPa[33psi]. When low pressure (63LS) ex- ceeds 0.38MPa[55psi]. When high pressure (63HS1) rises When 63HS1 exceeds 3.62MPa[525psi] When 63HS1 is or below 3.43MPa[497psi] and 30 seconds have passed Operation

    Sv9

    On

    Off

    When high pressure (63HS1) rises during the heating operation When 63HS1 exceeds 3.50MPa [507psi] When SV5b is ON and the pressure is 2.70MPa[391psi]or below Others Always OFF Operation SV5b ON (Closed) OFF (Open) When high pressure (63HS1) rises during the heating operation When the pressure is 2.70MPa [391psi] or below When SV9 is ON and the pressure is 3.50MPa [507psi] or more At startup ON (Closed) During defrost cycle ON (Closed) When returning to normal operation after completion of the defrost cycle OFF (Open) for 3 minutes and goes ON (Closed) Others Always ON (Closed)

    Page 137

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 126 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5-2-6 Frequency Control ŒDepending on the capacity required, the frequency of the compressor is controlled to keep constant evaporation temperature (0°C [32°F] = 0.71 MPa [103 psi]) during cooling operation, and condensing temperature (49°C [120°F] = 2.88 MPa [418 psi]) during heating operation. ŒThe table below summarizes the operating frequency ranges of the inverter compressor during normal operation. ŒThe OS in the multiple-outdoor-unit system operates at the actual compressor frequency value that is calculated by the OS based on the preliminary compressor frequency value that the OC determines. The maximum frequency during heating operation depends on the outside air temperature and the dipswitch settings. (1) Pressure limit The upper limit of high pressure (63HS1) is preset, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency is decreased every 15 seconds. ŒThe actuation pressure is when the high-pressure reading on 63HS1 is 3.58MPa[519psi]. (2) Discharge temperature limit Discharge temperature (TH4) of the compressor in operation is monitored, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency is decreased every minute. ŒOperating temperature is 115°C [239°F]. (3) Periodic frequency control Frequency control other than the ones performed at start-up, upon status change, and for protection is called periodic frequen- cy control (convergent control) and is performed in the following manner. Periodic control cycle Periodic control is performed after the following time has passed Œ30 seconds after either compressor start-up or the completion of defrost operation Œ30 seconds after frequency control based on discharge temperature or pressure limit The amount of frequency change The amount of frequency change is controlled to approximate the target value based on the evaporation temperature (Te) and condensing temperature (Tc). Model Frequency/cooling Frequency/heating Max Min Max Min

    Hp72

    50Hz 15Hz 103Hz 29Hz

    Hp96

    64Hz 15Hz 120Hz 29Hz

    Page 138

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 127 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-2-7 Defrost Operation Control (1) Starting the defrost operation ŒThe defrost cycle will start when all of the three conditions (outside temperature, cumulative compressor operation time, and pipe temperature) under , , or are met. 1) Pipe temperature(TH6) ŒThe defrost cycle will not start if other outdoor units are in the defrost cycle or until a minimum of 10 minutes have passed since the completion of the last defrost cycle. ŒIf 10 minutes have passed since compressor startup or since the completion of a defrost cycle, a forced defrost cycle can be started by setting DIP SW4 (913) to ON. ŒEven if the defrost-prohibit timer is set to 90 minutes (or 150 minutes for "Condition 3" to be met), the actual defrost-prohibit time for the next defrost cycle is 50 minutes if the last defrost cycle took 12 minutes. ŒAll units in the heating mode will simultaneously go into the defrost cycle in a system with multiple units. The units that are not in operation may or may not go into the defrost cycle, depending on the cumulative operation time of their compressors. Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Outside temperature

    (Th7)

    -5ºC [23ºF] or above -5ºC [23ºF] or below Cumulative compressor operation time 50 minutes or more 90 minutes or more if the defrost prohibit timer is set to 90. 250 minutes or more Pipe temperature

    (Th6)

    The pipe tempera- ture has stayed be- low the temperatures in the table below (Note1) for three minutes. The pipe temperature has stayed below the value obtained from the formula "Outside temperature (TH7) - 5ºC [23ºF] " for three minutes, or the 63LS reading has stayed below the value obtained from the formula "1.5 + 0.02 × (20+TH7ºC) (kgf/cm2) [21.3+0.158×(4+TH7ºF) (lb/in2) ] " for three minutes. The pipe temperature has stayed below the temperatures in the table below (Note1) for three minutes

    Hp72

    Hp96

    Sw4 (915) Off

    -10ºC [14ºF] -8ºC [18ºF]

    Sw4 (915) On

    -5ºC [23ºF] -5ºC [23ºF]

    Page 139

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 128 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (2) Defrost operation (3) Stopping the defrost operation ŒThe defrost cycle will end when 12 minutes have passed from the beginning of the defrost cycle, OR when the piping tem- peratures (TH9, TH11, and TH6) have remained above the values listed in the table below for four minutes with SW4 (916) being set to OFF or two minutes with SW4 (916) being set to ON. ŒThe defrost cycle will not end for two minutes once started unless one of the following conditions is met : Pipe temperature reaches 25°C [77°F] and SW4 (916) is set to OFF OR =25+TH7°C [77°F+TH7] and SW4 (916) is set to ON.

    *1 (5°C [41°F]

    25°C [77°F]).

    ŒIn the multiple-outdoor-unit system, defrosting is stopped on all units at the same time. (4) Problems during defrost operation ŒIf a problem is detected during defrost operation, the operation will be stopped, and the defrost prohibition time based on the integrated compressor operation time will be set to 20 minutes. (5) Change in the number of operating indoor units during defrost operation ŒEven when there is a change in the number of operating indoor units during defrost operation, the operation will continue, and an adjustment will be made after the completion of the defrost operation. ŒDefrost operation will be continued, even if the indoor units stop or under the Thermo-OFF conditions until it has run its course. Outdoou unit Compressor frequency Model Compressor frequency HP72 model 107Hz HP96 model 107Hz Outdoor unit fan Stopped SV1a ON (open) SV5b ON (closed) 21S4a

    Off

    Sv9

    OFF (closed) BC controller

    Lev1

    G type: 4000, GA type: 6000

    Lev3

    G type: 1000, GA type: 2000 GB, HB type: 60 (full closed)

    Svm1

    On

    Svm2

    Off

    SVM1b

    On

    SVM2b

    Off

    Sv

    B

    Off

    Sv

    A

    Ports that are connected to the indoor units in cooling Thermo-ON Other ports : OFF Model TH9, TH11, and TH6

    Sw4 (916) Off

    Sw4 (916) On

    72 model

    7°C [45°F]

    12°C [54°F]

    96 model

    7°C [45°F]

    12°C [54°F]

    Page 140

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 129 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-2-8 ON-defrost operation control (1) ON-defrost operation start conditions ŒOn-defrost operation will start when all the conditions listed in the table below are met (outside temperature, cumulative com- pressor operation time, and piping temperature). ŒSW4 (848) must be set to ON to perform ON-defrost operation. (2) Valve operation during ON-defrost cycle (3) ON-defrost operation end conditions ŒON-defrost operation will end when the ON-defrost operation time in the table below is reached or when the piping tempera- tures (TH9 and TH11) have remained above the temperature in the table below for three minutes. 5-2-9 Refrigerant Recovery Control Refrigerant recovery is performed for each BC port during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating in- side the units that are stopped (in the fan mode), in the cooling mode, or in the heating Thermo-OFF mode. It is also performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the outdoor heat exchanger. Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle (during Cooling-only, Cooling-main, Heating-only, or Heating-main mode) The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all of the following conditions are met: 1) When 5 minutes have passed in the Heating-only or Heating-main mode or 30 seconds have passed in the Cooling-only or Cooling-main mode since the completion of the previous refrigerant recovery cycle AND the when following conditions are met.

    Th4 > 105°C [221°F]

    2) When the port is not in the 4-minute restart delay mode Starting criteria for the refrigerant recovery cycle (during Cooling-only, Cooling-main, Heating-only, or Heating-main mode) 1) When the port is in the cooling Thermo-OFF, fan, or stop mode SVC at the port turns on for 30 seconds. 2) The opening of LEV1 and LEV3 is increased. Single unit Combination units Outside temperature (TH7)

    3.5°C [38.3°F] - 7.0°C[44.6°F]

    Cumulative compressor operation time When 30 minutes have passed When 50 minutes have passed Piping temperature (TH6)

    Th6>Th7−8°C [14°F]

    Th6>Th7−10°C [18°F]

    Single unit Combination units Top HEX in defrost cycle Bottom HEX in de- frost cycle Unit in defrost cycle Unit in operation Outdoor unit fan In operation In operation Stopped In operation SV1a

    Off

    SV5b

    On

    Off

    On

    Sv9

    Off

    Off

    Off

    Off

    Sv10

    On

    Off

    On

    Off

    Sv11

    Off

    On

    On

    Off

    SV4a

    Off

    On

    Off

    On

    SV4b

    On

    Off

    Off

    On

    SV4d

    Off

    Off

    Off

    Off

    21S4a

    On

    Single unit Combination units ON-defrost operation time When 20 minutes have passed When 30 minutes have passed Piping temperature (TH9, TH11)

    6°C [43°F]

    Page 141

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 130 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5-2-10 Oil recovery during compressor operation at low frequency ŒOil collection operation is performed after units have been operated continuously for an extended period at the compressor frequency F as listed in the table below (Condition 1). It is performed by fixing the compressor frequency F to the value listed below (Condition 2) for a maximum of four minutes. ŒThe opening of the LEV on indoor units will increase during oil collection operation. 5-2-11 Outdoor Unit Fan Control (1) Control method ŒDepending on the capacity required, the rotation speed of the outdoor unit fan is controlled by the inverter to keep a constant condensing temperature of (outside temperature +10°C [50°F]) during cooling operation and a constant evaporation temper- ature of (0°C [32°F] =0.71 Hp72

    Hp96

    Condition 1

    F < 22

    F < 32

    Condition 2

    F = 25

    F = 36 (Cooling-Only and Cooling-Main) F = 46 (Heating-Only and Heating-Main) Model Operation mode Operation patterns Solenoid valve SV4a SV4b SV4c SV4d HP72, HP96 models Cooling-only Cooling-main 1

    Off

    On

  • On

  • 2

    Off

    On

  • Off

  • 3

    On

    On

  • Off

  • Heating-only 1

    On

    On

  • Off

  • Heating-main 1

    On

    On

  • On

  • 2

    On

    On

  • Off

  • Defrost 1

    On

    On

  • Off

  • Page 142

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 131 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-2-12 Compressor discharge superheat control (expansion valve ) ŒCompressor discharge superheat of OC and OS is controlled separately. ŒCompressor discharge superheat (calculated based on the compressor discharge temperature (TH4) and high pressure (63HS)) is controlled by LEV4 every 30 seconds to stay within the certain target ranges that corresponds to given compressor frequencies. 5-2-13 Evaporation Temperature Control (Expansion Valves ) (1) LEV5 control will begin when all of the following conditions are met. ŒUnits are operated in the Heating-Only or Heating-Main mode.

    ŒTh7<5°C [41°F]

    Œ63LS<0.69MPa [99psi]

    ŒTh15<4°C [39°F]

    (2) LEV5 control will end when one or more of the following conditions are met. ŒUnits are operated in the mode other than Heating-Main or Heating-Only.

    ŒTh7>10°C [50°F]

    Œ63LS>0.98MPa [142psi] ŒThe LEV is controlled every 30 seconds to maintain constant the bypass inlet temperature of the BC controller during heat- ingmain mode or heating mode. When LEV5 is being controlled, SV4a, b, and d will all be turned off. ŒThe LEV operates at 300 pulse while the compressor is stopped. The LEV opens to a specified position in response to chang- es in heat exchanger capacity control patterns during cooling only or cooling main mode. 5-2-14 Control at Initial Startup ŒWhen started up for the first time before 12 hours have elapsed after power on, the unit goes into the initial startup mode. ŒAt the completion of the initial operation mode on the OC and OS, they will go into the normal control mode. (1) Single-outdoor-unit system Compressor frequency Target compressor discharge superheat 93 Hz or above

    20°C [36°F]

    83 - 92Hz

    25°C [45°F]

    72 - 82Hz

    30°C [54°F]

    71 Hz or below

    40°C [72°F]

    50 F 60Hz or F < 50Hz Initial startup mode starts. Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. Initial startup mode complete or the discharge superheat (TH4 - Tc) is detected (within 5 minutes of startup) that remains above approximately 25 degrees for one minute . Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

    Page 143

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 132 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (2) Two-outdoor-unit system ∗1 Qj:Total capacity (models) code For information about capacity codes, refer to the following page(s).[5-1-2 Indoor Unit Switch Functions and Factory Set- tings](page 121) The compressor on the OC starts up. The total operating load of the indoor unit after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above. (*1 Qj 50) Initial startup mode starts. F 60Hz Yes No or F < 50Hz (both OC and OS) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. The compressor on the OC remains in operation, and the compressor on the OS starts up. or F < 50Hz (OC) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. The compressor on the OC starts up. Both the OC and OS stop. The startup sequence of the OC and OS is rotated. or F < 50Hz (OS) Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes. The compressor on the OS starts up. *2 *3 *2 The air conditioning load is too small for both the OC and the OS to simultaneously stay in operation. *3 The air conditioning load is high enough for both OC and OS to simultaneously stay in operation. Initial startup mode complete or the discharge superheat (TH4 - Tc) is detected (within 5 minutes of startup) that remains above approximately 25 degrees for one minute . or the discharge superheat (TH4 - Tc) is detected (within 5 minutes of startup) that remains above approximately 25 degrees for one minute . or the discharge superheat (TH4 - Tc) is detected (within 5 minutes of startup) that remains above approximately 25 degrees for one minute . 50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. 50 F 60Hz (OC) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes. 50 F 60Hz (OS) Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.

    Page 144

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 133 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-2-15 Emergency Operation Mode
  • Problems with the outdoor unit
  • ŒThe HP144 through HP192 models of unit have a mode that allows the outdoor unit to perform an emergency operation when the other outdoor unit in the system malfunctions. ŒThis mode can be started by performing an error reset via the remote controller. (1) Starting the emergency operation 1) When an error occurs, the error source and the error code will be displayed on the display on the remote controller. 2) The error is reset using the remote controller. 3) If an error code appears that permits an emergency operation in step 1) above, (See the table below.), the retry operation starts. 4) If the same error is detected during the retry operation (step 3 above), an emergency operation can be started by resetting the error via the remote controller. Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS) Emergency operation pattern (2 outdoor units) 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable ca- pacity, some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF. Trouble source Error codes that permit an emergency operation Error code description Compressor Fan motor Inverter 0403 Serial communication error 4220,4225 Bus voltage drop 4230,4235 Heatsink overheat protection 4240,4245 Overload protection 4250,4255 Overcurrent relay trip 5110 Heatsink temperature sensor failure (THHS) 5301 Current sensor/circuit failure 5305 Position error Thermistor

    Th4

    5104 Discharge temperature sensor failure

    Th5

    5105 Accumulator inlet temperature sensor failure

    Th6

    5106 Subcool heat exchanger liquid outlet sensor failure

    Th7

    5107 Outside air temperature sensor failure

    Th9

    5109 ON-defrost temperature sensor fault

    Th11

    5111 ON-defrost temperature sensor fault Power 4102 Open phase 4115 Power supply sync signal abnormality

    Oc

    OC failure pattern Trouble Normal Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted 60% Cooling Heating Normal Trouble OS failure pattern

    Os

    Emergency operation Maximum total capacity of indoor units (Note 1)

    Page 145

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 134 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (2) Ending the emergency operation 1) End conditions When one of the following conditions is met, emergency operation stops, and the unit makes an error stop. ŒWhen the integrated operation time of compressor in cooling mode has reached four hours. ŒWhen the integrated operation time of compressor in heating mode has reached two hours. ŒWhen an error is detected that does not permit the unit to perform an emergency operation. 2) Control at or after the completion of emergency operation ŒAt or after the completion of emergency operation, the compressor stops, and the error code reappears on the remote con- troller. ŒIf another error reset is performed at the completion of an emergency mode, the unit repeats the procedures in section (1) above. ŒTo stop the emergency mode and perform a current-carrying operation after correcting the error, perform a power reset.
  • Communication circuit failure or when some of the outdoor units are turned off
  • This is a temporary operation mode in which the outdoor unit that is not in trouble operates when communication circuit failure occurs or when some of the outdoor units are turned off. (1) Starting the emergency operation (When the OC is in trouble) 1) When an error occurs, the error source and the error code appear on the display on the remote controller. 2) Reset the error via the remote controller to start an emergency operation. Precautions before servicing the unit ŒWhen the OC is in trouble, the OS temporarily takes over the OC's function and performs an emergency operation. When this happens, the indoor unit connection information are changed. ŒIn a system that has a billing function, a message indicating that the billing system information has an error may appear on the TG-2000A. Even if this message appears, do not change (or set) the refrigerant system information on the TG-2000A. After the completion of an emergency operation, the correct connection information will be restored. (2) Starting the emergency operation (When the OS is in trouble) 1) A communication error occurs. -> An emergency operation starts in approximately six minutes. Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS) Emergency operation pattern (2 outdoor units) 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable ca- pacity, some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF. (3) Ending the emergency operation When communication is restored, the emergency mode is cancelled, and the units go into the normal operation mode. Trouble source Circuit board failure or the power to the outdoor units is off 6607 6608 No acknowledgement error No response error Error codes that permit an emergency operation Error code description

    Oc

    Cooling Heating OC failure pattern Trouble Normal Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Normal Trouble OS failure pattern

    Os

    Emergency operation Maximum total capacity of indoor units (Note 1) Capacity that matches the total capacity of the operable outdoor units

    Page 146

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 135 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-2-16 Unit Control Scheme The control system configuration for the PURY models is shown in the chart below. Control method Data signal exchange between system equipment Calculation, processing System control Adjustment of refrigerant flow rate Adjustment of rotation speed of compressor or fan Non-polar 2-wire serial communication method 16-bit CPU microcomputer operation processing Autonomous distributed control system (F2-VPM control) Rotation speed control of compressor or fan depending on the refrigerant pressure value and the changing speed Self-contained capacity control depending on the load Refrigerant distribution control depending on the operation mode Outdoor unit Daisy-chained non-polar 2-wire transmission line Indoor unit BC controller
  • Autonomous distributed control system : A system that consists of three independent sub control systems,
  • instead of a single centralized control system, that work together to maintain the overall control of the entire system.

    Page 147

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 136 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5-2-17 Refrigerant Circuits and Refrigerant Cycle Diagrams High-pressure gas High-pressure gas Heat exchanger High-pressure liquid Fan 4-way valve Check valve Selector valve Low-pressure two-phase Low-pressure two-phase Low- pressure two- phase High-pressure liquid Low- pressure two- phase Low- pressure two- phase Heat exchanger High-pressure liquid High-pressure liquid High-pressure liquid High-pressure liquid High-pressure liquid Cooling Cooling Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Heating Heating Low- pressure pipe High- pressure pipe High- pressure gas High- pressure gas High- pressure gas High-pressure two-phase Low-pressure gas Low-pressure gas Low-pressure gas Low-pressure gas Low- pressure gas Gas-liquid separator Outdoor unit BC controller Indoor unit

    Lev

    Lev

    M

    M

    L

    M

    L

    M

    L

    M

    L

    A

    O

    M

    L

    M

    L

    M

    L

    M

    L

    A

    O

    B

    C

    D

    I

    J

    J

    E

    F

    F

    N

    N

    N

    K

    M

    L

    M

    L

    M

    L

    G

    H

    A

    O

    L

    J

    G

    I

    K

    H

    D

    C

    F

    E

    B

    N

    A

    M

    O

    J

    G

    I

    K

    H

    D

    C

    F

    E

    B A

    M

    L

    F

    M

    A

    O

    M

    L

    A

    O

    M

    A

    I

    E

    K

    B

    C

    D

    B

    C

    D

    B

    C

    D

    F

    G

    H

    Gas-liquid mixture Pressure Liquid Gas Enthalpy (energy) Schematic diagram of refrigerant circuit Gas Two-phase Liquid Schematic diagram of refrigerating cycle Cooling only Operation status Cooling main Heating only Heating main

    Page 148

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 137 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-2-18 Operation Mode (1) Indoor unit operation mode The operation mode can be selected from the following 6 modes using the remote controller. (2) Outdoor unit operation mode When units in cooing and heating coexist, the operation mode (cooling main mode or heating main mode) will be determined, based on the refrigerant pressure in the R2 refrigerant circuit and speed variation data. (3) Operation pattern for automatic cooling/heating mode When the automatic cooling/heating mode is selected from remote controller functions, the indoor temperature will be detect- ed in pattern as shown in the figure below, and the operation mode (cooling or heating) will automatically be selected. (4) Relationship between the operation mode and the load capacity (kW) (within a system) 1 Cooling mode 2 Heating mode 3 Dry mode 4 Automatic cooling/heating mode 5 Fan mode 6 Stopping mode 1 Cooling only mode All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode. 2 Heating only mode All indoor units in operation are in heating mode. 3 Cooling main mode Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes. 4 Heating main mode Coexistence of units in cooling and heating modes. 5 Stopping mode All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode. Cooling Fan Heating Switches to cooling mode Cooling operation under Thermo-ON conditions Set temperature (Variable between 19 C and 28 C [ 67 F and 83 F]) Heating operation under Thermo-ON conditions Switches to heating mode Fan Temperature rise

    1.5 C

    [3 F]

    1.5 C

    [3 F]

    1 C [2 F]

    1 C [2 F]

    Cooling load capacity Heating load capacity + Cooling load capacity Heating load capacity Heating load capacity + Cooling load capacity 100(%) Cooling only mode Cooling main mode Heating main mode Total heat recovery mode Heating only mode 100(%) Heating load (%) Heating load X100 = Cooling load (%) = Cooling load

    X 100

    0 0

    Page 149

    [5-2 Outdoor Unit Control ]

  • 138 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5-2-19 Demand Control Cooling/heating operation can be prohibited (Thermo-OFF) by an external input to the indoor units. When DIP SW6-8 is set to ON, the 4-step DEMAND control is enabled. Eight-step demand control is possible in the system with two outdoor units. For details, refer to the following page(s). [2-4-7 Various Control Methods Using the Signal Input/Output Connector on Outdoor Unit](page 26)

    Page 150

    [5-3 BC Controller Control ]

  • 139 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-3 BC Controller Control
  • Control of SV
  • A, Sv

    B, and SV

    C

    Sv

    A, Sv

    B, and SV C turn on or off depending on the operation mode of the branch.
  • Control of SVM1, SVM1b
  • SVM turns on or off depending on the operation mode.
  • Control of LEV
  • Lev

    opening (sj) is controlled as follows depending on the operation mode.
  • Control of SVM2, SVM2b
  • Mode Cooling Heating Stopped Defrost Port

    Sv

    A

    On

    Off

    Off

    Off

    Sv

    B

    Off

    On

    Off

    Off

    Sv

    C

    On

    Off

    Off

    Off

    Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Defrost Stopped SVM1,1b

    On

    Pressure dif- ferential con- trol*1 *1. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and P3) is controlle every minute so as to be within a certain range.

    Off

    Off

    On

    Off

    Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Defrost Stopped

    G,Ga,

    Ha

    type

    Lev1

    2000 Liquid level control*1dif- ferential control*2 *1. Liquid level control: The liquid level detected by the liquid inlet temperature (TH11 sensor) is controlled so as to be within a certain range. *2. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and P3) is controlle every minute so as to be within a certain range. 110 110*3 *3. Can be 110 or more due to pressure rise on the liquid side (PS1). 2000 1200

    Lev2

    (only GA,HA type)

    Lev3

    Superheat control*4 *4. Superheat control: The amound of superheat that is calculated on the bypass inlet and outlet temperature (G, GA,HA:TH12,TH15, GB, HB: TH12, TH15) is controlled every minute so as to be within a certain range. Pressure dif- ferential con- trol*2 Pressure dif- ferential con- trol*2

    G:1000

    Ga,Ha:2000

    60

    Gb,Hb

    type

    Lev3

    Superheat control*4 Superheat control*4 60 60 60 60 Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Defrost Stopped SVM2,2b

    Off

    Off

    Pressure differ- ential control*1 *1. Pressure differential control: The detected differential pressure (PS1 and P3) is controlled every minute so as to be with- in a certain range. Pressure differ- ential control*1

    Off

    Off

    Page 151

    [5-4 Operation Flowcharts ]

  • 140 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5-4 Operation Flowcharts 5-4-1 Operation Sequence Flowchart (1) Indoor unit (cooling, heating, dry, fan mode) Start Remote controller display lit off Error mode Error stop Error display Self-holding of protection function Error command to outdoor unit Indoor unit LEV fully closed. Refer to 5-4-2 (1) for cooling operation. Refer to 5-4-2 (2) for heating operation. Refer to 5-4-2 (3) for dry operation. Prohibition Prohibition Prohibition Dry display Heating display Cooling display Dry mode Heating mode Fan mode Fan display Fan operations

    Operation mode Cooling mode Prohibition "Blinking display on the remote controller" FAN stop Breaker turned on Operation SW turned on Auxiliary heater

    On

    Drain pump

    On

    3-minute drain pump ON

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    *Note 1 *Note 1 *Note 2 *Note 3 *Note 3 *Note 3
  • Protection function
  • self-holding cancelled.
  • Indoor unit LEV fully closed.
  • Auxiliary heater OFF
  • Low fan speed for
  • 1 minute

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Normal operation Error Stop 1 Prohibition Auto COOL/HEAT display Automatic cooling/heating mode *Note 3

    Yes

    Auto cooling/heating mode 1 1 *Note 1. Indoor unit LEV fully closed : Opening 41. *Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or outdoor unit side. If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem, only those indoor units that are experiencing the problem will stop. If the BC controller or the outdoor unit is experiencing a problem, all the connected units will stop. *Note 3. If multiple indoor units are connected to a port and there is a discrepancy in the operation mode between the indoor unit and the port, the operation will be prohibited. (Operation mode blinks on the remote controller, the Fan stops, indoor unit LEV becomes fully closed.)

    Page 152

    [5-4 Operation Flowcharts ]

  • 141 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control (2) Outdoor unit (cooling only, heating only, cooling main and heating main modes) Start Breaker turned on Operation command Error stop Error display on the outdoor unit LED Self-holding of protection function Operation command to the BC controller Operation mode Error mode

    52C1 On

    *Note 1 *Note 2 *Note 3 *Note 4

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    fan

    No

    "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the remote controller Operation command to the BC controller Cooling only, Heating only Mixture of units in cooling and heating Mixture of units in cooling and heating Protection function self-holding cancelled. Normal operation
  • 52C1 4-way valve OFF
  • Inverter output 0Hz
  • Fan stop
  • All solenoid valves OFF
  • Cooling Only Heating Only 2 2 Cooling Main

    Operation mode Operation mode *Note 1. For about 3 minutes after power on, search for the indoor unit address, for the remote controller address, and for the group information will start. During this, "HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the display of the remote controller. When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing, "HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" keeps blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes after power on. *Note 3. The units will follow the operation mode commands from the BC controller *Note 4. When the operation mode commands from the BC controllers are mixed (both cooling and heating), the actual operation mode is determined by the outdoor unit. *Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the outdoor unit side. The outdoor stops only when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems. The operation of even a single indoor unit will keep the outdoor unit running. The error will be indicated on the LED display. Heating Main Indoor units registered to the remote controller Error Unit in the stopped state

    Page 153

    [5-4 Operation Flowcharts ]

  • 142 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (3) BC controller (cooling only, heating only, cooling main and heating main modes) Start Breaker turned on Operation command Error command to outdoor unit Error stop Self-holding of protection function Error command to indoor unit Error mode *Note 1

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    Fan

    No

    All units in the same mode Solenoid valves OFF LEV Fully closed
  • Determination of operation mode
  • (Cooling only, Heating only, Mixture of units in cooling and heating)
  • Transmitted to the outdoor unit
  • 3 3 Operation mode Note 1. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit side or the BC controller or outdoor unit side. If some of the indoor units are experiencing a problem, only those indoor units that are experiencing the problem will stop. If the BC controller or the outdoor unit is experiencing a problem, all the connected units will stop. Operation mode Operation mode Cooling Only Heating Only Cooling Main Heating Main Mixture of units in cooling and heating Reception of operation mode command from the outdoor unit Protection function self-holding cancelled. Normal operation Error Unit in the stopped state

    Page 154

    [5-4 Operation Flowcharts ]

  • 143 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control 5-4-2 Actions Performed in Different Modes (1) Cooling operation Cooling operation Test run mode

    On

    Thermostat

    On

    3-minute restart prevention *Note 1

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    4-way valve OFF
  • Inverter frequency control
  • Indoor unit LEV, Oil returnLEV control
  • Solenoid valve control
  • Outdoor unit fan control
  • BC controller solenoid valve control
  • BC controller LEV control
  • Normal operation During test run mode Indoor unit fan operation
  • Inverter output 0Hz
  • Indoor unit LEV, Oil return LEV fully closed
  • Solenoid valves OFF
  • Outdoor unit fan stop
  • BC controller solenoid valves OFF
  • BC controller LEV fully closed
  • Unit in the stopped state 2 3 *Note 1. The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the thermostat.

    Page 155

    [5-4 Operation Flowcharts ]

  • 144 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (2) Heating operation 1) When the outdoor unit goes into the defrost mode, defrost command is sent to the BC controller and indoor units. Upon re- ception of the command, the indoor units will go into the defrost mode. When defrosting is completed and upon receiving the signal that indicates the completion of defrosting, indoor units will resume the heating operation. 2) Defrost end condition: 10 minutes have passed since defrost operation started. Outdoor unit pipe temperature: Refer to the following page(s).[5-2-7 Defrost Operation Control](page 127) Heating operation Test run mode

    On

    Thermostat

    On

    Defrost operation 3-minute restart prevention *Note 1,2 *Note 1,2

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

  • Indoor/outdoor unit fan control
  • Inverter frequency control
  • Indoor unit LEV fully open
  • Solenoid valve control
  • BC controller solenoid valve control
  • BC controller LEV control
  • Normal operation Defrost operation 4-way valve ON During test run mode
  • Indoor unit fan operation at
  • Very Low speed
  • Inverter output 0Hz
  • Indoor unit LEV fully open
  • Solenoid valve OFF
  • Outdoor unit fan stop
  • BC controller solenoid valve control
  • BC controller LEV control
  • Stopping the defrost operation
  • Indoor unit fan stop
  • Inverter defrost frequency control
  • Indoor unit LEV fully open
  • Solenoid valve control
  • Outdoor unit fan stop
  • BC controller solenoid valve control
  • BC controller LEV control
  • 4-way valve OFF 1 3 Stopping the defrost operation Unit in the stopped state

    Page 156

    [5-4 Operation Flowcharts ]

  • 145 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5 Control (3) Dry operation Dry operation *Note 1 *Note 2

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    4-way valve OFF
  • Outdoor unit (compressor)
  • intermittent operation
  • Indoor unit fan intermittent operations
  • (Synchronized with the compressor: low speed, OFF operations) Normal operation Thermostat ON Thermostat ON
  • Indoor unit fan stop
  • Inverter output 0Hz
  • Indoor unit LEV fully closed.
  • Solenoid valve OFF
  • Outdoor unit fan stop
  • BC controller Solenoid valve OFF
  • BC controller LEV fully closed
  • 2 3 *Note 1.When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18 C [64 F], the outdoor unit (compressor) and the indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously. When the indoor unit inlet temperature becomes 18 C [64 F],or less, the fan always runs (at low speed). The outdoor unit, the indoor unit, and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor is turned on. *Note 2.Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode, and indoor and outdoor unit intermittent operation (ON) time is a little longer than that of normal operation. Test run mode

    On

    Suction temperature

    18 C[64 F]

    Unit in the stopped state

    Page 157

    [5-4 Operation Flowcharts ]

  • 146 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 158

  • 147 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 6 Test Run 6-1 Read before Test Run....................................................................................................................... 149 6-2 MA and ME Remote Controller Functions and Specifications ..................................................... 150 6-2-1 Function/Specification Comparison .................................................................................................... 150 6-2-2 Local Remote Controller Selection Tips.............................................................................................. 150 6-3 Making the Group and Interlock Settings from an ME Remote Controller.................................. 151 6-3-1 Overview............................................................................................................................................. 151 6-3-2 Address Registration........................................................................................................................... 151 6-3-3 Address Search .................................................................................................................................. 153 6-3-4 Address Deletion................................................................................................................................. 154 6-3-5 Making Group and Interlock Settings from Another Remote Controller.............................................. 154 6-4 Selecting Remote Controller Functions from an ME Remote Controller .................................... 155 6-5 Making Interlock Settings from an MA Remote Controller ........................................................... 157 6-5-1 MA Remote Controller (PAR-21MAAU).............................................................................................. 157 6-6 Changing the Room Temperature Detection Position .................................................................. 159 6-7 Test Run Method............................................................................................................................... 160 6-7-1 MA Remote Controller (PAR-21MAAU).............................................................................................. 160 6-8 Operation Characteristics and Refrigerant Charge....................................................................... 161 6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge ............................................................................... 161 6-9-1 Refrigerant Overcharge and undercharge .......................................................................................... 161 6-9-2 Checking the Refrigerant Charge during Operation............................................................................ 161 6-9-3 The Amount of Refrigerant to Be Added............................................................................................. 162 6-9-4 Refrigerant Charge Adjustment Mode ................................................................................................ 164 6-10 The Following Symptoms Are Normal............................................................................................ 166 6-11 Standard Operation Data (Reference Data).................................................................................... 167 6-11-1 Single Unit (Standard)......................................................................................................................... 167 6-11-2 Dual Unit Combination (Standard)...................................................................................................... 168

    Page 159

  • 148 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 160

    [6-1 Read before Test Run ]

  • 149 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 6 Test Run6-1 Read before Test Run (1) Check for refrigerant leak and loose cables and connectors. (2) When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. ŒBefore inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the capacitor voltage (inverter main circuit) has dropped to 20 VDC or less. (It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.) ŒControl box houses high temperature parts. Be well careful even after turning off the power source. ŒPerform the service after disconnecting the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) and the inverter board connector (CN1). (To plug or unplugconnectors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details.) ŒTo connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20 VDC or below. ŒReconnect the connector (CNINV) back to the fan board and reconnect the connector (CN1) back to the inverter board after servicing. (3) Measure the insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground with a 500V megger and make sure it reads at least 1.0Mohm. ŒDo not operate the unit if the insulation resistance is below 1.0Mohm. ŒDo not apply megger voltage to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the controller board. ŒThe insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground could go down to close to 1Mohm imme- diately after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. ŒIf insulation resistance reads at least 1 MΩ, by turning on the main power and keeping it on for at least 12 hours, the refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate and the insulation resistance will go up. ŒDo not measure the insulation resistance of the terminal block for transmission line for the unit remote controller. (4) When the power is turned on, the compressor is energized even while it is not operating. ŒBefore turning on the power, disconnect all power supply wires from the compressor terminal block, and measure the insula- tion resistance of the compressor. ŒCheck the compressor for a ground fault. If the insulation resistance is 1.0 MΩ or below, connect all power supply wires to the compressor and turn on the power to the outdoor unit. (The liquid refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate by energiz- ing the compressor.) (5) Make sure the valves on both the high-pressure and low-pressure sides are fully open. Securely tighten the cap. (6) Check the phase sequence and the voltage of the power supply. When the voltage is out of the ±10% range, or when the phase voltage difference is more than 2%, please discuss the coun- termeasure with the customer. (7) [When a transmission booster is connected] Turn on the transmission booster before turning on the outdoor units. ŒIf the outdoor units are turned on first, the connection information for the refrigerant circuit may not be properly recognized. ŒIn case the outdoor units are turned on before the transmission booster is turned on, perform a power reset on the outdoor units after turning on the power booster. (8) Turn on the main power at least 12 hours before test run. Insufficient powering time may result in compressor damage. (9) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control(*), perform a test run with the power supply unit being energized. Leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting). *Includes the cases where power is supplied to the transmission line from a system controller with a power-supply function

    Page 161

    [6-2 MA and ME Remote Controller Functions and Specifications ]

  • 150 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6-2 MA and ME Remote Controller Functions and Specifications There are two types of remote controllers: ME remote controller, which is connected on the indoor-outdoor transmission line, and MA remote controller, which is connected to each indoor unit. 6-2-1 Function/Specification Comparison 6-2-2 Local Remote Controller Selection Tips MA remote controller and ME remote controller have different functions and characteristics. Choose the one that better suits the requirements of a given system. Use the following criteria as a reference. Functions/specifications MA remote controller*1*2 *1. MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAU, PAR-21MAAU, PAR-30MAAU), Simple MA Remote Controller, and wireless remote controller. *2. Either the MA remote controller or the ME remote controller can be connected when a group operation of units in a sys- tem with multiple outdoor units is conducted or when a system controller is connected. ME remote controller*2*3 *3. ME remote controller refers to ME remote controller and Simple ME Remote Controller. Remote controller address settings Not required Required Indoor/outdoor unit address set- tings Not required (required only by a system with one outdoor unit)*4 *4. Depending on the system configuration, some systems with one outdoor unit may require address settings. Required Wiring method Non-polarized 2-core cable ∗To perform a group operation, daisy- chain the indoor units using non-polar- ized 2-core cables. Non-polarized 2-core cable Remote controller connection Connectable to any indoor unit in the group Connectable anywhere on the indoor-out- door transmission line Interlock with the ventilation unit Each indoor unit can individually be in- terlocked with a ventilation unit. (Set up via remote controller in the group.) Each indoor unit can individually be inter- locked with a ventilation unit. (Set up via remote controller.) Changes to be made upon group- ing change MA remote controller wiring between in- door units requires rewiring. Either the indoor unit address and remote controller address must both be changed, or the registration information must be changed via MELANS. MA remote controller*1*2 ME remote controller*1*2 ŒThere is little likelihood of system expansion and group- ing changes. ŒGrouping (floor plan) has been set at the time of instal- lation. ŒThere is a likelihood of centralized installation of remote controllers, system expansion, and grouping changes. ŒGrouping (floor plan) has not been set at the time of in- stallation. ŒTo connect the remote controller directly to the OA pro- cessing unit. *1. ME remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units. *2. A system controller must be connected to a system to which both MA remote controller and ME remote controller are con- nected. MA remote controller Outdoor unit Indoor unit BC controller M-NET transmission line (indoor/outdoor transmission line) group group ME remote controller Outdoor unit Indoor unit BC controller M-NET transmission line (indoor/outdoor transmission line) group group

    Page 162

    [6-3 Making the Group and Interlock Settings from an ME Remote Controller ]

  • 151 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 6-3 Making the Group and Interlock Settings from an ME Remote Controller 6-3-1 Overview 6-3-2 Address Registration Make the following settings to perform a group operation of units that are connected to different outdoor units or to manually set up the indoor/outdoor unit address. (A) Group settings...........Registration of the indoor units to be controlled with the remote controller,

    and search and deletion of registered information. (B) Interlock settings........Registration of LOSSNAY units to be interlocked with the indoor units,

    and search and deletion of registered information

    [Normal display] Register the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller. Bring up either one of the following displays on the remote controller: The blinking display of HO, which appears when the power is turned on, or the normal display, which appears when the unit is stopped. The display window must look like one of the two figures below to proceed to the next step. 1 [Blinking display of HO ]

    On/Off

    Set Temp.

    Par-F27Mea-Us

    Filter

    Check

    Test

    Clock

    On

    Off

    Mode

    Timer

    Fan Speed

    Louver

    Ventilation

    Air Direction

    Timer Set

    ?

    A

    F

    D

    B

    H

    G

    C

    E

    Page 163

    [6-3 Making the Group and Interlock Settings from an ME Remote Controller ]

  • 152 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    (B) Interlock Settings (A) Group Settings Indoor unit address display window Indoor unit address display window Interlocked unit address display window 2 Bring up the Group Setting window. -Press and hold buttons [FILTER] and [LOUVER] simultaneously for 2 seconds to bring up the display as shown below. 3

    A

    C

    D

    B

    Select the unit address.
  • Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing
  • button [SET TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through the addresses. Register the indoor unit whose address appears on the display.
  • Press button [TEST] to register the indoor unit address
  • whose address appears on the display.
  • If registration is successfully completed, unit type will appear
  • on the display as shown in the figure below.
  • If the selected address does not have a corresponding indoor
  • unit, an error message will appear on the display. Check the address, and try again. 5

    Unit type (Indoor unit in this case) blinks to indicate a registration error. (Indicates that selected address does not have a corresponding unit.) 4 To register the addresses for multiple indoor units, repeat steps and above. 3 4 Go to section 6-3-3 "Address Search" for how to search for an address. Go to section 6-3-3 "Address Search" for how to search for an address. Bring up the Interlock Setting window. -Press button [MODE] to bring up the following display. Press again to go back to the Group Setting window as shown under step . 6

    G

    2 Both the indoor unit address and interlocked unit address will be displayed together. Bring up the address of the indoor unit and the address of the LOSSNAY to be interlocked on the display.
  • Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing
  • button [SET TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through the addresses.
  • Select the address of the LOSSNAY unit to be interlocked by
  • pressing button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through the interlocked unit addresses. 7 8

    C

    H

    Make the settings to interlock LOSSNAY units with indoor units.
  • Press button [TEST] while both the indoor unit address and
  • the address of the LOSSNAY units to be interlocked are displayed to enter the interlock setting.
  • Interlock setting can also be made by bringing up the
  • LOSSNAY address in the indoor unit address display window and the indoor unit address in the interlocked unit address display window.

    D

    (Displayed alternately) If registration is successfully completed, the two displays as shown on the left will appear alternately. If the registration fails, will blink on the display. (Indicates that the selected address does not have a corresponding unit.) NOTE : Interlock all the indoor units in the group with the LOSSNAY units; otherwise, the LOSSNAY units will not operate. (C) To return to the normal display When all the group settings and interlock settings are made, take the following step to go back to the normal display. Press and hold buttons [FILTER] and [LOUVER] simultaneously for 2 seconds to go back to the window as shown in step . Repeat steps 7 and 8 above until all the indoor units in the group are interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit. To go back to the normal display, follow step Go to section 6-3-3 "Address Search" for how to search for an address. 10

    A

    B

    1 9 10

    Page 164

    [6-3 Making the Group and Interlock Settings from an ME Remote Controller ]

  • 153 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 6-3-3 Address Search To search for the address of indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller, follow steps and . (A) To search group settings

    Unit type (Indoor unit in this case)

  • When only one unit address is registered, the same address
  • will remain on the display regardless of how many times the button is pressed.
  • When the address of multiple units are registered
  • (i.e. 011, 012, 013 ), they will be displayed one at a time in an ascending order with each pressing of button [TIMER ] . To delete an address, go to section 6-3-4 “Address Deletion.” To go back to the normal display, follow step (Displayed alternately) Refer to section 6-3-4 "Address Deletion" for how to delete an address. Bring up the address of another registered unit on the display.
  • After completing step , a subsequent pressing of button
  • [TIMER] will bring up the address of another registered unit. (The display method is the same as the one in step .) Address of an interlocked LOSSNAY unit Address of another interlocked unit Bring up on the display the address of the LOSSNAY unit that was interlocked with the indoor unit in step .
  • With each pressing of button [TIMER], the address of the
  • LOSSNAY and indoor unit that is interlocked with it will be displayed alternately. LOSSNAY can be searched in the same manner by bringing up the LOSSNAY address in the Interlocked unit address display window. (B) Interlock setting search After performing step , proceed as follows: Bring up the address of the indoor unit to be searched on the display.
  • Select the address of the indoor unit to be searched by pressing
  • button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through the interlocked addresses. (Displayed alternately) Bring up the Group Setting window.
  • Each pressing of button [TIMER ] will bring up the address of a
  • registered indoor unit and its unit type on the display. 11

    E

    1 2

    E

    10

    E

    13 13 13 12 14 12 6

    E

    H

    Page 165

    [6-3 Making the Group and Interlock Settings from an ME Remote Controller ]

  • 154 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6-3-4 Address Deletion 6-3-5 Making Group and Interlock Settings from Another Remote Controller The addresses of the indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller can be deleted by deleting the group settings. The interlock settings between units can be deleted by deleting the interlock settings. Follow the steps in section 6-3-3 “Address Search” to find the address to be deleted and perform deletion with the address being displayed in the display window. To delete an address, the address must first be bought up on the display. Delete the registered indoor unit address or the interlock setting between units.
  • Press button ? [CLOCK ON OFF] twice while either the indoor unit address or the address of the interlocked unit is displayed on the
  • display to delete the interlock setting.

    F

    15 (A) To delete group settings (B) To delete interlock settings will be displayed in the room temperature display window.
  • If a transmission error occurs, the selected setting will not be
  • deleted, and the display will appear as shown below. In this case, repeat the steps above. (Displayed alternately) will be displayed in the room temperature display window. If deletion is successfully completed, will appear in the unit type display window. If the deletion fails, will appear in the unit type display window. In this case, repeat the steps above.
  • -
  • To go back to the normal display, follow step . 10 (A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group can be made from any arbitrary remote controller. Refer to "(B) Interlock Settings" under section 6-3-1 "Overview" for operation procedures. Set the address as shown below. (A) To make group settings Interlocked unit address display window...Remote controller address Indoor unit address display window...........The address of the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller (B) To make interlock settings Interlocked unit address display window...LOSSNAY address Indoor unit address display window..........The address of the indoor unit to be interlocked with the LOSSNAY

    Page 166

    [6-4 Selecting Remote Controller Functions from an ME Remote Controller ]

  • 155 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 6-4 Selecting Remote Controller Functions from an ME Remote Controller

    Par-F27Mea-Us

    On/Off

    Filter

    Fun Speed

    Louver

    Ventilation

    Air Direction

    Check Test

    Timer Set

    Mode

    Timer

    Clock? On? Off

    Set Temp.

    Cool

    Auto

    Heat

    Fan

    Speed

    1 3 2 4 In the remote controller function selection mode, the settings for three types of functions can be made or changed as necessary. 3) Narrowed preset temperature range mode The default temperature ranges are 67°F to 87°F in the cooling/dry mode and 63°F to 83°F in the heating mode. By changing these ranges (raising the lower limit for the cooling/dry mode and lowering the upper limit for the heating mode), energy can be saved. *The settable range varies depending on the unit to be connected. On the PAR-F27MEA-US model, automatic operation mode cannot be selected while the unit is in the narrowed preset temperature range mode. Only the lower limit can be set for cooling/dry mode, and upper limit for heating mode.

    Note

    [Function selection mode sequence on the remote controller] Normal Display (Stopped unit) 1 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 [Normal display] Operation mode display selection mode Room temperature display selection mode Narrowed preset temperature range mode (cooling/dry mode) Narrowed preset temperature range mode (heating mode)

    Centrally Controlled

    Daily

    Auto Off

    Dry

    Fan

    Remainder

    Error Code

    Clock

    Set Temp.

    Auto

    On

    Auto

    Off

    Fan

    Speed

    Check Mode

    Filter

    Sensor

    Inside

    Test Run

    Limit Temp.

    1Hr.

    Not Available

    Ventilation

    Stand By

    Defrost

    Timer

    Check

    1 3 2 : Press and hold the [CHECK] and [MODE] buttons simultaneously for two seconds. : [SET TEMP. ( ) ] button : [SET TEMP. ( ) ] button 2) Room temperature display selection mode (Display or non-display of room temperature) Although the suction temperature is normally displayed on the remote controller, the setting can be changed so that it will not appear on the remote controller. 1) Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of COOL/HEAT during automatic operation mode) When the automatic operation mode is selected, the indoor unit will automatically perform a cooling or heating operation based on the room temperature. In this case, AUTO COOL or AUTO HEAT will appear on the remote controller display. This setting can be changed so that only AUTO will appear on the display. Remote controller function selection mode

    Page 167

    [6-4 Selecting Remote Controller Functions from an ME Remote Controller ]

  • 156 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1Hr.

    Not Available

    Ventilation

    Stand By

    Defrost

    Timer

    Check

    [Operation Procedures]
  • Press the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop. The display will appear as shown in the previous page (Normal
  • display).
  • Press buttons [CHECK] and [MODE] simultaneously for 2 seconds to go into the operation mode display selection mode
  • under the remote controller function selection mode. Press button [SET TEMP. ( )] or [SET TEMP. ( )] to go into the other three modes under the remote controller function selection mode. 2 3 Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of room temperature on the remote controller.) AUTO COOL/HEAT will blink, and either ON or OFF will light up. Press button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] in this state to switch between ON and OFF. When it is set to ON, AUTO and COOL or AUTO and HEAT will appear on the display during automatic operation mode. When it is set to OFF, only AUTO will appear on the display during automatic operation mode. Room temperature display selection mode (Display or non-display of room temperature) Narrowed preset temperature range mode (The range of preset temperature can be changed.) When it is set to ON, the room temperature will stay in the operation display window during operation. When it is set to OFF, the room temperature will not appear in the operation display window during operation. 88 F will blink in the room temperature display window, and either ON or OFF will light up. Press button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] in this state to switch between ON and OFF. 1) Temperature range setting for the cooling/dry mode COOL/DRY and LIMIT TEMP. will light up in the display window, and the temperature range for the cooling/dry mode will appear on the display. The lower limit temperature will be blinking in the preset temperature display window. While it is blinking, the temperature setting can be changed. [Selection range for the lower limit temperature] : 67 F 87 F (Medium temperature range indoor unit 57 F 87 F) (The upper limit temperature is fixed at 87 F. Only the lower limit temperature is changeable.) HEAT and LIMIT TEMP will light up, and the temperature range for the heating mode will appear on the screen. The upper limit temperature can be changed with button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )]. [Selection range for the upper limit temperature] : 63 F 83 F (Medium temperature range indoor unit 63 F 83 F) (The lower limit temperature is fixed at 63 F. Only the upper limit temperature is changeable.) [When the temperature range for the cooling or dry mode is set to 67 F to 87 F] [When the temperature range is changed to 75 F - 87 F] 2) Press button [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the lower limit temperature to the desired temperature. 3) After completing the step above, press button [SET TEMP. ( )] to go into the temperature range setting mode to set the temperature range for the heating operation.
  • When all the necessary settings have been made, exit the remote controller function selection mode and go back to the Normal display by
  • pressing and holding buttons [CHECK] and [MODE] simultaneously for 2 seconds. 1

    Centrally Controlled

    Daily

    Auto Off

    Dry Cool

    Auto Fan

    Heat

    Remainder

    Error Code

    Clock

    Set Temp.

    Auto

    On

    Auto

    Off

    Fan

    Speed

    Check Mode

    Filter

    Sensaor

    Inside

    Test Run

    Limit Temp.

    1Hr.

    Not Available

    Ventilation

    Stand By

    Defrost

    Timer

    Check

    Centrally Controlled

    Daily

    Auto Off

    Dry Cool

    Auto Fan

    Heat

    Remainder

    Error Code

    Clock

    Set Temp.

    Auto

    On

    Auto

    Off

    Fan

    Speed

    Check Mode

    Filter

    Sensaor

    Inside

    Test Run

    Limit Temp.

    1Hr.

    Not Available

    Ventilation

    Stand By

    Defrost

    Timer

    Check

    Centrally Controlled

    Daily

    Auto Off

    Dry Cool

    Auto Fan

    Heat

    Remainder

    Error Code

    Clock

    Set Temp.

    Auto

    On

    Auto

    Off

    Fan

    Speed

    Check Mode

    Filter

    Sensaor

    Inside

    Test Run

    Limit Temp.

    1Hr.

    Not Available

    Ventilation

    Stand By

    Defrost

    Timer

    Check

    Centrally Controlled

    Daily

    Auto Off

    Dry Cool

    Auto Fan

    Heat

    Remainder

    Error Code

    Clock

    Set Temp.

    Auto

    On

    Auto

    Off

    Fan

    Speed

    Check Mode

    Filter

    Sensaor

    Inside

    Test Run

    Limit Temp.

    1Hr.

    Not Available

    Ventilation

    Stand By

    Defrost

    Timer

    Check

    Centrally Controlled

    Daily

    Auto Off

    Dry Cool

    Auto Fan

    Heat

    Remainder

    Error Code

    Clock

    Set Temp.

    Auto

    On

    Auto

    Off

    Fan

    Speed

    Check Mode

    Filter

    Sensaor

    Inside

    Test Run

    Limit Temp.

    1Hr.

    Not Available

    Ventilation

    Stand By

    Defrost

    Timer

    Check

    [TIMER SET ( ) (( ))] button [TIMER SET ( ) (( ))] button 4 4 4 4 2 1

    Page 168

    [6-5 Making Interlock Settings from an MA Remote Controller ]

  • 157 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 6-5 Making Interlock Settings from an MA Remote Controller LOSSNAY interlock setting (Make this setting only when necessary.) 6-5-1 MA Remote Controller (PAR-21MAAU) [Operation Procedures]
  • Without interlocked LOSSNAY settings
  • Search result
  • The indoor unit address and the interlocked LOSSNAY address will appear alternately.
  • Press the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop. The display window on the remote controller must look like the figure below to proceed to step . NOTE: When using LOSSNAY units in conjunction, interlock the addresses of all indoor units within the group and address of LOSSNAY units. Perform this operation to enter the interlock setting between the LOSSNAY and the indoor units to which the remote controller is connected, or to search and delete registered information.
  • When the upper controller is connected, make the setting using the upper controller.
  • In the following example, the address of the indoor unit is 05 and the address of the LOSSNAY unit is 30. 2 < 1. Registration Procedures > Indoor unit address LOSSNAY address Press the [TEST] button to register the address of the selected indoor unit and the interlocked LOSSNAY unit.
  • Registration completed
  • The registered indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately.
  • Registration error
  • If the registration fails, the indoor unit address and the LOSSNAY address will be displayed alternately. Registration cannot be completed: The selected unit address does not have a corresponding indoor unit or a LOSSNAY unit. Registration cannot be completed: Another LOSSNAY has already been interlocked with the selected indoor unit. 1 3 2

    Press and hold the [FILTER] and [ ] buttons simultaneously for two seconds to perform a search for the LOSSNAY that is interlocked with the indoor unit to which the remote controller is connected. If no settings are necessary, exit the window by pressing and holding the [FILTER] and [ ] buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds. Go to step 1. Registration Procedures to make the interlock settings with LOSSNAY units, or go to step 2. Search Procedures to search for a particular LOSSNAY unit. Go to step 3. Deletion Procedures to delete any LOSSNAY settings. To interlock an indoor unit with a LOSSNAY unit, press the [ TEMP. ( ) or ( )] button on the remote controller that is connected to the indoor unit, and select its address (01 to 50). Press the [ CLOCK ( ) or ( )] button to select the address of the LOSSNAY to be interlocked (01 to 50). 5 4 7 6

    Page 169

    [6-5 Making Interlock Settings from an MA Remote Controller ]

  • 158 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

  • Search completed (No interlocked settings with a LOSSNAY exist.)
  • The selected address does not have a corresponding indoor unit.
  • < 2. Search Procedures > < 3. Deletion Procedures > Press the [ MENU] button to search for the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit.
  • Search completed (With a LOSSNAY connection)
  • The indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately. Take the following steps to delete the interlock setting between a LOSSNAY unit and the interlocked indoor unit from the remote controller that is connected to the indoor unit. Find the address of the LOSSNAY to be deleted (See section 2. Search Procedures. ), and bring up the result of the search for both the indoor unit and LOSSNAY on the display. Press the [ ON/OFF] button twice to delete the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit.
  • Registration completed
  • The indoor unit address and , and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and will appear alternately. -Deletion error If the deletion fails 8 9 10 11 To search for the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with a particular indoor unit, enter the address of the indoor unit into the remote controller that is connected to it.

    Page 170

    [6-6 Changing the Room Temperature Detection Position ]

  • 159 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 6-6 Changing the Room Temperature Detection Position
  • Selecting the position of temperature detection (Factory setting: SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit is
  • set to OFF.) To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit to ON. ŒSome models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor. Use the built-in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead. ŒWhen using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected.

    Page 171

    [6-7 Test Run Method ]

  • 160 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6-7 Test Run Method 6-7-1 MA Remote Controller (PAR-21MAAU) The figure shows an MA remote controller (PAR-21MAAU).

    Par-21Maau

    On/Off

    Filter

    Check

    Operation

    Clear

    Test

    Temp.

    Menu

    Back

    Day

    Monitor/Set

    Clock

    On/Off

    Set Temperature buttons Down Up Operation Mode button ON/OFF button Fan Speed button Test Run button Vertical Air Direction button Louver button ( Operation button) To preceding operation number. Ventilation button ( Operation button) To next operation number.

    F C

    F C

    Error Code

    After

    Timer

    Time Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

    On

    Off

    Hr

    After

    Filter

    Function

    ONLY1Hr.

    Weekly

    Simple

    Auto Off

    Operation procedures Turn on the main power. "PLEASE WAIT" appears on the LCD for up to five minutes. Leave the power on for 12 hours. (Energize the belt heater.) Press the Test button twice. Operation mode display "TEST RUN" and OPERATION MODE are displayed alternately. Press the Operation Mode button. Make sure that cold (or warm) air blows out. On the same refrigerant system, make the operation mode the same. Make sure that the air is blowing out. Switch to cooling (or heating) operation by pressing the Operation Mode button. Press the Fan Speed button. Change the air flow direction by pressing the Vertical Air Direction button or the Louver button. Confirm the operation of outdoor unit fan. Confirm the operation of all interlocked equipment, such as ventilation equipment. Note 1: Refer to the following pages if an error code appears on the remote controller or when the unit malfunctions. 2: The OFF timer will automatically stop the test run after 2 hours. 3: The remaining time for the test run will be displayed in the time display during test run. 4: The temperature of the liquid pipe on the indoor unit will be displayed in the room temperature display window on the remote controller during test run. 5: On some models, "NOT AVAILABLE" may appear on the display when the Vane Control button is pressed. This is normal. 6: If an external input is connected, perform a test run using the external input signal. 7: Test run all systems for at least 15 minutes to detect possible system errors. Make sure that the fan speed changes with each pressing of the button. Stop Make sure that the air flow direction changes with each pressing of the button. Cancel the test run by pressing the ON/OFF button.

    Page 172

    [6-8 Operation Characteristics and Refrigerant Charge ]

  • 161 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 6-8 Operation Characteristics and Refrigerant Charge It is important to have a clear understanding of the characteristics of refrigerant and the operating characteristics of air conditioners before attempting to adjust the refrigerant amount in a given system. The following table shows items of particular importance. 1) During cooling operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the smallest when all indoor units are in operation. 2) During heating operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the largest when all indoor units are in operation. 3) General tendency of discharge temperature ŒDischarge temperature tends to rise when the system is short on refrigerant. ŒChanging the amount of refrigerant in the system while there is refrigerant in the accumulator has little effect on the discharge temperature. ŒThe higher the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise. ŒThe lower the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise. 4) When the amount of refrigerant in the system is adequate, the compressor shell temperature is 10 to 60°C [18 to 108°F] higher than the low pressure saturation temperature (Te). -> If the temperature difference between the compressor shell temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is smaller than 5°C [9°F], an overcharging of refrigerant is suspected. 6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge 6-9-1 Refrigerant Overcharge and undercharge Overcharging or undercharging of refrigerant can cause the following symptoms: Before attempting to adjust the amount of refrigerant in the system, thoroughly check the operating conditions of the system. Then, adjust the refrigerant amount by running the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode. 6-9-2 Checking the Refrigerant Charge during Operation Operate all indoor units in either cooling-only or heating-only mode, and check such items as discharge temperature, subcool- ing, low pressure, suction temperature, and shell bottom temperature to estimate the amount of refrigerant in the system. The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1500 (overcharged refrigerant) on the controller. Overcharged refrigerant The operating frequency does not reach the set frequency, and there is a problem with performance. Insufficient refrigerant amount The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1102 (abnormal discharge temper- ature) on the controller. Symptoms Conclusion Discharge temperature is high. (Normal discharge temperature is below 95°C [203°F].) Slightly under- charged refrigerant Low pressure is unusually low. Suction superheat is large. (Normal suction superheat is less than 20°C [36°F].) Compressor shell bottom temperature is high. (The difference between the compressor shell bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is greater than 60°C [108°F].) Discharge superheat is small. (Normal discharge superheat is greater than 10°C [18°F].) Slightly overcharged refrigerant Compressor shell bottom temperature is low. (The difference between the compressor shell bot- tom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is less than 5°C [9°F].)

    Page 173

    [6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge ]

  • 162 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6-9-3 The Amount of Refrigerant to Be Added The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory-charged to the outdoor units. The amount necessary for extended pipe (field piping) is not included and must be added on site. (1) Calculation formula The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping. (unit in m[ft]) Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1kg. (Example: 18.04kg to 18.1kg) Round up the calculation result in increments of 4oz (0.1kg) or round it up to the nearest 1oz. (Example: 78.21oz to 79oz) Outdoor unit model

    Hp72

    Hp96

    Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in the outdoor unit (kg) 11.8 11.8 Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in the outdoor unit [lbs-oz] 26-1 26-1 1) When the piping length from outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit is 30.5 m [100 ft] or shorter Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.23 x L1) + (0.16 x L2) + (0.11 x L3)+ (0.2 x L4) + (0.12 x L5) + (0.06 x L6) + (0.024 x L7) + α1 + α2 +α3 +α4+β Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (2.48x L1' ) + (1.73 x L2' ) + (1.19x L3' )+ (2.16 x L4' ) + (1.30 x L5' ) + (0.65 x L6' ) + (0.26 x L7' ) + α1' + α2'+ α3 ' +α4'+β' 2) When the piping length from outdoor unit to the farthest indoor unit is longer than 30.5 m [100 ft] Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.21 x L1) + (0.14 x L2) + (0.1 x L3)+ (0.18 x L4) + (0.11 x L5) + (0.054 x L6) + (0.021 x L7) + α1 + α2 +α3 +α4+β Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (2.26x L1' ) + (1.51 x L2' ) + (1.08x L3' )+ (1.94 x L4' ) + (1.19 x L5' ) + (0.59 x L6' ) + (0.23 x L7' ) + α1' + α2'+ α3 ' +α4'+β' L1 : Length of ø22.2[7/8"] high pressure pipe (m) L2 : Length of ø19.05[3/4"] high pressure pipe (m) L3 : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] high pressure pipe (m) L4 : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] liquid pipe (m) L5 : Length of ø12.7[1/2"] liquid pipe (m) L6 : Length of ø9.52[3/8"] liquid pipe (m) L7 : Length of ø6.35[1/4"] liquid pipe (m) α1, α2, α3, α4, α1' , α2' , α3' , α4' : Refer to the table below. L1' : Length of ø22.2[7/8"] high pressure pipe [ft] L2' : Length of ø19.05[3/4"] high pressure pipe [ft] L3' : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] high pressure pipe [ft] L4' : Length of ø15.88[5/8"] liquid pipe [ft] L5' : Length of ø12.7[1/2"] liquid pipe [ft] L6' : Length of ø9.52[3/8"] liquid pipe [ft] L7' : Length of ø6.35[1/4"] liquid pipe [ft] β, β' : Refer to the table below. Outdoor unit total index Amount for the BC con- trollers (standard/main) BC controller (main) Total capacity of connected indoor units Amount for the Indoor unit α1(kg) α1' (oz) α4(kg) α4' (oz) HP72 model 3.0 106 HA type α2(kg) α2' (oz)
  • 27
  • 2.0 71 HP96 model 4.5 160 1 2.0 71 28
  • 54
  • 2.5 89 55
  • 126
  • 3.0 106 HP144 model 6.0 212 BC controller (sub) 127
  • 144
  • 3.5 124 HP192 model 145
  • 180
  • 4.5 159 Total number of BC α3(kg) α3' (oz) 181
  • 234
  • 5.0 177 1 1.0 36 235
  • 273
  • 6.0 212 2 2.0 71 274
  • 307
  • 8.0 283 Outdoor unit total index Charged amount for Out- door Unit(s) β (kg) β' (oz) Single HP72 model 0.0 0 HP96 model 1.0 36 Combination HP144 model 0.0 0 HP192 model 2.0 71

    Page 174

    [6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge ]

  • 163 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 1) Maximum refrigerant charge There is a limit to the amount of refrigerant that can be charged into a unit. Regardless of the amount yielded by the formula above, observe the maximum refrigerant charge in the table below. *1 Maximum refrigerant charge: the amount of factory-charged refrigerant and the amount of refrigerant to be added on site. (2) Example (3) Sample calculation The piping length between the outdoor unit and the farthest indoor unit F + A + C + D + e = 73 meters [239ft], which is longer than 30.5 m [100 ft]. Therefore, The amount of refrigerant to be charged [kg]=40×0.21+4×0.14+60×0.054+20×0.021+6+2+5+2=27.7 kg The amount of refrigerant to be charged [oz]=131×2.26+13×1.51+196×0.59+65×0.23+212+71+177+71=978 oz Total index of the outdoor units

    Hp72

    Hp96

    Hp144

    Hp192

    Maximum refrigerant charge *1 (kg) 39.0 47.3 58.5 86.3 Maximum refrigerant charge *1 [lbs-oz] 86-0 104-3 129-0 190-3 BC controller(GA) BC controller(HB) BC controller(HB) Indoor a

    C

    b

    H

    H′

    h1 h1

    (P06 - P54)

    Junction pipe kit

    (Cmy-R160-J)

    (Optional accessory) Branch joint

    (Cmy-Y102S-G2)

    B

    c d f h3

    D

    E

    Branch joint

    (Cmy-Y202-G2)

    (Cmy-Y102L-G2)

    (Cmy-Y102S-G2)

    A

    e h1

    F

    h4 Branch joint kit Outdoor unit 1 Outdoor unit 2 Reducer (Supplied with the BC Controller)

    G

    h2 Indoor Indoor Maximum of 3 units per port Total capacity of P54 or below Indoor Indoor Indoor 2 6 5 3 4 1

    (P72 - P96)

    Outdoor unit 1 : 96 model Outdoor unit 2 : 96 model Indoor unit 1 : 30 model Indoor unit 2 : 96 model Indoor unit 3 : 12 model Indoor unit 4 : 15 model Indoor unit 5 : 12 model Indoor unit 6 : 24 model

    A : 22.2

    B : 9.52

    C : 9.52

    D : 9.52

    E : 9.52

    F : 19.05

    G : 19.05

    40m 10m 20m 5m 5m 3m 1m [7/8"] [3/8"] [3/8"] [3/8"] [3/8"] [3/4"] [3/4"] [3/8"] [3/8"] [1/4"] [1/4"] [1/4"] [3/8"] [131ft] [32ft] [65ft] [16ft] [16ft] [9ft] [3ft] [32ft] [16ft] [16ft] [32ft] [16ft] [16ft] a : 9.52 b : 9.52 c : 6.35 d : 6.35 e : 6.35 f : 9.52 10m 5m 5m 10m 5m 5m 22.2 A = 40m [131ft] 19.05 F+G = 4m [13ft] 9.52 B+C+D+E+a+b+f = 60m [196ft] 6.35 c+d+e = 20m [65ft] The aggregate length of each liquid pipe type. When

    Page 175

    [6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge ]

  • 164 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6-9-4 Refrigerant Charge Adjustment Mode Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode. When the function switch (SW4 (922)) on the main board on the outdoor unit (OC only) is turned to ON, the unit goes into the refrigerant amount adjust mode, and the following sequence is followed. The unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode when the switch on the OS is set to ON. Operation When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it nor- mally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling. 1) Adjust the refrigerant amount based on the values of TH4, SC11, SC16, and Tc, following the flowchart below. The TH4, SC11, SC16, and Tc values can be displayed by using the self-diagnosis switch (SW4 (SW6-10: OFF)) on the control board of the OC or OS. 2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes). When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate. Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller is 5°C [9°F] or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and

    27°F].

    The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment, but may turn out to be inadequate later on. Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller is 5°C [9°F] or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less. Wait until the Subcool (SC11 and SC16) of the BC controller reaches 5°C [9°F] or above and the SH of the indoor unit is be- tween 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F] to determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate. ŒSC11: Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller inlet; SC16: Subcool of liquid refrigerant at BC controller outlet 3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa [290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made. 4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW4 (922) and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode. ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) Self-diagnosis swithes on TH4 Self-diagnosis swithes on SC16 Use these switches to check the TH4, SC11, and SC16. Self-diagnosis swithes on SC11

    On

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    Page 176

    [6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge ]

  • 165 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Start Put all indoor units in the test run mode and run the units in cooling mode. Has it been at least 30 minutes since start up? 5°C[9°F]≤SH on all indoor units. Has the LEV opening been stabilized on all indoor units ?

    No

    Does the following hold true?

    Sc11 < 5°C[9°F]

    Yes

    No

    Does the following hold true ?

    5°C[9°F]≤Sc11≤15°C[27°F]

    (on the BC) Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low- pressure side. Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Turn on SW4 (922) on the OC. Adjustment complete Turn off SW4 (922) on the OC. Has the initial start-up mode been completed? Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low - pressure side. Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low - pressure side. Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the refrigerant amout to determine its adequacy. Gradually add refrigerant from the service port on the low- pressure side. Gradually draw out refrigerant from the service port on the low pressure side. Is the TH4 value of the OC and OS at or below 100°C [212°F]? Has the operating frequency of the compressor on the OC and OS become stable? Does the following hold true ? TH4≤95°C[203°F] on the OC and OS Does the following hold true ? 15°C[27°F]≤SC16 (on the BC) Operation of the Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode When the unit is the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it normally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling. Note 1) SW4-3 on the OS is invalid, and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode. 2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes). 3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa[290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made. 4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW4-3 and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

    Caution

    Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air.

    Caution

    Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system. ŒIf gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may result in performance loss.

    Page 177

    [6-10 The Following Symptoms Are Normal ]

  • 166 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6-10 The Following Symptoms Are Normal Symptoms Remote controller display Cause The indoor unit does not start after starting cooling (heating) operation. "Cooling (heating)" icon blinks on the display. The unit cannot perform a heating (cooling) operation when other indoor units on the same refrigerant system, are performing a cooling (heating) operation. The auto vane adjusts its posi- tion by itself. Normal display After an hour of cooling operation with the auto vane in the vertical posi- tion, the vane may automatically move into the horizontal position. Louver blades will automatically move into the horizontal position while the unit is in the defrost mode, pre-heating stand-by mode, or when the thermostat triggers unit off. The fan speed changes dur- ing heating. Normal display Very Low fan speed when "Thermo-OFF.' Changes from Very Low to pre- set fan speed when "Thermo-ON" depending on pipe temperature. The fan stops during heating operation. Defrost The fan remains stopped during defrost operation. The fan keeps running after the unit has stopped. Unlit When the auxiliary heater is turned on, the fan operates for one minute after stopping to dissipate heat. The fan speed does not reach the set speed when operation switch is turned on.

    Stand By

    The fan operates at extra low speed for 5 minutes after it is turned on or until the pipe temperature reaches 35°C[95°F], then it operates at low speed for 2 minutes, and finally it operates at the set speed. (Pre-heating stand-by) When the main power is turned on, the display shown on the right appears on the in- door unit remote controller for 5 minutes. "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" icons blink on the display. The system is starting up. Wait until the blinking display of "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" go off. The drain pump keeps run- ning after the unit has stopped. Unlit The drain pump stays in operation for three minutes after the unit in the cooling mode is stopped. The drain pump is running while the unit is stopped. Unlit When drain water is detected, the drain pump goes into operation even while the unit is stopped. Outdoor unit, indoor unit, or BC controller makes noise when the operation mode is switched between Cooling and Heating. Normal display This noise is made when the refrigerant circuit is reversed and is normal. Sound of the refrigerant flow is heard from the indoor unit im- mediately after starting opera- tion. Normal display This is caused by the transient instability of the refrigerant flow and is nor- mal. Warm air sometimes comes out of the indoor units that are not in the heating mode. Normal display This is due to the fact that the LEVs on some of the indoor units are kept slightly open to prevent the refrigerant in the indoor units that are not op- erating in the heating mode from liquefying and accumulating in the com- pressor. It is part of a normal operation.

    Page 178

    [6-11 Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ]

  • 167 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run 6-11 Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) 6-11-1 Single Unit (Standard) Outdoor unit model

    Pury-Hp72T(Y)Kmu-A(-H)

    Pury-Hp96T(Y)Kmu-A(-H)

    BC controller model

    Cmb-P104Nu-G

    Cmb-P104Nu-G

    Conditions Ambient temperature (cooling) Indoor

    Db/Wb

    26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

    26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

    Outdoor

    35°C/− [95 °F/−]

    35°C/− [95 °F/−]

    Ambient temperature (heating) Indoor

    Db/Wb

    21.1°C/− [70 °F/-]

    21.1°C/− [70 °F/-]

    Outdoor

    8.3°C/6.1°C [47 °F/43 °F]

    8.3°C/6.1°C[47 °F/43 °F]

    Indoor unit Number of units connected Unit 3 2 Number of units in operation 3 2 Model
  • 24/24/24
  • 48/48 Piping Main pipe m [ft] 5 [16-3/8"] 5 [16-3/8"] Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4"] 10 [32-3/4"] Total pipe length 35 [114-13/16"] 25 [82] Fan speed
  • Hi
  • Hi Refrigerant charge kg [lbs-oz] 19.8 [43-10] 21.5 [47-6] Outdoor unit Voltage*1 *1. Measurements of current and voltage that are listed in the table above are those of the TKMU model.

    V

    230 230 Cooling-Only Outdoor unit Electric current*1

    A

    15.7 21.7 Compressor frequency Hz 43 61 LEV open- ing Indoor unit Pulse 200/200/200 387/387 BC controller (1/2/3) 2000/−/180 2000/−/170 Pressure High pressure (63HS1)/Low pressure (63LS) MPa [psi] 2.65/0.92 [384/133] 2.78/0.90 [403/131] BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Mid-way point (PS3) 2.59/2.59 [375/375] 2.70/2.70 [392/392] Section tempera- tures Outdoor unit Discharge (TH4)

    °C [°F]

    76 [169] 87 [189] Heat exchanger outlet (TH3) 41 [106] 41 [106] Accumulator inlet 14 [57] 8 [46] Accumulator outlet 14 [57] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 23 [73] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 34 [93] 40 [104] Indoor unit LEV inlet 24 [75] 19 [66] Heat exchanger inlet 12 [54] 6 [43] Heating-Only Outdoor unit Electric current*1

    A

    17.1 24.1 Compressor frequency Hz 57 76 LEV open- ing Indoor unit Pulse 203/203/203 406/406 BC controller (1/2/3) 110/-/520 110/-/590 Pressure High pressure (63HS1)/Low pressure (63LS) MPa [psi] 2.52/0.7 [365/102] 2.52/0.63 [365/91] BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Mid-way point (PS3) 2.45/2.13 [355/309] 2.48/2.27 [360/329] Section tempera- tures Outdoor unit Discharge (TH4)

    °C [°F]

    68 [154] 78 [172] Heat exchanger inlet (TH6) 2 [36] 0 [32] Accumulator inlet 1 [34] -2 [28] Accumulator outlet 1 [34] -3 [27] Compressor inlet 1 [34] -3 [27] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104] Indoor unit LEV inlet 30 [86] 36 [97] Heat exchanger inlet 62 [144] 68 [154]

    Page 179

    [6-11 Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ]

  • 168 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6-11-2 Dual Unit Combination (Standard) Packaged unit model

    Pury-Hp144T(Y)Skmu-A(-H)

    Outdoor unit model

    Pury-Hp72T(Y)Kmu-A(-H)

    Pury-Hp72T(Y)Kmu-A(-H)

    BC controller model

    Cmb-P108Nu-Ga

    Conditions Ambient temperature (cooling) Indoor

    Db/Wb

    26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

    Outdoor

    35°C/− [95 °F/−]

    Ambient temperature (heating) Indoor

    Db/Wb

    21.1°C/− [70 °F/-]

    Outdoor

    8.3°C/6.1°C [47 °F/43 °F]

    Indoor unit Number of units connected Unit 4 Number of units in operation 4 Model
  • 36/36/36/36
  • Piping Main pipe m [ft] 5 [16-3/8"] Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4"] Total pipe length 45 [147-5/8"] Fan speed
  • Hi
  • Refrigerant charge kg [lbs-oz] 36.6 [80-11] Outdoor unit Voltage*1 *1. Measurements of current and voltage that are listed in the table above are those of the TKMU model.

    V

    230 230 Cooling-Only Outdoor unit Electric current*1

    A

    32.4 Compressor frequency Hz 43 43 LEV open- ing Indoor unit Pulse 275/275/275/275 BC controller (1/2/3) 2000/2000/250 Pressure High pressure (63HS1)/Low pressure (63LS) MPa [psi] 2.65/0.91 [384/131] 2.65/0.91 [384/131] BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Mid-way point (PS3) 2.59/2.59 [375/375] Section tempera- tures Outdoor unit Discharge (TH4)

    °C [°F]

    76 [169] 76 [169] Heat exchanger outlet (TH3) 41 [106] 41 [106] Accumulator inlet 14 [57] 14 [57] Accumulator outlet 14 [57] 14 [57] Compressor inlet 23 [73] 23 [73] Compressor shell bottom 34 [93] 34 [93] Indoor unit LEV inlet 22 [72] Heat exchanger inlet 13 [55] Heating-Only Outdoor unit Electric current*1

    A

    35.3 Compressor frequency Hz 57 57 LEV open- ing Indoor unit Pulse 350/350/350/350 BC controller (1/2/3) 110/110/870 Pressure High pressure (63HS1)/Low pressure (63LS) MPa [psi] 2.52/0.70 [365/102] 2.52/0.70 [365/102] BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Mid-way point (PS3) 2.45/2.13 [355/309] Section tempera- tures Outdoor unit Discharge (TH4)

    °C [°F]

    68 [154] 68 [154] Heat exchanger inlet (TH6) 2 [36] 2 [36] Accumulator inlet 1 [34] 1 [34] Accumulator outlet 1 [34] 1 [34] Compressor inlet 1 [34] 1 [34] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104] Indoor unit LEV inlet 28 [82] Heat exchanger inlet 67 [153]

    Page 180

    [6-11 Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ]

  • 169 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 Test Run Packaged unit model

    Pury-Hp192T(Y)Skmu-A(-H)

    Outdoor unit model

    Pury-Hp96T(Y)Kmu-A(-H)

    Pury-Hp96T(Y)Kmu-A(-H)

    BC controller model

    Cmb-P108Nu-Ga

    Conditions Ambient temperature (cooling) Indoor

    Db/Wb

    26.7°C/19.4°C [80 °F/67 °F]

    Outdoor

    35°C/− [95 °F/−]

    Ambient temperature (heating) Indoor

    Db/Wb

    21.1°C/− [70 °F/-]

    Outdoor

    8.3°C/6.1°C [47 °F/43 °F]

    Indoor unit Number of units connected Unit 6 Number of units in operation 6 Model
  • 30/30/30/30/36/36
  • Piping Main pipe m [ft] 5 [16-3/8"] Branch pipe 10 [32-3/4"] Total pipe length 65 [213-1/4"] Fan speed
  • Hi
  • Refrigerant charge kg [lbs-oz] 38.7 [85-5] Outdoor unit Voltage*1 *1. Measurements of current and voltage that are listed in the table above are those of the TKMU model.

    V

    230 230 Cooling-Only Outdoor unit Electric current*1

    A

    44.8 Compressor frequency Hz 61 61 LEV open- ing Indoor unit Pulse 230/230/230/230/275/275 BC controller (1/2/3) 2000/2000/270 Pressure High pressure (63HS1)/Low pressure (63LS) MPa [psi] 2.78/0.90 [403/131] 2.78/0.90 [403/131] BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Mid-way point (PS3) 2.70/2.70 [392/392] Section tempera- tures Outdoor unit Discharge (TH4)

    °C [°F]

    87 [189] 87 [189] Heat exchanger outlet (TH3) 41 [106] 41 [106] Accumulator inlet 8 [46] 8 [46] Accumulator outlet 8 [46] 8 [46] Compressor inlet 19 [66] 19 [66] Compressor shell bottom 42 [108] 40 [104] Indoor unit LEV inlet 19 [66] Heat exchanger inlet 6 [43] Heating-Only Outdoor unit Electric current*1

    A

    49.7 Compressor frequency Hz 76 76 LEV open- ing Indoor unit Pulse 295/295/295/295/350/350 BC controller (1/2/3) 110/110/1050 Pressure High pressure (63HS1)/Low pressure (63LS) MPa [psi] 2.52/0.63 [365/91] 2.52/0.63 [365/91] BC controller on the liquid side (PS1)/Mid-way point (PS3) 2.48/2.27 [360/329] Section tempera- tures Outdoor unit Discharge (TH4)

    °C [°F]

    78 [172] 78 [172] Heat exchanger inlet (TH6) 0 [32] 0 [32] Accumulator inlet -2 [28] -2 [28] Accumulator outlet -3 [27] -3 [27] Compressor inlet -3 [27] -3 [27] Compressor shell bottom 40 [104] 40 [104] Indoor unit LEV inlet 36 [97] Heat exchanger inlet 68 [154]

    Page 181

    [6-11 Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ]

  • 170 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 182

  • 171 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists................................................................................ 175 7-2 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [0 - 999] ................................................................. 179 7-2-1 Error Code [0403] ............................................................................................................................... 179 7-3 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [1000 - 1999] ......................................................... 180 7-3-1 Error Code [1102] ............................................................................................................................... 180 7-3-2 Error Code [1301] ............................................................................................................................... 181 7-3-3 Error Code [1302] (during operation).................................................................................................. 182 7-3-4 Error Code [1302] (at startup)............................................................................................................. 183 7-3-5 Error Code [1500] ............................................................................................................................... 183 7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] ......................................................... 184 7-4-1 Error Code [2500] (Models with a drain sensor) ................................................................................. 184 7-4-2 Error Code [2500] (Models with a float switch) ................................................................................... 185 7-4-3 Error Code [2502] (Models with a drain sensor) ................................................................................. 186 7-4-4 Error Code [2502] (Models with a float switch) ................................................................................... 187 7-4-5 Error Code [2503] ............................................................................................................................... 188 7-4-6 Error Code [2600] ............................................................................................................................... 189 7-4-7 Error Code [2601] ............................................................................................................................... 189 7-4-8 Error Code [2602] ............................................................................................................................... 190 7-5 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [3000 - 3999] ......................................................... 191 7-5-1 Error Code [3121] ............................................................................................................................... 191 7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ......................................................... 192 7-6-1 Error Code [4102] (TKMU).................................................................................................................. 192 7-6-2 Error Code [4102] (YKMU).................................................................................................................. 193 7-6-3 Error Code [4106] ............................................................................................................................... 194 7-6-4 Error Code [4109] ............................................................................................................................... 194 7-6-5 Error Code [4115] (TKMU).................................................................................................................. 195 7-6-6 Error Code [4115] (YKMU).................................................................................................................. 195 7-6-7 Error Code [4116] ............................................................................................................................... 196 7-6-8 Error Code [4121] ............................................................................................................................... 196 7-6-9 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 108 (TKMU) ........................................................................... 197 7-6-10 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 108 (YKMU)........................................................................... 198 7-6-11 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 109 (TKMU) ........................................................................... 199 7-6-12 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 109 (YKMU)........................................................................... 199 7-6-13 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 110 (TKMU) ........................................................................... 200 7-6-14 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 111 (TKMU) ........................................................................... 200 7-6-15 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 111 (YKMU)........................................................................... 201 7-6-16 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 131......................................................................................... 201 7-6-17 Error Code [4230] (TKMU).................................................................................................................. 202 7-6-18 Error Code [4230] (YKMU).................................................................................................................. 202 7-6-19 Error Code [4240] (TKMU).................................................................................................................. 203 7-6-20 Error Code [4240] (YKMU).................................................................................................................. 203 7-6-21 Error Codes [4250, 4255] Detail Code 101 (TKMU) ........................................................................... 204 7-6-22 Error Codes [4250, 4255] Detail Code 101 (YKMU)........................................................................... 205 7-6-23 Error Code [4250] Detail Codes 103, 106, and 107 (TKMU) .............................................................. 206 7-6-24 Error Code [4250] Detail Codes 106 and 107 (YKMU)....................................................................... 206 7-6-25 Error Codes [4250, 4255] Detail Code 104......................................................................................... 207 7-6-26 Error Codes [4250, 4255] Detail Code 105......................................................................................... 208

    Page 183

  • 172 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-27 Error Code [4260] (TKMU).................................................................................................................. 209 7-6-28 Error Code [4260] (YKMU).................................................................................................................. 209 7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ......................................................... 210 7-7-1 Error Codes [5101, 5102, 5103, 5104]................................................................................................ 210 7-7-2 Error Codes [5104, 5105, 5106, 5107, 5109, 5111]............................................................................ 211 7-7-3 Error Code [5110] (TKMU).................................................................................................................. 212 7-7-4 Error Code [5110] (YKMU).................................................................................................................. 212 7-7-5 Error Codes [5111, 5112, 5115, 5116]................................................................................................ 213 7-7-6 Error Code [5201] ............................................................................................................................... 214 7-7-7 Error Codes [5201, 5203].................................................................................................................... 214 7-7-8 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 115 (TKMU)....................................................................................... 215 7-7-9 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 115 (YKMU)....................................................................................... 215 7-7-10 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 116 (TKMU)....................................................................................... 216 7-7-11 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 117..................................................................................................... 216 7-7-12 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 118 (TKMU)....................................................................................... 217 7-7-13 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 119 (TKMU)....................................................................................... 217 7-7-14 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 119 (YKMU)....................................................................................... 218 7-7-15 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 120 (TKMU)....................................................................................... 218 7-7-16 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 120 (YKMU)....................................................................................... 219 7-7-17 Error Codes [5305] Detail Code 132................................................................................................... 219 7-7-18 Error Codes [5305] Detail Code 133................................................................................................... 220 7-7-19 Error Codes [5305] Detail Code 134................................................................................................... 221 7-7-20 Error Code [5401] ............................................................................................................................... 221 7-7-21 Error Code [5402] ............................................................................................................................... 222 7-7-22 Error Code [5403] ............................................................................................................................... 222 7-7-23 Error Code [5701] ............................................................................................................................... 222 7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ......................................................... 223 7-8-1 Error Code [6201] ............................................................................................................................... 223 7-8-2 Error Code [6202] ............................................................................................................................... 223 7-8-3 Error Code [6600] ............................................................................................................................... 224 7-8-4 Error Code [6601] ............................................................................................................................... 224 7-8-5 Error Code [6602] ............................................................................................................................... 225 7-8-6 Error Code [6603] ............................................................................................................................... 226 7-8-7 Error Code [6606] ............................................................................................................................... 226 7-8-8 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = Outdoor Unit (OC)........................................................... 227 7-8-9 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = BC Controller (BC).......................................................... 227 7-8-10 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = Indoor Unit (IC) ............................................................... 228 7-8-11 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = LOSSNAY (LC)............................................................... 229 7-8-12 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = ME Remote Controller .................................................... 230 7-8-13 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = System Controller ........................................................... 231 7-8-14 Error Code [6607] All Error Source Addresses................................................................................... 232 7-8-15 Error Code [6607] No Error Source Address ...................................................................................... 233 7-8-16 Error Code [6608] ............................................................................................................................... 234 7-8-17 Error Code [6831] ............................................................................................................................... 235 7-8-18 Error Code [6832] ............................................................................................................................... 236 7-8-19 Error Code [6833] ............................................................................................................................... 237 7-8-20 Error Code [6834] ............................................................................................................................... 238 7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ......................................................... 239 7-9-1 Error Code [7100] ............................................................................................................................... 239

    Page 184

  • 173 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-9-2 Error Code [7101] ............................................................................................................................... 240 7-9-3 Error Code [7102] ............................................................................................................................... 241 7-9-4 Error Code [7105] ............................................................................................................................... 242 7-9-5 Error Code [7106] ............................................................................................................................... 242 7-9-6 Error Code [7107] ............................................................................................................................... 243 7-9-7 Error Code [7110] ............................................................................................................................... 244 7-9-8 Error Code [7111] ............................................................................................................................... 244 7-9-9 Error Code [7113] ............................................................................................................................... 245 7-9-10 Error Code [7117] ............................................................................................................................... 246 7-9-11 Error Code [7130] ............................................................................................................................... 247

    Page 185

  • 174 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 186

    [7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists ]

  • 175 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists Error Code Prelimi- nary error code Error (prelim- inary) detail code Error code definition Searched unit Notes 0403 4300 4305 1 5 (Note) Serial communication error/Panel communication error

    O

    O

    (page 179) 1102 1202
  • Discharge temperature fault
  • O

    (page 180) 1301
  • -
  • Low pressure fault

    O

    (page 181) 1302 1402
  • High pressure fault
  • O

    (page 182) 1500 1600
  • Refrigerant overcharge
  • O

    (page 183)
  • 1605
  • Preliminary suction pressure fault
  • O

    2500
  • -
  • Drain sensor submergence

    O

    (page 184) 2502
  • -
  • Drain pump fault

    O

    O

    (page 186) 2503
  • -
  • Drain sensor (Thd) fault

    O

    O

    (page 188) 2600
  • -
  • Water leakage

    O

    (page 189) 2601
  • -
  • Water supply cutoff

    O

    (page 189) 2602
  • -
  • Function setting error

    O

    (page 190) 3121
  • -
  • Out-of-range outside air temperature

    O

    (page 191) 4102 4152
  • Open phase
  • O

    (page 192) 4106
  • -
  • Transmission power supply fault

    O

    (page 194) 4109
  • -
  • Fan operation status detection error

    O

    (page 194) 4115
  • -
  • Power supply signal sync error

    O

    (page 195) 4116
  • -
  • RPM error/Motor error

    O

    O

    (page 196) 4121 4171 − Function setting error

    O

    (page 196) 4220 4225 (Note) 4320 4325 (Note) [0] Backup operation

    O

    [108] Abnormal bus voltage drop

    O

    (page 197) [109] Abnormal bus voltage rise

    O

    (page 199) [110] VDC error

    O

    (page 200) [111] Logic error

    O

    (page 200) [131] Low bus voltage at startup

    O

    (page 201) 4230 4330
  • Heatsink overheat protection
  • O

    (page 202) 4240 4340
  • Overload protection
  • O

    (page 203) 4250 4255 (Note) 4350 4355 (Note) [0] Backup operation

    O

    [101] IPM error

    O

    (page 204) [103] DCCT overcurrent (H/W detection)

    O

    (page 206) [104] Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault

    O

    (page 207) [105] Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor

    O

    (page 208) [106] Instantaneous overcurrent (S/W detection)

    O

    (page 206) [107] Overcurrent (effective value)(S/W detection)

    O

    (page 206) 4260
  • -
  • Heatsink overheat protection at startup

    O

    (page 209) Outdoor unit Indoor unit BC controller

    Lossnay

    Remote controller

    Page 187

    [7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists ]

  • 176 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    5101 1202
  • Temperature sensor
  • fault Return air temperature

    (Th21)

    O

    (page 210) OA processing unit inlet temperature (TH4)

    O

    (page 210) 5102 1217
  • Temperature sensor
  • fault Indoor unit pipe tempera- ture (TH22)

    O

    (page 210) OA processing unit pipe temperature (TH2)

    O

    (page 210) 5103 1205 00 Temperature sensor fault Indoor unit gas-side pipe temperature (TH23)

    O

    (page 210) OA processing unit gas- side pipe temperature

    (Th3)

    O

    (page 210) 5104 1202
  • Temperature sensor
  • fault OA processing unit intake air temperature (TH1)

    O

    (page 210) Outside temperature

    (Th24)

    O

    (page 210) Detectable only by the All- Fresh type in- door units Outdoor unit discharge temperature (TH4)

    O

    (page 211) 5105 1204
  • Temperature sensor
  • fault Accumulator inlet tempera- ture (TH5)

    O

    (page 211) 5106 1216
  • Temperature sensor
  • fault Heat exchanger inlet tem- perature (TH6)

    O

    (page 211) 5107 1221
  • Temperature sensor
  • fault Outside temperature (TH7)

    O

    (page 211) 5109 1273
  • Temperature sensor
  • fault ON-defrost (TH9)

    O

    (page 211) 5110 1214 [0] Backup operation

    O

    01 Temperature sensor fault Heatsink temperature

    (Thhs)

    O

    (page 212) 5111 1274
  • Temperature sensor
  • fault ON-defrost (TH11)

    O

    (page 211) Liquid inlet temperature

    (Th11)

    O

    (page 213) 5112
  • -
  • Temperature sensor fault (BC controller) Bypass outlet temperature

    (Th12)

    O

    (page 213) 5115
  • -
  • LEV3 outlet temperature

    (Th15)

    O

    (page 213) 5116
  • -
  • LEV3 inlet temperature

    (Th16)

    O

    (page 213) 5201
  • -
  • High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1)

    O

    (page 214) 5201 1402
  • High-pressure sensor fault
  • (Outdoor unit HPS/BC controller PS1)

    O

    O

    (page 214) 5203
  • -
  • Intermediate pressure sensor fault (BC controller PS3)

    O

    (page 214) Error Code Prelimi- nary error code Error (prelim- inary) detail code Error code definition Searched unit Notes Outdoor unit Indoor unit BC controller

    Lossnay

    Remote controller

    Page 188

    [7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists ]

  • 177 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 5301 4300 [0] Backup operation

    O

    [115] ACCT sensor fault

    O

    (page 215) [116] DCCT sensor fault

    O

    (page 216) [117] ACCT sensor circuit fault

    O

    (page 216) [118] DCCT sensor circuit fault

    O

    (page 217) [119] Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector

    O

    (page 217) [120] Faulty ACCT wiring

    O

    (page 218) 5305 4305 [0] Backup operation

    O

    [132] Position detection error at startup

    O

    (page 219) [133] Position detection error during operation

    O

    (page 220) [134] RPM error before startup

    O

    (page 221) 5401
  • -
  • Humidity sensor fault

    O

    O

    (page 221) 5402
  • -
  • Outside humidity sensor fault

    O

    (page 222) 5403
  • -
  • Aging degradation of outside humidity sensor

    O

    (page 222) 5701
  • -
  • Loose float switch connector

    O

    (page 222) 6201
  • -
  • Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory error)

    O

    (page 223) 6202
  • -
  • Remote controller board fault (clock IC error)

    O

    (page 223) 6600
  • -
  • Address overlaps

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    (page 224) 6601
  • -
  • Polarity setting error

    O

    (page 224) 6602
  • -
  • Transmission processor hardware error

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    (page 225) 6603
  • -
  • Transmission line bus busy error

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    (page 226) 6606
  • -
  • Communication error between device and trans- mission processors

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    (page 226) 6607
  • -
  • No ACK error

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    (page 227) 6608
  • -
  • No response error

    O

    O

    O

    O

    O

    (page 234) 6831
  • -
  • MA controller signal reception error (No signal re- ception)

    O

    O

    (page 235) 6832
  • -
  • MA remote controller signal transmission error (Synchronization error)

    O

    O

    (page 236) 6833
  • -
  • MA remote controller signal transmission error (H/ W error)

    O

    O

    (page 237) 6834
  • -
  • MA controller signal reception error (Start bit de- tection error)

    O

    O

    (page 238) 7100
  • -
  • Total capacity error

    O

    (page 239) 7101
  • -
  • Capacity code setting error

    O

    O

    O

    (page 240) 7102
  • -
  • Wrong number of connected units

    O

    O

    (page 241) 7105
  • -
  • Address setting error

    O

    (page 242) 7106
  • -
  • Attribute setting error

    O

    (page 242) 7107
  • -
  • Port setting error

    O

    (page 243) Error Code Prelimi- nary error code Error (prelim- inary) detail code Error code definition Searched unit Notes Outdoor unit Indoor unit BC controller

    Lossnay

    Remote controller

    Page 189

    [7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists ]

  • 178 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    The last digit in the check error codes in the 4000's and 5000's and two-digit detail codes indicate if the codes apply to inverter on fan inverter. Example Code 4225 (detail code 108): Bus voltage drop in the fan inverter system Code 4230 : Heatsink overheat protection in the inverter system 7110
  • -
  • Connection information signal transmission/recep- tion error

    O

    (page 244) 7111
  • -
  • Remote controller sensor fault

    O

    O

    (page 244) 7113
  • -
  • Function setting error (improper connection of CN-

    Typ)

    O

    (page 245) 7117
  • -
  • Model setting error

    O

    (page 246) 7130
  • -
  • Incompatible unit combination

    O

    (page 247) The last digit Inverter system 0 or 1 Compressor inverter system 5 Fan inverter system Error Code Prelimi- nary error code Error (prelim- inary) detail code Error code definition Searched unit Notes Outdoor unit Indoor unit BC controller

    Lossnay

    Remote controller

    Page 190

    [7-2 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [0 - 999] ]

  • 179 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-2 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [0 - 999] 7-2-1 Error Code [0403]
  • Error code definition
  • Serial communication error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Serial communication error between the control board and the INV board on the compressor, and between the control board and the Fan board Detail code 1: Between the control board and the INV board Detail code 5: Between the control board and the Fan board
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Faulty wiring Check the following wiring connections. 1) Between Control board and Fan board 2) Between Fan board and INV board (2) INV board failure, Fan board failure and Control board failure Replace the INV board or the Fan board or control board when the power turns on automatically, even if the power source is reset.
  • Error code definition
  • Panel communication error (Indoor unit)
  • Error definition and detection method
  • This error is detected when indoor units cannot successfully receive the signals from the Auto filter cleaning unit for one min- ute.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Control board FAN board

    Cn2,Cn2A

    Cn80

    Cn4,Cn4A

    Cn80

    FAN board INV board

    Cn82

    Cn2

    Cn83

    Cn43

    Cause Check method and remedy (1) Incorrect switch setting on the indoor unit cir- cuit board Check SW3-3 on the indoor unit circuit board Set SW3-3 to ON only when connecting an auto filter cleaning unit. (2) Power wire that connects the circuit board on the indoor unit and the circuit board on the cleaning unit is loose. Check the LED1 (cleaning unit circuit board (microcomputer power)). Lit: Power is supplied properly. Unlit: Check for loose or disconnected power wire between the indoor unit circuit board (CNAC) and the cleaning unit circuit board (CN3A). (3) Communication wire that connects the circuit board on the indoor unit and the circuit board on the cleaning unit is loose. Check the LED4 (cleaning unit circuit board (communication)). Blinking: Normal communication Unlit: Check for loose or disconnected communication wire be- tween the indoor unit circuit board (CN3G) and the cleaning unit circuit board (CN3G). If the LED blinks at irregular intervals (normally blinks at 0.5-sec- ond intervals), electrical interference is suspected. Check the items above, turn the power off, and turn the power back on. If the error persists, replace either the cleaning unit cir- cuit board or the indoor unit circuit board. (4) Panel transceiver circuit fault (cleaning unit) (5) Panel transceiver circuit fault (indoor unit) (6) Electrical interference on the cleaning unit's communication cable

    Page 191

    [7-3 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [1000 - 1999] ]

  • 180 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-3 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [1000 - 1999] 7-3-1 Error Code [1102]
  • Error code definition
  • Discharge temperature fault
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • 1) If the discharge temperature of 120 °C [248°F] or more is detected during the above operation (the first detection), the outdoor unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically. 2) If the discharge temperature of 120° C [248°F] or more is detected again (the second detection) within 30 minutes after the second stop of the outdoor unit described above, the mode will be changed to 3 - minute restart mode, then the outdoor unit will restart in 3 minutes. 3) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected (the third detection) within 30 minutes after the stop of the outdoor unit described above (regardless of the first or the second stop), the outdoor unit will make an error stop, and the error code "1102" will be displayed. 4) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected more than 30 minutes after the previous stop of the outdoor unit, the detection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start. 5) For 30 minutes after the stop (the first stop or the second stop) of the outdoor unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Gas leak, gas shortage Refer to the following page(s).[6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge](page 161) (2) Overload operation Check operating conditions and operation status of indoor/ outdoor units. (3) LEV failure on the indoor unit Perform a heating operation and check the operation. Cooling: LEV on the indoor unit BC controller LEV1,3

    Svm1,2

    Sva,C

    Heating: LEV on the indoor unit BC controller LEV3

    Svb

    SV4a, SV4b, SV4d Refer to the following page(s). [8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems](page 273) (4) BC controller LEV malfunction Cooling only : LEV3 Cooling main : LEV1,3 Heating only or heating main : LEV3 Defrost : LEV3 (5) BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction → Cooling only or defrost (6) BC controller SVA malfunction → Cooling only or cooling main (7) BC controller SVB malfunction → Heating only or heating main (8) Solenoid valve actuation failure (SV4a, SV4b, or SV4d) →heating only, heating main (9) Port address setting error. Confirm the port address of the indoor unit. (10) Closed ball valve Confirm that the ball valve is fully open. (11) Outdoor fan (including fan parts) failure, mo- tor failure, or fan controller malfunction Rise in discharge temp. by low pressure drawing for (3) - (11). Check the fan on the outdoor unit. Refer to the following page(s). [8-7 Troubleshooting Outdoor Unit Fan Problems](page 272) (12) Gas leak between low and high pressures (4-way valve failure, Compressor failure, So- lenoid valve (SV1a) failure) Perform a cooling or heating operation and check the opera- tion. (13) Thermistor failure

    (Th4)

    Refer to the following page(s). [7-7-2 Error Codes [5104, 5105, 5106, 5107, 5109, 5111]](page 211) (14) Input circuit failure on the controller board thermistor Check the inlet air temperature on the LED monitor.

    Page 192

    [7-3 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [1000 - 1999] ]

  • 181 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-3-2 Error Code [1301]
  • Error code definition
  • Low pressure fault
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When starting the compressor from Stop Mode for the first time if low pressure reads 0.098MPa [14psi] immediately before start-up, the operation immediately stops.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inner pressure drop due to a leakage. Refer to the following page(s). [8-5-3 Comparing the Low- Pressure Sensor Measurement and Gauge Pressure](page 268) (2) Low pressure sensor failure (3) Short-circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn outer rubber (4) A pin on the male connector is missing. (5) Disconnected wire (6) Failure of the low pressure input circuit on the controller board

    Page 193

    [7-3 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [1000 - 1999] ]

  • 182 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-3-3 Error Code [1302] (during operation)
  • Error code definition
  • High pressure fault 1 (Outdoor unit)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • 1) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor during operation (the first detection), the out- door stops once, turns to antirestart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically. 2) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor again (the second detection) within 30 min- utes after the first stop of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically. 3) If the pressure of 3.87MPa [561psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor (the third detection) within 30 minutes of the second stop of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit will make an error stop, and the error code "1302" will be displayed. 4) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected more than 30 minutes after the stop of the outdoor unit, the detection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start. 5) For 30 minutes after the stop of the outdoor unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display. 6) The outdoor unit makes an error stop immediately when not only the pressure sensor but also the pressure switch detects 4.15+0,-0.15 MPa [601+0,-22 psi]
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Indoor unit LEV actuation failure Perform a heating operation and check the operation. Cooling: LEV on the indoor unit BC controller LEV1,3, SVM1,1b,2,2b, SVA Heating: LEV on the indoor unit BC controller LEV3, SVM2,2b, SV4a,SV4b, SV4d Refer to the following page(s). [8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems](page 273) (2) BC controller LEV malfunction Heating only or heating main : Indoor LEV 3 Defrost : LEV3 (3) BC controller SVM1 and 2 malfunction →Cooling only or defrost (4) BC controller SVA and SVC malfunction →Cooling only or cooling main (5) BC controller SVB malfunction →Heating only or heating main Solenoid valve actuation failure (SV4a, SV4b, or SV4d) →Cooling only or cooling main (6) Port address setting error. Confirm the port address of the indoor unit. (7) Refrigerant service valve actuation failure Confirm that the refrigerant service valve is fully (8) Short cycle on the indoor unit side Check the indoor units for problems and correct them, if any. (9) Clogged filter on the indoor unit (10) Reduced air flow due to dirty fan on the indoor unit fan (11) Dirty heat exchanger of the indoor unit (12) Indoor fan (including fan parts) failure or motor failure Items (7) through (12) above reduce the condensing capability of the unit, resulting in high-pressure rise during heating operation. (13) Short cycle on the outdoor unit Check the outdoor units for problems and correct them, if any. (14) Dirty heat exchanger of the outdoor unit (15) Outdoor fan (including fan parts) failure, motor failure, or fan con- troller malfunction Items (13) through (15) above reduce the condensing capability of the unit, resulting in high-pressure rise during cooling operation. Check the fan on the outdoor unit. Refer to the following page(s). [8-7 Troubleshooting Outdoor Unit Fan Problems](page 272) (16) Solenoid valve (SV1a) malfunction The by-pass valve (SV1a) can not control rise in high pressure. Refer to the following page(s). [8-6 Troubleshooting Solenoid Valve Problems](page 269) (17) Thermistor failure (TH9, TH11, TH7) Refer to the following page(s). [7-7-2 Error Codes [5104, 5105, 5106, 5107, 5109, 5111]](page 211) (18) Pressure sensor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-5-1 Comparing the High-Pressure Sensor Measurement and Gauge Pressure](page 267) (19) Failure of the thermistor input circuit and pressure sensor input circuit on the controller board Check the sensor temperature/pressure on the LED monitor. (20) Thermistor mounting problem (TH9, TH11, TH7) Check the sensor temperature/pressure on the LED monitor. (21) Disconnected male connector on the pressure switch (63H1) or disconnected wire

    Page 194

    [7-3 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [1000 - 1999] ]

  • 183 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-3-4 Error Code [1302] (at startup)
  • Error code definition
  • High pressure fault 2 (Outdoor unit)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • If the pressure of 0.098MPa [14psi] or lower is registered on the pressure sensor immediately before start-up, it will trigger an abnormal stop, and error code "1302" will be displayed.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-3-5 Error Code [1500]
  • Error code definition
  • Refrigerant overcharge
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • An error can be detected by the discharge temperature superheat. 1) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied during operation (first detection), the outdoor unit stops, goes into the 3-minute restart mode, and starts up in three minutes. 2) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied again within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the outdoor unit (second de- tection), the unit comes to an abnormal stop, and the error code "1500" appears. 3) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied 30 minutes or more after the first stoppage of the outdoor unit, the same se- quence as Item "1 above (first detection) is followed. 4) For 30 minutes after the stop of the outdoor unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inner pressure drop due to a leakage. Refer to the following page(s). [8-5-1 Comparing the High-Pressure Sensor Measurement and Gauge Pressure](page 267) (2) Pressure sensor failure (3) Shorted-circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn outer rubber (4) A pin on the male connector on the pressure sensor is missing or contact failure (5) Disconnected pressure sensor cable (6) Failure of the pressure sensor input circuit on the controller board Cause Check method and remedy (1) Overcharged refrigerant Refer to the following page(s). [6-9 Evaluating and Adjust- ing Refrigerant Charge](page 161) (2) Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board Check the temperature and pressure readings on the sen- sor that are displayed on the LED monitor. (3) Faulty mounting of thermistor (TH4) Check the temperature and pressure readings on the thermistor that are displayed on the LED monitor. (4) Solenoid valve actuation failure (SV5b) Perform a cooling or heating operation and check the oper- ation. [8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems](page 273) (5) Solenoid valve actuation failure (SV4a, SV4b, or SV4d) → Heating only or heating main (6) LEV5a failure→ Heating only or heating main (7) LEV4 failure→ Heating only or heating main

    Page 195

    [7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] ]

  • 184 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] 7-4-1 Error Code [2500] (Models with a drain sensor)
  • Error code definition
  • Drain sensor submergence
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • 1) If an immersion of the drain sensor in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on. 2) If the immersion of the sensor in the water is detected four consecutive times at an hour interval, this is considered water leak- age, and "2500" appears on the monitor. 3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped. 4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met: ŒOne hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON. ŒThe operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry. ŒThe liquid pipe temperature minus the inlet temperature is -10°C [-18°F] or less.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Drain water drainage problem ŒClogged drain pump ŒClogged drain piping ŒBackflow of drain water from other units Check for proper drainage. (2) Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor ŒTrickling of water along the lead wire ŒRippling of drain water caused by filter clogging 1) Check for proper lead wire installation. 2) Check for clogged filter. (3) Failure of the relay circuit for the solenoid valve Replace the relay. (4) Indoor unit control board failure ŒDrain sensor circuit failure If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit control board.

    Page 196

    [7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] ]

  • 185 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-4-2 Error Code [2500] (Models with a float switch)
  • Error code definition
  • Drain sensor submergence
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • 1) If an immersion of the float switch in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on. 2) If the drain pump turns on within one hour after preliminary water leakage is detected and the above-mentioned condition is detected two consecutive times, water leakage error water leakage is detected, and "2500" appears on the monitor. 3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped. 4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met: ŒOne hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON. ŒThe operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry. ŒThe liquid pipe temperature minus the inlet temperature is - 10°C [ -18°F] or less.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Drain water drainage problem ŒClogged drain pump ŒClogged drain piping ŒBackflow of drain water from other units Check for proper drainage. (2) Stuck float switch Check for slime in the moving parts of the float switch. Check for normal operation of the float switch. (3) Float switch failure Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and turned off. 6 minutes 6 minutes 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds

    On

    Off

    On

    Off

    Drain pump operation triggered by a submergence of the liquid level sensor (except during the Cooing/Dry mode) Drain pump output Float switch input Submergence of the sensor Submergence of the sensor Preliminary water leakage Submergence of the sensor Water leakage Sensor in the air Sensor in the air Within 1-hour period Within 1-hour period

    Page 197

    [7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] ]

  • 186 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-4-3 Error Code [2502] (Models with a drain sensor)
  • Error code definition
  • Drain pump fault
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • 1) Make the drain sensor thermistor self-heat. If the temperature rise is small, it is interpreted that the sensor is immersed in water. This condition is considered to be a preliminary error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode. 2) If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain pump error, and "2502" appears on the monitor. 3) This error is always detected while the drain pump is in operation. 4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of outdoor unit (system stoppage) are met. ∗"Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature -10°C [ -18 °F] " has been detected for 30 minutes. ∗The immersion of drain sensor is detected 10 consecutive times. ∗The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage of the outdoor unit. 5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the outdoor unit in the same refrigerant circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the outdoor unit brings all the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop. "2502" appears on the monitor of the units that came to an error stop. 6) Forced stoppage of the outdoor unit Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped. 7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of outdoor unit Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the outdoor unit that is connected to the same refrig- erant circuit. Forced stoppage of the outdoor unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller. (Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other. The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit) that caused the error.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Drain pump failure Check for proper functioning of the drain pump. (2) Drain water drainage problem ŒClogged drain pump ŒClogged drain piping Check for proper drainage. (3) Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor ŒTrickling of water along the lead wire ŒRippling of drain water caused by filter clogging 1) Check for proper lead wire installation. 2) Check for clogged filter. (4) Indoor unit control board failure ŒDrain pump drive circuit failure ŒDrain heater output circuit failure If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit control board. (5) Items (1) through (4) above and an indoor unit elec- tronic valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred si- multaneously. Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for leaks.

    Page 198

    [7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] ]

  • 187 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-4-4 Error Code [2502] (Models with a float switch)
  • Error code definition
  • Drain pump fault
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • 1) The immersion of sensor tip in water is detected by the ON/OFF signal from the float switch. ∗Submergence of the sensor When it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is immersed in water. ∗Sensor in the air When it is detected that the float switch has been OFF for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is not immersed in water. 2) If it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 3 minutes after the immersion of the sensor tip was detected, this is con- sidered a drain pump failure, and "2502" appears on the monitor. ∗The total time it takes for this error to be detected is 3 minutes and 15 seconds, including the time it takes for the first im- mersion of the sensor tip to be detected. 3) Detection of drain pump failure is performed while the unit is stopped. 4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of outdoor unit (system stoppage) are met. ∗"Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature
  • 10°C [ -18°F] " has been detected for 30 minutes.
  • ∗It is detected by the float switch that the sensor tip has been immersed in water for 15 minutes or more. ∗The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage of the outdoor unit. 5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the outdoor unit in the same refrigerant circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the outdoor unit brings all the indoor units in the same refrigerant circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop. 6) Forced stoppage of the outdoor unit Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped. This error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped. 7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of outdoor unit Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the outdoor unit that is connected to the same refrig- erant circuit. Forced stoppage of the outdoor unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller. (Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other. The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit) that caused the error.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Drain pump failure Check for proper functioning of the drain pump mechanism (2) Drain water drainage problem ŒClogged drain pump ŒClogged drain piping Check for proper drainage. (3) Stuck float switch Check for slime in the moving parts of the float switch. Check for normal operation of the float switch. (4) Float switch failure Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and turned off. (5) Indoor unit control board failure ŒDrain pump drive circuit failure ŒFloat switch input circuit failure Replace indoor unit control board. (6) Items (1) through (5) above and an indoor unit electronic valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred simultane- ously. Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for leaks.

    Page 199

    [7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] ]

  • 188 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-4-5 Error Code [2503]
  • Error code definition
  • Drain sensor (Thd) fault
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒIf the open or short circuit of the thermistor has been detected for 30 seconds, this condition is considered to be a preliminary error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode. ŒIf another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain sensor error.(If the short or open circuit of the thermistor is no longer detected, normal operation will be restored in 3 minutes.) ŒThis error is detected when one of the following conditions are met. ∗During Cool/Dry operation ∗Liquid pipe temperature minus inlet temperature is equal to or smaller than - 10°C [ -18°F] (except during the defrost cycle) ∗When the liquid temperature thermistor or suction temperature thermistor or short or open circuited. ∗Drain pump is in operation. ∗One hour has elapsed since the drain sensor went off. Short: 90°C [194 °F] or above Open: - 20°C [-4 °F] or below
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Faulty connector (CN31) insertion. 1) Check for connector connection failure. Reinsert the connector, restart the operation, and check for proper operation. (2) Broken or semi-broken thermistor wire 2) Check for a broken thermistor wire. (3) Thermistor failure 3) Check the resistance of the thermistor. 0°C[32 °F]:6.0 kΩ 10°C[50 °F]:3.9 kΩ 20°C[68°F]:2.6 kΩ 30°C[86°F]:1.8 kΩ 40°C[104 °F]:1.3 kΩ (4) Indoor unit control board (error detection circuit) failure 4) Replace the indoor unit control board if the problem recurs when the unit is operated with the No.-1 and No.-2 pins on the drain sensor connector (CN31) being short-circuited. If the above item checks out OK, there are no problems with the drain sensor. Turn off the power and turn it back on.

    Page 200

    [7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] ]

  • 189 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-4-6 Error Code [2600]
  • Error code definition
  • Water leakage
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Check that water does not leak from the pipes in such as the humidifier. 7-4-7 Error Code [2601]
  • Error code definition
  • Water supply cutoff
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) The water tank of the humidifier is empty. Check the amount of supply water. Check for the solenoid valve and for the connection. (2) The solenoid valve for humidification is OFF. Check the connector. (3) Disconnected float switch Check the connecting part. (4) Poor operation of float switch Check for the float switch. (5) Frozen water tank Turn off the power source of the water tank to defrost, and turn it on again.

    Page 201

    [7-4 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [2000 - 2999] ]

  • 190 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-4-8 Error Code [2602]
  • Error code definition
  • Function setting error
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy The function selection switch on the LOSS- NAY unit (SW5-5) is set to ON. Set the function selection switch (SW5-5) on the LOSSNAY unit to OFF.

    Page 202

    [7-5 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [3000 - 3999] ]

  • 191 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-5 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [3000 - 3999] 7-5-1 Error Code [3121]
  • Error code definition
  • Out-of-range outside air temperature
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒWhen the thermistor temperature of -32°C[-25°F] or below has continuously been detected for 3 minutes during heating op- eration (during compressor operation), the unit makes an error stop and "3121" appears on the display. (Use the OC therm- istor temperature to determine when two outdoor units are in operation.) ŒThe compressor restarts when the thermistor temperature is -26°C[-15°F] or above (both OC and OS) during error stop. (The error display needs to be canceled by setting the remote controller.) ŒOutdoor temperature error is canceled if the units stop during error stop. (The error display needs to be canceled by setting the remote controller.)
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Check the following factors if an error is detected, without drop in the outdoor temperature. Cause Check method and remedy (1) Thermistor failure Check thermistor resistance. (2) Pinched lead wire Check for pinched lead wire. (3) Torn wire coating Check for wire coating. (4) A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure Check connector. (5) Disconnected wire Check for wire. (6) Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED monitor. When the temperature is far different from the actual temper- ature, replace the control board.

    Th7

    Open detection -40 C [ -40 F ] and below (130 k ) Short detection 110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k )

    Page 203

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 192 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] 7-6-1 Error Code [4102] (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Open phase
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒAn open phase of the power supply was detected at power on. The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Power supply problem ŒOpen phase voltage of the power supply ŒPower supply voltage drop Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1. (2) Noise filter problem ŒCoil problem ŒCircuit board failure ŒCheck the coil connections. ŒCheck for coil burnout. ŒConfirm that the voltage at the CN001 connector is 188 V or above. (3) Wiring failure ŒCheck Noise filter CN110, relay connector CNFG2, and control board CN110 connector for damage to wire or for incomplete connection. ŒCheck Noise filter CN012 and control board CNAC connector. (4) Blown fuse Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a blown fuse. ->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault of the actuator. (5) Control board failure Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the problem.

    Page 204

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 193 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-2 Error Code [4102] (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Open phase
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒAn open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on. ŒThe L3 phase current is outside of the specified range. The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Power supply problem ŒOpen phase voltage of the power supply ŒPower supply voltage drop Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1. (2) Noise filter problem ŒCoil problem ŒCircuit board failure ŒCheck the coil connections. ŒCheck for coil burnout. ŒCheck that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on the noise filter board is 414V or above. (3) Wiring failure Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 190 V or above. If the voltage is below 190, check the wiring between noise filter CN6, noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control board CNAC. Confirm that the wiring between noise filter TB23 and INV board SC-L3 is put through CT3. (4) Blown fuse Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a blown fuse. ->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault of the actuator. (5) CT3 failure Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compres- sor has gone into operation. (6) Control board failure Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the problem.

    Page 205

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 194 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-3 Error Code [4106]
  • Error code definition
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Transmission power output failure
  • Cause
  • 1) Wiring failure 2) Transmission power supply cannot output voltage because overcurrent was detected. 3) Voltage cannot be output due to transmission power supply problem. 4) Transmission voltage detection circuit failure
  • Check method and remedy
  • Check the transmission power supply circuit on all outdoor units in a given refrigerant circuit for problems. [8-12-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 308) [8-13-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 310)
  • Error code definition
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Transmission power reception failure
  • Cause
  • One of the outdoor units stopped supplying power, but no other outdoor units start supplying power.
  • Check method and remedy
  • Check the transmission power supply circuit on all outdoor units in a given refrigerant circuit for problems. [8-12-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 308) [8-13-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 310) 7-6-4 Error Code [4109]
  • Error code definition
  • Indoor unit fan operation error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • 1) Connector CN28 has remained open-circuited for 100 consecutive secondsduring operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Auxiliary relay (X13) fault The coil or the wiring of the auxiliary relay connected to CN28 is faulty. (2) Connector (CN28) is disconnected. Check the connector for proper connection. (3) Blown fuse Check the fuse on the control circuit board. (4) Motor error (thermistor error inside the motor) Check the unit fan for proper operation in the test run mode. If no problems are found with items 1 through 3 above and the fan does not operate, replace the motor.

    Page 206

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 195 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-5 Error Code [4115] (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Power supply signal sync error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-6-6 Error Code [4115] (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Power supply signal sync error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Power supply error Check the voltage of the power supply terminal block (TB1). (2) Noise filter problem ŒCoil problem ŒCircuit board failure ŒCheck the coil connections. ŒCheck for coil burnout. ŒConfirm that the voltage at the CN012 connector is 188 V or above. (3) Blown fuse Check fuse F01 on the control board. (4) Wiring failure Between noise filter board CN012 and control board

    Cnac

    Confirm that the voltage at the control board con- nector CNAC is 188 V or above. (5) Control board failure If none of the items described above is applicable, and if the trouble reappears even after the power is switched on again, replace the control board. Cause Check method and remedy (1) Power supply error Check the voltage of the power supply terminal block (TB1). (2) Noise filter problem ŒCoil problem ŒCircuit board failure ŒCheck the coil connections. ŒCheck for coil burnout. ŒCheck that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on the noise filter board is 414V or above. (3) Blown fuse Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a blown fuse. (4) Wiring failure Between noise filter CN6, noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control board CNAC Confirm that the voltage at the control board con- nector CNAC is 190 V or above. (5) Control board failure If none of the items described above is applicable, and if the trouble reappears even after the power is switched on again, replace the control board.

    Page 207

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 196 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-7 Error Code [4116]
  • Error code definition
  • RPM error/Motor error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒLossnay

    ∗The motor keep running even if the power is OFF. ∗The thermal overload relay is ON. (Only for the three-phase model) ŒIndoor unit If detected less than 180rpm or more than 2000rpm, the indoor unit will restart and keep running for 3 minutes.If detected again, the display will appear.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-6-8 Error Code [4121]
  • Error code definition
  • Function setting error
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Board failure Replace the board. (2) Motor malfunction Check for the motor and the solenoid switch. (3) Solenoid switch malfunction Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit (1) Dip switch setting error on the control board Check the SW6-1 setting on the control board (2) Connector connection error on the control board Check that nothing is connected to the connector CNAF on the control board. (3) Control board failure Replace the control board if no problems are found with the two items above.

    Page 208

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 197 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-9 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 108 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • If Vdc 160V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection)
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Power supply environment Find out if there was a (momentary) power failure. Check whether the power voltage is 188V or less across all phases. (2) Voltage drop detected 4220 ŒCheck the voltage between SC-P1 and IPM N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped. → Check the following items if it is 253V or above. 1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 160 V. Replace the INV board if it is below 160 V. 2) Check the voltage at CN72C on the control board. →Go to (3). 3) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and coil burnout. 4) Check the resistance of the diode stack. Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-15 Troubleshooting Problems with Di- ode Stack](page 297) 5) Check the wiring connections between the following sections: Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and C1. Replace the noise filter board if no problems are found. → Check the following items if the voltage is below 253 V. 1) Check the connection to SC-P1 and IPM N on the INV board. 2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board. 3) Check the resistance of the diode stack. Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-15 Troubleshooting Problems with Di- ode Stack](page 297) 4) Check the in-rush current resistor value. Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components](page 295) 5) Replace the noise filter board. 4225 ŒCheck the voltage at CNVDC on the Fan board while the inverter is stopped. →Check the following items if it is 253 V or above. 1) Check the voltage at CN72C on the control board. →Go to 3). 2) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout. 3) Check the wiring connections between noise filter board, inverter board, and fan board. Replace the noise filter board, if no problems are found. If the problem recurs after replacing the noise filter, replace the Fan board. → Check the following items if the voltage is below 253V. 4) Check the CNVDC connector connection. (3) Control board failure Confirm that a voltage of 12 VDC is applied to the connector CN72C on the control board during inverter operation. →If voltage is absent, check the fuse F01. If no problems are found, replace the control board. For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288)

    Page 209

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 198 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-10 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 108 (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • If Vdc 289V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection)
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Power supply environment Find out if there was a (momentary) power failure. Check whether the power voltage (Between L1 and L2, L2 and L3, and L1 and L3) is 414V or less across all phases. (2) Voltage drop detected 4220 ŒCheck the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is 420 V or above, check the following items. 1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 289V. Replace the INV board if it is below 289 V. 2) Check the voltage at CN72 on the control board. →Go to (3). 3) Check the noise filter coil connections and for coil burnout. 4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL. Replace 72C if no problems are found. 5) Check the IGBT module resistance on the INV board. Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-14 Troubleshooting Prob- lems with IGBT Module](page 305) ŒCheck the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is less than 420 V, check the following items. 1) Check the coil connections and for coil burnout on the noise filter. 2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board. 3) Check the connection to SCP1 and SC-P2 on the INV board. 4) Check the in-rush current resistor value. 5) Check the 72C resistance value. 6) Check the DCL resistance value. Replace the INV board if no problems are found. 4225 ŒCheck the voltage at CNVDC on the Fan board while the inverter is stopped and if it is 420 V or above, check the following items. 1) Check the voltage at CN72 on the control board. →Go to 3). 2) Check the noise filter coil connections and for coil burnout. 3) Check the wiring connections between the following sections Between the noise filter board INV board and the Fan board. 4) Check contents 4220 Replace the Fan board if no problems are found. ŒCheck the voltage at CNVDC on the Fan board while the inverter is stopped and if it is less than 420 V, check the following items. 1) Check the state of the wiring connections between the INV board and the Fan board. 2) Check contents 4220 Replace the Fan board if no problems are found. (3) Control board failure Check that 12VDC is applied to connector CN72 on the control board while the inverter is operating. If voltage is absent or the wrong voltage is applied, check the fuse F01. Replace the control board if no problems are found with the fuse. For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298)

    Page 210

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 199 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-11 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 109 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • If Vdc 400V is detected during inverter operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Different voltage connection Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1). (2) INV board failure If the problem recurs, replace the INV board or fan board. In the case of 4220: INV board In the case of 4225: Fan board For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-6-12 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 109 (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • If Vdc 830V is detected during inverter operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Different voltage connection Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1). (2) INV board failure If the problem recurs, replace the INV board or fan board. In the case of 4220: INV board In the case of 4225: Fan board For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298)

    Page 211

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 200 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-13 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 110 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • VDC error (Detail code 110)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Bus voltage abnormality If Vdc 400V or Vdc 160V is detected. (H/W detection)
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Same as detail code No.108 and 109 of 4220 error For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-6-14 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 111 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Logic error (Detail code 111)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • H/W error If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected.
  • Cause, Check method and remedy
  • In the case of 4220 In the case of 4225 For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) Cause Check method and remedy (1) External noise (2) INV board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detec- tion Circuit](page 290) (3) IPM failure Replace the IPM. (4) DCCT failure Replace the DCCT. Cause Check method and remedy (1) External noise (2) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 291) [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293)

    Page 212

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 201 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-15 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 111 (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Logic error (Detail code 111)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • H/W error If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected.
  • Cause, Check method and remedy
  • In the case of 4220 In the case of 4225 For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) 7-6-16 Error Codes [4220, 4225] Detail Code 131
  • Error code definition
  • Low bus voltage at startup (Detail code 131)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When Vdc 160 V is detected just before the inverter operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Inverter main circuit failure Same as detail code 108 of 4220 error For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) External noise (2) INV board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detec- tion Circuit](page 300) Cause Check method and remedy (1) External noise (2) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 301) [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303)

    Page 213

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 202 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-17 Error Code [4230] (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Heatsink overheat protection
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 90°C [194°F] is detected.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-6-18 Error Code [4230] (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Heatsink overheat protection
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] is detected.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 291) [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293) (2) Outdoor unit fan failure Check the outdoor unit fan operation. If any problem is found with the fan operation, check the fan motor. Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 291) (3) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked (4) THHS failure Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor. →If an abnormal value appears, check the sensor resistance, and replace the sensor as necessary. Cause Check method and remedy (1) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 301) [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303) (2) Outdoor unit fan failure Check the outdoor unit fan operation. If any problem is found with the fan operation, check the fan motor. Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 301) (3) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked (4) THHS failure 1) Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper installation of the IGBT heatsink.) 2) Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor. →If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board.

    Page 214

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 203 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-19 Error Code [4240] (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Overload protection
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • If the output current of "(Iac) > 53 (Arms)" or "THHS > 80°C [175°F]" is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during inverter operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-6-20 Error Code [4240] (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Overload protection
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • If the output current of "(Iac) > 27 (Arms)" or "THHS > 95°C [203°F] " is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during inverter operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked (2) Power supply environment Power supply voltage is 188 V or above. (3) Inverter failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) (4) Current sensor (ACCT) failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components](page 295) (5) Compressor failure Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation. → Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section). Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 290) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Air passage blockage Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked (2) Power supply environment Power supply voltage is 414 V or above. (3) Inverter failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) (4) Compressor failure Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation. → Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section). Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 300)

    Page 215

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 204 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-21 Error Codes [4250, 4255] Detail Code 101 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • IPM error (Detail code 101)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • In the case of 4250 IPM error signal is detected. In the case of 4255 IPM error signal is detected.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • In the case of 4250 In the case of 4255 For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter output related Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 290) [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 290) [8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 290) [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) [8-10-10 Checking the Installation Conditions](page 293) (2) Same as 4230 error Same as 4230 error Cause Check method and remedy (1) Fan motor abnormality Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 291) (2) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 291) [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293)

    Page 216

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 205 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-22 Error Codes [4250, 4255] Detail Code 101 (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • IPM error (Detail code 101)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • In the case of 4250 Overcurrent is detected by the overcurrent detection resistor (RSH) on the INV board. In the case of 4255 IPM error signal is detected.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • In the case of 4250 In the case of 4255 For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter output related Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 300) [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 300) [8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 300) [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301) [8-11-10 Checking the Installation Conditions](page 303) Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board, if no problems are found. [8-11-14 Troubleshooting Problems with IGBT Module](page 305) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Fan motor abnormality Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 301) (2) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 301) [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303)

    Page 217

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 206 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-23 Error Code [4250] Detail Codes 103, 106, and 107 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • DCCT overcurrent (H/W detection) (Detail code 103) Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106) Overcurrent (effective value) (Detail code 107)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Overcurrent 106 Apeak or 64 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-6-24 Error Code [4250] Detail Codes 106 and 107 (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106) Overcurrent (effective value) (Detail code 107)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Overcurrent 56 Apeak or 33 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter output related Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 290) [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 290) [8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 290) [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) [8-10-10 Checking the Installation Conditions](page 293) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter output related Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 300) [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 300) [8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 300) [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301) [8-11-10 Checking the Installation Conditions](page 303) Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board, if no problems are found. [8-11-14 Troubleshooting Problems with IGBT Module](page 305)

    Page 218

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 207 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-25 Error Codes [4250, 4255] Detail Code 104
  • Error code definition
  • Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault (Detail code 104)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When IPM/IGBT short damage or grounding on the load side is detected just before starting the inverter.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • In the case of 4250 In the case of 4255 For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Grounding fault compressor Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 290)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 300) (2) Inverter output related Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 290) [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 290) [8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 290) [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) [8-10-10 Checking the Installation Conditions](page 293)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 300) [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 300) [8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 300) [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301) [8-11-10 Checking the Installation Conditions](page 303) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Grounding fault of fan motor Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 291)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 301) (2) Fan board fail- ure Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 291) [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 301) [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303)

    Page 219

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 208 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-6-26 Error Codes [4250, 4255] Detail Code 105
  • Error code definition
  • Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor (Detail code 105)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When a short is detected on the load side just before starting the inverter operation.
  • Cause, Check method and remedy
  • In the case of 4250 In the case of 4255 For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Short - circuited com- pressor Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 290)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 300) (2) Output wiring Check for a short circuit. Cause Check method and remedy (1) Short - circuited fan motor Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 291)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 301) (2) Output wiring Check for a short circuit.

    Page 220

    [7-6 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [4000 - 4999] ]

  • 209 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-6-27 Error Code [4260] (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Heatsink overheat protection at startup
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 90°C [194°F] for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Same as 4230 error 7-6-28 Error Code [4260] (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Heatsink overheat protection at startup
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Same as 4230 error

    Page 221

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 210 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] 7-7-1 Error Codes [5101, 5102, 5103, 5104]
  • Error code definition
  • 5101 Return air temperature sensor (TH21) fault (Indoor unit) Return air temperature sensor (TH4) fault (OA processing unit) 5102 Pipe temperature sensor (TH22) fault (Indoor unit) Pipe temperature sensor (TH2) fault (OA processing unit) 5103 Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH23) fault (Indoor unit) Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH3) fault (OA processing unit) 5104 Intake air temperature sensor (TH1) fault (OA processing unit) Intake air temperature sensor (TH24) fault (All-fresh (100% outdoor air) type indoor unit)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒIf a short or an open is detected during thermostat ON, the outdoor unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes. When the error is not restored after 3 minutes (if restored, the outdoor unit runs normally), the outdoor unit makes an error stop. Short: detectable at 90°C [194°F] or higher Open: detectable at -40°C [-40°F] or lower ŒSensor error at gas-side cannot be detected under the following conditions. ∗During heating operation ∗During cooling operation for 3 minutes after the compressor turns on.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Thermistor failure Check the thermistor resistor. 0°C [32°F]: 15 kΩ 10°C [50°F]: 9.7 kΩ 20°C [68°F] : 6.4 kΩ 30°C [86°F] : 4.3 kΩ 40°C [104°F] : 3.1 kΩ (2) Connector contact failure (3) Disconnected wire or partial disconnected thermistor wire (4) Unattached thermistor or contact failure (5) Indoor board (detection circuit) failure Check the connector contact. When no fault is found, the indoor board is a failure.

    Page 222

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 211 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-7-2 Error Codes [5104, 5105, 5106, 5107, 5109, 5111]
  • Error code definition
  • 5104 Discharge temperature sensor (TH4) fault (Outdoor unit) 5105 Accumulator inlet temperature sensor (TH5) fault (Outdoor unit) 5106 Heat exchanger inlet temperature sensor (TH6) fault (Outdoor unit) 5107 Outside temperature sensor (TH7) fault (Outdoor unit) 5109 ON-defrost temperature sensor (TH9) error (outdoor unit) 5111 ON-defrost temperature sensor (TH11) error (outdoor unit)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒWhen a short (high temperature intake) or an open (low temperature intake) of the thermistor is detected (the first detection), the outdoor unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts when the detected temperature of the thermistor. ŒWhen a short or an open is detected again (the second detection) after the first restart of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts in 3 minutes when the detected temperature is within the normal range. ŒWhen a short or an open is detected again (the third detection) after the previous restart of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit makes an error stop. ŒIf a short- or open-circuited thermistor is detected immediately before restart, the unit comes to an abnormal stop, and an error code "5104""5105,""5106,""5107," "5109," or "5111" will appear on the display. ŒDuring 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display. ŒA short or an open described above is not detected for 10 minutes after the compressor start, during defrost mode, or for 3 minutes after defrost mode.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Thermistor failure Check thermistor resistance. (2) Pinched lead wire Check for pinched lead wire. (3) Torn wire coating Check for wire coating. (4) A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure Check connector. (5) Disconnected wire Check for wire. (6) Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED monitor. When the temperature is far different from the actual temper- ature, replace the control board. Short detection Open detection

    Th4

    240°C [464°F] and above (0.57kΩ and below) 0°C [32°F] and below (698kΩ and above)

    Th5

    70°C [158°F] and above (0.4kΩ and below) -40°C [-40°F] and below (130kΩ and above)

    Th6

    70°C [158°F] and above (1.14kΩ and below) -40°C [-40°F] and below (130kΩ and above)

    Th7

    110°C [230°F] and above (0.4kΩ and below) -40°C [-40°F] and below (130kΩ and above)

    Th9

    110°C [230°F] and above (0.4kΩ and below) -40°C [-40°F] and below (130kΩ and above)

    Th11

    110°C [230°F] and above (0.4kΩ and below) -40°C [-40°F] and below (130kΩ and above)

    Page 223

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 212 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-7-3 Error Code [5110] (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Heatsink temperature sensor (THHS) fault (Detail code 01)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When a short or an open of THHS is detected just before or during the inverter operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-7-4 Error Code [5110] (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Heatsink temperature sensor (THHS) fault (Detail code 01)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When a short or an open of THHS is detected just before or during the inverter operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) THHS sensor failure Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor. Replace the sensor if it reads below - 30°C[ -22°F] or above

    150°C[302°F].

    (2) Contact failure Check the connector connection (CNTH) on the INV board. Cause Check method and remedy (1) INV board failure If the problem recurs when the unit is put into operation, replace the INV board.

    Page 224

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 213 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-7-5 Error Codes [5111, 5112, 5115, 5116]
  • Error code definition
  • 5111 Liquid inlet temperature sensor (TH11) fault (BC controller) 5112 Bypass outlet temperature sensor (TH12) fault (BC controller) 5115 LEV3 outlet temperature sensor (TH15) fault (BC controller) 5116 LEV3 inlet temperature sensor (TH16) fault (BC controller)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒIf a shorted (high temperature intake) or open (low temperature intake) thermistor (TH11, TH12, TH15, or TH16) is detected during operation, the unit makes an error stop, and an error code "5111," "5112," "5115," or "5116" appears on the display. ŒDetection of a short- or open-circuit as described above is suspended during the defrost cycle and for 3 minutes after the operation mode is changed.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Thermistor failure Check thermistor resistance. (2) Pinched lead wire Check for pinched lead wire. (3) Torn wire coating Check for wire coating. (4) A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure Check connector. (5) Disconnected wire Check for wire. (6) Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED monitor. When the temperature is far different from the actual temperature, replace the control board.

    Th11

    Th12

    Th15

    Th16

    Open detection -40 C [ -40 F ] and below (130 k ) -40 C [ -40 F ] and below (130 k ) -40 C [ -40 F ] and below (130 k ) -40 C [ -40 F ] and below (130 k ) Short detection 110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k ) 110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k ) 70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k ) 110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k )

    Page 225

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 214 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-7-6 Error Code [5201]
  • Error code definition
  • High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒIf the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less during the operation, the outdoor unit stops once, turns to anti- restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes when the detected high pressure sensor is 0.098MPa [14psi] or more. ŒIf the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less just before the restart, the outdoor unit makes an error stop, and the error code "5201" will appear. ŒDuring 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display. ŒA error is not detected for 3 minutes after the compressor start, during defrost operation, or 3 minutes after defrost operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-7-7 Error Codes [5201, 5203]
  • Error code definition
  • 5201 High-pressure sensor fault (Outdoor unit 63HS1/BC controller PS1) 5203 Intermediate pressure sensor fault (BC controller PS3)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When a pressure sensor reading of 4.06 MPa [589 psi] or above is detected, error codes "5201" and "5203" will appear. The unit will continue its operation by using other sensors as a backup.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) High pressure sensor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-5-1 Com- paring the High-Pressure Sensor Measure- ment and Gauge Pressure](page 267) (2) Pressure drop due to refrigerant leak (3) Torn wire coating (4) A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure (5) Disconnected wire (6) High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board Cause Check method and remedy (1) High pressure sensor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-5-1 Com- paring the High-Pressure Sensor Measure- ment and Gauge Pressure](page 267) (2) Pressure drop due to refrigerant leak (3) Torn wire coating (4) A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure (5) Disconnected wire (6) High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board

    Page 226

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 215 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-7-8 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 115 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When the formula "output current < 2 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-7-9 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 115 (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When the formula "output current < 1.5 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter open output phase Check the output wiring connections. (2) Compressor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 290) (3) INV board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 290) [8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 290) [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) (4) Contact failure Check the connection of the connector (CNCT2) on the INV boardINV board. (5) ACCT sensor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components](page 295) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter open output phase Check the output wiring connections. (2) Compressor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 300) (3) INV board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 300) [8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 300) [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301)

    Page 227

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 216 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-7-10 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 116 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • DCCT sensor fault (Detail code116)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When the bus current less than 18 Apeak is detected at startup (6Hz)
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-7-11 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 117
  • Error code definition
  • ACCT sensor circuit fault (Detail code 117)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When an error value is detected with the ACCT detection circuit just before the inverter starts
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Contact failure Check the contact of the connector (CNCT) on the INV board, and the contact the connector on DCCT side. (2) Misorientation Check the installation direction of DCCT. (3) DCCT sensor failure Replace the DCCT sensor. (4) INV board failure Replace the INV board. Cause Check method and remedy (1) INV board failure Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 290) [8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 290) [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 300) [8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 300) [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301) (2) Compressor failure Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 290)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 300)

    Page 228

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 217 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-7-12 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 118 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • DCCT sensor circuit fault (Detail code118)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When an error value is detected with the DCCT detection circuit just before the inverter starts
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) 7-7-13 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 119 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector (Detail code 119)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Presence of enough current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before inverter startup.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Contact failure Check for good contact of the INV board connector CNCT and the connector on the DCCT side. (2) INV board failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit](page 290) [8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 290) [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) (3) DCCT sensor failure Replace the DCCT sensor. (4) Compressor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 290) (5) Inverter failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) Cause Check method and remedy (1) ACCT sensor disconnection Check the connection of the connector (CNCT2) on the INV board. Check for proper mounting of ACCT. (2) ACCT sensor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components](page 295) (3) Inverter failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 290) [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) (4) Compressor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 290)

    Page 229

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 218 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-7-14 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 119 (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector (Detail code 119)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Presence of enough current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before inverter startup.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) 7-7-15 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 120 (TKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Faulty ACCT wiring (Detail code 120)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Presence of target current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before startup. (Detection of improperly mounted ACCT sensor)
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter output wiring problem Check output wiring connections. Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12 and CT22 on the INV board respectively. (2) Inverter failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 300) [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Opera- tion](page 301) (3) Compressor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 300) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Wrongly mounted ACCT sensor Check for proper mounting of ACCT.[8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Com- ponents](page 295) (2) ACCT sensor failure [8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components](page 295) (3) Inverter failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 290) [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) (4) Compressor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 290)

    Page 230

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 219 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-7-16 Error Code [5301] Detail Code 120 (YKMU)
  • Error code definition
  • Faulty ACCT wiring (Detail code 120)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Presence of target current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before startup.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) 7-7-17 Error Codes [5305] Detail Code 132
  • Error code definition
  • Position detection error at startup (Detail code 132)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • When a motor sensor has detected an error within 10 seconds after the fan motor has gone into operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Inverter output wiring problem Check output wiring connections. Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12 and CT22 on the INV board respectively. (2) Inverter failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load](page 300) [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301) (3) Compressor failure Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 300) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Contact failure and faulty fan motor wiring Check the fan board connector CNINV and CNSNR for proper contacts. Check the wirign betweem the fan motor and fan board. (2) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303) (3) Fan motor error Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 291)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 301)

    Page 231

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 220 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-7-18 Error Codes [5305] Detail Code 133
  • Error code definition
  • Position detection error during operation (Detail code 133)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • An error from a motor sensor is detected during fan moter operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Outdoor factors Check that there is no wind (gust or strong wind). (2) Contact failure and faulty fan motor wiring Check the fan board connector CNINV and CNSNR for proper contacts. Check the wirign betweem the fan motor and fan board. (3) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303) (4) Fan motor error Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 291)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Prob- lems](page 301)

    Page 232

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 221 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-7-19 Error Codes [5305] Detail Code 134
  • Error code definition
  • RPM error before start up (Detail code 134)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The fan RPM will not drop to the set RPM.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • For inverter-related error codes, refer to the following page(s). [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU)](page 288) [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU)](page 298) 7-7-20 Error Code [5401]
  • Error Code
  • Humidity sensor fault
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒA short-circuit or an open-circuit of the humidity sensor is detected during operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Outdoor factors Check that there is no wind (gust or strong wind). (2) Fan board failure Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303) (3) Fan motor error Refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 291)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 301) 5401 Cause Check method and remedy (1) Connector contact failure (CN30) (Loose con- nector) 1) Check the connector for proper contact. Reconnect the connector, and operate the unit to check for proper operation. (2) Broken or partially broken humidity sensor wire 2) Check for broken humidity sensor wire. (3) Humidity sensor fault 3) Check the output voltage across No. 1 and No. 3 pins of connector CN30 with the connector being connected to the indoor unit control board.

    30% : 1.25V

    40% : 1.52V

    50% : 1.88V

    60% : 2.19V

    70% : 2.48V

    80% : 2.79V

    (4) Indoor unit control board (detection circuit) fault 4) If the above items check out okay, replace the indoor unit control board.

    Page 233

    [7-7 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [5000 - 5999] ]

  • 222 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-7-21 Error Code [5402]
  • Error code definition
  • Outside humidity sensor fault
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Humidity sensor fault or built-in temperature sensor fault
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 1) Check the connector CN22 on the circuit board for proper connection. 2) Check the outside humidity sensor and relay cable for proper connection. 3) Check the output voltage across 2P and 4P of the humidity sensor (CN22). Conversion of relative humidity to humidity sensor output voltage 20%RH: 1. 2 V or below

    40%Rh: 1.7V

    60%Rh: 2.2V

    80%Rh: 2.7V

    Replace the outside humidity sensor if there is a large discrepancy between ambient humidity and the humidity temperature sensor output voltage. 4) Disconnect the connector CN22 on the circuit board, and check the resistance between 3P and 4P (thermistor resistance of the built-in temperature sensor) Conversion of temperature to sensor resistance 0°C: 169kΩ 20°C: 63kΩ 40°C:26kΩ Replace the outside humidity sensor if there is a large discrepancy between ambient temperature and thermistor resistance. → If replacing the sensor does not resolve the problem, resolve the circuit board. 7-7-22 Error Code [5403]
  • Error code definition
  • Aging degradation of outside humidity sensor
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The life of the humidity sensor has expired, and humidity cannot be detected correctly.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 1) Replace the outside humidity sensor. After replacing the outside humidity sensor, press and hold the maintenance reset switch (SW22) for 5 seconds or longer until the maintenance reset indication LED2 (green) starts blinking. → If replacing the sensor does not resolve the problem, resolve the circuit board. 7-7-23 Error Code [5701]
  • Error code definition
  • Loose float switch connector
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Detection of the disconnected float switch (open-phase condition) during operation
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) CN4F disconnection or contact failure Check for disconnection of the connector (CN4F) on the indoor unit control board.

    Page 234

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 223 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] 7-8-1 Error Code [6201]
  • Error code definition
  • Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory error)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • This error is detected when the data cannot be read out from the built-in nonvolatile memory on the remote controller.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Remote controller failure Replace the remote controller. 7-8-2 Error Code [6202]
  • Error code definition
  • Remote controller board fault (clock IC error)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • This error is detected when the built-in clock on the remote controller is not properly functioning.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Remote controller failure Replace the remote controller.

    Page 235

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 224 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-8-3 Error Code [6600]
  • Error code definition
  • Address overlaps
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • An error in which signals from more than one indoor units with the same address are received The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller indicate the controller that detected the error.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-8-4 Error Code [6601]
  • Error code definition
  • Polarity setting error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error detected when transmission processor cannot distinguish the polarities of the M-NET transmission line.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Two or more of the following have the same address: Outdoor units, BC controllers, indoor units, LOSSNAY units, controllers such as ME remote controllers. 6600 "01" appears on the remote controller Unit #01 detected the error. Two or more units in the system have 01 as their ad- dress. ŒFind the unit that has the same address as that of the error source. Once the unit is found, correct the address. Then, turn off the outdoor units, indoor units, BC controllers, and LOSSNAY units, keep them all turned off for at least five minutes, and turn them back on. ŒWhen air conditioning units are operating normally despite the address overlap error Check the transmission wave shape and noise on the transmission line. See the section "Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise." (2) Signals are distorted by the noise on the transmission line. Cause Check method and remedy (1) No voltage is applied to the M-NET transmission line that AG-150A/GB-50ADA/PAC-YG50ECA/BAC- HD150 are connected to. Check if power is supplied to the M-NET transmission line of the AG-150A/GB-50ADA/PAC-YG50ECA/BAC- HD150, and correct any problem found. (2) M-NET transmission line to which AG-150A/GB- 50ADA/PAC-YG50ECA/BAC-HD150 are connected is short-circuited.

    Page 236

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 225 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-8-5 Error Code [6602]
  • Error code definition
  • Transmission processor hardware error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Although "0" was surely transmitted by the transmission processor, "1" is displayed on the transmission line. The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc- curred.
  • Cause
  • 1) When the wiring work of or the polarity of either the indoor or outdoor transmission line is performed or is changed while the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, the wave shape will be changed, and an error will be detected. 2) Grounding fault of the transmission line 3) When grouping the indoor units that are connected to different outdoor units, the male power supply connectors on the multiple outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40). 4) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used in the system connected with MELANS, the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the outdoor unit. 5) Controller failure of the source of the error 6) When the transmission data is changed due to the noise on the transmission line 7) Voltage is not applied on the transmission line for centralized control (in case of grouped indoor units connected to different outdoor units or in case of the system connected with MELANS)
  • Check method and remedy
  • No

    Tightly reconnect the male power supply connector to the female power supply switch connector (CN40).

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Is the transmission line work performed while the power is on? Check the power source of the indoor unit.

    188 / 253V?

    Check the transmission line work is performed and the shielded wire is treated properly. Grounding fault or does the shielded wire contact with the transmission line? System ? Faulty power source work Improper transmission line work Turn off the power source of outdoor/indoor units, and turn them on again.

    No

    Investigation into the transmission line noise Noise exist? Controller failure of the source of the error *For the investigation method, follow Investigation into the cause of the noise Correct the error. System with the power supply unit for transmission lines Is the male power supply connector connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on only one of the outdoor unit? Is the male power supply connector connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) ? Confirm that the power supply connector on the outdoor unit is not plugged into CN40. Confirm that the power supply connector on the outdoor unit is not plugged into CN40. Disconnect the male power supply on CN40 and connect it to CN41 Single-outdoor-unit system Multiple-outdoor-unit system

    Page 237

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 226 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-8-6 Error Code [6603]
  • Error code definition
  • Transmission line bus busy error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒGenerated error when the command cannot be transmitted for 4-10 minutes in a row due to bus-busy ŒGenerated error when the command cannot be transmitted to the transmission line for 4-10 minutes in a row due to noise The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc- curred.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-8-7 Error Code [6606]
  • Error code definition
  • Communication error between device and transmission processors
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Communication error between the main microcomputer on the indoor unit board and the microcomputer for transmission The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc- curred.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) The transmission processor cannot be transmit- ted as the short-wavelength voltage like noise ex- ists consecutively on the transmission line. Check the transmission wave shape and noise on the transmission line. See the section "Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise." → No noise indicates that the error source controller is a failure. → If noise exists, investigate the noise. (2) Error source controller failure Cause Check method and remedy (1) Data is not properly transmitted due to accidental erroneous operation of the controller of the error source. Turn off the power source of the outdoor and the indoor units.(When the power source is turned off separately, the microcomputer will not be reset, and the error will not be corrected.) → If the same error occurs, the error source controller is a failure. (2) Error source controller failure

    Page 238

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 227 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-8-8 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = Outdoor Unit (OC)
  • Error code definition
  • No ACK error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans- mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK).
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-8-9 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = BC Controller (BC)
  • Error code definition
  • No ACK error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans- mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK).
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Incidental cause 1) Turn off the power source of the outdoor unit, and turn it on again. (2) Contact failure of transmission line of OC or IC 2) If the error is accidental, it will run normally. If not, check the causes (2) - (5). (3) Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by exceed- ing acceptable range of transmission wiring. Farthest: 200 m [656ft] or less Remote controller wiring: 10m [32ft] or less (4) Erroneous sizing of transmission line (Not within the range below). Wire diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more (5) Outdoor unit control board failure Cause Check method and remedy (1) Incidental cause 1) Turn off the power to the outdoor unit and the BC controller, leave them turned off for at least 5 min- utes, and then turn them back on. (2) When BC controller address is changed or modified dur- ing operation. 2) If the error is accidental, it will run normally. If not, check the causes (2) - (5). (3) Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of BC control- ler (4) Disconnected connector of BC controller (CN02) (5) Faulty control board of BC controller

    Page 239

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 228 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-8-10 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = Indoor Unit (IC)
  • Error code definition
  • No ACK error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans- mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK).
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Troubleshooting problems for indoor units (A) (2) Troubleshooting problems for indoor units (B) Error display ME remote controller (RC), MA remote controller (MA) System controller (SC) Types of refrigerant systems Single refrigerant system Grouped operation of multi- ple refrigerant systems Types of indoor units experiencing problems Part of the indoor units (IC) are experiencing problems. All indoor units (IC) in the same system are experiencing problems. All indoor units (IC) are experiencing problems. Troubleshooting prob- lems for indoor units (A) Troubleshooting problems for indoor units (A) Troubleshooting prob- lems for indoor units (A) Troubleshooting prob- lems for indoor units (B) Troubleshooting prob- lems for indoor units (B) & & Troubleshooting problems for all units (A) Troubleshooting prob- lems for all units (A) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Incidental cause 1) Turn off the outdoor/indoor units for 5 or more min- utes, and turn them on again. (2) When IC unit address is changed or modified during op- eration. 2) If the error is accidental, it will run normally. If not, check the causes (2) - (6). (3) Faulty or disconnected IC transmission wiring (4) Disconnected IC connector

    (Cn2M)

    (5) Indoor unit controller failure (6) ME remote controller failure Cause Check method and remedy (1) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used and the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control Check voltage of the transmission line for central- ized control. Œ20 V or more: Check (1) on the left. ŒLess than 20 V: Check (2) on the left. (2) Disconnection or shutdown of the power source of the power supply unit for transmission line (3) System controller (MELANS) malfunction

    Page 240

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 229 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-8-11 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = LOSSNAY (LC)
  • Error code definition
  • No ACK error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans- mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK).
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Troubleshooting problems for LOSSNAY units Error display ME remote controller (RC), MA remote controller (MA) Types of refrigerant systems Single refrigerant system Grouped operation of multiple refrigerant systems Troubleshooting problems for LOSSNAY units Troubleshooting problems for LOSSNAY units & Troubleshooting problems for all units (A) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Incidental cause 1) Turn off the power source of LOSSNAY and turn it on again. (2) The power source of LOSSNAY has been shut off. 2) If the error is accidental, it will run normally. If not, check the causes (2) - (6). (3) When the address of LOSSNAY is changed in the middle of the operation (4) Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of LOSSNAY (5) Disconnected connector (CN1) on LOSSNAY (6) Controller failure of LOSSNAY

    Page 241

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 230 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-8-12 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = ME Remote Controller
  • Error code definition
  • No ACK error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans- mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK).
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Troubleshooting problems for ME remote controllers Error display ME remote controller (RC), MA remote controller (MA) System controller (SC) Types of refrigerant sys- tems Single refrigerant system Grouped operation of mul- tiple refrigerant systems Types of indoor units experiencing problems Part of the indoor units (IC) are experiencing problems. All indoor units (IC) in the same system are experi- encing problems. All indoor units (IC) are experiencing problems. Troubleshooting problems for ME remote controllers Troubleshooting prob- lems for ME remote con- trollers Troubleshooting prob- lems for ME remote con- trollers Troubleshooting prob- lems for all units (B) Troubleshooting prob- lems for all units (B) & & Troubleshooting prob- lems for all units (A) Troubleshooting prob- lems for all units (C) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Incidental cause 1) Turn off the power source of the outdoor unit for 5 minutes or more, and turn it on again. (2) Faulty transmission wiring at IC unit side. 2) If not, check the causes (2) - (5). (3) Faulty wiring of the transmission line for ME remote con- troller (4) When the address of ME remote controller is changed in the middle of the operation (5) ME remote controller failure

    Page 242

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 231 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-8-13 Error Code [6607] Error Source Address = System Controller
  • Error code definition
  • No ACK error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans- mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK).
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Troubleshooting problems for system controllers Error display ME remote controller (RC), MA remote controller (MA) Type of unit/controller in error Part of the ME remote con- trollers (RC) are experi- encing problems. All indoor units (IC) in the same system are experi- encing problems. All ME remote controllers (RC) are experiencing problems. Troubleshooting problems for system controllers Troubleshooting prob- lems for all units (B) Troubleshooting prob- lems for all units (B) & Troubleshooting prob- lems for all units (C) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Incidental cause 1) Turn off the power source of the outdoor unit for 5 minutes or more, and turn it on again. (2) Faulty wiring of the transmission line for ME remote con- troller 2) If not, check the causes (2) - (4). (3) When the address of ME remote controller is changed in the middle of the operation (4) ME remote controller failure

    Page 243

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 232 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-8-14 Error Code [6607] All Error Source Addresses
  • Error code definition
  • No ACK error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans- mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK).
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • (1) Troubleshooting problems for all units (A) (2) Troubleshooting problems for all units (B) (3) Troubleshooting problems for all units (C) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the outdoor unit on the terminal block for centralized con- trol line connection (TB7) 1) Check the causes of (1) - (4). If the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, check 2). (2) When multiple outdoor units are connected and the pow- er source of one of the outdoor units has been shut off. 2) Check the LED displays for troubleshooting on oth- er remote controllers whether an error occurs. (3) The male power supply connector of the outdoor unit is not connected to the female power supply switch connec- tor (CN40). ŒWhen an error is present Check the causes of the error indicated by the error codes listed in item (4) in the "Cause" col- umn. ŒWhen no errors are present Indoor unit circuit board failure (4) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for centralized control. If an error occurs, after the unit runs normally once, the following causes may be considered. ŒTotal capacity error (7100) ŒCapacity code error (7101) ŒError in the number of connected units (7102) ŒAddress setting error (7105) Cause Check method and remedy (1) Total capacity error (7100) 1) Check the LED display for troubleshooting on the outdoor unit. ŒWhen an error is present Check the causes of the error indicated by the error codes listed in items (1) through (4) in the "Cause" column. ŒWhen no errors are present Check the causes of the error indicated by the error codes listed in items (5) through (7) in the "Cause" column. (2) Capacity code error (7101) (3) Error in the number of connected units (7102) (4) Address setting error (7105) (5) Disconnection or short circuit of the transmission line for the outdoor unit on the terminal block for centralized con- trol line connection (TB7) (6) Turn off the power source of the outdoor unit (7) Malfunction of electrical system for the outdoor unit Cause Check method and remedy (1) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used and the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control Check the causes of the error indicated by the error codes listed in items (1) through (3) in the "Cause" column. (2) Disconnection or shutdown of the power source of the power supply unit for transmission line (3) System controller (MELANS) malfunction

    Page 244

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 233 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-8-15 Error Code [6607] No Error Source Address
  • Error code definition
  • No ACK error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is trans- mitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.) The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide the response (ACK).
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy (1) Although the address of ME remote controller has been changed after the group is set using ME remote control- ler, the indoor unit is keeping the memory of the previous address. The same symptom will appear for the registra- tion with SC. Delete unnecessary information of non-existing address which some indoor units have. Use either of the following two methods for dele- tion. (2) Although the address of LOSSNAY has been changed af- ter the interlock registration of LOSSNAY is made using ME remote controller, the indoor unit is keeping the mem- ory of the previous address. 1) Address deletion by ME remote controller Delete unnecessary address information using the manual setting function of ME remote controller. For details, refer to the following page(s). [6-3-4 Address Deletion](page 154) 2) Deletion of connection information of the outdoor unit by the deleting switch Note that the above method will delete all the group settings set via the ME remote controller and all the interlock settings between LOSSNAY units and indoor units. Procedures 1) Turn off the power source of the outdoor unit, and wait for 5 minutes. 2) Turn on the dip switch (SW5-2) on the outdoor unit control board. 3) Turn on the power source of the outdoor unit, and wait for 5 minutes. 4) Turn off the power source of the outdoor unit, and wait for 5 minutes. 5) Turn off the dip switch (SW5-2) on the outdoor unit control board. 6) Turn on the power source of the outdoor unit.

    Page 245

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 234 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-8-16 Error Code [6608]
  • Error code definition
  • No response error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒWhen no response command is returned although acknowledgement (ACK) is received after transmission, an error is detect- ed. ŒWhen the data is transmitted 10 times in a row with 3 seconds interval, an error is detected on the transmission side. The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error oc- curred.
  • Cause
  • 1) The transmission line work is performed while the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, and the wave shape will be changed. 2) The transmission is sent and received repeatedly due to noise. 3) Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring. Farthest:200m [656ft] or less Remote controller wiring:12m [39ft] or less 4) The transmission line voltage/signal is decreased due to erroneous sizing of transmission line. Wire diameter: 1.25mm2[AWG16] or more
  • Check method and remedy
  • 1) When an error occurs during commissioning, turn off the power sources for the outdoor unit, indoor unit, BC controller, and LOSSNAY for 5 or more minutes, and then turn them on again. Œ When they return to normal operation, the cause of the error is the transmission line work performed with the power on. ŒIf an error occurs again, check the cause 2). 2) Check 3) and 4) above. ŒIf the cause is found, correct it. Œ If no cause is found, check 3). (1) Check the transmission waveform, and check the transmission line for electrical noise. For details, refer to the following page(s). [8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference](page 264) Noise is the most possible cause of the error "6608".

    Page 246

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 235 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-8-17 Error Code [6831]
  • Error code definition
  • MA controller signal reception error (No signal reception)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒCommunication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly. ŒNo proper data has been received for 3 minutes.
  • Cause
  • 1) Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit. 2) All the remote controllers are set to SUB. 3) Failure to meet wiring regulations ŒWire length ŒWire size ŒNumber of remote controllers ŒNumber of indoor units 4) The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off. 5) Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines 6) Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller 7) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller
  • Check method and remedy
  • 1) Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers. 2) Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line. 3) Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded. 4) Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN. 5) Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual). [OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations) [NG]: Replace the MA remote controller. [6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 6) Check the transmission waveform, and check the MA remote controller line for electrical noise. For details, refer to the follow- ing page(s). [8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference](page 264) 7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller. The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board. ŒIf LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on. ŒIf LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

    Page 247

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 236 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-8-18 Error Code [6832]
  • Error code definition
  • MA remote controller signal transmission error (Synchronization error)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒMA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly. ŒFailure to detect opening in the transmission path and unable to send signals ∗Indoor unit: 3 minutes ∗Remote controller: 6 seconds
  • Cause
  • 1) Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit 2) 2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN 3) Overlapped indoor unit address 4) Noise interference on the remote controller lines 5) Failure to meet wiring regulations ŒWire length ŒWire size ŒNumber of remote controllers ŒNumber of indoor units 6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller
  • Check method and remedy
  • 1) Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers. 2) Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line. 3) Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded. 4) Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN. 5) Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual). [OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations) [NG]: Replace the MA remote controller. [6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 6) Check the transmission waveform, and check the MA remote controller line for electrical noise. For details, refer to the follow- ing page(s). [8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference](page 264) 7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller. The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board. ŒIf LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on. ŒIf LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

    Page 248

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 237 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-8-19 Error Code [6833]
  • Error code definition
  • MA remote controller signal transmission error (Hardware error)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒCommunication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly. ŒAn error occurs when the transmitted data and the received data differ for 30 times in a row.
  • Cause
  • 1) Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit 2) 2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN 3) Overlapped indoor unit address 4) Noise interference on the remote controller lines 5) Failure to meet wiring regulations ŒWire length ŒWire size ŒNumber of remote controllers ŒNumber of indoor units 6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller
  • Check method and remedy
  • 1) Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers. 2) Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line. 3) Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded. 4) Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN. 5) Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual). [OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations) [NG]: Replace the MA remote controller. [6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 6) Check the transmission waveform, and check the MA remote controller line for electrical noise. For details, refer to the follow- ing page(s). [8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference](page 264) 7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller. The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board. ŒIf LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on. ŒIf LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

    Page 249

    [7-8 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [6000 - 6999] ]

  • 238 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-8-20 Error Code [6834]
  • Error code definition
  • MA controller signal reception error (Start bit detection error)
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • ŒCommunication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly. ŒNo proper data has been received for 2 minutes.
  • Cause
  • 1) Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit. 2) All the remote controllers are set to SUB. 3) Failure to meet wiring regulations ŒWire length ŒWire size ŒNumber of remote controllers ŒNumber of indoor units 4) The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off. 5) Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines 6) Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller 7) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller
  • Check method and remedy
  • 1) Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers. 2) Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line. 3) Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded. 4) Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN. 5) Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual). [OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations) [NG]: Replace the MA remote controller. [6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 6) Check the transmission waveform, and check the MA remote controller line for electrical noise. For details, refer to the follow- ing page(s). [8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference](page 264) 7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller. The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board. ŒIf LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on ŒIf LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

    Page 250

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 239 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] 7-9-1 Error Code [7100]
  • Error code definition
  • Total capacity error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The model total of indoor units in the system with one outdoor unit exceeds limitations.
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy,
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit (1) The model total of indoor units in the sys- tem with one outdoor unit exceeds the fol- lowing table. 1) Check the model total (capacity code total) of in- door units connected. 2) Check the model name (capacity code) of the connected indoor unit set by the switch (SW2 on indoor unit board). When the model name set by the switch is differ- ent from that of the unit connected, turn off the power source of the outdoor and the indoor units, and change the setting of the model name (ca- pacity code). (2) The model selection switches (SW5-3 - 5- 6) on the outdoor unit are set incorrectly. Check the setting for the model selection switch on the outdoor unit (Dipswitches SW5-3 - 5-6 on the outdoor unit control board). (3) The outdoor unit and the auxiliary unit (OS) that is connected to the same system are not properly connected. Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are properly connected. HP72 model HP96 model HP144 model HP192 model 108 144 216 288 Model Capacity total Model 72 model 96 model

    Sw5

    Off

    On

    Off

    Off

    On

    On

    Off

    Off

    3 4 5 6

    Page 251

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 240 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-9-2 Error Code [7101]
  • Error code definition
  • Capacity code setting error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Connection of incompatible (wrong capacity code) indoor unit or outdoor unit
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit Indoor unit (1) The model name (capacity code) set by the switch (SW2) is wrong. 1) Check the model name (capacity code) of the in- door unit which has the error source address set by the switch (SW2 on indoor unit board). When the model name set by the switch is different from that of the unit connected, turn off the power source of the outdoor and the indoor units, and change the setting of the capacity code. *The capacity of the indoor unit can be confirmed by the self-diagnosis function (SW1 operation) of the outdoor unit. Outdoor unit (2) The model selection switches (SW5-3 - 5-6) on the outdoor unit are set incor- rectly. Check the setting for the model selection switch on the outdoor unit (Dipswitches SW5-3 - 5-6 on the outdoor unit control board). Model 72 model 96 model

    Sw5

    Off

    On

    Off

    Off

    On

    On

    Off

    Off

    3 4 5 6

    Page 252

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 241 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-9-3 Error Code [7102]
  • Error code definition
  • Wrong number of connected units
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The number of connected indoor units is "0" or exceeds the allowable value.
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit (1) Number of indoor units connected to the outdoor terminal block (TB3) for indoor/ outdoor transmis- sion lines exceeds limitations described below. 1) Check whether the number of units con- nected to the outdoor terminal block (TB3) for indoor/ outdoor transmission lines does not exceed the limitation. (See (1) and (2) on the left.) 2) Check (2) - (3) on the left. 3) Check whether the transmission line for the terminal block for centralized control (TB7) is not connected to the terminal block for the indoor/outdoor transmission line (TB3). 4) Check the setting for the model selection switch on the outdoor unit (Dipswitches SW5-7 on the outdoor unit control board). (2) Disconnected transmission line from the outdoor unit or BC controller (3) Short-circuited transmission line When (2) and (3) apply, the following display will appear. ŒME remote controller Nothing appears on the remote controller be- cause it is not powered. ŒMA remote controller "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" blinks. (4) The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the out- door unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to ON) (5) Outdoor unit address setting error The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit do not have sequential address numbers. (6) GA- or HA-type BC controller is connected as a main BC controller to a system HP192 or above. Restriction on the number of units Number of units 0 or 1 0 or 1 1 (HP72- HP144 models only) 0,1 or 2 1 - 18 : HP72 model 1 - 24 : HP96 model 1 - 36 : HP144 model 1 - 48 : HP192 model 1 : HP72 - HP96 models 2 : HP144 - HP192 models Total number of indoor units Total number of LOSSNAY units (During auto address start-up only) Number of Sub BC controllers Number of Main BC controllers Number of BC controllers Total number of outdoor units

    Page 253

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 242 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-9-4 Error Code [7105]
  • Error code definition
  • Address setting error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Erroneous setting of OC unit address Erroneous setting of BC controller address
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-9-5 Error Code [7106]
  • Error code definition
  • Attribute setting error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit BC controller Erroneous setting of OC unit address The address of outdoor unit is not being set to 51 -
  • The address of BC controller is not set to 51 - 100.
  • Check that the outdoor unit and BC controller addresses are set to 00 or a number between 51 and 100. If the outdoor unit address is out of the valid range, reset the address with the power to the outdoor unit turned off. If the BC controller address is out of the valid range, reset the address with the power to both the outdoor unit and BC controller turned off. Error source Cause Check method and remedy
  • A remote controller for use with indoor
  • units, such as the MA remote controller, is connected to the OA processing unit whose attribute is FU. To operate the OA processing unit directly via a re- mote controller for use with indoor units, such as the MA remote controller, set the DIP SW 3-1 on the OA processing unit to ON.

    Sw3-1

    Off

    On

    Interlocked operation with the indoor unit Operation Method Direct operation via the MA remote controller

    Page 254

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 243 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-9-6 Error Code [7107]
  • Error code definition
  • Port setting error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The port with wrong number is connected to the indoor unit.The model total connected to the port is greater than the specifi- cation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy BC controller (1) Model total of indoor units per each port or per each port merge is greater than the specification. Before resetting the port number using the port number setting switch or the model using the model (capacity code) setting switch, turn off the power of the outdoor unit, the BC controller and the indoor unit. (2) 4 or more indoor units are connected to the same port. (3) When two ports are used, the port with the smaller number is not connected to the indoor unit. (4) For the address of the BC controller (Sub 1 or 2), 50 is not added to the smallest indoor unit address, which is connected to the BC controller (Sub1 or 2). (5) In the system to which multiple BC controllers are connected, the indoor unit address connected to the BC controller is not set as shown below. (i) The indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller (main) (ii) The indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller (Sub1) (iii) he indoor unit address which is connected to the BC controller (Sub2) Address setting (i)<(ii)<(iii) *(ii) and (iii) can be reversed. Model total Total port number Single branching 2 branches merge 54 96 Change the port No. Is there a BC controller (Sub)? Are 4 or more indoor units connected to the same port? Is the model total of indoor units connected to the same port greater than the item (1)? When two ports are used, is the port with the smallest number connected to the indoor unit?

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    For the address of the BC controller (Sub), is 50 added to the smallest indoor unit address, which is connected to the BC controller (Sub)? Is the address of the indoor unit, which is connected to the the BC controller (Main) ,smaller than that of the indoor, which is connected to the BC controller (Sub 1 or 2)?

    Yes

    Yes

    Is the address of the indoor unit, which is connected to the the BC controller (Main), smaller than that of the indoor, which is connected to the BC controller (Sub 1 or 2)?

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Change the port No.

    No

    Change the BC controller (Sub) address.

    No

    No

    Change the indoor unit address or change the BC controller address

    Yes

    Change the port No.

    Yes

    Change the set indoor unit model (capacity code). Port No. setting error? Port No. setting error? The wrong model (capacity code) is set. Adjust the piping connection to the port. Adjust the piping connection to the port.

    Page 255

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 244 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-9-7 Error Code [7110]
  • Error code definition
  • Connection information signal transmission/reception error
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The given indoor unit is inoperable because it is not properly connected to the outdoor unit in the same system.
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy
  • 7-9-8 Error Code [7111]
  • Error code definition
  • Remote controller sensor fault
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • This error occurs when the temperature data is not sent although the remote controller sensor is specified.
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit (1) Power to the transmission booster is cut off. 1) Confirm that the power to the transmission booster is not cut off by the booster being connected to the switch on the indoor unit. (The unit will not function properly unless the transmission booster is turned on.) (2) Power resetting of the transmission booster and outdoor unit. ->Reset the power to the outdoor unit. (3) Wiring failure between OC and OS 2) Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are properly connected. (4) Broken wire between OC and OS. 3) Check the model selection switch on the out- door unit (Dipswitch SW5-7 on the control board.). (5) The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the outdoor unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to

    On)

    Error source Cause Check method and remedy Indoor unit OA process- ing unit The remote controller without the temperature sensor (the wireless remote controller or the ME compact remote controller (mounted type)) is used and the remote controller sen- sor for the indoor unit is specified. (SW1-1 is

    On.)

    Replace the remote controller with the one with built-in temperature sensor.

    Page 256

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 245 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-9-9 Error Code [7113]
  • Error code definition
  • Function setting error (improper connection of CNTYP)
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit (1) Wiring fault (Detail code 15) (2) Loose connectors, short-cir- cuit, contact failure 1) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper con- nection. 2) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper con- nection. (Detail code 14) (3) Incompatible control board and INV board (replacement with a wrong circuit board) 1) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper con- nection. 2) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper con- nection. (4) DIP SW setting error on the control board 3) Check the settings of SW5-3 through SW5-6 on the control board. (Detail code 12) 1) Check the connector CNTYP2 on the control board for proper con- nection. 2) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper con- nection. 3) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper con- nection. 4) Check the settings of SW5-3 through SW5-6 on the control board. (Detail code 16) 1) Check the connector CNTYP on the INV board for proper connec- tion. 2) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper con- nection. 3) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper con- nection. 4) Check the settings of SW5-3 through SW5-6 on the control board. 5) Check the wiring between the control board and INV board. Refer to the following page(s). [7-2-1 Error Code [0403]](page 179) (Detail code 0, 1, 5, 6) 1) Check the wiring between the control board and INV board. Refer to the following page(s). [7-2-1 Error Code [0403]](page 179) 2) Check the settings of SW5-3 through SW5-6 on the control board. 3) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper con- nection. 4) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper con- nection. (Detail code Miscellaneous) *If a set-model-name identification error occurs, check the detail code on the unit on which the error occurred. The detail code that appears on other units will be different from the ones shown above.

    Page 257

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 246 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7-9-10 Error Code [7117]
  • Error code definition
  • Model setting error
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit (1) Wiring fault (Detail code 15) (2) Loose connectors, short-circuit, con- tact failure 1) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper connection. 2) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper connection. (Detail code 14) 1) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper connection. (Detail code 12) 1) Check the connector CNTYP2 on the control board for proper connection. 2) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper connection. (Detail code 16) 1) Check the connector CNTYP on the INV board for proper connection. 2) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper connection. 3) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper connection. 4) Check the wiring between the control board and INV board. Refer to the following page(s). [7-2-1 Error Code [0403]](page 179) (Detail code 0, 1, 5, 6) 1) Check the wiring between the control board and INV board. Refer to the following page(s). [7-2-1 Error Code [0403]](page 179) 2) Check the settings of SW5-3 through SW5-6 on the control board. 3) Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for proper connection. 4) Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for proper connection. (Detail code Miscellaneous) *If a set-model-name identification error occurs, check the detail code on the unit on which the error occurred. The detail code that appears on other units will be dif- ferent from the ones shown above.

    Page 258

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 247 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    7 Troubleshooting Using Error Codes 7-9-11 Error Code [7130]
  • Error code definition
  • Incompatible unit combination
  • Error definition and error detection method
  • The check code will appear when the indoor units with different refrigerant systems are connected.
  • Error source, cause, check method and remedy
  • Error source Cause Check method and remedy Outdoor unit The connected indoor unit is for use with R22 or R407C. Incorrect type of indoor units are connected. The M-NET connection adapter is connected to the indoor unit system in a system in which the Slim Model (A control) of units are con- nected to the M-NET. Check the connected indoor unit model. Check whether the connecting adapter for M-NET is not connected to the indoor unit. (Connect the connecting adapter for M-NET to the outdoor unit.)

    Page 259

    [7-9 Error Code Definitions and Solutions: Codes [7000 - 7999] ]

  • 248 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 260

  • 249 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-1 MA Remote Controller Problems..................................................................................................... 251 8-1-1 The LCD Does Not Light Up. .............................................................................................................. 251 8-1-2 The LCD Momentarily Lights Up and Then Goes Off. ........................................................................ 252 8-1-3 "HO" and "PLEASE WAIT" Do Not Go Off the Screen. ...................................................................... 253 8-1-4 Air Conditioning Units Do Not Operate When the ON Button Is Pressed........................................... 254 8-2 ME remote Controller Problems...................................................................................................... 255 8-2-1 The LCD Does Not Light Up. .............................................................................................................. 255 8-2-2 The LCD Momentarily Lights Up and Then Goes Off. ........................................................................ 256 8-2-3 "HO" Does Not Go Off the Screen. ..................................................................................................... 257 8-2-4 "88" Appears on the LCD.................................................................................................................... 258 8-3 Refrigerant Control Problems.......................................................................................................... 259 8-3-1 Units in the Cooling Mode Do Not Operate at Expected Capacity...................................................... 259 8-3-2 Units in the Heating Mode Do Not Operate at Expected Capacity. .................................................... 261 8-3-3 Outdoor Units Stop at Irregular Times. ............................................................................................... 263 8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference .................................. 264 8-4-1 M-NET................................................................................................................................................. 264 8-4-2 MA Remote Controller ........................................................................................................................ 266 8-5 Pressure Sensor Circuit Configuration and Troubleshooting Pressure Sensor Problems....... 267 8-5-1 Comparing the High-Pressure Sensor Measurement and Gauge Pressure....................................... 267 8-5-2 High-Pressure Sensor Configuration (63HS1,PS1,PS3) .................................................................... 267 8-5-3 Comparing the Low-Pressure Sensor Measurement and Gauge Pressure........................................ 268 8-5-4 Low-Pressure Sensor Configuration (63LS) ....................................................................................... 268 8-6 Troubleshooting Solenoid Valve Problems.................................................................................... 269 8-7 Troubleshooting Outdoor Unit Fan Problems................................................................................ 272 8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems ...................................................................................................... 273 8-8-1 General Overview on LEV Operation.................................................................................................. 273 8-8-2 Possible Problems and Solutions ....................................................................................................... 275 8-8-3 Coil Removal Instructions ................................................................................................................... 276 8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller....................................... 277 8-9-1 Pressure Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 277 8-9-2 Temperature Sensor........................................................................................................................... 279 8-9-3 Troubleshooting Flowchart for LEVs................................................................................................... 281 8-9-4 Troubleshooting Flowchart for Solenoid Valves.................................................................................. 284 8-9-5 BC Controller Transformer.................................................................................................................. 287 8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) .................................................................................. 288 8-10-1 Inverter-Related Problems and Solutions ........................................................................................... 288 8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit........................................................................... 290 8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems...................................... 290 8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load ................................................................................... 290 8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation...................................................... 291 8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems ......................................... 291 8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load .............................................................. 291 8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load ............................................................................ 292 8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load .............................................................................. 293 8-10-10 Checking the Installation Conditions................................................................................................... 293 8-10-11 Solutions for the Main No-Fuse Breaker Trip...................................................................................... 294 8-10-12 Solutions for the Main Earth Leakage Breaker Trip............................................................................ 294

    Page 261

  • 250 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components................................................................................... 295 8-10-14 Troubleshooting Problems with Intelligent Power Module .................................................................. 296 8-10-15 Troubleshooting Problems with Diode Stack ...................................................................................... 297 8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) .................................................................................. 298 8-11-1 Inverter-Related Problems and Solutions ........................................................................................... 298 8-11-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit........................................................................... 300 8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems...................................... 300 8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load ................................................................................... 300 8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation...................................................... 301 8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems ......................................... 301 8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load .............................................................. 301 8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load ............................................................................ 302 8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load .............................................................................. 303 8-11-10 Checking the Installation Conditions................................................................................................... 303 8-11-11 Solutions for the Main No-Fuse Breaker Trip...................................................................................... 304 8-11-12 Solutions for the Main Earth Leakage Breaker Trip............................................................................ 304 8-11-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components................................................................................... 305 8-11-14 Troubleshooting Problems with IGBT Module .................................................................................... 305 8-12 Control Circuit (TKMU)..................................................................................................................... 307 8-12-1 Control Power Supply Function Block................................................................................................. 307 8-12-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit ............................ 308 8-13 Control Circuit (YKMU)..................................................................................................................... 309 8-13-1 Control Power Supply Function Block................................................................................................. 309 8-13-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit ............................ 310 8-14 Measures for Refrigerant Leakage.................................................................................................. 311 8-15 Compressor Replacement Instructions.......................................................................................... 313 8-16 Solenoid Valve Block and Check Valve Replacement Instructions............................................. 315 8-17 BC Controller Maintenance Instructions ........................................................................................ 319 8-18 Troubleshooting Problems Using the LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit ................... 322

    Page 262

    [8-1 MA Remote Controller Problems ]

  • 251 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-1 MA Remote Controller Problems 8-1-1 The LCD Does Not Light Up.
  • Phenomena
  • Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start run- ning.(Power indicator ( ) is unlit and no lines appear on the remote controller.)
  • Cause
  • 1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit. ŒThe main power of the indoor unit is not on. ŒThe connector on the indoor unit board has come off. ŒThe fuse on the indoor unit board has melted. ŒTransformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit. 2) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller ŒDisconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block. ŒShort-circuited MA remote controller wiring ŒIncorrect wiring of the MA remote controller cables ŒIncorrect connection of the MA remote wiring to the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit ŒWiring mixup between the MA remote controller cable and 208-230 VAC power supply cable ŒReversed connection of the wire for the MA remote controller and the M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit 3) The number of the MA remote controllers that are connected to an indoor unit exceeds the allowable range (2 units). Two PAR-31MAAU controllers are connected. 4) The length or the diameter of the wire for the MA remote controller are out of specification. 5) Short circuit of the wire for the remote display output of the outdoor unit or reversed polarity connection of the relay. 6) The indoor unit board failure 7) MA remote controller failure
  • Check method and remedy
  • 1) Check the voltage at the MA remote controller terminals. ŒIf the voltage is between DC 9 and 12V, the remote controller is a failure. ŒIf no voltage is applied, check the causes 1) and 3) and if the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, refer to 2). 2) Disconnect the remote controller cable from TB15 (MA remote controller terminal) on the indoor unit, and check the voltage across the terminals on TB15. ŒIf the voltage is between DC 9 and 12 V, check the causes 2) and 4) and if the cause is found, correct it. ŒIf no voltage is applied, check the cause 1) and if the cause is found, correct it. If no cause is found, check the wire for the remote display output (relay polarity). If no further cause is found, replace the indoor unit board.

    Page 263

    [8-1 MA Remote Controller Problems ]

  • 252 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-1-2 The LCD Momentarily Lights Up and Then Goes Off.
  • Phenomena
  • When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, the operation status briefly appears on the display, then it goes off, and the display lights out immediately, and the unit stops.
  • Cause
  • 1) The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the outdoor unit. For details, refer to the following page(s). [8-12-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 308) [8-13-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 310) 2) Short circuit of the transmission line. 3) Incorrect wiring of the M-NETtransmission line on the outdoorunit. ŒDisconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block. ŒThe indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7). ŒThe male power supply connectors on the multiple outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector

    (Cn40).

    In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connect- ed to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the outdoor unit. 4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit side. 5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or disconnected connector.
  • Check method and remedy
  • When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Same symptom for all units in a system with one outdoor unit? Check the self-diagnosis LED Check item 1) in the "Cause" column. Check items 2) and 3) in the "Cause" column. Check item 4) in the "Cause" column. Measure voltages of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit.

    17 - 30V?

    Check item 5) in the "Cause" column. Error found? Indoor unit board or MA remote controller failure Correct the error. Is the error code 7102 displayed?

    Page 264

    [8-1 MA Remote Controller Problems ]

  • 253 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-1-3 "HO" and "PLEASE WAIT" Do Not Go Off the Screen.
  • Phenomena
  • "HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed. ("HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display will normally turn off 5 minutes later after the power on.)
  • Cause
  • 1) The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the outdoor unit. For details, refer to the following page(s). [8-12-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 308) [8-13-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 310) 2) Short-circuited transmission line 3) Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the outdoor unit. ŒDisconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block. ŒThe indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7). ŒThe male power supply connectors on the multiple outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector

    (Cn40).

    In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connect- ed to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the outdoor unit 4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit. 5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or disconnected connector. 6) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller ŒShort-circuited wire for the MA remote controller ŒDisconnected wire for the MA remote controller (No.2) and disconnected line to the terminal block. ŒReversed daisy-chain connection between groups ŒIncorrect wiring for the MA remote controller to the terminal block for transmission line connection (TB5) on the indoor unit ŒThe M-NET transmission line is connected incorrectly to the terminal block (TB15) for the MA remote controller. 7) The sub/main setting of the MA remote controller is set to sub. Two PAR-31MAAU controllers are connected. 8) 2 or more main MA remote controllers are connected. 9) Indoor unit board failure (MA remote controller communication circuit) 10) Remote controller failure 11) Outdoor failure (Refer to the following page(s). [8-18 Troubleshooting Problems Using the LED Status Indicators on the Out- door Unit](page 322))
  • Check method and remedy
  • When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    Check the self-diagnosis LED Error found? Error found? Replace the ME remote controller with the MA remote controller

    17 - 30V?

    Same symptom for all units in a system with one outdoor unit? Correct the error. Measure voltages of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit. Is the error code 7102 displayed? Indoor unit board or MA remote controller failure Check item 1) in the "Cause" column. Check items 2) and 3) in the "Cause" column. Check item 4) in the "Cause" column. Check items 5) and 6) in the "Cause" column.

    Page 265

    [8-1 MA Remote Controller Problems ]

  • 254 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-1-4 Air Conditioning Units Do Not Operate When the ON Button Is Pressed.
  • Phenomena
  • Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the indoor and the outdoor units do not start running.
  • Check method and remedy
  • Yes

    Blinking? Is " " displayed on the remote controller?

    No

    No

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    When all wires used for grouping are disconnected, is at least one of the LED2 on the grouped indoor units lit?

    Yes

    Replace the MA remote controller. Is there an indoor unit on which LED2 is turned off? If operated afterwards, error 6602 or 6607 occurs. Check the voltage between the MA remote controller terminals (A and B). 9-13VDC if the voltage is applied and 0V if no voltage is applied. Is LED1 on the indoor unit control board lit? (Blinks for 2 or 3 seconds approximately every 20 seconds) Does the number of the MA remote controllers that are connected to an indoor unit exceed the allowable range (2 units)? Blinking? (Turns on momentarily approximately every 20 seconds) *After correcting the error, daisy-chain the wire for the MA remote controller again. Check for the M-NET transmission line. Replace the indoor unit control board. Connect 2 remote controllers or less. Check whether the screw on the wire is not loose. Is LED2 on the indoor unit control board blinking? When the unit is operated with the remote controller, will "ON" appear on the display? Is "Centralized" displayed? "HO"/"PLEASE WAIT" keeps blinking on the MA remote controller. Is only the power source of the indoor unit turn turned on again? DEMAND by MELANS? External thermo input setting?

    (Sw3-3=On)

    Does an error occur when the power is reset? Does the unit work properly when the wire for the MA remote controller is daisy-chained again? Is LED1 on the indoor unit control board lit? Does the MA remote controller work properly when it is connected to the specified indoor unit? Does an error occur when the power is reset? Running group operation with the MA remote controller? Is the unit grouped with the equipment package indoor unit? No fault with the equipment package indoor unit? Does an error occur when the power is reset? Check that no error occurs in other indoor units. Check the indoor unit on which LED2 is lit. All the indoor unit power failure? All the indoor unit power failure? Error display? Error display? Thermo is OFF? Is operation possible? Short circuit of the remote controller? After turning the power on, check whether "HO"/ "PLEASE WAIT" is displayed on the remote controller. After more than 20 seconds since turning the power on, is LED2 check of the indoor control board still displayed? Is the operation by MELANS forbidden or the input from external control equipment allowed (SWC=ON)? Is the compulsory thermo OFF (SWA) switch set to "2" or "3"? Although No.1 refrigerant circuit is normal, No.2 or No.3 refrigerant circuit remain stopped. Running group operation with the MA remote controller? Does the indoor unit make an instantaneous stop? Power supply voltage

    Ac188~253V?

    No

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    When no error occurs

    No

    No

    No

    Keep displaying for 5 or more minutes.

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Check the power supply. Check the wire for the remote controller.

    No

    Replace the indoor unit control board.

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Replace the MA remote controller.

    No

    Replace the remote controller or the indoor control board.

    Yes

    Replace the indoor unit control board where an error occurs. Keep the operation.

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Keep the operation.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Power on

    Yes

    Refer to the self-diagnosis list for the displayed error code.

    Yes

    Normal Turns off within approximately 5 minutes. After the main power on, start the MA remote controller. "HO" display will appear.

    Yes

    Normal "Centralized" is displayed.

    Yes

    Refer to the error code list.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Normal

    Yes

    Normal (Is the thermo OFF signal input?)

    Yes

    Set the SWA to "1".

    Yes

    Refer to the self-diagnosis list for the displayed error code.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Check the equipment package indoor unit.

    Yes

    Replace the remote controller or the indoor control board. Replace the indoor unit control board.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Replace the remote controller or the indoor control board. Normal (Operate the unit with external control equipment)

    Yes

    Yes

    Replace the indoor unit control board. Check the power supply.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Check the voltage between the MA remote controller terminal blocks (TB15) (A and B). 9-13VDC if the voltage is applied and 0V if no voltage is applied.

    No

    Disconnected wire for the remote controller? Disconnected wire to the terminal block? Disconnected relay connector?

    No

    Are the length or the diameter of the wire for MA remote controller out of specification?

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    Use the wire that meets the specification. Replace the wire for the MA remote controller.

    Yes

    Check for the wire for the remote controller. Keep the operation.

    Yes

    Replace the indoor unit control board.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Power on See section 8-1-1 The LCD Does Not Light Up. See section 8-1-1 The LCD Does Not Light Up. See sections 8-1-1 The LCD Does Not Light Up and 8-1-2 The LCD Momentarily Lights Up and Then Goes Off. See section 8-1-3 "HO"and

    "Please Wait"

    Do Not Go Off the Screen. See section 8-1-2 The LCD Momentarily Lights Up and Then Goes Off. No.1 Refrigerant circuit check See section 8-1-2 The LCD Momentarily Lights Up and Then Goes Off. Check the malfunctioning refrigerant circuit.

    Page 266

    [8-2 ME remote Controller Problems ]

  • 255 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-2 ME remote Controller Problems 8-2-1 The LCD Does Not Light Up.
  • Phenomena
  • Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running. (Power indicator does not appear on the screen.)
  • Cause
  • 1) The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the outdoor unit. 2) Short circuit of the transmission line. 3) Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the outdoor unit. ŒDisconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block. ŒThe indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7). 4) Disconnected transmission line on the remote controller. 5) Remote controller failure 6) Outdoor unit failure (For details, refer to the following page(s). [8-18 Troubleshooting Problems Using the LED Status Indica- tors on the Outdoor Unit](page 322))
  • Check method and remedy
  • 1) Check voltage of the transmission terminal block for of the ME remote controller. ŒIf voltage between is 17V and 30V → ME remote controller failure Œ When voltage is 17V or less → For details, refer to the following page(s). [8-12-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 308) [8-13-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 310) 2) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED.

    Page 267

    [8-2 ME remote Controller Problems ]

  • 256 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-2-2 The LCD Momentarily Lights Up and Then Goes Off.
  • Phenomena
  • When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, a temporary operation display is indicated, and the display lights out immediately.
  • Cause
  • 1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit. ŒThe main power of the indoor unit (AC208/230V) is not on. ŒThe connector on the indoor unit board has come off. ŒThe fuse on the indoor unit board has melted. ŒTransformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit ŒThe indoor unit board failure 2) The outdoor control board failure As the indoor unit does not interact with the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit model cannot be recognized.
  • Check method and remedy
  • Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Yes

    *1 *1 Check LED1 on the indoor unit control board. Is it lit? When it is lit When it is off or cannot be checked Check for the change of LED display by operating dip switch for self-diagnosis. Check voltage of the power supply terminal on the indoor unit.

    Ac208/230V?

    Check the fuse on the circuit board. Melted? Check 200V circuit for short circuit and ground fault Check the connection of the connector. Check the main power of the power supply wire Turn on the power again. Connector contact failure Disconnected? Check the resistance value of the transformer Within specification? Check the cause of the disconnected transformer. Ground fault on the circuit board Ground fault of the sensor and the LEV Check self-diagnosis function of outdoor unit Changed? Changed? Outdoor unit board failure Check self-diagnosis function of outdoor unit after the power on. Accidental error Indoor unit control board failure Correct the error. *1. Refer to the parts catalog “transformer check”.

    Page 268

    [8-2 ME remote Controller Problems ]

  • 257 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-2-3 "HO" Does Not Go Off the Screen.
  • Phenomena
  • "HO" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed.
  • Cause
  • Without using MELANS 1) Outdoor unit address is set to "00" 2) A wrong address is set. ŒThe address of the indoor unit that is connected to the remote controller is incorrect. (It should equal the ME remote controller address plus 100.) ŒA wrong address is set to the ME remote controller. (100 must be added to the address of the indoor unit.) 3) Faulty wiring of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) of the indoor unit in the same group with the remote controller. 4) The centralized control switch (SW5-1) on the outdoor unit is set to ON. 5) Disconnection or faulty wiring of indoor unit transmission line. 6) Disconnection between the terminal block for M-NET line connection (TB5) of the indoor unit and the male connector (CN2M) 7) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control. 8) Outdoor unit control board failure 9) Indoor unit control board failure 10) Remote controller failure Interlocking control with MELANS 1) No group registration is made using MELANS. (The indoor unit and the ME remote controller are not grouped.) 2) Disconnected transmission line for centralized control (TB7) of the outdoor unit 3) The male power supply connector is connected to CN40 on more than one outdoor unit, or the connector is connected to CN40 on the outdoor unit in the system to which a power supply unit for transmission line is connected. Using MELANS 1) When MELANS is used, "HO" display on the remote controller will disappear when the indoor unit and the local remote con- troller (ME remote controller) are grouped. If "HO" does not disappear after the registration, check items 1) through 3) in the "Cause" column of the section on interlocked control with MELANS.
  • Check method and remedy
  • Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    *1 *1. When the indoor unit address is set to 1 - 50, the address will be forcibly set to 100.

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Without using MELANS Are all the units in the system experiencing the same problem? Check the address of the outdoor unit. 51 - 100? Check the centralized centralized switch (SW5-1) on the outdoor unit.

    On?

    Indoor unit control board failure A wrong address is set to the outdoor unit. Wrong switch setting Change it from ON to OFF. A wrong address is set to the ME remote controller. A wrong address is set to the indoor unit. Wrong wiring of the M-NET transmission line of the indoor unit Disconnected connector (CN2M) Correct the error. Disconnected?

    17 - 30V?

    ME remote controller
  • 100?
  • Check the address of the indoor unit to be coupled. Indoor unit + 100? Check the address of the ME remote controller on which "HO" is displayed. Check connection between indoor M-NET transmission terminal block (TB5) and the male connector (CN2M) Measure voltages of the terminal block for M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit. Indoor unit board or remote controller failure

    Page 269

    [8-2 ME remote Controller Problems ]

  • 258 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-2-4 "88" Appears on the LCD.
  • Phenomena
  • "88" appears on the remote controller when the address is registered or confirmed.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy An error occurs when the address is registered or con- firmed. (common)
  • A wrong address is set to the unit to be coupled.
  • (1) Confirm the address of unit to be coupled.
  • The transmission line of the unit to be coupled is dis-
  • connected or is not connected. (2) Check the connection of transmission line.
  • Circuit board failure of the unit to be coupled
  • (3) Check voltage of the terminal block for transmission line of the unit to be coupled. 1) Normal if voltage is between DC17 and 30V.
  • Improper transmission line work
  • 2) Check (5) in case other than 1). Generates at interlocking registration between LOSS- NAY and the indoor unit
  • The power of LOSSNAY is OFF.
  • (4) Check for the main power of LOSSNAY. Generates at confirmation of controllers used in the system in which the indoor units connected to different outdoor units are grouped
  • The power of the outdoor unit to be confirmed has
  • been cut off. (5) Check the power supply of the outdoor unit which is coupled with the unit to be confirmed.
  • Transmission line is disconnected from the terminal
  • block for central control system connection (TB7) on the outdoor unit. (6) Check that the transmission line for centralized control (TB7) of the outdoor unit is not disconnect- ed.
  • When the indoor units connected to different outdoor
  • units are grouped without MELANS, the male power supply connector is not connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the trans- mission line for centralized control. (7) Check voltage of the transmission line for central- ized control.
  • The male power supply connectors on 2 or more out-
  • door units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control. 1) Normal when voltage is between 10V and 30V
  • In the system to which MELANS is connected, the
  • male power supply connector is connected to the fe- male power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control. 2) Check 8 - 11 described on the left in case other than 1).
  • Short circuit of the transmission line for centralized
  • control

    Page 270

    [8-3 Refrigerant Control Problems ]

  • 259 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-3 Refrigerant Control Problems 8-3-1 Units in the Cooling Mode Do Not Operate at Expected Capacity.
  • Phenomena
  • Although cooling operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy
  • Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.
  • ŒFaulty detection of pressure sensor. ŒProtection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high discharge temperature ŒProtection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high pressure ŒPressure drops excessively. (1) Check pressure difference between the detected pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual pres- sure with self-diagnosis LED. → If the accurate pressure is not detected, check the pressure sensor. Refer to the following page(s). [8-5-1 Comparing the High-Pressure Sensor Measurement and Gauge Pressure](page 267) Note: Lower inlet pressure by the low pressure sensor than the actual pressure causes insufficient capacity. SW4 setting (SW6-10: OFF) ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the follow- ing page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) (2) Check temperature difference between the evaporat- ing temperature (Te) and the target evaporating tem- perature (Tem) with self-diagnosis LED. Note: Higher Te than Tem causes insufficient capacity. SW4 setting (SW6-10: OFF) ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the follow- ing page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) Note: Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise even at higher Te than Tem due to high discharge temperature and high pressure. At high discharge temperature: Refer to the following page(s).[7-3-1 Error Code [1102]](page 180) At high pressure: Refer to the following page(s). [7-3-3 Error Code [1302] (during operation)](page 182)
  • Indoor unit LEV malfunction
  • Refer to the following page(s).[8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems](page 273) ŒInsufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunc- tion (not enough opening) or protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to pres- sure drop. ŒRefrigerant leak from LEV on the stopping unit causes refrigerant shortage on the running unit. High pressure sensor Low pressure sensor

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    Sw4

    Sw4

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Evaporating temperature Te Target evaporating temperature Tem

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    Sw4

    Sw4

    Page 271

    [8-3 Refrigerant Control Problems ]

  • 260 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Cause Check method and remedy
  • RPM error of the outdoor unit FAN
  • Refer to the following page(s). [8-7 Troubleshooting Outdoor Unit Fan Prob- lems](page 272) [7-7-2 Error Codes [5104, 5105, 5106, 5107, 5109, 5111]](page 211) [7-3-3 Error Code [1302] (during operation)](page 182) ŒMotor failure or board failure, or airflow rate de- crease due to clogging of the heat exchanger ŒThe fan is not properly controlled as the outdoor temperature cannot be precisely detected by the temperature sensor. ŒThe fan is not properly controlled as the pressure cannot be precisely detected by the pressure sen- sor.
  • Long piping length
  • The cooling capacity varies greatly depending on the pressure loss. (When the pressure loss is large, the cooling capacity drops.) Check the piping length to determine if it is contributing to performance loss. Piping pressure loss can be estimated from the tem- perature difference between the indoor unit heat ex- changer outlet temperature and the saturation temperature (Te) of 63LS. →Correct the piping.
  • Piping size is not proper (thin)
  • Insufficient refrigerant amount
  • Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high discharge temperature. Refer to item 1 (Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.) on the previous page. (page 259) Refer to the following page(s).[6-9 Evaluating and Ad- justing Refrigerant Charge](page 161)
  • Clogging by foreign object
  • Check the temperature difference between in front of and behind the place where the foreign object is clog- ging the pipe (upstream side and downstream side). When the temperature drops significantly, the foreign object may clog the pipe. → Remove the foreign object inside the pipe.
  • The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively.
  • (Less than 15°C [59°F] WB) Check the inlet air temperature and for short cycling. Change the environment where the indoor unit is used.
  • Compressor failure
  • The amount of circulating refrigerant decreases due to refrigerant leak in the compressor. Check the discharge temperature to determine if the refrigerant leaks, as it rises if there is a leak.
  • BC controller LEV 3 actuation failure
  • Sufficient liquid refrigerant is not be supplied to the indoor unit as sufficient sub cool cannot be secured due to LEV3 malfunction. Refer to the following page(s).[8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems](page 273) It most likely happens when there is little difference or no difference between TH12 and TH15.
  • TH12, TH15 and 63HS1 sensor failure or faulty wir-
  • ing LEV3 is not controlled normally. ŒCheck the thermistor. ŒCheck wiring.

    Page 272

    [8-3 Refrigerant Control Problems ]

  • 261 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-3-2 Units in the Heating Mode Do Not Operate at Expected Capacity.
  • Phenomena
  • Although heating operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy
  • Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.
  • ŒFaulty detection of pressure sensor. ŒProtection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high discharge temperature ŒProtection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to high pressure. (1) Check pressure difference between the detected pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual pressure with self-diagnosis LED. → If the accurate pressure is not detected, check the pressure sensor. Refer to the following page(s). [8-5-1 Comparing the High-Pressure Sensor Mea- surement and Gauge Pressure](page 267) Note: Higher inlet pressure by the high pressure sensor than the actual pressure causes insufficient capac- ity. SW4 setting (SW6-10: OFF) ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the fol- lowing page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) (2) Check the difference between the condensing tem- perature (Tc) and the target condensing tempera- ture (Tcm) with self-diagnosis LED. Note: Higher Tc than Tcm causes insufficient capacity. SW4 setting (SW6-10: OFF) ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the fol- lowing page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) Note: Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise even at lower Tc than Tcm due to high dis- charge temperature and high pressure. At high discharge temperature: Refer to the following page(s).[7-3-1 Error Code [1102]](page 180) At high pressure: Refer to the following page(s).[7-3-3 Error Code [1302] (during operation)](page 182) High pressure sensor Low pressure sensor

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    Sw4

    Sw4

    Condensing temperature Tc Target condensing temperature Tcm

    On

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    Sw4

    Sw4

    Page 273

    [8-3 Refrigerant Control Problems ]

  • 262 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Cause Check method and remedy
  • Indoor unit LEV malfunction
  • Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction (not enough opening). Refer to the following page(s).[8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems](page 273)
  • Temperature reading error on the indoor unit piping
  • temperature sensor If the temperature reading on the sensor is higher than the actual temperature, it makes the subcool seem smaller than it is, and the LEV opening de- creases too much. Check the thermistor. 4 RPM error of the outdoor unit FAN Refer to the following page(s). [8-7 Troubleshooting Outdoor Unit Fan Prob- lems](page 272) ŒMotor failure or board failure, or airflow rate de- crease, pressure drop due to clogging of the heat exchanger leading to high discharge temperature ŒThe fan is not properly controlled as the tempera- ture cannot be precisely detected with the piping sensor.
  • Insulation failure of the refrigerant piping
  • Long piping length
  • Excessively long piping on the high pressure side causes pressure loss leading to increase in the high pressure. Confirm that the characteristic of capacity drop due to piping length. → Change the pipe
  • Piping size is not proper (thin)
  • Clogging by foreign object
  • Check the temperature difference between the up- stream and the downstream of the pipe section that is blocked. Since blockage in the extended section is difficult to locate, operate the unit in the cooling cycle, and follow the same procedures that are used to locate the blockage of pipe during cooling operation. → Remove the blockage in the pipe.
  • The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively
  • high.(exceeding 28°C [82°F]) Check the inlet air temperature and for short cy- cling. Change the environment where the indoor unit is used.
  • Insufficient refrigerant amount
  • Protection works and compressor frequency does not rise due to low discharge temperature Refrigerant recovery operation is likely to start. Refer to item 1 (Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.) on the previous page. (page 261) Refer to the following page(s).[6-9 Evaluating and Adjusting Refrigerant Charge](page 161)
  • Compressor failure (same as in case of cooling)
  • Check the discharge temperature.
  • BC controller LEV 3 actuation failure
  • A drop in the low pressure that is caused either by a blockage of liquid pipe or by a pressure loss and the resultant slowing of refrigerant flow causes a tenden- cy for the discharge temperature to rise. Refer to the following page(s).[8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems](page 273)

    Page 274

    [8-3 Refrigerant Control Problems ]

  • 263 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-3-3 Outdoor Units Stop at Irregular Times.
  • Phenomena
  • Outdoor unit stops at times during operation.
  • Cause, check method and remedy
  • Cause Check method and remedy The first stop is not considered as an error, as the unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes as a pre- liminary error. (1) Check the mode operated in the past by displaying preliminary error history on LED display with SW4. Error mode (2) Reoperate the unit to find the mode that stops the unit by displaying preliminary error history on LED display with SW4. Refer to the reference page for each error mode. 1) Abnormal high pressure 2) Abnormal discharge air temperature 3) Heatsink thermistor failure *Display the indoor piping temperature table with SW4 to check whether the freeze proof operation runs properly, and check the temperature. 4) Thermistor failure Refer to the following page(s).9 LED Status Indica- tors on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board(page 325) 5) Pressure sensor failure 6) Over-current break 7) Refrigerant overcharge Note1: Frost prevention tripping only under cooling mode may be considered in addition to the above. (Freeze protection is detected by one or all indoor units.) Note2: Even the second stop is not considered as an error when some specified errors occur. (eg. The third stop is considered as an error when the thermistor error occurs.)

    Page 275

    [8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference ]

  • 264 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference 8-4-1

    M-Net

    Control is performed by exchanging signals between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit (ME remote controller) through M- NET transmission. Noise interference on the transmission line will interrupt the normal transmission, leading to erroneous op- eration. (1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line (2) Wave shape check Wave shape check Check the wave pattern of the transmission line with an oscilloscope. The following conditions must be met. 1) Small wave pattern (noise) must not exist on the transmission signal. (Minute noise (approximately 1V) can be generated by DC-DC converter or the inverter operation; however, such noise is not a problem when the shield of the transmission line is grounded.) 2) The sectional voltage level of transmission signal should be as follows. Cause Erroneous operation Error code Error code definition Noise interference on the transmission line Signal is transformed and will be misjudged as the signal of another address. 6600 Address overlap Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to the noise creating a new signal 6602 Transmission pro- cessor hardware er- ror Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to the noise, and will not be received normally leading to no acknowledgement (ACK). 6607 No ACK error Transmission cannot be performed due to the fine noise. 6603 Transmission line bus busy error Transmission is successful; however, the acknowl- edgement (ACK) or the response cannot be re- ceived normally due to the noise. 6607 6608 No ACK error No response error Logic Voltage level of the transmission line 0 VHL = 2.5V or higher 1 VBN = 1.3V or below [With transmission] [Without transmission] No fine noise allowed No fine noise allowed 52 52 52 52 52

    Vbn

    Vhl

    Logic "0" Logic "1"

    Page 276

    [8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference ]

  • 265 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms (3) Check method and remedy 1) Measures against noise Check the followings when noise exists on the wave or the errors described in (1) occur. 2) Check the followings when the error "6607" occurs, or "HO" appears on the display on the remote controller. Error code definition Remedy Check that the wiring work is performed ac- cording to wiring specifications.
  • The transmission line and
  • the power line are not wired too closely. Isolate the transmission line from the power line (5cm [1-31/32"] or more). Do not insert them in the same conduit.
  • The transmission line is
  • not bundled with that for another systems. The transmission line must be isolated from another transmission line. When they are bundled, erroneous operation may be caused.
  • The specified wire is used
  • for the transmission line. Use the specified transmission line. Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For ME remote control- ler) Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more (Remote controller wire: 0.3 - 1.25mm2 [AWG22-16])
  • When the transmission
  • line is daisy-chained on the indoor unit terminals, are the shields daisy- chained on the terminals, too? The transmission is two-wire daisy-chained. The shielded wire must be also daisy-chained. When the shielded cable is not daisy-chained, the noise cannot be reduced enough. Check that the grounding work is performed according to grounding specifi- cations.
  • Is the shield of the indoor-
  • outdoor transmission ca- ble grounded to the earth terminal on the outdoor unit? Connect the shield of the indoor-outdoor transmission cable to the earth terminal ( ) on the outdoor unit. If no grounding is provided, the noise on the transmission line can- not escape leading to change of the transmission signal.
  • Check the treatment meth-
  • od of the shield of the transmission line (for cen- tralized control). The transmission cable for centralized control is less subject to noise interference if it is grounded to the outdoor unit whose power jumper cable was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power sup- ply unit. The environment against noise varies depending on the distance of the transmission lines, the number of the connected units, the type of the controllers to be connected, or the environment of the installation site. Therefore, the transmission line work for central- ized control must be performed as follows.
  • When no grounding is provided:
  • Ground the shield of the transmission cable by connecting to the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit.
  • When an error occurs even though one point grounding is
  • provided: Ground the shield on all outdoor units. Error code definition Remedy
  • The farthest distance of transmission line is
  • 200m [656ft] or longer. Check that the farthest distance from the outdoor unit to the indoor unit and to the remote controller is within 200m [656ft].
  • The types of transmission lines are different.
  • Use the specified transmission line. Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For ME remote control- ler) Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more (Remote controller wire: 0.3-1.25mm2 [AWG22-16])
  • Outdoor unit circuit board failure
  • Replace the outdoor unit control board or the power supply board for the transmission line.
  • Indoor unit circuit board failure or remote con-
  • troller failure Replace the indoor unit circuit board or the remote controller.
  • The MA remote controller is connected to the M-
  • NET transmission line. Connect the MA remote controller to the terminal block for MA re- mote controller (TB15).

    Page 277

    [8-4 Checking Transmission Waveform and for Electrical Noise Interference ]

  • 266 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-4-2 MA Remote Controller The communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is performed with current tone burst. (1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line If noise is generated on the transmission line, and the communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is interrupted for 3 minutes in a row, MA transmission error (6831) will occur. (2) Confirmation of transmission specifications and wave pattern A, B : No polarity Across terminal No. 1-2 : Power supply (9V to 12VDC) Satisfies the formula 12 msec/bit 5% Voltage among terminals must be between DC9 and 12 V.

    Tb15

    A

    B

    1 2 MA remote controller Transmission waveform (Across terminal No.1 - 2)

    Dc9~12V

    Logic 1 Logic 0 Logic 1 Logic 1 12msec 12msec 12msec 12msec Indoor unit

    Page 278

    [8-5 Pressure Sensor Circuit Configuration and Troubleshooting Pressure Sensor Problems ]

  • 267 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-5 Pressure Sensor Circuit Configuration and Troubleshooting Pressure Sensor Problems 8-5-1 Comparing the High-Pressure Sensor Measurement and Gauge Pressure By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW4 (when SW6-10 is set to OFF)) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the high-pressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board. (1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak. 2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4). 3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], go to (3). 4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2). (2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running. (Com- pare them by MPa [psi] unit.) 1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.098MPa [14psi], both the high pressure sensor and the control board are normal. 2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. (perfor- mance deterioration) 3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the high pressure sensor has a problem. (3) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure on the self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. 2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 4.15MPa [601psi], the control board has a problem. (4) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors (63HS1) to check the pressure with self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. 2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem. 8-5-2 High-Pressure Sensor Configuration (63HS1,PS1,PS3) The high pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC 5V is applied between the red and the black wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.071V per 0.098MPa [14psi]. The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side is different from that on the control board side. ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    Sw4

    Body side Control board side Vcc Pin 1 Pin 3 Vout Pin 2 Pin 2

    Gnd

    Pin 3 Pin 1 0 0.5 [73] 1.0 [145] 1.5 [218] 2.0 [290] 2.5 [363] 3.0 [435] 3.5 [508] 4.0 [580] 4.5 [653] 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

    Output voltage (V)

    Pressure (MPa [psi]) Connector

    63Hs1

    1 2 3 1 2 3 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red) Pressure 0 ~ 4.15 MPa [601psi] Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V 0.071 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi]

    Page 279

    [8-5 Pressure Sensor Circuit Configuration and Troubleshooting Pressure Sensor Problems ]

  • 268 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-5-3 Comparing the Low-Pressure Sensor Measurement and Gauge Pressure By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW4 (when SW6-10 is set to OFF)) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the low-pressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board. (1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak. 2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4). 3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], go to (3). 4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2). (2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running.(Com- pare them by MPa [psi] unit.) 1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.03MPa [4psi], both the low pressure sensor and the control board are normal. 2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.03MPa [4psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. (performance dete- rioration) 3) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the low pressure sensor has a problem. (3) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1 display. 1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. 2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem. ŒWhen the outdoor temperature is 30°C [86°F] or less, the control board has a problem. ŒWhen the outdoor temperature exceeds 30°C [86°F], go to (5). (4) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors (63LS:CN202) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. 2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem. (5) Remove the high pressure sensor (63HS1) from the control board, and insert it into the connector for the low pres- sure sensor (63LS) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1. 1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem. 2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem. 8-5-4 Low-Pressure Sensor Configuration (63LS) The low pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC5V is applied between the red and the black wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.173V per 0.098MPa [14psi]. The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side is different from that on the control board side. ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    Sw4

    Body side Control board side Vcc Pin 1 Pin 3 Vout Pin 2 Pin 2

    Gnd

    Pin 3 Pin 1 0 0.2 [29] 0.4 [58] 0.6 [87] 0.8 [116] 1.0 [145] 1.2 [174] 1.4 [203] 1.6 [232] 1.8 [261] 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5

    Output voltage (V)

    Pressure (MPa [psi]) Connector

    63Ls

    1 2 3 1 2 3 GND (Black) Vout (White) Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red) Pressure 0 ~ 1.7 MPa [247psi] Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V 0.173 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi]

    Page 280

    [8-6 Troubleshooting Solenoid Valve Problems ]

  • 269 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-6 Troubleshooting Solenoid Valve Problems Check whether the output signal from the control board and the operation of the solenoid valve match. Setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW4) as shown in the figure below causes the ON signal of each relay to be output to the LED's. Each LED shows whether the relays for the following parts are ON or OFF. LEDs light up when relays are on. The circuits on some parts are closed when the relays are ON. Refer to the following instructions. ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) ŒWhen a valve malfunctions, check if the wrong solenoid valve coil is not attached the lead wire of the coil is not disconnected, the connector on the board is not inserted wrongly, or the wire for the connector is not disconnected. (1) In case of 21S4a (4-way switching valve) About this 4-way valve When not powered: Conducts electricity between the oil separator outlet and heat exchanger AND the gas ball valve (BV1) and the accumulator to com- plete the circuit for the cooling cycle. When powered: The electricity runs between the oil separator and the gas ball valve, and between the heat exchanger and the accumulator. This circulation is for heating. Check the LED display and the intake and the discharge temperature for the 4-way valve to check whether the valve has no faults and the electricity runs between where and where.Do not touch the pipe when checking the temperature, as the pipe on the oil sep- arator side will be hot. Do not give an impact from outside, as the outer hull will be deformed leading to the malfunction of the inner valve. (2) In case of SV1a (Bypass valve) This solenoid valve opens when powered (Relay ON). 1) At compressor start-up, the SV1a turns on for 4 minutes, and the operation can be checked by the self-diagnosis LED display and the closing sound. 2) To check whether the valve is open or closed, check the change of the SV1a downstream piping temperature while the valve is being powered.Even when the valve is closed, high-temperature refrigerant flows inside the capillary next to the valve. (Therefore, temperature of the downstream piping will not be low with the valve closed.) (3) SV4a, 4b, and 4d (HP72, HP96 models)(Controls heat exchanger capacity) 1) Depending on the conditions during Cooling-only operation, at least one of the solenoid valves among SV4a through 4d turns on. Check for proper operation on the LED and by listening for the operation sound of the solenoid valve. 2) During Heating-only operation, SV4a through 4d all turn on. Check for proper operation on the LED and by listening for the operation sound of the solenoid valves. 3) Depending on the conditions during Cooling-main or Heating-main operation, at least one of the solenoid valves among SV4a through 4d turns on. Check for proper operation on the LED and by listening for the operation sound of the solenoid valve. 4) The diagram on the next page shows the refrigerant flow. This diagram shows the flow of the high-temperature (high-pressure) gas refrigerant in the Cooling-only and Cooling-main modes and the flow of the low-temperature gas/liquid refrigerant in the Heating-only and Heating-main modes. Refer to the refrigerant circuit diagram. Solenoid valves turns on and off according to such factors as the capacity of the indoor units in operation and outside temperature. Check the LED. Remove the SV coil, open the lid, and check the plunger. The type of pin face wrench that is listed in the service parts list is required to perform this task.

    Sw4 (Sw6-10:Off)

    Display

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Upper 21S4a

    Sv10

    SV1a

    Sv11

    Lower SV5b Upper SV4a SV4b SV4d

    Sv9

    Lower 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    Sw4

    On

    Sw4

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    Page 281

    [8-6 Troubleshooting Solenoid Valve Problems ]

  • 270 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Refrigerant Circuit diagram (HP72, HP96 models) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Solenoid valve block (three compartments) SV4d SV4b SV4a SV4d SV4b SV4a Solenoid valve block

    Bv2

    St1 Bv1

    CV8a CV6a

    Th7

    SV4a SV4b SV4d

    Th6

    CV9a

    Th9

    Th11

    Cv4

    CV2a CV7a CV3a CV5a SV5b

    Hex

    St18

    LEV5a

    Lev4

    *1

    Cp3

    Page 282

    [8-6 Troubleshooting Solenoid Valve Problems ]

  • 271 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms (4) In the case of SV5b (Bypass valve) This solenoid valve closes when energized (when the relay is on). This valve turns off for three minutes after the completion of the defrost cycle, or when SV9 is on turned ON and the value of 63HS1 is greater than 3.5 MPa [507psi] during Heating-only or Heating-main operation at the minimum frequency. The valve position can be determined by measuring and monitoring the changes in the pipe temperature on the downstream of SV5b while the unit is de-energized. When the valve is open, high-temperature gas refrigerant passes through the pipe. Do not at- tempt to check the pipe temperature by touching the pipe. (5) In the case of SV9 (Bypass valve) This solenoid valve opens when energized (when the relay is on) This valve turns on when the value of 63HS1 is greater than 3.5 MPa [507psi] during Heating-only or Heating-main operation at the minimum frequency. The valve position can be determined by measuring and monitoring the changes in the pipe tem- perature on the downstream of SV9 while the unit is energized. When the valve is open, high-temperature gas refrigerant passes through the pipe. Do not attempt to check the pipe temperature by touching the pipe. (6) In the case of SV10 This solenoid valve opens when energized (when the relay is on) The valve opens during the On-defrost cycle. The valve position can be determined by measuring and monitoring the changes in the pipe temperature on the downstream of SV10 while the unit is energized. When the valve is open, high-temperature gas refrigerant passes through the pipe. Do not attempt to check the pipe temperature by touching the pipe. (7) In the case of SV11 This solenoid valve opens when energized (when the relay is on) The valve opens during the On-defrost cycle. The valve position can be determined by measuring and monitoring the changes in the pipe temperature on the downstream of SV11 while the unit is energized. When the valve is open, high-temperature gas refrigerant passes through the pipe. Do not attempt to check the pipe temperature by touching the pipe.

    Page 283

    [8-7 Troubleshooting Outdoor Unit Fan Problems ]

  • 272 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-7 Troubleshooting Outdoor Unit Fan Problems (1) Fan motor (common items) ŒTo check the revolution of the fan, check the inverter output state on the self-diagnosis LED, as the inverter on the outdoor fan controls the revolutions of the fan.The revolution of the fan is approximately 680 rpm (HP72 model), 790 rpm (HP96 model) at full speed. ŒWhen starting the fan, the fan runs at full speed for 5 seconds. ŒWhen setting the DIP SW4 (when SW6-10 is set to OFF) as shown in the figure below, the inverter output [%] will appear. 100% indicates the full speed and 0% indicates the stopping. ŒAs the revolution of the fan changes under control, at the interphase or when the indoor unit operation capacity is low, the revolution of the fan may change. ŒIf the fan does not move or it vibrates, Fan board problem or fan motor problem is suspected. When checking the fan motor for problems by shutting down the power, be sure to disconnect the motor wire from the fan board. If a short-circuited fan board malfunctions, it will keep the fan motor from rotating smoothly. For details, refer to the following page(s).

    (Tkmu)

    [8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 291) [8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 291) [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293)

    (Ykmu)

    [8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems](page 301) [8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 301) [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303) ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10

    On

    Sw4

    Fan

    Page 284

    [8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems ]

  • 273 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems 8-8-1 General Overview on LEV Operation LEV operation LEV are stepping-motor-driven valves that operate by receiving the pulse signals from the indoor and outdoor unit control boards. (1) Outdoor LEV (LEV5a, LEV4), Indoor LEV and BC controller LEV The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses. 1) Control boards and the LEV (Indoor unit LEV, and BC controller LEV1 (G type only) and LEV3) 2) Control boards and the LEV (BC controller LEV1 (Applicable only to the GA and HA types.)) Note. The connector numbers on the intermediate connector and the connector on the control board differ. Check the color of the lead wire to judge the number. Outdoor control board Drive circuit

    Lev

    M

    5 5 2 2 1 1 3 3 4 4 6 6

    Dc12V

    Red Intermediate connector Brown Blue Orange Yellow White Red Orange White Brown Blue Yellow 6 5 4 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 ø4 ø3 ø2 ø1 ø4 ø3 ø2 ø1 Control board Drive circuit

    Lev

    M

    5 2 1 3 4 6

    Dc12V

    Red Blue Orange Yellow White Orange White Blue Yellow Red 6 5 4 3 2 1

    Page 285

    [8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems ]

  • 274 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3) Pulse signal output and valve operation 4) LEV valve closing and opening operation

    Output state Output (phase) number 1 2 3 4 1

    On Off Off On

    2

    On On Off Off

    3

    Off On On Off

    4

    Off Off On On

    Output pulses change in the following orders when the Valve is closed; 1 2 3 4 1 Valve is open; 4 3 2 1 4 *1. When the LEV opening angle does not change, all the output phases will be off. *2. When the output is open phase or remains ON, the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates. *When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 2200 pulses will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position. It must be fixed at point A. When the valve operates smoothly, no sound from LEV or no vibration occurs, however, when the pulses change from E to A in the chart or the valve is locked, a big sound occurs. *Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle. Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate) Valve closed Valve open

    E

    B

    80 - 100 pulses Pulses Fully open: 1400 pulses

    A

    C

    D

    Page 286

    [8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems ]

  • 275 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-8-2 Possible Problems and Solutions Malfunction mode Judgment method Remedy Microcomputer driver circuit fail- ure Disconnect the control board connector and connect the check LED as shown in the figure below. resistance : 0.25W 1kΩ LED : DC15V 20mA or more When the main power is turned on, the indoor unit circuit board out- puts pulse signals to the indoor unit LEV for 10 seconds. If any of the LED remains lit or unlit, the drive circuit is faulty. When the drive circuit has a problem, replace the control board. LEV mechanism is locked If the LEV is locked, the drive motor runs idle, and makes a small clicking sound. When the valve makes a closing and opening sound, the valve has a problem. Replace the LEV. Disconnected or short-circuited LEV motor coil If the resistance between the coils on indoor and BC controller LEVs (Indoor unit LEV: red-white, red-orange, brown-yellow, and brown- blue; BC controller LEV: red-white, red-orange, red-yellow, and red- blue) as measured with a tester is in the range of 150 Ω ±10% (in- door unit LEV) or , 100 Ω ±10% (BC controller LEV), the LEVs are normal. Replace the LEV coils. Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red -orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester. They are normal if re- sistance is 150Ω ± 3%. Replace the LEV coils. Incomple sealing (leak from the valve) When checking the refrigerant leak from the indoor LEV, run the tar- get indoor unit in the fan mode, and the other indoor units in the cool- ing mode. Then, check the liquid temperature (TH22) with the self- diagnosis LED. When the unit is running in the fan mode, the LEV is fully closed, and the temperature detected by the thermistor is not low. If there is a leak, however, the temperature will be low. If the temperature is extremely low compared with the inlet temperature displayed on the remote controller, the LEV is not properly sealed, however, if there is a little leak, it is not necessary to replace the LEV when there are no effects to other parts. If there is a large amount of leakage, replace the LEV. Faulty wire con- nections in the connector or faulty contact
  • Check for loose pins on the connector and check the colors of
  • the lead wires visually Check the continuity at the points where an error occurs.
  • Disconnect the control board's connector and conduct a con-
  • tinuity check using a tester. 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 k

    Led

    Thermistor (liquid piping temperature detection) Linear Expansion Valve

    Page 287

    [8-8 Troubleshooting LEV Problems ]

  • 276 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-8-3 Coil Removal Instructions (1) Outdoor unit LEV (LEV5a, LEV4) 1) Components The outdoor unit LEV consists of a coil and a valve body that can be separated from each other. 2) Removing the coil Securely hold the LEV at the bottom (as indicated by A in the figure), and turn the coil. After checking that the stopper is re- moved, pull up and out the coil. When removing the coil, hold the LEV body securely to prevent undue force from being placed on the pipe and bending the pipe. 3) Installing the coil Securely hold the bottom of the LEV (section A in the figure), insert the coil from above, and turn the coil until the coil stopper is properly installed on the LEV body. When removing the coil, hold the LEV body securely to prevent undue force from being placed on the pipe and bending the pipe. Stopper Lead wire Coil Body Part A Stopper Stopper Part A

    Page 288

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 277 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller 8-9-1 Pressure Sensor Troubleshooting flow chart for pressure sensor Check whether the pressure sensor or the connectors of P1 and P3 are connected, properly All the compressors of the outdoor units to which the BC controller is connected are stopped. Check P1 and P3 on the self-diagnosis LED, and check that the detected pressure is 0.098MPa [14psi] or less. On the self-diagnosis monitor, measure Outdoor high-pressure 63HS1 Outdoor low-pressure 63LS BC controller pressure P1 (liquid side) and P3 (intermediate part) Check whether the result is

    63Hs1 P1 P3 63Ls

    Start

    Repair the fault. Fix the relation between the refrigerant piping and the transmission line. Fix the relation between the refrigerant piping and the transmission line. Replace the pressure sensor. Replace the board. Restore contact failure. Check whether the contact of the pressure sensor connector in trouble is not faulty.

    Ok?

    Ok?

    Check that the difference between each detected pressure is 0.098MPa [14psi] or less.

    Ok?

    Both the board and the pressure sensor are normal.

    Ok?

    Is Pd P1 P3 Ps? Remove the pressure sensor connector from the board, and check the pressure.

    Ok?

    Ok?

    Check whether the refrigerant pipe and the transmission line are connected correctly between the indoor unit and the BC controller.

    Ok?

    Operating at the moment? Check whether the refrigerant pipe and the transmission line are connected correctly between the indoor unit and the BC controller.

    Ok?

    Yes

    Note 2 Note 1

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Note 3 Note 4

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Yes

    No

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    No

    No

    Replace the pressure sensor, which detects less than 6MPa [870psi] pressure, with the pressure sensor, which detects 6MPa [870psi] or more pressure, check the pressure, and check whether the detected pressure is displayed normally. 10 minutes or longer after the operation stops? Pressure 0MPa [0psi] 6MPa [870psi] pressure or more is displayed. Short-circuit between connecter pins #2 and #3 on the circuit board, and check the pressure.

    Page 289

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 278 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1) BC controller: Phenomena when the pressure sensor is connected wrongly (reverse connection of P1 and P3) to the board. 2) Check the self-diagnosis switch (Outdoor control board SW4 (SW6-10:OFF)). 3) Check whether CNP1 (liquid side) connector on the BC controller control board and the connector CNP2 (intermediate part) are not disconnected or not loose. 4) Check the pressure value on the self-diagnosis switch (same as note 2) with the connector of the applied pressure sensor is disconnected from the board. Cooling-only Heating only

    Heating main Non-cooling Indoor heating SC small

    Heating indoor Thermo ON Especially noise is large. Indoor heating SC small Heating indoor Thermo ON Especially noise is large. Cooling-main Symptoms SC11 large

    SC16 small

    PHM large

    SC11 large

    SC16 small

    PHM large

    Non-cooling Normal SC11 large SC16 small PHM large ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) Measurement data SW4 setting value Outdoor high pressure Outdoor low pressure BC controller pressure (liquid side) BC controller pressure (intermediate part)

    Symbol

    63Hs1

    Ps1

    63Ls

    Ps3

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    Page 290

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 279 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-9-2 Temperature Sensor Pull out the thermistor connector in trouble from the board. Measure the temperature of the thermistor in trouble. (actual measurement value) Check the thermistor resistor. Compare the temperature corresponding to the resistance measured by the thermistor and the temperature measured by a commercially available thermometer, and check whether there is no difference between them. Insert the connector of the thermistor in trouble into the board, check the sensor inlet temperature on the LED monitor, and check the temperature difference.

    Start

    Normal Troubleshooting instructions for thermistor Replace the thermistor Temperature difference Temperature difference Check for contact failure. Replace the control board. Note 1 Note 2 Note 2 Note 3

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    No

    Page 291

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 280 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1) For the connectors on the board, TH11 and TH12 are connected to CN10, and TH15 and TH16 are connected to CN11. Dis- connect the connector in trouble, and check the sensor of each number. 2) ŒPull out the sensor connector from the I/O board, Do not pull the sensor by holding the lead wire. ŒMeasure the resistance with such as a tester. ŒCompare the measured value with that of shown in the figure below. When the result is 10%, it is normal. 3) Check the self-diagnosis switch (Outdoor control board SW1). ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    Th12

    Th15

    Th12

    Th15

    Liquid inlet temperature Bypass outlet temperature Bypass outlet temperature Bypass outlet temperature

    Th11

    Th12

    Bypass inlet temperature Bypass inlet temperature Bypass inlet temperature Bypass inlet temperature

    Th15

    Th16

    Measurement data SW4 setting value Symbol

    G, Ga, Ha

    (Standard / main)

    Gb, Hb

    (Sub 1)

    Gb, Hb

    (Sub 2)

    Page 292

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 281 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-9-3 Troubleshooting Flowchart for LEVs Check whether the electric expansion valve and the solenoid valve connector are not disconnected or not loose. Run the cooling operation or the heating operation in the system in trouble (only in one system). No cooling capacity No heating capacity Repair the fault. Fault is found. Note 1

    No

    Check that LEV1 is fully open. Check that LEV1 is fully open. Check that SVA and SVC are ON. Check that SVA and SVC are OFF. Cooling or heating operation Note 2 Heating operation Check whether LEV3 is controlling superheat. Check LEV1. Check LEV3. Check SVA and SVC. Check SVB. LEV1 is fully open. Check whether LEV 3 is controlled by the value of the differential pressure. LEV1 is fully open. Note 3 Note 2 Note 3

    Yes

    No

    Cooling operation Superheat control OK Differential pressure OK

    Yes

    No

    Check that SVB is OFF. Check that SVB is ON.

    Sva, Svc On

    Sva, Svc Off

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    Completed

    Svb Off

    Svb On

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Page 293

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 282 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    1) BC controller: Phenomena when LEV is connected wrongly (reverse connection of LEV1 and LEV3) to the board. 2) Check method of fully open state or fully closed state of LEV ŒCheck LEV opening (pulse) on the self-diagnosis LED (Outdoor control board SW1). Full open: 2000 pulses Fully closed: 110 pulses (In the case of heating-only mode, however, the pulse may become 110 or more.) ŒWhen LEV is fully open, measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of LEV, and make sure that there is no temperature difference. ŒWhen LEV is fully closed, check that there is no refrigerant flowing sound. 3) Refer to the chart below to judge LEV opening controlled by the values of the differential pressure and of the superheat. (BC controller LEV basic operation characteristic) Phenomena Cooling-only Cooling-main Heating only Heating main Non-cooling SH12 small, SC11 small SC16 small, branch pipe SC small BC controller sound Non-cooling and non-heating SH12 small, SC11 small SC16 large, but branch pipe SC small BC controller sound

    PHM large Indoor heating SC small

    PHM large Non-cooling Indoor heating SC small

    PHM large Part Malfunction mode Operation mode Content Standards of judgment on unit stable operation

    G, Ga, Ha

    type

    Lev1

    Inclined to close Heating only Heating- main Cooling- main Difference between high pressure (P1) and interme- diate pressure (P3) is large. 0.3 to 0.4MPa [44 to 58psi] Inclined to open Difference between high pressure (P1) and interme- diate pressure (P3) is small.

    Lev3

    Inclined to close Cooling-only Cooling- main SH12 is large.

    Sh12 < 20°C [36°F]

    Heating only Heating- main Difference between high pressure (P1) and interme- diate pressure (P3) is small. 0.3 to 0.4MPa [44 to 58psi] Inclined to open Cooling-only Cooling- main SC16 and SH12 are small.

    Sc16 > 3°C [5.4°F]

    Sh12 > 3°C [5.4°F]

    Heating only Heating- main Difference between high pressure (P1) and interme- diate pressure (P3) is large. 0.3 to 0.4MPa [44 to 58psi]

    Gb, Hb

    type)

    Lev3

    Inclined to close Cooling-only Cooling- main SH22 is large.

    Sh22 < 20°C [36°F]

    Inclined to open Cooling-only Cooling- main SH22 is small.

    Sh22 > 3°C [5.4°F]

    Page 294

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 283 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms Self-diagnosis LED ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    On

    LEV1 opening LEV3 opening LEV3 opening BC controller bypass outlet superheat BC controller intermediate part subcool

    Sh12

    LEV2 opening LEV3 opening

    Sc16

    BC controller liquid-side subcool

    Sc11

    Measurement data SW4 setting value Symbol

    G, Ga, Ha

    (Standard / main)

    Gb, Hb

    (Sub 1)

    Gb, Hb

    (Sub 2)

    Page 295

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 284 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-9-4 Troubleshooting Flowchart for Solenoid Valves 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 5 1 3 4 6 To

    Lev

    Led

    10 k Start Brown Red Blue Orange Yellow White Brown Red Blue Orange Yellow White

    Ok?

    No

    Yes

    Ok?

    No

    Yes

    Repair the fault. Repair the fault.

    Ok?

    No

    Yes

    Ok?

    No

    Yes

    Replace LEV.

    Ok?

    No

    Yes

    Replace LEV. Replace LEV.

    Ok?

    No

    Yes

    Replace the board in trouble. Completed Check for pins not fully inserted on the connector and check the colors of the lead wires visually. Intermediate connector Control board Check that no refrigerant leaks from LEV. Pull out the connector from the board, and check that the electricity runs with a tester. The wiring side of CN05 and 07: Among 1, 3 and 5, and among 2, 4 and 6 Check the resistance between each coil with a tester (between red and white, red and orange, brown and yellow and brown and blue), and check that the resistance is 150 within 10%. Connect the LED for check, which is as shown in the right figure, to the board connector, and check that the LED keeps lighting for 10 seconds. When LEV is fully closed : tick sound When LEV is fully open : no sound Check the above.

    Page 296

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 285 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms (1) Solenoid valve (SVA, SVB, SVC) Stop the operation of the applied BC remote controller system. Faulty judgment of solenoid valve

    Faulty judgment of solenoid valve Solenoid valve failure

    Replace the control board.

    Replace the solenoid valve coil. Repair the fault. Replace the control board. Stop the operation Note 1 Check whether the wire to the solenoid valve is not connected wrongly, or the connector is not loose.

    No fault Check the operation sound of the solenoid valve to be magnetized at the time of turning on the remote controller. Makes a tick sound. Check the relay output with the self-diagnosis LED, and check whether the operation corresponds with the operation mode.

    Corresponds Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of the solenoid valve. When the solenoid valve is ON : There is no temperature difference. When the solenoid valve is OFF : There is a temperature difference.

    Ok

    Remove the solenoid valve coil, and check that there is a suction force. There is a suction force. Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes of the solenoid valve, and compare them. There is no temperature difference. : OK There is a temperature difference. : NO

    Ok

    Run the cooling or heating operation of the refrigerant system of the solenoid valve in trouble.

    No

    No

    No

    Stop the unit with the remote controller. Remove the solenoid valve connector, and check that the electricity runs through the solenoid valve coil.

    The electricity runs.

    Output 200V

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Turn on the remote controller with the connector of the solenoid valve in trouble disconnected, and check that the control board outputs 200V.

    Page 297

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 286 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Check whether the BC board output signal corresponds with the solenoid valve operation correspond.

    1) Sva, Svb, Svc

    SVA, SVB, and SVC turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode. SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, SVM2b SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, and SVM2b turn on or off according to the indoor unit operation mode.

    2) Sva, Svb, Svc

    Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and of SVA. Measure the temperature at the upstream and downstream pipes and of SVB. Mode Cooling Heating Stopped Defrost Fan Port

    Sva

    On

    Off

    Off

    Off

    Off

    Svb

    Off

    On

    Off

    Off

    Off

    Svc

    On

    Off

    Off

    Off

    On

    Operation mode Cooling only Cooling main Heating only Heating main Defrost Stopped SVM1,SVM1b

    On

    Pressure dif- ferential con- trol OFF or

    On

    Off

    Off

    On

    Off

    Svm2,

    SVM2b

    Off

    Off

    Pressure dif- ferential con- trol OFF or

    On

    Pressure dif- ferential con- trol OFF or

    On

    Off

    Off

    Page 298

    [8-9 Troubleshooting Problems with Major Components on BC Controller ]

  • 287 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-9-5 BC Controller Transformer
  • Before measuring the resistance, pull out the connector.
  • Normal Abnormal

    Cntr(1)-(3)

    about 58 Ω. Open-phase or shorting

    Cn03(1)-(3)

    about 1.6 Ω.

    Cntr

    Cn03

    BC controller control board Red White Red Red

    Page 299

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 288 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) 8-10-1 Inverter-Related Problems and Solutions ŒReplace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the compressor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrent is detected, protecting the inverter from damage.) ŒReplace only the fan motor if only the fan motor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the fan motor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrrent is detected, protecting the inverter from damage.) ŒReplace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective. ŒIf both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices. (1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies 1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Before inspecting the inverter-related items, turn off the main power, wait for 5 to 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor has dropped to a sufficiently low level. 2) Disconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. (To plug or unplugconnec- tors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details.) 3) To connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20 VDC or below. 4) Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work. 5) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors, and Faston terminals. 6) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned on. 7) Current sensors become damaged if electricity is passed through without them being connected to the circuit board. Connect the current sensor to the appropriate connectors on the circuit board before operating the inverter. 8) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion. 9) When the IPM, diode stack, or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these parts. Wipe off any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure. 10) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence. 11) When the power is turned on, the compressor is energized even while it is not operating. Before turning on the power, dis- connect all power supply wires from the compressor terminal block, and measure the insulation resistance of the compressor. Check the compressor for a graound fault. If the insulation resistance is 1.0 MΩ or below, connect all power supply wires to the compressor and turn on the power to the outdoor unit. (The liquid refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate by energiz- ing the compressor.) Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

    Page 300

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 289 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms Error display/failure condition Measure/inspection item [1] Inverter related errors 4250, 4255, 4220, 4225, 4230, 4240, 4260, 5301, 5305, 0403 Implement solutions that correspond to the error codes or preliminary error codes.[7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists](page 175) [2] Main power breaker trip <1> Check the breaker capacity. <2> Check whether the electrical system is short-circuited or ground-faulted. <3> If <1> or <2> is not the cause of the problem, refer to the following page(s). [8- 10-11 Solutions for the Main No-Fuse Breaker Trip](page 294) [3] Main power earth leakage breaker trip <1> Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity current. <2> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter <3> If <1> or <2> is not the cause of the problem, refer to the following page(s). [8- 10-11 Solutions for the Main No-Fuse Breaker Trip](page 294) [4] Only the compressor does not operate. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor. If the frequency indicates that the units are in operation, refer to the following page(s). [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) [5] The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound. Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) [6] Only the fan motor does not operate. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor. If the frequency indicates that the units are in operation, refer to the following page(s). [8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 291) [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293) [7] The fan motor shakes violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor. If the frequency indicates that the units are in operation, refer to the following page(s). [8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 291) [8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 292) [8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 293) [8] Noise is picked up by the peripheral device <1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not run close to the power supply wiring of the outdoor unit. <2> Check that the inverter output wiring is not in close contact with the power sup- ply wiring and the transmission lines. <3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire. <4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter <5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the factory for details of the service part settings.) <6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other electric appli- ances. <7> If the problem suddenly appeared, inverter output may have had a ground fault. For details, refer to the following page(s). [8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 291) *Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above. [9] Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.) <1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly. <2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire. <3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connection wiring does not run close to another power supply system or does not run through the same conduit pipe.
  • Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.
  • Page 301

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 290 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-10-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit 8-10-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems 8-10-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Remove power sup- ply. 1) IPM/overcurrent breaker trip Error code: 4250 Detail code: No. 101, 103, 104, 105, 106, and 107 Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-14 Troubleshooting Problems with Intelligent Power Module](page 296) Replace the IPM, and put the outdoor unit back into operation. If the problem persists, replace the INV board. (2) Disconnect the invert- er output wire from the output terminals (U, V, W) of the IPM. 2) Logic error Error code: 4220 Detail code: No. 111 Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-14 Troubleshooting Problems with Intelligent Power Module](page 296) Replace the IPM, and put the outdoor unit back into operation. If the problem persists, replace the INV board. Replace the INV board, and put the outdoor unit back into operation. If the problem persists, replace the DCCT. (3) Apply power supply. 3) ACCT sensor circuit failure Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.117 Replace the INV board. (4) Put the outdoor unit into operation. 4) DCCT sensor circuit failure Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.118 Replace the DCCT board. Replace the DCCT, and put the outdoor unit back into operation. If the problem persists, replace the INV board. 5) IPM open Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.119 Normal Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy Disconnect the compressor wiring, and check the compres- sor Meg, and coil resistance. 1) Compressor Meg failure Error if less than 1 Mohm. When no liquid refrigerant in the compres- sor Replace the compressor Check that no liquid refrigerant in the compressor. 2) Compressor coil resistance failure Coil resistance value of 0.092 Ω

    (20°C [68°F])

    Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Remove power supply. 1) Inverter-related problems are detected. Turn off SW1-1 and go to section 8-10-2. 2) Inverter voltage is not out- put. Check the connection between the IPM and the CNIPM on the INV board. Replace the IPM. If the problem persists, replace the INV board. (2) Disconnect the inverter output wire from the output terminals (U, V, W) of the IPM. 3) There is an voltage imbal- ance between the wires. Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V Replace the IPM. If the problem persists, replace the INV board. (3) Turn on SW1-1 on the INV board. (4) Apply power supply. 4) There is no voltage imbal- ance between the wires. Normal *Turn off SW1-1 (5) Put the outdoor unit into oper- ation.

    Page 302

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 291 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-10-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation 8-10-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems 8-10-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy Put the outdoor unit into operation. Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output frequency has stabilized. 1) Overcurrent-related prob- lems occur immediately af- ter compressor startup. (4250 Details : No.101, 102, 103, 106, 107) a. Check items 8-10-2 through 8-10-4 for prob- lems. b. Check that high and low pressures are balanced. c. Check that no liquid refrigerant is present in the com- pressor. →Go to "d." when the problem persists after compres- sor startup was repeated several times. If normal operation is restored, check the belt heater for problems. d. Check that there is a pressure difference between high and low pressures after compressor startup. →Check the high pressure with LED monitor for changes. Replace the compressor if there is no pressure differ- ence. (the compressor may be locked.) 2) There is a voltage imbal- ance between the wires af- ter the inverter output voltage is stabilized. Greater than the larger of the following values: imbal- ance of 5% or 5V If there is a voltage imbalance, replace the IPM. If the problem persists, replace the INV board. If the problem persists after replacing the above parts, go to section 8-10-3. Check the belt heater for problems if there is no voltage imbalance. →When the error occurred, liquid refrigerant may have been present in the compressor. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy Remove fan motor winding. Check insulation resistance and coil resis- tance. 1) Fan motor insulation failure. If < 1 MΩ, Defect. Change fan motor. 2) Fan motor wire failure. Normal coil resistance is a few ohms. (Changes with temperature) Change fan motor. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Turn off breaker. *Turn power off without fail. 1) Electrical current over load error. Check code: 4255 Detail code: 101, 104 Change Fan board. (2) Remove Fan board CNINV and CNSNR connectors. 2) Logic error Check code: 4255 Detail code:111 Change Fan board. (3) Turn on breaker. 3) Position error on start up Check code: 5305 Detail code: 132 Normal *After checking, return connector

    Cninv & Cnsnr.

    (4) Operate unit.

    Page 303

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 292 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-10-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Turn off breaker. *Turn power off without fail. 1) Within 30 seconds from the start of operation, an error other than a posi- tion error (5305) (detail code 132) is detected. Change Fan board. (2) Disconnect the connector CN- INV from the Fan board. 2) Less than 5V unbalance in the wiring. Change Fan board. (3) Set Fan board switch SW1-1 to ON. 3) No unbalanced voltage in the wiring. After 30 second, detail code 132 is produced and the system stops. Normal *After checking, return SW1&CN-

    Inv.

    (4) Turn on breaker. (5) Operate unit. After about 30 seconds under no load with constant voltage output, the code below will be displayed indicating a position error (5305). Detail code: 132 Also, running with no load pro- duces constant voltage of about 160V.

    Page 304

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 293 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-10-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load 8-10-10 Checking the Installation Conditions Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Turn off breaker. 1) After operation, electrical overload error or position detection error and unit stops within 10 seconds. Check code: 4255, 5305 Detail code: 101, 132 Check for fan motor lock. →If locked, change for fan mo- tor. If the same error is still present after changing fan motor, change INV board. →If not locked, refer to 3) & 4). (2) Turn on breaker. 2) RPM error before stat-up Check code: 5305 Detail code: 134 Change Fan board if the same error occurs after restart. (3) Operate unit. 3) Electrical current overload error during operation Check code: 4255 Detail code: 101 a. Check for gusts or windy conditions. b. Go to 8-10-6 if not windy. c. After checking 8-10-6 , and there is no problem, change Fan board. d. If replacing Fan board doesn't re- solve issue, change fan motor. 4) Sensor error during operation Check code: 5305 Detail code: 132, 133 a. Check for gusts or windy conditions. b. If no issues with wind, but the error is still present, change Fan board. c. Change fan motor if Fan board change doesn't resolve issue. 5) Voltage overload error Check code: 4225 Detail code: 109 a. Check for gusts or windy conditions. b. Change Fan board if it is not windy. 6) Load short circuit Check code: 4255 Detail code: 105 a. Check 8-10-7 and 8-10-8. If no problem, then check wiring for short circuit. b. If there is no problem with item a. above, change fan motor. c. If same error after motor change, change Fan board. 7) After RPM has stabilized, voltage unbal- ance of 5%, or 5V. a. If voltage is unbalanced, go to 8-10-
  • b. After checking 8-10-6, and there is
  • no problem, change Fan board. c. If replacing Fan board doesn't re- solve issue, change fan motor. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Check refrigerant charge. Overcharge of refrigerant Return to correct refrigerant charge. (2) Check outdoor unit branch in- stallation. The branch approach <500 mm. Make branch approach >500mm Is the branch angle < ±15° to horizontal? Make branch angle < ±15°

    Page 305

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 294 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-10-11 Solutions for the Main No-Fuse Breaker Trip 8-10-12 Solutions for the Main Earth Leakage Breaker Trip The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1MΩ after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please use the following procedure to take care of this. ŒDisconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block. ŒIf the resistance is less than 1 MΩ, switch on the power for the outdoor unit with the wires still disconnected. ŒLeave the power on for at least 12 hours. ŒCheck that the resistance has recovered to 1 MΩ or greater. Earth leakage current measurement method ŒFor easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure. Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION ŒWhen measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy [1] Perform Meg check between the terminals on the power terminal block TB1. Zero to several ohm, or Meg failure a. Check each part in the main inverter circuit. Refer to the following page(s). [8- 10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components](page 295) ŒDiode stack

    ŒIpm

    ŒRush current protection resistor ŒElectromagnetic relay ŒDC reactor b. A compressor ground fault can be considered. Go to 8-10-3. [2] Turn on the power again and check again. 1) Main power breaker trip 2) No remote control display [3] Turn on the outdoor unit and check that it operates normally. 1) Operates normally without tripping the main breaker. a. The wiring may have been short- circuited. Search for the wire that short-circuited, and repair it. b. If item a) above is not the cause of the problem, the compressor may have a problem. 2) Main power breaker trip A compressor ground fault can be con- sidered. Go to 8-10-3. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy [1] Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity cur- rent. Use of a non-specified earth leakage breaker Replace with a regulation earth leakage breaker. [2] Check the resistance at the power supply terminal block (TB1) with a megger. Failure resistance value Check each part and wiring. Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Compo- nents](page 295)

    ŒIpm

    ŒRush current protection resistor ŒElectromagnetic relay ŒDC reactor [3] Disconnect the compressor wir- ings and check the resistance of the compressor with a megger. Failure compressor if the insu- lating resistance value is not in specified range. Failure when the insulating re- sistance value is 1 MΩ or less. Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in the compressor. If there is none, replace the compressor. [4] Disconnect the fan motor wirings and check the resistance of the fan motor with a megger. Failure fan motor if the insulat- ing resistance value is not in specified range. Failure when the insulating re- sistance value is 1 MΩ or less. Replace the fan motor.

    Page 306

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 295 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-10-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components ŒTurn off the power of the unit and leave it turned off for 10 minutes. Check that the voltage of the electrolytic capacitor (inverter main circuit) is 20 VDC or below. Then, remove the relevant parts from the control box. ŒBefore checking, turn the power off and remove the parts to be checked from the control box. Part name Judgment method Diode stack Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-15 Troubleshooting Problems with Diode Stack](page 297) IPM (Intelligent power module) Refer to the following page(s). [8-10-14 Troubleshooting Problems with Intelligent Power Module](page 296) Rush current protection resis- tor

    R1(R2)

    Measure the resistance between the + terminal on the diode stack and terminal TB31. (*Can be mea- sured without the need to remove the noise filter board): 22 Ω±10% Electromagnetic relay

    72C

    This electromagnetic relay is rated at 200VAC and is driven by a coil. The resistance between the coils in row A cannot be measured with a tester.Check only for shorting. DC reactor DCL Measure the resistance between terminals: 1 Ω or lower (almost 0 Ω) Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis: Current sensor

    Acct

    Disconnect the CNCT2 connector and measure the resistance between terminals: 280 Ω± 30 Ω 1 - 2 PIN (U-phase),3 - 4 PIN (W-phase) Installation direction Test button Row

    A

    Row

    B

    Row

    C

    Row

    D

    Row

    E

    A2

    44 34 24 14 43 33 23 13

    A1

    Check point Not to be short-circuited Coil Contact Checking criteria Between No. 1 pin and No. 3 pin of the CN03 on the noise filter board + terminal on the diode stack and terminal TB31 on the noise filter With the test button turned on : 0 With the test button turned off :

    U

    U

    V

    Ipm

    *Check the ACCT connection phase and the direction of the connection

    W

    Acct-W

    W

    Acct-U

    Page 307

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 296 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-10-14 Troubleshooting Problems with Intelligent Power Module Measure resistances between each pair of terminals on the IPM with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting. 1) Notes on measurement ŒCheck the polarity before measuring. (On the tester, black normally indicates plus.) ŒCheck that the resistance is not open ( Ω) or not shorted (to 0 Ω). ŒThe values are for reference, and the margin of errors is allowed. ŒThe result that is more than double or half of the result that is measured at the same measurement point is not allowed. 2) Tester restriction ŒUse the tester whose internal electrical power source is 1.5V or greater ŒUse the dry-battery-powered tester. (The accurate diode-specific resistance cannot be measured with the button-battery-powered card tester, as the applied volt- age is low.) ŒUse a low-range tester if possible. A more accurate resistance can be measured. Judgment value (reference) Black ( + )

    P

    N

    U

    V

    W

    Red (-)

    P

  • -
  • 5 - 200 Ω

    5 - 200 Ω

    5 - 200 Ω

    N

  • -
  • U

    5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • V

  • 5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • W

  • 5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • External view
  • Internal circuit diagram 1 4 7 10 16

    W

    V

    U

    B

    P

    N

    V

    U

    P

    W

    N

    B

    3 2 1 6 5 4 9 8 7 11 13 10 14 15 12 16 Drive circuit Drive circuit Drive circuit Drive circuit Drive circuit Drive circuit Overheating -protection circuit Temperature sensor

    Page 308

    [8-10 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (TKMU) ]

  • 297 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-10-15 Troubleshooting Problems with Diode Stack Measure resistances between each pair of terminals on the diode stack with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting. For cautionary notes on measuring diode stack resistance and information on the types of testers to be used, refer to the fol- lowing page(s). [8-10-14 Troubleshooting Problems with Intelligent Power Module](page 296) Judgment value (reference) Black ( + ) External view

    + (P)

    - (N)

    to (L1) to (L2) to (L3) Red (-)

    + (P)

  • -
  • 5 - 200

    5 - 200

    5 - 200

    - (N)

  • -
  • to (L1) 5 - 200

  • -
  • Internal circuit diagram
  • to (L2) 5 - 200

  • -
  • to (L3)
  • 5 - 200

  • -
  • L1 L2 L3

  • +
  • L1

  • L2

    L3

    Page 309

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 298 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) 8-11-1 Inverter-Related Problems and Solutions ŒReplace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the compressor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrent is detected, protecting the inverter from damage.) ŒReplace only the fan motor if only the fan motor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the fan motor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrrent is detected, protecting the inverter from damage.) ŒReplace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective. ŒIf both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices. (1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies 1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Turn off the unit, leave it turned off for at least 10 minutes, and check that the voltage across FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board or the terminals at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor is 20V or below before checking inside the control box. (It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turn off.) 2) Disconnect the outdoor unit fan board connector (CNINV) before performing maintenance work. (To plug or unplugconnec- tors, check that the outdoor unit fan is not rotating and that the voltage of capacitor in the main circuit is 20 VDC or below. The capacitor may collect a charge and cause an electric shock when the outdoor unit fan rotates in windy conditions. Refer to the wiring nameplate for details.) 3) To connect wiring to TB7, check that the voltage is 20 VDC or below. 4) Reconnect the connector (CNINV) to the fan board after completion of maintenance work. 5) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors, and Faston terminals. 6) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned on. 7) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion. 8) When the IPM or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these parts. Wipe off any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure. 9) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence. 10) When the power is turned on, the compressor is energized even while it is not operating. Before turning on the power, dis- connect all power supply wires from the compressor terminal block, and measure the insulation resistance of the compressor. Check the compressor for a graound fault. If the insulation resistance is 1.0 MΩ or below, connect all power supply wires to the compressor and turn on the power to the outdoor unit. (The liquid refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate by energiz- ing the compressor.) Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

    Page 310

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 299 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms Error display/failure condition Measure/inspection item [1] Inverter related errors 4250, 4255, 4220, 4225, 4230, 4240, 4260, 5301, 5305, 0403 Implement solutions that correspond to the error codes or preliminary error codes.[7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists](page 175) [2] Main power breaker trip Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-11 Solutions for the Main No-Fuse Breaker Trip](page 304) [3] Main power earth leakage breaker trip Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-12 Solutions for the Main Earth Leakage Breaker Trip](page 304) [4] Only the compressor does not operate. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor. If the frequency indicates that the units are in operation, refer to the following page(s). [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301) [5] The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound. Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301) [6] Only the fan motor does not operate. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor. If the frequency indicates that the units are in operation, refer to the following page(s). [8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 301) [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303) [7] The fan motor shakes violently at all times or makes an ab- normal sound. Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor. If the frequency indicates that the units are in operation, refer to the following page(s). [8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load](page 301) [8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load](page 302) [8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load](page 303) [8] Noise is picked up by the peripheral device <1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not run close to the power supply wiring of the outdoor unit. <2> Check if the inverter output wiring is not running parallel to the power supply wiring and the transmission lines. <3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when it is re- quired, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire. <4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter <5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the factory for de- tails of the service part settings.) <6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other electric ap- pliances. <7> If the problem suddenly appeared, inverter output may have had a ground fault. For details, refer to the following page(s). [8-11-5 Checking the Invert- er for Damage during Compressor Operation](page 301) *Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above. [9] Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.) <1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly. <2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when it is re- quired, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire. <3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connection wiring does not run close to another power supply system or does not run through the same conduit pipe.
  • Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.
  • Page 311

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 300 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-11-2 Checking the Inverter Board Error Detection Circuit 8-11-3 Checking the Compressor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems 8-11-4 Checking the Inverter for Damage at No-Load Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Remove power supply. 1) Overcurrent error Error code: 4250 Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105, 106, and 107 Replace the INV board. (2) Disconnect the inverter output wire from the ter- minals of the INV board

    (Sc-U, Sc-V, Sc-W).

    2) Logic error Error code: 4220 Detail code: No. 111 Replace the INV board. (3) Apply power supply. 3) ACCT sensor circuit failure Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.117 Replace the INV board. (4) Put the outdoor unit into operation. 4) IPM open Error code: 5301 Detail code: No.119 Normal Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy Disconnect the compressor wir- ing, and check the compressor Meg, and coil resistance. 1) Compressor Meg failure Error if less than 1 Mohm. Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in the compressor. If there is none, replace the compres- sor. 2) Compressor coil resistance failure Coil resistance value of 0.32 Ω

    (20°C [68°F])

    Replace the compressor. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Remove power supply. 1) Inverter-related problems are detected. Connect the short-circuit connector to CN6, and go to section 8-11-2. (2) Disconnect the inverter output wire from the ter- minals of the INV board

    (Sc-U, Sc-V, Sc-W).

    2) Inverter voltage is not output at the termi- nals (SC-U, SC-V, and SC-W) Replace the INV board. (3) Disconnect the short-cir- cuit connector from CN6 on the INV board. 3) There is an voltage imbalance between the wires. Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V Replace the INV board. (4) Apply power supply. (5) Put the outdoor unit into operation. Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output frequency has sta- bilized. 4) There is no voltage imbalance between the wires. Normal *Reconnect the short-circuit connector to CN6 after checking the voltage.

    Page 312

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 301 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-11-5 Checking the Inverter for Damage during Compressor Operation 8-11-6 Checking the Fan Motor for Ground Fault and Coil Resistance Problems 8-11-7 Checking the Fan Board Error Detection Circuit at No Load Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy Put the outdoor unit into operation. Check the inverter output voltage af- ter the inverter output frequency has stabilized. 1) Overcurrent-related problems occur im- mediately after compressor startup. Error code : 4250 Detail code : 101, 102, 106, 107 a. Check items 8-11-2 through 8- 11-4 for problems. b. Check that high and low pres- sures are balanced. c. Check that no liquid refrigerant is present in the compressor. →Go to "d." when the problem persists after compressor start- up was repeated several times. If normal operation is restored, check the belt heater for prob- lems. d. Check that there is a pressure difference between high and low pressures after compres- sor startup. →Check the high pressure with LED monitor for changes. Replace the compressor if there is no pressure difference. (the compressor may be locked.) 2) There is a voltage imbalance between the wires after the inverter output voltage is stabilized. Greater than the larger of the following values: imbalance of 5% or 5V Replace the INV board if there is a voltage imbalance. Check the belt heater for problems if there is no voltage imbalance. →When the error occurred, liquid refrigerant may have been present in the compressor. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy Remove fan motor winding. Check insulation resistance and coil resis- tance. 1) Fan motor insulation failure. If < 1 MΩ, Defect. Change fan motor. 2) Fan motor wire failure. Normal coil resistance is a few ohms. (Changes with temperature) Change fan motor. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Turn off breaker. *Turn power off without fail. 1) Electrical current over load error. Check code: 4255 Detail code: 101, 104 Change fan board. (2) Remove fan board CNINV and CNSNR connectors. 2) Logic error Check code: 4225 Detail code:111 Change fan board. (3) Turn on breaker. 3) Position error on start up Check code: 5305 Detail code: 132 Normal *After checking, return connector

    Cninv & Cnsnr.

    (4) Operate unit.

    Page 313

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 302 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-11-8 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage at No Load Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Turn off breaker. *Turn power off without fail. 1) Within 30 seconds from the start of operation, an error other than a posi- tion error (5305) (detail code 132) is detected. Change fan board. (2) Disconnect the connector CN- INV from the fan board. 2) Less than 5V unbalance in the wir- ing. Change fan board. (3) Set fan board switch SW1-1 to

    On.

    3) No unbalanced voltage in the wiring. After 30 second, detail code 132 is produced and the system stops. Normal *After checking, return SW1&CN-

    Inv.

    (4) Turn on breaker. (5) Operate unit. After about 30 seconds under no load with constant voltage output, the code below will be displayed indicating a position error (5305). Detail code: 132 Also, running with no load pro- duces constant voltage of about 160V.

    Page 314

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 303 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-11-9 Checking the Fan Inverter for Damage with Load 8-11-10 Checking the Installation Conditions Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Turn off breaker. 1) After operation, electrical overload error or position detection error and unit stops within 10 seconds. Check code: 4255, 5305 Detail code: 101, 132 Check for fan motor lock. →If locked, change for fan mo- tor. If the same error is still present after changing fan motor, change INV board. →If not locked, refer to 3) & 4). (2) Turn on breaker. 2) RPM error before stat-up Check code: 5305 Detail code: 134 Change Fan board if the same error occurs after restart. (3) Operate unit. 3) Electrical current overload error during operation Check code: 4255 Detail code: 101 a. Check for gusts or windy conditions. b. Go to 8-11-6 if not windy. c. After checking 8-11-6 , and there is no problem, change Fan board. d. If replacing Fan board doesn't re- solve issue, change fan motor. 4) Sensor error during operation Check code: 5305 Detail code: 132, 133 a. Check for gusts or windy conditions. b. If no issues with wind, but the error is still present, change Fan board. c. Change fan motor if Fan board change doesn't resolve issue. 5) Voltage overload error Check code: 4225 Detail code: 109 a. Check for gusts or windy conditions. b. Change Fan board if it is not windy. 6) Load short circuit Check code: 4255 Detail code: 105 a. Check 8-11-7 and 8-11-8. If no problem, then check wiring for short circuit. b. If there is no problem with item a. above, change fan motor. c. If same error after motor change, change Fan board. 7) After RPM has stabilized, voltage unbal- ance of 5%, or 5V. a. If voltage is unbalanced, go to 8-11-
  • b. After checking 8-11-6, and there is
  • no problem, change Fan board. c. If replacing Fan board doesn't re- solve issue, change fan motor. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy (1) Check refrigerant charge. Overcharge of refrigerant Return to correct refrigerant charge. (2) Check outdoor unit branch in- stallation. The branch approach <500 mm. Make branch approach >500mm Is the branch angle < ±15° to horizontal? Make branch angle < ±15°

    Page 315

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 304 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-11-11 Solutions for the Main No-Fuse Breaker Trip 8-11-12 Solutions for the Main Earth Leakage Breaker Trip The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1 MΩ after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please use the following procedure to take care of this. ŒDisconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block. ŒIf the resistance is less than 1 MΩ, switch on the power for the outdoor unit with the wires still disconnected. ŒLeave the power on for at least 12 hours. ŒCheck that the resistance has recovered to 1 MΩ or greater. Earth leakage current measurement method ŒFor easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure. Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION ŒWhen measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block. Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy [1] Check the breaker capacity. Use of a non-specified break- er Replace it with a specified breaker. [2] Perform Meg check between the terminals on the power terminal block TB1. Zero to several ohm, or Meg failure Check each part and wiring. Refer to the following page(s).[8-11-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Compo- nents](page 305) ŒIGBT module ŒRush current protection resistor ŒElectromagnetic relay ŒDC reactor [3] Turn on the power again and check again. 1) Main power breaker trip 2) No remote control display [4] Turn on the outdoor unit and check that it operates normally. 1) Operates normally without tripping the main breaker. a) The wiring may have been short-circuit- ed. Search for the wire that short-circuit- ed, and repair it. b) If item a) above is not the cause of the problem, refer to 8-11-2 - 8-11-10 2) Main power breaker trip Items to be checked Phenomena Remedy [1] Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity cur- rent. Use of a non-specified earth leakage breaker Replace with a regulation earth leakage breaker. [2] Check the resistance at the power supply terminal block with a meg- ger. Failure resistance value Check each part and wiring. Refer to the following page(s).[8-11-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Compo- nents](page 305) ŒIGBT module ŒRush current protection resistor ŒElectromagnetic relay ŒDC reactor [3] Disconnect the compressor wir- ings and check the resistance of the compressor with a megger. Failure compressor if the insu- lating resistance value is not in specified range. Failure when the insulating re- sistance value is 1 MΩ or less. Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in the compressor. If there is none, replace the compressor. [4] Disconnect the fan motor wirings and check the resistance of the fan motor with a megger. Failure fan motor if the insulat- ing resistance value is not in specified range. Failure when the insulating re- sistance value is 1 MΩ or less. Replace the fan motor.

    Page 316

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 305 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-11-13 Simple Check on Inverter Circuit Components Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. 8-11-14 Troubleshooting Problems with IGBT Module Measure the resistances between each pair of terminals on the IGBT with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting. The terminals on the INV board are used for the measurement. 1) Notes on measurement ŒCheck the polarity before measuring. (On the tester, black normally indicates plus.) ŒCheck that the resistance is not open (∞ Ω) or not shorted (to 0 Ω). ŒThe values are for reference, and the margin of errors is allowed. ŒThe result that is more than double or half of the result that is measured at the same measurement point is not allowed. ŒDisconnect all the wiring connected the INV board, and make the measurement. 2) Tester restriction ŒUse the tester whose internal electrical power source is 1.5V or greater ŒUse the dry-battery-powered tester. (The accurate diode-specific resistance cannot be measured with the button-battery-powered card tester, as the applied volt- age is low.) ŒUse a low-range tester if possible. A more accurate resistance can be measured. Part name Judgment method IGBT module Refer to the following page(s). [8-11-14 Troubleshooting Problems with IGBT Module](page 305) Rush current pro- tection resistor

    R1, R5

    Measure the resistance between terminals R1 and R5: 22 Ω±10% Electromagnetic relay

    72C

    This electromagnetic relay is rated at DC12V and is driven by a coil. Check the resistance between terminals DC reactor DCL Measure the resistance between terminals: 1Ω or lower (almost 0 Ω) Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis: ∞ 1 6 5 2 3 4 Upper Installation direction Check point Checking criteria( )

    W

    Between Terminals 5 and 6 Between Terminals 1 and 2 Between Terminals 3 and 4 Not to be short-circuited (Center value 75 ohm) Coil Contact

    Page 317

    [8-11 Troubleshooting Inverter Problems (YKMU) ]

  • 306 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    INV board external diagram Judgment value (reference) Black ( + )

    Sc-P1

    Ft-N

    Sc-L1

    Sc-L2

    Sc-L3

    Red (-)

    Sc-P1

  • -
  • 5 - 200 Ω

    5 - 200 Ω

    5 - 200 Ω

    Ft-N

  • -
  • ∞ ∞ ∞

    Sc-L1

    5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • Sc-L2

  • 5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • Sc-L3

  • 5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • Black ( + )
  • Sc-P2

    Ft-N

    Sc-U

    Sc-V

    Sc-W

    Red (-)

    Sc-P2

  • -
  • 5 - 200 Ω

    5 - 200 Ω

    5 - 200 Ω

    Ft-N

  • -
  • ∞ ∞ ∞

    Sc-U

    5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • Sc-V

  • 5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • Sc-W

  • 5 - 200 Ω

  • -
  • Sc-U

  • Sc-W

    Sc-V

    Ft-N

    Sc-P1

    Sc-P2

    Sc-L1

    Sc-L2

    Sc-L3

    Page 318

    [8-12 Control Circuit (TKMU) ]

  • 307 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-12 Control Circuit (TKMU) 8-12-1 Control Power Supply Function Block

    1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

  • MA remote controllers and ME remote controllers cannot be used together.
  • (Both the ME and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

    Tb2

    Tb15

    Terminal block for power source

    Tb5

    Terminal block for MA remote controller Terminal block for transmission line connection

    Dc 17 ~ 30 V

    Cn40

    A, B

    A, B

    MA remote controller wiring (Non-polar 2 wire)

    Dc 17 ~ 30 V

    Dc 9 ~ 12 V

    ME remote controller MA remote controller

    Ac 208 / 230 V

    Terminal block for power source

    Tb1

    Noise filter Noise filter Fuse Surge protection INV board

    72C

    Dcl

    Rectifier Smoothing capacitor 15V Power supply Inverter drive circuit Microcomputer 5 V Power supply 12 V Power supply

    Dc / Dc

    converter Fuse Inverter Compressor Heat exchanger fan Fuse Fan board Microcomputer 5 V Power supply Inverter Inverter drive circuit Outdoor unit Power source system (AC 208 / 230 V) Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)

    63H1

    Inverter reset circuit DC / DC converter Microcomputer 5 V Power supply 16 V Power supply Fuse Detection circuit for the power supply to the transmission line M-NET board

    Dc / Dc

    converter 30 V Power supply Relay drive circuit Relay Indoor unit

    Lev

    72C

    Solenoid valve 4-way valve Fuse Control board 12V Power supply Relay, LEV Drive circuit

    Ac 208 / 230 V

    AC Power source To next unit (Indoor unit) Terminal block for transmission line for centralized control

    (Dc 24 ~ 30 V)

    Tb7

    Indoor/outdoor transmission block

    (Dc 24 ~ 30 V)

    Tb3

    Page 319

    [8-12 Control Circuit (TKMU) ]

  • 308 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-12-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit

    1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Tkmu-A-H

    Dc24 ~ 30V

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Check the voltage at the indoor/outdoor transmission terminal block (TB3) of outdoor unit.

    Dc 24 ~ 30 V

    Dc 24 ~ 30 V

    Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3. Check whether the male connector is connected to the female power supply connector (CN40). Connected Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7).

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Check if the indoor/outdoor transmission line is not short-circuited, and repair the problem. Check whether the transmission line is disconnected, check for contact failure, and repair the problem. Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the CN62 on the control board. Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the CN62 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

    Dc24 ~ 30V

    Dc24 ~ 30V

    Dc24 ~ 30V

    No

    No

    Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7.

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the transmission line (CN62, CNPS, CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors. Fix the wiring and connector disconnection. Check for shorted transmission line for centralized control.

    Yes

    Is there a wiring error or a connector disconnection? Replace the control board. Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the transmission line (CN62, CNPS, CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors. Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins of the CNPS on the control board. Is the voltage measurement between 4.5 and 5.2 VDC? Is there a connector disconnection? Fix the connector disconnection. Replace the M-NET board Replace the M-NET board

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    Replace the INV board. Replace the noise filter. Replace the noise filter. Replace the diode stack. Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power supply problems found. Turn on the power again. Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of the CNDC3 on the INV board. Check the voltage between TB31 and TB42 on the noise filter. Check the voltage between the + and – terminals on the diode stack.

    Dc265 ~ 357V

    Dc265 ~ 357V

    Dc265 ~ 357V

    No

    No

    No

    Check the voltages among TB21, TB22, and TB23 on the noise filter. Check the voltage at the power supply terminal block TB1.

    Ac188 ~ 253V

    Ac188 ~ 253V

    No

    No

    No

    Page 320

    [8-13 Control Circuit (YKMU) ]

  • 309 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-13 Control Circuit (YKMU) 8-13-1 Control Power Supply Function Block

    1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    Outdoor unit Power source system (AC 230 / 460 V) Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)
  • MA remote controllers and ME remote controllers cannot be used together.
  • (Both the ME and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

    A, B

    A, B

    M-Net

    transmission line (Non-polar 2 wire)

    Ac 220 / 240 V

    AC Power source To next unit (Indoor unit) MA remote controller wiring (Non-polar 2 wire)

    Dc 17 ~ 30 V

    Dc 9 ~ 12 V

    Tb2

    Tb15

    Terminal block for power source

    Tb5

    Terminal block for MA remote controller Terminal block for transmission line connection

    Dc 17 ~ 30 V

    Ac 460V

    Terminal block for power source

    Tb1

    Noise filter Noise filter Fuse Fuse Fuse

    72C, Lev

    Fuse Surge protection INV board Control board Fan board

    63H1

    72C

    Dcl

    DC / DC converter Detection circuit for the power supply to the transmission line M-NET board

    Dc / Dc

    converter Microcomputer Microcomputer Microcomputer 5 V Power supply 16 V Power supply 12V Power supply 30 V Power supply Relay drive circuit Relay 5 V Power supply 5 V Power supply 17V Power supply Smoothing capacitor Inverter Inverter Inverter drive circuit Inverter drive circuit Inverter reset circuit Rectifier Compressor Heat exchanger fan Relay, LEV Drive circuit Solenoid valve 4-way valve

    Cn40

    Terminal block for transmission line for centralized control

    (Dc 24 ~ 30 V)

    Tb7

    Indoor/outdoor transmission block

    (Dc 24 ~ 30 V)

    Tb3

    Rectifier Trans Box ME remote controller MA remote controller Indoor unit Oudoor unit

    Page 321

    [8-13 Control Circuit (YKMU) ]

  • 310 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-13-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit

    1) Pury-Hp72, Hp96Ykmu-A

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Dc270 ~ 356V

    Ac414 ~ 506V

    Fuse F4 on the noise filter board is blown.

    Ac414 ~ 506V

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    No

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    Yes

    Yes

    Yes

    No

    No

    No

    Yes

    No

    Yes

    Check the voltage between L2 and L3 at the power supply terminal block TB1. Check the voltages among TB22 and TB23 on the noise filter Fuse F5 is blown. Fuse F5 is blown. Fuse F5 is blown. Check fuse F5. Pull out CN4 and CN5 on the noise filter, replace fuse F5, and turn on the power.

    Yes

    Check the voltage at the indoor/outdoor transmission terminal block (TB3) of outdoor unit.

    Dc 24 ~ 30 V

    Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3.

    Dc 24 ~ 30 V

    Dc 24 ~ 30 V

    Dc 24 ~ 30 V

    Dc 24 ~ 30 V

    Dc 24 ~ 30 V

    Check whether the male connector is connected to the female power supply connector (CN40). Connected Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7). Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7. Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the CNS2 on the control board. Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of the noise filter CN4.

    Dc270 ~ 356V

    Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of the noise filter CN5. Check the noise filter fuse F4 . Turn on the power again. Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power supply problems found. Replace the noise filter. Replace the noise filter. Replace the M-NET board Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on. Replace the control board. Replace the noise filter. Replace the noise filter. Replace the control board. Fuse F4 on the noise filter board is blown. Fuse F4 on the noise filter board is blown. Disconnect the noise filters CN4 and CN5, and then replace fuse F4 on the noise filter board, then turn the power on. Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on. Replace the M-NET board Replace the M-NET board Replace the control board. Is the voltage measurement between 4.5 and 5.2 VDC? Replace the M-NET board Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins of the CNPS on the control board. Is there a connector disconnection? Fix the connector disconnection. Check whether the transmission line is disconnected, check for contact failure, and repair the problem. Check if the indoor/outdoor transmission line is not short-circuited, and repair the problem. Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the transmission line (CN62, CNPS, CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors. Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the transmission line (CN62, CNPS, CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors. Fix the wiring and connector disconnection. Check for shorted transmission line or power feed collision for centralized control. Replace the control board. Is there a wiring error or a connector disconnection? Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

    Page 322

    [8-14 Measures for Refrigerant Leakage ]

  • 311 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-14 Measures for Refrigerant Leakage
  • Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Cooling season)
  • 1) Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint (CJ2) on the low-pressure side. 2) Stop all the indoor units, and close the high-pressure side refrigerant service valve (BV2) on the outdoor unit while the com- pressor is being stopped. 3) Stop all the indoor units; turn on SW4 (912) on the outdoor unit control board while the compressor is being stopped. (Pump down mode will start, and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode.) 4) In the pump down mode (SW4 (912)), all the indoor units and compressors will automatically stop when the low pressure (63LS) reaches 0.383MPa [55psi] or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started. Stop all the indoor units and compressors when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, which is on the check joint (CJ2) for low-pressure ser- vice, reaches 0.383MPa [55psi] or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started. 5) Close the service ball valve (BV1) on the low-pressure pipe on the outdoor unit. 6) Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected. 7) Repair the leak. 8) After repairing the leak, vacuum*1 the extension pipe and the indoor unit. 9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the outdoor unit, and turn off SW4 (912).
  • Leak spot: In the case of outdoor unit (Cooling season)
  • (1) Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode. 1) To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW4 (769) on the outdoor unit control board to ON. 2) Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode. 3) Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation. (2) Check the SC16 value. (This value can be displayed on the LED by setting the self-diagnosis switch SW4 (SW6-10: OFF) on the outdoor unit control board.) 1) When SC16 is 10°C [18°F] or above: Go to the next item (3). 2) When the SC16 value is below 10°C [18°F] : After the compressor has stopped, extract the refrigerant in the system, repair the leak, evacuate the air from the system *1, and charge the system with refrigerant. (If the leak is in the outdoor unit, follow the same procedure as listed under "heating season.") (3) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor. 1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW4 (769) on the outdoor control board from ON to OFF. 2) Check that all the indoor units are being stopped. (4) Close the ball valves (BV1 and BV2). (5) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the outdoor unit.Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected. (6) Repair the leak. (7) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation*1 inside the outdoor unit. (8) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the outdoor unit. *1. For details, refer to the following page(s). [1-3-3 Vacuum Drying](page 12) SC16 self-diagnosis switch ŒFor how to read the SW settings, refer to the following page(s). [9-1-1 How to Read the LED](page 325) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9

    On

    Page 323

    [8-14 Measures for Refrigerant Leakage ]

  • 312 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

  • Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Heating season)
  • (1) Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode. 1) To run the indoor unit in test run mode, set SW4 (769) on the outdoor unit control board to ON. 2) Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode. 3) Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation. (2) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor. 1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW4 (769) on the outdoor control board from ON to OFF. 2) Check that all the indoor units are stopped. (3) Close the ball valves (BV1 and BV2). (4) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere when it is collected. (5) Repair the leak. (6) After repairing the leak, perform evacuation of the extension pipe*1 for the indoor unit, and open the ball valves (BV1 and BV2) to adjust refrigerant.
  • Leak spot: In the case of outdoor unit (Heating season)
  • 1) Collect the refrigerant in the entire system (outdoor unit, extended pipe and indoor unit).Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere when it is collected. 2) Repair the leak. 3) Repair the leak, and evacuate the air from the entire system *1. Then, calculate the proper amount of refrigerant to be added (outdoor unit + extension pipe + indoor unit), and charge the system with that amount. For details, refer to the following page(s). [6-9-3 The Amount of Refrigerant to Be Added](page 162) *1. For details, refer to the following page(s). [1-3-3 Vacuum Drying](page 12)

    Page 324

    [8-15 Compressor Replacement Instructions ]

  • 313 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-15 Compressor Replacement Instructions

    Follow the procedures below (Steps 1 through 5) to remove the compressor components and replace the compressor. Reassemble them in the reverse order after replacing the compressor.

  • Remove both the top and bottom service panels
  • (front panels).
  • Remove the wires that are secured to the frame,
  • and remove the frame. Electric wiring Frame Service panel Control box Compressor cover (front)
  • Remove the control box and the compressor
  • cover (front).

    Page 325

    [8-15 Compressor Replacement Instructions ]

  • 314 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Remove the compressor cover (top, left, and right), the compressor wires. When brazing the pipes, make sure that the acoustic insulation in the compressor cover and the thermal insulation on the compressor’s suction pilpe are not damaged. Remove the fixing gasket, the gasket, the mounting plate, and the mounting support metal. Then, replace the compressor after debrazing the discharge pipe, the suction pipe, and the injection pipe. 4 5 Compressor covers (top) (The inside of the compressor cover is lined with sound insulation material.) Suction piping Discharge pipe Compressor covers (right) (The inside of the compressor cover is lined with sound insulation material.) Compressor covers (left) (The inside of the compressor cover is lined with sound insulation material.) Injection port Fixing gasket Mounting support metal Terminal block box Mounting plate Gasket

    Page 326

    [8-16 Solenoid Valve Block and Check Valve Replacement Instructions ]

  • 315 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-16 Solenoid Valve Block and Check Valve Replacement Instructions 1.Applicable models

    䊶Pury-Hp72,96Tkmu-A-H(-Bs)

    䊶Pury-Hp72,96Ykmu-A(-Bs)

    2.Parts to be serviced, Set-content Following instructions are applicable to 1-4 service parts on the table below. Numbers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.Procedures *Precautions for starting replacement 䊶Check that the main power supply is OFF. 䊶Check that no refrigerant is in the outdoor unit. Remove each part according to the 1)-3) procedures on the figure above right before replacing service parts. Mount the removed parts back in place in a reversed procedure of 1)-3) on the figure above right after replacing service parts. (1) Solenoid valve block ASSY (SV4a, SV4b, SV4d) replacement procedures 䃂To remove Solenoid valve block ASSY 㽲Remove the solenoid valve block coil cover, solenoid valve coil, and peripheral cables. 㽳Remove the screw (M5) that fixes the supporting plate for solenoid valve block and the unit base. 㽴Debraze A-G parts (total 7 places). 㽵Do not damage heat exchanger fins and peripheral piping devices when removing the Solenoid valve block ASSY. 㽶Remove the screw (M5) that fixes the solenoid valve block and the supporting plate for solenoid valve block. 䃂To install Solenoid valve block ASSY 㽷Fix the Solenoid valve block ASSY and the supporting plate with the fixing screw (M5). 㽸Mount the Solenoid valve block ASSY replacement to the unit with care not to damage heat exchanger fins and peripheral piping devices. Fix the supporting plate for solenoid valve block and the unit base with the fixing screw (M5). 㽹Braze A-G parts (total 7 places). 㽺Mount the solenoid valve block coil cover, solenoid valve coil, and peripheral cables back in place. Things required for replacing

    No.

    e d o

    C

    m e tI Parts to be serviced Solenoid valve block service parts set 䇭䇭䇭䇼Set-content䇽 1 Solenoid valve block ASSY (SV4a, SV4b, SV4d)

    Kb00S879G20

    Wt07188X01

    Kb00V126G01

    䇭䇭䇭䊶Replacement instructions 䇭䇭䊶Solenoid valve block ASSY

    P633133X01

    Kb00S879G15

    Service parts replacement instructions Service parts replacement instructions 䇭䇭䇭䊶Check valve 䇭䇭䇭䇼Set-content䇽

    Kb00S879G14

    P639183X01

    Wt06632X01

    Wt06632X01

    Check valve (CV4a, CV8a) 䇭䇭䇭䊶Replacement instructions 3 Check valve (CV6a) 2 䇭䇭䊶Check valve 䇭䇭䇭䇼Set-content䇽 䇭䇭䇭䊶Replacement instructions 4 Check valve (CV9a) Service parts replacement instructions

    Kb00S879G16

    䇭䇭䇭䇼Set-content䇽 䇭䇭䇭䊶Replacement instructions

    Wt06632X01

    䇭䇭䇭䊶Check valve

    P639180X01

    䇭* Precautions for replacing Solenoid valve block ASSY 䇭䊶Be sure to perform no-oxidation brazing when brazing. 䇭䊶Place a wet towel on the solenoid valve block when heating pipes to keep the temperature of the valve from exceeding 120ºC. 䇭䊶After brazing, check the condition around the brazing. After confirming no leakage, evacuate the air inside. 䇭䊶Perform brazing with care of the flame direction so that it does not burn cables and plates etc. in the unit. 䇭䊶Remove the brazing part protecting heat exchanger fins from burning, and replace the service parts.
  • Following instructions show procedures for replacing service parts for Solenoid valve block ASSY (SV4a, SV4b,
  • SV4d), Check valve (CV4a, CV6a, CV8a, CV9a). Replace them properly according to the procedures. R410A CITY MULTI H2i R2 Solenoid valve block ASSY (SV4a, SV4b, SV4d), Check valve (CV4a, CV6a, CV8a, CV9a) replacement instructions

    Page 327

    [8-16 Solenoid Valve Block and Check Valve Replacement Instructions ]

  • 316 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 1 9

    E

    (ø15.88) Coil cover, Solenoid valve coil (SV4a,SV4b,SV4d)

    B

    (ø19.05)

    D

    (ø15.88)

    A

    (ø19.05) Heat exchanger Removing or installing solenoid valve block 1) Remove the upper and lower service panels (Panel FU and FB). 3) Remove the cable that is fixed to the Frame M ASSY and remove the Frame M ASSY. 2) Remove the control box and the partition plate. 4) Remove the relay box Screw (M5) Supporting plate for solenoid valve block Solenoid valve block 2 7 Removed Solenoid valve block ASSY Removing or fixing the Supporting plate for solenoid valve block Removing Solenoid valve block ASSY Brazing or debrazing pipes *This figure does not show heat exchanger. C (ø12.7) F (ø28.6)

    F

    B

    E

    D

    C

    A

    G(ø12.7) Screw (M5) Supporting plate for solenoid valve block Solenoid valve block 5 6 4 3 8
  • Refer to the next page for Check valve (CV4a, CV6a, CV8a, CV9a) replacement procedures.
  • Page 328

    [8-16 Solenoid Valve Block and Check Valve Replacement Instructions ]

  • 317 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 4 (2) Check valve (CV4a, CV6a, CV8a, CV9a) replacement procedures Remove the Solenoid valve block ASSY following "(1) Solenoid valve block ASSY (SV4a, SV4b, SV4d) replacement procedures" on the front page. Debraze G-J parts (total 4 places), and remove the Check valve ASSY. Replace the Check valve (CV4a, CV6a, CV8a, CV9a) to be serviced while it is removed from the unit. Braze the pipes as they were according to the angle of the pipes on the figure below right (Figure as viewed from point K). Mount the Solenoid valve block ASSY, coil cover, and peripheral cables back in place according to "(1) Solenoid valve block ASSY (SV4a, SV4b, SV4d) replacement procedures" on the front page.

    J

    (ø15.88)

    I

    (ø19.05)
  • Precautions for replacing Check valve
  • Be sure to perform no-oxidation brazing when brazing.
  • Place a wet towel on the Check valve when heating pipes to keep the temperature of the valve from exceeding 120ºC.
  • After brazing, check the condition around the brazing. After confirming no leakage, evacuate the air inside.
  • Perform carefully with the flame direction so that it does not burn cables and plates etc. in the unit.
  • Remove the brazing part protecting heat exchanger fins not to be burn, and replace the service parts.
  • After removing Solenoid valve block ASSY
  • Part A (Refer to the next page.)

    Page 329

    [8-16 Solenoid Valve Block and Check Valve Replacement Instructions ]

  • 318 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    6 4 Detailed View of Part A Check valve replacement When replacing CV4a: Remove the brazing 1. When replacing CV6a: Remove the brazing 2. When replacing CV8a: Remove the brazing 3 and 4. When replacing CV9a: Remove the brazing 5 and 6. Angle of the pipes when replacing CV8a, CV9a (Figure as viewed from point K)

    I

    J

    CV4a CV8a CV9a CV6a 5 ( ( ø22.2) 6 ø22.2) 3 (ø28.6) 4 (ø28.6) 1 (ø28.6) 2 (ø15.88)

    G

    H

    Check valve ASSY

    K

    Brazing or debrazing pipes *This figure does not show heat exchanger.

    G

    (ø28.6)

    H

    (ø15.88) 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3

    Page 330

    [8-17 BC Controller Maintenance Instructions ]

  • 319 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms 8-17 BC Controller Maintenance Instructions
  • Service panel
  • Control box
  • *Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts. Work procedure Explanatory figure 1) Remove the two lock nuts on the control box, loosen the other two, and remove the control box. 2) Remove the three fixing screws on the service panel, and remove the service panel. 3) Remove the nine machine screws on the ceiling panel, and remove the ceiling panel. Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) To check the inside of the control box, remove the two lock nuts on the control box cover. 1) Check the terminal connection of the power wire or of the transmission line. 2) Check the transformer. 3) Check the address switch. (2) When the control board is replaced, the followings must be noted. (1) Check that the board type is G,GA (HA), or GB (HB). (2) Check that the wire and the connector are properly con- nected. It is not required to remove the two fixing screws on the control box when checking the inside.

    Cmb-1016Nu-G, Ga, Ha

    Loosen Service panel Control Box Ceiling panel

    Page 331

    [8-17 BC Controller Maintenance Instructions ]

  • 320 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

  • Thermistor (liquid pipe/gas pipe temperature detection)
  • Pressure sensor
  • *Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts. Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) Remove the service panel. 1) For TH11, TH12, and TH15, refer to 1. 1), 2). 2) For TH16, refer to 1. 1), 2), 3). (GA type only) (2) Remove the lead wire of the piping sensor from the control board.

    1) Th11,Th12 (Cn10)

    2) Th15,Th16 (Cn11)

    (3) Pull out the temperature sensor from the tempera- ture sensor housing, and replace the temperature sensor with the new one. (4) Connect the lead wire of the temperature sensor se- curely on the control board.

    Cmb-1016Nu-Ga

    Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) Remove the service panel. 1) For the pressure sensors PS1 and PS3, refer to 1. 1), 2). (2) Remove the pressure sensor connector in trouble from the control board, and insulate the connector. 1) Liquid-side pressure sensor (CNP1) 2) Intermediate-part pressure sensor (CNP3) (3) Attach a new pressure sensor to the place which is shown in the figure, and insert the connector to the control board. When gas leaks from the pressure sensor, repair the leak, and follow the instructions above if required.

    Th15

    Th12

    Th16

    Th11

    Svm1

    Ps1

    Ps3

    Page 332

    [8-17 BC Controller Maintenance Instructions ]

  • 321 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8 Troubleshooting Based on Observed Symptoms

    5. Lev

  • Solenoid valve
  • Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) Remove the service panel. (See figure at right.) (2) Replace the LEV in trouble. Secure enough service space in the ceiling for welding operation, and conduct the work carefully.If required, dismount the unit from the ceiling, and conduct the work. *Special care must be taken when replacing heavy parts. Work procedure Explanatory figure (1) Remove the service panel. (See figure at right.) (2) Remove the connector of the solenoid valve in trou- ble. (3) Remove the solenoid valve coil. 1) The coils on the solenoid valves SVA, SVB, SVM1, SVM1b, SVM2, and SVM2b can be serviced through the inspection door. SVC is accessible for replacement by removing the four mounting screws on the rear panel and removing the panel (if enough space is available on the back). (SVM1 is present only on the G, GA, and HA types, SVM2 on the GA and HA types, and SVM1b and SVM2b on the HA type.)

    Cmb-1016Nu-G

    Cmb-1016Nu-Ga

    Lev3

    Lev1

    Lev2

    Svm2

    SVM2b Double-pipe heat exchanger Solenoid valve

    Page 333

    [8-18 Troubleshooting Problems Using the LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit ]

  • 322 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    8-18 Troubleshooting Problems Using the LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit If the LED error display appear as follows while all the SW4 switches and SW6-10 are set to OFF, check the items under the ap- plicable item numbers below.
  • Error code appears on the LED display.
  • Refer to the following page(s). [7-1 Error Code and Preliminary Error Code Lists](page 175)
  • LED is blank.
  • Take the following troubleshooting steps. (1) Refer to the section on troubleshooting the transmission power supply circuit, if the voltage across pins 1 through 3 of CNDC on the control panel is outside the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC. [8-12-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 308) [8-13-2 Troubleshooting Problems with Outdoor Unit Transmission Power Supply Circuit](page 310) (2) If the LED error display becomes lit when the power is turned on with all the connectors on the control board except CNDC disconnected, there is a problem with the wiring to those connectors or with the connectors themselves. (3) If nothing appears on the display under item (2) above AND the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC is within the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC, control board failure is suspected.
  • Only the software version appears on the LED display.
  • (1) Only the software version appears while the transmission cables to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected. 1) Wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board.(CN62, CNPS, CNIT, CNS2, CN102) 2) If item 1) checks out OK, the transmission line power supply board failure is suspected. 3) If items 1) and 2) check out OK, control board failure is suspected. (2) If the LED shows the same display as the initial display upon disconnection of transmission lines (TB3, TB7), there is a problem with the transmission lines or with the connected devices. [9-1-2 Initial LED Display](page 326)

    Page 334

  • 323 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Chapter 9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 9-1 LED Status Indicators....................................................................................................................... 325 9-1-1 How to Read the LED ......................................................................................................................... 325 9-1-2 Initial LED Display............................................................................................................................... 326 9-1-3 Clock Memory Function ...................................................................................................................... 327 9-2 LED Status Indicators Table ............................................................................................................ 328

    Page 335

  • 324 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    Page 336

    [9-1 LED Status Indicators ]

  • 325 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 9-1 LED Status Indicators 9-1-1 How to Read the LED By setting the DIP SW 4-1 through 4-10 (Set SW6-10 to OFF.)(Switch number 10 is represented by 0), the operating condition of the unit can be monitored on the service monitor. (Refer to the table on the following pages for DIP SW settings.) The service monitor uses 4-digit 7-segment LED to display numerical values and other types of information. Pressure and temperature are examples of numerical values, and operating conditions and the on-off status of solenoid valve are examples of flag display. ŒSW4-10 is set to "0" on the LED Status Indicators Table. ŒIn the example above, 1 through 9 are set to OFF, and 10 is set to ON. 1) Display of numerical values Example: When the pressure data sensor reads 18.8kg/cm2 (Item No. 58) ŒThe unit of pressure is in kg/cm2 Œ Use the following conversion formula to convert the displayed value into a value in SI unit. Value in SI unit (MPa) = Displayed value (kg/cm2) x 0.098 2) Flag display Example: When 21S4a and SV1a are ON. (Item No. 3) Example: 3-minutes restart mode (Item No. 14)

    Sw4

    On

    1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

    7Seg Led

    Ld1 Ld2 Ld3 Ld4 Ld5 Ld6 Ld7 Ld8

    Upper Lower

    Ld1 Ld2 Ld3 Ld4 Ld5 Ld6 Ld7 Ld8

    Page 337

    [9-1 LED Status Indicators ]

  • 326 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    9-1-2 Initial LED Display From power on until the completion of initial settings, the following information will be displayed on the monitor screen. (Displays No. 1 through No. 4 in order repeatedly.) After the initial settings have been completed, the information on these items can be checked by making the switch setting that corresponds to No. 517 in the LED display table. Only item No. 1 "Software Version" appears on the display if there is a wiring failure between the control board and the trans- mission line power supply board or if the circuit board has failed. No Item Display Remarks 1 Software version [0103] : Version 1.03 2 Refrigerant type

    [ 410] : R410A

    3 Model and capacity [H-20] : Cooling/Heating 20 HP For the first few minutes after power on, the capacity of each outdoor unit is displayed. Thereafter, the com- bined capacity is displayed. 4 Communication address [ 51] : Address 51

    Page 338

    [9-1 LED Status Indicators ]

  • 327 -
  • Hwe13080

    Gb

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 9-1-3 Clock Memory Function The outdoor unit has a simple clock function that enables the unit to calculate the current time with an internal timer by receiv- ing the time set by the system controller, such as AG-150A. If an error (including a preliminary error) occurs, the error history data and the error detection time are stored into the service memory. The error detection time stored in the service memory and the current time can be seen on the service LED. 1) Use the time displayed on the service LED as a reference. 2) The date and the time are set to "00" by default. If a system controller that sets the time, such as AG-150A is not connected, the elapsed time and days since the first power on will be displayed. If the time set on a system controller is received, the count will start from the set date and the time. 3) The time is not updated while the power of the indoor unit is turned off. When the power is turned off and then on again, the count will resume from the time before the power was turned off. Thus, the time that differs the actual time will be displayed. (This also applies when a power failure occurs.) The system controller, such as AG-150A, adjusts the time once a day. When the system controller is connected, the time will be automatically updated to the correct current time after the time set by the system controller is received. (The data stored into the memory before the set time is received will not be updated.) (1) Reading the time data: 1) Time display Example: 12 past 9 2) Date display ŒWhen the main controller that can set the time is connected Example: May 10, 2003 ŒWhen the main controller that can set the time is not connected Example: 52 days after power was turned on
  • Disappears if the time data is deviated due to a power failure, or if a
  • system controller that sets the time is not connected. Alternate display Alternate display of year and month, and date
  • Appears between the year and the month, and nothing appears
  • when the date is displayed. Alternate display Day count

  • Appears between the year and the month, and nothing
  • appears when the date is displayed.

    Page 339

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 328 -
  • Hwe13080

    10LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 9-2 LED Status Indicators Table Current data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    0 0000000000 Relay output display 1 Lighting Comp in op- eration

    72C

    Oc

    CPU in oper- ation

    A

    A

    Check (error) display 1 OC/OS error 0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

    B

    B

    1 1000000000 Check (error) display 2 OC/OS error 0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

    A

    A

    Display of the latest pre- liminary error If no preliminary errors are detected, "----" ap- pears on the display. 2 0100000000 Check (error) display 3 (Including IC and BC) 0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

    B

    If no errors are detected, "----" appears on the dis- play. 3 1100000000 Relay out- put display 2 Top 21S4a

    Sv10

    SV1a

    Sv11

    A

    A

    Bottom SV5b 4 0010000000 Relay out- put display 3 Top SV4a SV4b SV4d

    Sv9

    Power sup- ply for indoor transmis- sion line

    A

    A

    Bottom 7 1110000000 Special control Retry opera- tion Emergency operation Communica- tion error be- tween the OC and OS Communica- tion error 3-minute re- start delay mode

    B

    B

    9 1001000000 Communication de- mand capacity 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    If not demanded con- trolled, "----" [ % ] ap- pears on the display. 10 0101000000 Contact point demand capacity 0000 to 9999

    B

    If not demanded con- trolled, "----" [ % ] ap- pears on the display. *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 340

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 329 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 11 1101000000 External signal (Open input contact point) Contact point de- mand Low-noise mode (Capacity priority ) Snow sensor

    A

    A

    12 0011000000 External signal (Open input contact point) Low-noise mode (Quiet priori- ty)

    A

    A

    13 1011000000 14 0111000000 Outdoor unit operation status BC opera- tion signal Warm-up mode 3-minutes restart mode Compressor in operation Preliminary error Error 3-minutes restart after instanta- neous power failure Preliminary low pres- sure error

    A

    A

    15 1111000000 OC/OS identification

    Oc/Os

    A

    A

    16 0000100000 Indoor unit check Top Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8

    B

    The lamp that corre- sponds to the unit that came to an abnormal stop lights. The lamp goes off when the error is reset. Each unit that comes to an abnormal unit will be given a sequential num- ber in ascending order starting with 1. Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 16 17 1000100000 Top Unit No. 17 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 24 Bottom Unit No. 25 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 32 18 0100100000 Top Unit No. 33 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 40 Bottom Unit No. 41 Unit No. 42 Unit No.43 Unit No. 44 Unit No. 45 Unit No. 46 Unit No. 47 Unit No. 48 19 1100100000 Top Unit No. 49 Unit No. 50 Bottom 20 0010100000 Indoor unit Operation mode Top Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8

    B

    Lit during cooling Blinking during heating Unlit while the unit is stopped or in the fan mode Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 16 21 1010100000 Top Unit No. 17 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 24 Bottom Unit No. 25 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 32 22 0110100000 Top Unit No. 33 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 40 Bottom Unit No. 41 Unit No. 42 Unit No.43 Unit No. 44 Unit No. 45 Unit No. 46 Unit No. 47 Unit No. 48 23 1110100000 Top Unit No. 49 Unit No. 50 Bottom Current data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 341

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 330 -
  • Hwe13080

    24 0001100000 Indoor unit thermo- stat Top Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2 Unit No. 3 Unit No. 4 Unit No. 5 Unit No. 6 Unit No. 7 Unit No. 8

    B

    Lit when thermostat is on Unlit when thermostat is off Bottom Unit No. 9 Unit No. 10 Unit No. 11 Unit No. 12 Unit No. 13 Unit No. 14 Unit No. 15 Unit No. 16 25 1001100000 Top Unit No. 17 Unit No. 18 Unit No. 19 Unit No. 20 Unit No. 21 Unit No. 22 Unit No. 23 Unit No. 24 Bottom Unit No. 25 Unit No. 26 Unit No. 27 Unit No. 28 Unit No. 29 Unit No. 30 Unit No. 31 Unit No. 32 26 0101100000 Top Unit No. 33 Unit No. 34 Unit No. 35 Unit No. 36 Unit No. 37 Unit No. 38 Unit No. 39 Unit No. 40 Bottom Unit No. 41 Unit No. 42 Unit No.43 Unit No. 44 Unit No. 45 Unit No. 46 Unit No. 47 Unit No. 48 27 1101100000 Top Unit No. 49 Unit No. 50 Bottom 37 1010010000 BC operation mode Cooling-only

    On

    Cooling-only

    Off

    Heating-only

    On

    Heating-only

    Off

    Mixed-mode

    On

    Mixed-mode

    Off

    Fan Stop

    B

    39 1110010000 Outdoor unit Operation mode Permissible stop Standby Cooling Cooling- main Heating Heating- main

    A

    A

    42 0101010000 Outdoor unit control mode Stop Thermo OFF Abnormal stop Scheduled control Initial start up Defrost Oil balance Low fre- quency oil recovery

    A

    A

    43 1101010000 Warm-up mode Refrigerant recovery ON-defrost 2 ON-defrost 1

    A

    A

    45 1011010000

    Th4

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [°C] 47 1111010000

    Th7

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    48 0000110000

    Th6

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    50 0100110000

    Th5

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    54 0110110000

    Th9

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    56 0001110000

    Thhs1

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [°C] 58 0101110000 High-pressure sensor data -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [kgf/cm2] 59 1101110000 Low-pressure sensor data -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    63 1111110000

    Th11

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    78 0111001000 Qj 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    79 1111001000 Qjc 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    Current data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 342

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 331 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 80 0000101000 Qjh 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    81 1000101000 Target Tc -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 82 0100101000 Target Te -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    83 1100101000 Tc -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    84 0010101000 Te -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    86 0110101000 Total frequencies

    (Oc+Os)

    0000 to 9999

    B

    Control data [ Hz ] 87 1110101000 Total frequency of each unit 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    88 0001101000 COMP frequency 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    91 1101101000 COMP operating fre- quency 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    The unit is [rps]Output frequency of the inverter depends on the type of compressor and equals the integer multiples (x1, x2 etc.) of the operating frequency of the com- pressor. 92 0011101000 Number of times error occurred during crank- case heating by com- pressor motor 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    Number of times INV er- ror occurred during IH crankcase heating by compressor motor 93 1011101000 All AK (OC+OS) 0000 to 9999

    B

    94 0111101000

    Ak

    0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    95 1111101000

    Fan1

    0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    Fan output [ % ] 96 0000011000 Fan inverter output rpm

    (Fan1)

    0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    [rpm] 101 1010011000 LEV5a 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    105 1001011000

    Lev4

    0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    108 0011011000 COMP operating cur- rent (DC) 00.0 to 999.9

    A

    A

    Peak value[A] 111 1111011000 COMP bus voltage 00.0 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is

    [ V ]

    Current data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 343

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 332 -
  • Hwe13080

    116 0010111000 Number of times the unit went into the mode to remedy wet vapor suction 0000 to 9999

    B

    117 1010111000 COMP Operation time Upper 4 digits 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    The unit is [ h ] 118 0110111000 COMP Operation time Lower 4 digits 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    121 1001111000 Backup mode Abnormal pressure rise High-pres- sure drop Low-pres- sure drop Abnormal Td rise High-pres- sure during defrost cycle Control box temperature rise

    A

    A

    Stays lit for 90 seconds after the completion of backup control 123 1101111000 COMP number of start- stop events Upper 4 digits 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    Count-up at start-up The unit is [Time] 124 0011111000 COMP number of start- stop events Lower 4 digits 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    129 1000000100 Integrated operation time of compressor (for rotation purpose) 0000 to 9999

    B

    The unit is [ h ] 132 0010000100 Relay out- put display BC(Main) Top

    Svm1

    Svm2

    SVM1b SVM2b

    B

    Bottom 133 1010000100 Top

    Sva1

    Svb1

    Svc1

    Sva2

    Svb2

    Svc2

    B

    Bottom

    Sva3

    Svb3

    Svc3

    Sva4

    Svb4

    Svc4

    134 0110000100 Top

    Sva5

    Svb5

    Svc5

    Sva6

    Svb6

    Svc6

    B

    Bottom

    Sva7

    Svb7

    Svc7

    Sva8

    Svb8

    Svc8

    135 1110000100 Top

    Sva9

    Svb9

    Svc9

    Sva10

    Svb10

    Svc10

    B

    Bottom

    Sva11

    Svb11

    Svc11

    Sva12

    Svb12

    Svc12

    136 0001000100 Top

    Sva13

    Svb13

    Svc13

    Sva14

    Svb14

    Svc14

    B

    Bottom

    Sva15

    Svb15

    Svc15

    Sva16

    Svb16

    Svc16

    Current data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 344

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 333 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 138 0101000100 Relay out- put display BC(Sub1) Top

    Sva1

    Svb1

    Svc1

    Sva2

    Svb2

    Svc2

    B

    Bottom

    Sva3

    Svb3

    Svc3

    Sva4

    Svb4

    Svc4

    139 1101000100 Top

    Sva5

    Svb5

    Svc5

    Sva6

    Svb6

    Svc6

    B

    Bottom

    Sva7

    Svb7

    Svc7

    Sva8

    Svb8

    Svc8

    140 0011000100 Top

    Sva9

    Svb9

    Svc9

    Sva10

    Svb10

    Svc10

    B

    Bottom

    Sva11

    Svb11

    Svc11

    Sva12

    Svb12

    Svc12

    141 1011000100 Top

    Sva13

    Svb13

    Svc13

    Sva14

    Svb14

    Svc14

    B

    Bottom

    Sva15

    Svb15

    Svc15

    Sva16

    Svb16

    Svc16

    143 1111000100 Relay out- put display BC(Sub2) Top

    Sva1

    Svb1

    Svc1

    Sva2

    Svb2

    Svc2

    B

    Bottom

    Sva3

    Svb3

    Svc3

    Sva4

    Svb4

    Svc4

    144 0000100100 Top

    Sva5

    Svb5

    Svc5

    Sva6

    Svb6

    Svc6

    B

    Bottom

    Sva7

    Svb7

    Svc7

    Sva8

    Svb8

    Svc8

    145 1000100100 Top

    Sva9

    Svb9

    Svc9

    Sva10

    Svb10

    Svc10

    B

    Bottom

    Sva11

    Svb11

    Svc11

    Sva12

    Svb12

    Svc12

    146 0100100100 Top

    Sva13

    Svb13

    Svc13

    Sva14

    Svb14

    Svc14

    B

    Bottom

    Sva15

    Svb15

    Svc15

    Sva16

    Svb16

    Svc16

    149 1010100100 BC(Main or standard)

    Th11

    -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    150 0110100100 BC(Main)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    151 1110100100 BC(Main)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    152 0001100100 BC(Main)TH16 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    153 1001100100 BC(Main)63HS1 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    154 0101100100 BC(Main)63HS3 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    155 1101100100 BC(Main)SC11 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    156 0011100100 BC(Main)SH12 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    157 1011100100 BC(Main)SH13 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    158 0111100100 BC(Main)SC16 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    Current data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 345

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 334 -
  • Hwe13080

    159 1111100100 BC(Main)LEV1 0000 to 2000

    B

    LEV1 opening (Fully open:2000) 160 0000010100 BC(Main)LEV3 0000 to 2000

    B

    LEV3 opening (Fully open:2000) 161 1000010100 BC(Sub1)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    162 0100010100 BC(Sub1)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    163 1100010100 BC(Sub1)LEV3 0000 to 2000

    B

    LEV3 opening (Fully open:2000) 164 0010010100 BC(Sub2)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    165 1010010100 BC(Sub2)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    166 0110010100 BC(Sub2)LEV3 0000 to 2000

    B

    LEV3a opening (Fully open:2000) 167 1110010100 BC(Main)LEV2 0000 to 2000

    B

    LEV2 opening (Fully open:2000) Current data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 346

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 335 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 178 0100110100 Error history 1 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    Address and error codes highlighted If no errors are detected, "---- " appears on the dis- play. Preliminary error informa- tion of the OS does not appear on the OC. Neither preliminary error information of the OC nor error information of the IC appears on the OS. 179 1100110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    180 0010110100 Error history 2 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    181 1010110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    182 0110110100 Error history 3 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    183 1110110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    184 0001110100 Error history 4 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    185 1001110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    186 0101110100 Error history 5 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    187 1101110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    188 0011110100 Error history 6 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    189 1011110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    190 0111110100 Error history 7 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    191 1111110100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    192 0000001100 Error history 8 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    193 1000001100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    194 0100001100 Error history 9 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    195 1100001100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    196 0010001100 Error history 10 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    197 1010001100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    198 0110001100 Error history of inverter (At the time of last data backup before error) 0000 to 9999

    B

    B

    199 1110001100 Error details of inverter Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

    A

    A

    Current data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 347

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 336 -
  • Hwe13080

    Data before error No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    201 1001001100 Outdoor unit operation status BC opera- tion signal Warm-up mode 3-minutes restart mode Compressor in operation Preliminary error Error 3-minutes restart after instanta- neous power failure Preliminary low pres- sure error

    A

    A

    202 0101001100 OC/OS identification

    Oc/Os

    A

    A

    203 1101001100 BC operation mode Cooling-only

    On

    Cooling-only

    Off

    Heating-only

    On

    Heating-only

    Off

    Mixed-mode

    On

    Mixed-mode

    Off

    Fan Stop

    A

    A

    205 1011001100 Outdoor unit Operation mode Permissible stop Standby Cooling Cooling- main Heating Heating- main

    A

    A

    208 0000101100 Outdoor unit control mode Stop Thermo OFF Abnormal stop Scheduled control Initial start up Defrost Oil balance Low fre- quency oil recovery

    A

    A

    209 1000101100 Warm-up mode Refrigerant recovery ON-defrost 2 ON-defrost 1

    A

    A

    211 1100101100 Relay output display 1 Lighting Comp in op- eration

    72C

    Oc

    Always lit

    A

    A

    212 0010101100 Relay out- put display 2 Lighting Top 21S4a

    Sv10

    SV1a

    Sv11

    A

    A

    Bottom SV5b 213 1010101100 Relay out- put display 3 Lighting Top SV4a SV4b SV4d

    Sv9

    Lit while power to the indoor units is being sup- plied

    A

    A

    Bottom 216 0001101100

    Th4

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [°C] 218 0101101100

    Th7

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    219 1101101100

    Th6

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    221 1011101100

    Th5

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    225 1000011100

    Th9

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    227 1100011100

    Thhs1

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 348

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 337 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 229 1010011100 High-pressure sensor data -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [kgf/cm2] 230 0110011100 Low-pressure sensor data -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    234 0101011100

    Th11

    -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    249 1001111100 Qj 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    250 0101111100 Qjc 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    251 1101111100 Qjh 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    252 0011111100 Target Tc -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 253 1011111100 Target Te -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    254 0111111100 Tc -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [°C] 255 1111111100 Te -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    257 1000000010 Total frequencies

    (Oc+Os)

    0000 to 9999

    B

    Control data [ Hz ] 258 0100000010 Total frequency of each unit 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    259 1100000010 COMP frequency 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    264 0001000010 All AK (OC+OS) 0000 to 9999

    B

    265 1001000010

    Ak

    0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    266 0101000010

    Fan1

    0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    Fan inverter output [ % ] 267 1101000010 Fan inverter output rpm

    (Fan1)

    0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    [rpm] 272 0000100010 LEV5a 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    276 0010100010

    Lev4

    0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    279 1110100010 COMP operating cur- rent (DC) 00.0 to 999.9

    A

    A

    Peak value[A] 282 0101100010 COMP bus voltage 00.0 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [ V ] 288 0000010010 COMP Operation time Upper 4 digits 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    The unit is [ h ] 289 1000010010 COMP Operation time Lower 4 digits 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    Data before error No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 349

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 338 -
  • Hwe13080

    294 0110010010 COMP number of start- stop events Upper 4 digits 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    Count-up at start-up The unit is [Time] 295 1110010010 COMP number of start- stop events Lower 4 digits 0000 to 9999

    A

    A

    300 0011010010 Integrated operation time of compressor (for rotation purpose) 0000 to 9999

    B

    The unit is [ h ] Data before error No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 350

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 339 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Data before error No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)*1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    301 1011010010 Power supply unit OC/OS <-> Address

    B

    302 0111010010 Start-up unit OC/OS <-> Address

    B

    320 0000001010 BC(Main)TH11 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    321 1000001010 BC(Main)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    322 0100001010 BC(Main)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    323 1100001010 BC(Main)TH16 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    324 0010001010 BC(Main)PS1 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    325 1010001010 BC(Main)PS3 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    330 0101001010 BC(Main)LEV1 0000 to 2000

    B

    331 1101001010 BC(Main)LEV3 0000 to 2000

    B

    332 0011001010 BC(Sub1)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    333 1011001010 BC(Sub1)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    334 0111001010 BC(Sub1)LEV3 0000 to 2000

    B

    335 1111001010 BC(Sub2)TH12 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    336 0000101010 BC(Sub2)TH15 -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    337 1000101010 BC(Sub2)LEV3 0000 to 2000

    B

    338 0100101010 BC(Main)LEV2 0000 to 2000

    B

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 351

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 340 -
  • Hwe13080

    Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    351 1111101010 IC1 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

    B

    Displayed alternately ev- ery 5 seconds 352 0000011010 IC2 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 353 1000011010 IC3 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 354 0100011010 IC4 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 355 1100011010 IC5 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 356 0010011010 IC6 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 357 1010011010 IC7 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 358 0110011010 IC8 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 359 1110011010 IC9 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 360 0001011010 IC10 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 361 1001011010 IC11 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 362 0101011010 IC12 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 363 1101011010 IC13 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 364 0011011010 IC14 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 365 1011011010 IC15 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 366 0111011010 IC16 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 367 1111011010 IC17 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 352

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 341 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 368 0000111010 IC18 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

    B

    Displayed alternately ev- ery 5 seconds 369 1000111010 IC19 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 370 0100111010 IC20 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 371 1100111010 IC21 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 372 0010111010 IC22 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 373 1010111010 IC23 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 374 0110111010 IC24 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 375 1110111010 IC25 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 376 0001111010 IC26 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 377 1001111010 IC27 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 378 0101111010 IC28 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 379 1101111010 IC29 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 380 0011111010 IC30 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 381 1011111010 IC31 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 382 0111111010 IC32 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 383 1111111010 IC33 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 384 0000000110 IC34 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 385 1000000110 IC35 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 386 0100000110 IC36 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 387 1100000110 IC37 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 388 0010000110 IC38 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 389 1010000110 IC39 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 390 0110000110 IC40 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 391 1110000110 IC41 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 392 0001000110 IC42 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 393 1001000110 IC43 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 394 0101000110 IC44 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 395 1101000110 IC45 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 353

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 342 -
  • Hwe13080

    396 0011000110 IC46 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999

    B

    Displayed alternately ev- ery 5 seconds 397 1011000110 IC47 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 398 0111000110 IC48 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 399 1111000110 IC49 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 400 0000100110 IC50 Address/capacity code 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 408 0001100110 IC1 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 409 1001100110 IC2 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 410 0101100110 IC3 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 411 1101100110 IC4 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 354

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 343 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 412 0011100110 IC5 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 413 1011100110 IC6 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 414 0111100110 IC7 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 415 1111100110 IC8 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 416 0000010110 IC9 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 417 1000010110 IC10 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 418 0100010110 IC11 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 419 1100010110 IC12 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 420 0010010110 IC13 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 421 1010010110 IC14 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 422 0110010110 IC15 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 423 1110010110 IC16 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 424 0001010110 IC17 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 425 1001010110 IC18 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 426 0101010110 IC19 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 427 1101010110 IC20 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 428 0011010110 IC21 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 429 1011010110 IC22 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 430 0111010110 IC23 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 431 1111010110 IC24 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 432 0000110110 IC25 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 433 1000110110 IC26 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 434 0100110110 IC27 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 435 1100110110 IC28 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 355

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 344 -
  • Hwe13080

    436 0010110110 IC29 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 437 1010110110 IC30 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 438 0110110110 IC31 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 439 1110110110 IC32 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 440 0001110110 IC33 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 441 1001110110 IC34 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 442 0101110110 IC35 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 443 1101110110 IC36 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 444 0011110110 IC37 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 445 1011110110 IC38 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 446 0111110110 IC39 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 447 1111110110 IC40 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 448 0000001110 IC41 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 449 1000001110 IC42 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 450 0100001110 IC43 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 451 1100001110 IC44 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 452 0010001110 IC45 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 453 1010001110 IC46 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 454 0110001110 IC47 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 455 1110001110 IC48 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 456 0001001110 IC49Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 457 1001001110 IC50 Suction temperature -99.9 to 999.9 458 0101001110 IC1 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 459 1101001110 IC2 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 460 0011001110 IC3 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 461 1011001110 IC4 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 462 0111001110 IC5 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 463 1111001110 IC6 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 356

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 345 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 464 0000101110 IC7 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 465 1000101110 IC8 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 466 0100101110 IC9 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 467 1100101110 IC10 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 468 0010101110 IC11 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 469 1010101110 IC12 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 470 0110101110 IC13 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 471 1110101110 IC14 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 472 0001101110 IC15 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 473 1001101110 IC16 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 474 0101101110 IC17 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 475 1101101110 IC18 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 476 0011101110 IC19 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 477 1011101110 IC20 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 478 0111101110 IC21 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 479 1111101110 IC22 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 480 0000011110 IC23 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 481 1000011110 IC24 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 482 0100011110 IC25 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 483 1100011110 IC26 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 484 0010011110 IC27 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 485 1010011110 IC28 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 486 0110011110 IC29 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 487 1110011110 IC30 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 488 0001011110 IC31 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 489 1001011110 IC32 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 490 0101011110 IC33 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 491 1101011110 IC34 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 357

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 346 -
  • Hwe13080

    492 0011011110 IC35 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 493 1011011110 IC36 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 494 0111011110 IC37 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 495 1111011110 IC38 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 496 0000111110 IC39 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 497 1000111110 IC40 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 498 0100111110 IC41 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 499 1100111110 IC42 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 500 0010111110 IC43 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 501 1010111110 IC44 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 502 0110111110 IC45 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 503 1110111110 IC46 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 504 0001111110 IC47 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 505 1001111110 IC48 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 506 0101111110 IC49 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 507 1101111110 IC50 Liquid pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 358

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 347 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Setting data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)*1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    512 0000000001 Self-address Alternate display of self address and unit model

    A

    A

    513 1000000001 IC/FU address Count-up display of number of connected units

    B

    514 0100000001 RC address Count-up display of number of connected units

    B

    515 1100000001 BC/BS/TU address Count-up display of number of connected units 516 0010000001 OS address Count-up display of number of connected units

    B

    517 1010000001 Version/Capacity S/W version → Refrigerant type → Model and capacity → Communication address

    A

    A

    518 0110000001 OC address OC address display

    B

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 359

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 348 -
  • Hwe13080

    Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    523 1101000001 IC1 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 524 0011000001 IC2 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 525 1011000001 IC3 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 526 0111000001 IC4 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 527 1111000001 IC5 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 528 0000100001 IC6 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 529 1000100001 IC7 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 530 0100100001 IC8 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 531 1100100001 IC9 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 532 0010100001 IC10 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 533 1010100001 IC11 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 534 0110100001 IC12 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 535 1110100001 IC13 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 536 0001100001 IC14 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 537 1001100001 IC15 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 538 0101100001 IC16 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 539 1101100001 IC17 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 540 0011100001 IC18 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 541 1011100001 IC19 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 542 0111100001 IC20 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 543 1111100001 IC21 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 544 0000010001 IC22 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 545 1000010001 IC23 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 546 0100010001 IC24 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 547 1100010001 IC25 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 548 0010010001 IC26 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 549 1010010001 IC27 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 360

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 349 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    550 0110010001 IC28Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [°C] 551 1110010001 IC29 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 552 0001010001 IC30 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 553 1001010001 IC31 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 554 0101010001 IC32 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 555 1101010001 IC33 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 556 0011010001 IC34 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 557 1011010001 IC35 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 558 0111010001 IC36 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 559 1111010001 IC37 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 560 0000110001 IC38 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 561 1000110001 IC39 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 562 0100110001 IC40 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 563 1100110001 IC41 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 564 0010110001 IC42 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 565 1010110001 IC43 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 566 0110110001 IC44 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 567 1110110001 IC45 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 568 0001110001 IC46 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 569 1001110001 IC47 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 570 0101110001 IC48 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 571 1101110001 IC49 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 572 0011110001 IC50 Gas pipe temperature -99.9 to 999.9 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 361

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 350 -
  • Hwe13080

    Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)*1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    573 1011110001

    Ic1Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [ °C ] 574 0111110001

    Ic2Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 575 1111110001

    Ic3Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 576 0000001001

    Ic4Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 577 1000001001

    Ic5Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 578 0100001001

    Ic6Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 579 1100001001

    Ic7Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 580 0010001001

    Ic8Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 581 1010001001

    Ic9Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 582 0110001001

    Ic10Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 583 1110001001

    Ic11Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 584 0001001001

    Ic12Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 585 1001001001

    Ic13Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 586 0101001001

    Ic14Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 587 1101001001

    Ic15Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 588 0011001001

    Ic16Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 589 1011001001

    Ic17Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 590 0111001001

    Ic18Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 591 1111001001

    Ic19Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 592 0000101001

    Ic20Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 593 1000101001

    Ic21Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 594 0100101001

    Ic22Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 595 1100101001

    Ic23Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 596 0010101001

    Ic24Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 597 1010101001

    Ic25Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 598 0110101001

    Ic26Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 599 1110101001

    Ic27Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 362

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 351 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 600 0001101001

    Ic28Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [ °C ] 601 1001101001

    Ic29Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 602 0101101001

    Ic30Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 603 1101101001

    Ic31Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 604 0011101001

    Ic32Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 605 1011101001

    Ic33Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 606 0111101001

    Ic34Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 607 1111101001

    Ic35Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 608 0000011001

    Ic36Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 609 1000011001

    Ic37Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 610 0100011001

    Ic38Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 611 1100011001

    Ic39Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 612 0010011001

    Ic40Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 613 1010011001

    Ic41Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 614 0110011001

    Ic42Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 615 1110011001

    Ic43Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 616 0001011001

    Ic44Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 617 1001011001

    Ic45Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 618 0101011001

    Ic46Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 619 1101011001

    Ic47Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 620 0011011001

    Ic48Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 621 1011011001

    Ic49Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 622 0111011001

    Ic50Sh

    -99.9 to 999.9 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)*1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 363

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 352 -
  • Hwe13080

    Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)*1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    623 1111011001

    Ic1Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [ °C ] 624 0000111001

    Ic2Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 625 1000111001

    Ic3Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 626 0100111001

    Ic4Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 627 1100111001

    Ic5Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 628 0010111001

    Ic6Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 629 1010111001

    Ic7Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 630 0110111001

    Ic8Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 631 1110111001

    Ic9Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 632 0001111001

    Ic10Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 633 1001111001

    Ic11Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 634 0101111001

    Ic12Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 635 1101111001

    Ic13Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 636 0011111001

    Ic14Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 637 1011111001

    Ic15Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 638 0111111001

    Ic16Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 639 1111111001

    Ic17Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 640 0000000101

    Ic18Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 641 1000000101

    Ic19Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 642 0100000101

    Ic20Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 643 1100000101

    Ic21Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 644 0010000101

    Ic22Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 645 1010000101

    Ic23Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 646 0110000101

    Ic24Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 647 1110000101

    Ic25Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 648 0001000101

    Ic26Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 649 1001000101

    Ic27Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 364

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 353 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 650 0101000101

    Ic28Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9

    B

    The unit is [ °C ] 651 1101000101

    Ic29Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 652 0011000101

    Ic30Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 653 1011000101

    Ic31Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 654 0111000101

    Ic32Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 655 1111000101

    Ic33Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 656 0000100101

    Ic34Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 657 1000100101

    Ic35Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 658 0100100101

    Ic36Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 659 1100100101

    Ic37Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 660 0010100101

    Ic38Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 661 1010100101

    Ic39Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 662 0110100101

    Ic40Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 663 1110100101

    Ic41Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 664 0001100101

    Ic42Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 665 1001100101

    Ic43Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 666 0101100101

    Ic44Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 667 1101100101

    Ic45Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 668 0011100101

    Ic46Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 669 1011100101

    Ic47Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 670 0111100101

    Ic48Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 671 1111100101

    Ic49Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 672 0000010101

    Ic50Sc

    -99.9 to 999.9 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)*1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 365

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 354 -
  • Hwe13080

    Setting data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)* 1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    676 0010010101 INV board S/W version 0.00 to 99.99

    A

    A

    679 1110010101 Fan board (address 5) S/W version 0.00 to 99.99

    A

    A

    688 0000110101 Current time 00:00 to 23:59

    A

    A

    Hour: minute 689 1000110101 Current time -2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 690 0100110101 Time of error detection 1 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 691 1100110101 Time of error detection 1-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 692 0010110101 Time of error detection 2 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 693 1010110101 Time of error detection 2-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 694 0110110101 Time of error detection 3 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 695 1110110101 Time of error detection 3-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 696 0001110101 Time of error detection 4 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 697 1001110101 Time of error detection 4-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 698 0101110101 Time of error detection 5 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 699 1101110101 Time of error detection 5-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 700 0011110101 Time of error detection 6 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 701 1011110101 Time of error detection 6-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 366

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 355 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 702 0111110101 Time of error detection 7 00:00 to 23:59

    A

    A

    Hour: minute 703 1111110101 Time of error detection 7-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 704 0000001101 Time of error detection 8 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 705 1000001101 Time of error detection 8-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 706 0100001101 Time of error detection 9 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 707 1100001101 Time of error detection 9-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 708 0010001101 Time of error detection 10 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 709 1010001101 Time of error detection 10-2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display 710 0110001101 Time of last data backup be- fore error 00:00 to 23:59 Hour: minute 711 1110001101 Time of last data backup be- fore error -2 00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31 Year and month, and date alternate display Setting data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)* 1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 367

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 356 -
  • Hwe13080

    Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)* 1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    714 0101001101 IC1 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

    B

    Fully open: 2000 715 1101001101 IC2 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 716 0011001101 IC3 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 717 1011001101 IC4 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 718 0111001101 IC5 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 719 1111001101 IC6 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 720 0000101101 IC7 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 721 1000101101 IC8 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 722 0100101101 IC9 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 723 1100101101 IC10 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 724 0010101101 IC11 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 725 1010101101 IC12 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 726 0110101101 IC13 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 727 1110101101 IC14 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 728 0001101101 IC15 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 729 1001101101 IC16 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 730 0101101101 IC17 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 731 1101101101 IC18 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 732 0011101101 IC19 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 733 1011101101 IC20 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 734 0111101101 IC21 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 735 1111101101 IC22 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 736 0000011101 IC23 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 737 1000011101 IC24 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 738 0100011101 IC25 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 739 1100011101 IC26 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 740 0010011101 IC27 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 368

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 357 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 741 1010011101 IC28 LEV opening 0000 to 9999

    B

    Fully open: 2000 742 0110011101 IC29 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 743 1110011101 IC30 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 744 0001011101 IC31 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 745 1001011101 IC32 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 746 0101011101 IC33 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 747 1101011101 IC34 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 748 0011011101 IC35 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 749 1011011101 IC36 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 750 0111011101 IC37 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 751 1111011101 IC38 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 752 0000111101 IC39 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 753 1000111101 IC40 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 754 0100111101 IC41 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 755 1100111101 IC42 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 756 0010111101 IC43 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 757 1010111101 IC44 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 758 0110111101 IC45 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 759 1110111101 IC46 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 760 0001111101 IC47 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 761 1001111101 IC48 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 762 0101111101 IC49 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 763 1101111101 IC50 LEV opening 0000 to 9999 764 0011111101 IC1 Operation mode 0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

    B

    765 1011111101 IC2 Operation mode 766 0111111101 IC3Operation mode 767 1111111101 IC4 Operation mode 768 0000000011 IC5 Operation mode Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)* 1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 369

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 358 -
  • Hwe13080

    769 1000000011 IC6 Operation mode 0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

    B

    770 0100000011 IC7 Operation mode 771 1100000011 IC8 Operation mode 772 0010000011 IC9 Operation mode 773 1010000011 IC10 Operation mode 774 0110000011 IC11 Operation mode 775 1110000011 IC12 Operation mode 776 0001000011 IC13 Operation mode 777 1001000011 IC14 Operation mode 778 0101000011 IC15 Operation mode 779 1101000011 IC16 Operation mode 780 0011000011 IC17 Operation mode 781 1011000011 IC18 Operation mode 782 0111000011 IC19 Operation mode 783 1111000011 IC20 Operation mode 784 0000100011 IC21 Operation mode 785 1000100011 IC22 Operation mode 786 0100100011 IC23 Operation mode 787 1100100011 IC24 Operation mode 788 0010100011 IC25 Operation mode 789 1010100011 IC26 Operation mode 790 0110100011 IC27 Operation mode 791 1110100011 IC28 Operation mode 792 0001100011 IC29 Operation mode 793 1001100011 IC30 Operation mode 794 0101100011 IC31 Operation mode 795 1101100011 IC32 Operation mode 796 0011100011 IC33 Operation mode Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)* 1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 370

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 359 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 797 1011100011 IC34 Operation mode 0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

    B

    798 0111100011 IC35 Operation mode 799 1111100011 IC36 Operation mode 800 0000010011 IC37 Operation mode 801 1000010011 IC38 Operation mode 802 0100010011 IC39 Operation mode 803 1100010011 IC40 Operation mode 804 0010010011 IC41 Operation mode 805 1010010011 IC42 Operation mode 806 0110010011 IC43 Operation mode 807 1110010011 IC44 Operation mode 808 0001010011 IC45 Operation mode 809 1001010011 IC46 Operation mode 810 0101010011 IC47 Operation mode 811 1101010011 IC48 Operation mode 812 0011010011 IC49 Operation mode 813 1011010011 IC50 Operation mode 814 0111010011 IC1 filter 0000 to 9999

    B

    Hours since last mainte- nance [ h ] 815 1111010011 IC2 filter 0000 to 9999 816 0000110011 IC3 filter 0000 to 9999 817 1000110011 IC4 filter 0000 to 9999 818 0100110011 IC5 filter 0000 to 9999 819 1100110011 IC6 filter 0000 to 9999 820 0010110011 IC7 filter 0000 to 9999 821 1010110011 IC8 filter 0000 to 9999 822 0110110011 IC9 filter 0000 to 9999 823 1110110011 IC10 filter 0000 to 9999 824 0001110011 IC11 filter 0000 to 9999 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)* 1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 371

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 360 -
  • Hwe13080

    825 1001110011 IC12 filter 0000 to 9999

    B

    Hours since last mainte- nance [ h ] 826 0101110011 IC13 filter 0000 to 9999 827 1101110011 IC14 filter 0000 to 9999 828 0011110011 IC15 filter 0000 to 9999 829 1011110011 IC16 filter 0000 to 9999 830 0111110011 IC17 filter 0000 to 9999 831 1111110011 IC18 filter 0000 to 9999 832 0000001011 IC19 filter 0000 to 9999 833 1000001011 IC20 filter 0000 to 9999 834 0100001011 IC21 filter 0000 to 9999 835 1100001011 IC22 filter 0000 to 9999 836 0010001011 IC23 filter 0000 to 9999 837 1010001011 IC24 filter 0000 to 9999 838 0110001011 IC25 filter 0000 to 9999 839 1110001011 IC26 filter 0000 to 9999 840 0001001011 IC27 filter 0000 to 9999 841 1001001011 IC28 filter 0000 to 9999 842 0101001011 IC29 filter 0000 to 9999 843 1101001011 IC30 filter 0000 to 9999 844 0011001011 IC31 filter 0000 to 9999 845 1011001011 IC32 filter 0000 to 9999 846 0111001001 IC33 filter 0000 to 9999 847 1111001011 IC34 filter 0000 to 9999 848 0000101011 IC35 filter 0000 to 9999 849 1000101011 IC36 filter 0000 to 9999 850 0100101011 IC37 filter 0000 to 9999 851 1100101011 IC38 filter 0000 to 9999 852 0010101011 IC39 filter 0000 to 9999 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)* 1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 372

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 361 -
  • Hwe13080

    9 LED Status Indicators on the Outdoor Unit Circuit Board 853 1010101011 IC40 filter 0000 to 9999

    B

    Hours since last mainte- nance [ h ] 854 0110101011 IC41 filter 0000 to 9999 855 1110101011 IC42 filter 0000 to 9999 856 0001101011 IC43 filter 0000 to 9999 857 1001101011 IC44 filter 0000 to 9999 858 0101101011 IC45 filter 0000 to 9999 859 1101101011 IC46 filter 0000 to 9999 860 0011101011 IC47 filter 0000 to 9999 861 1011101011 IC48 filter 0000 to 9999 862 0111101011 IC49 filter 0000 to 9999 863 1111101011 IC50 filter 0000 to 9999 Data on indoor unit system No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B)* 1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    Page 373

    [9-2 LED Status Indicators Table]

  • 362 -
  • Hwe13080

    Other types of data No. SW4 (When SW6 - 10 is set to OFF) Item Display Unit

    (A, B) *1

    Remarks 1234567890

    Ld1

    Ld2

    Ld3

    Ld4

    Ld5

    Ld6

    Ld7

    Ld8

    Oc

    Os

    871 1110011011 U-phase current effec- tive value 1 -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [ A ] 872 0001011011 W-phase current effec- tive value 1 -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    873 1001011011 Power factor phase an- gle 1 -99.9 to 999.9

    A

    A

    The unit is [ deg ] 880 0000111011 Control board Reset counter 0 to 254

    A

    A

    The unit is [ time ] 881 1000111011 INV board Reset counter 0 to 254

    A

    A

    884 0010111011 Fan board (address 5) reset counter 0 to 254

    A

    A

    The unit is [ time ] *1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

    More from Mitsubishi